Work Text
The dark castle at the edge of the village looked as foreboding as the rumours said it is. No one ever makes it out alive, repeated a small child as he peeked out from the tree hole he climbed in to hide. The hunting dogs that terrorised him had been called back, and his pursuers returned, enraged, but not daring to come any closer. There are stories, rumours, of some kind of monster living in the castle, and it is forbidden for anyone to set foot there is fears of invoking the monster’s fury. But having lived with and suffered under the human skinned monsters in the village for years, even being mauled to death is preferable to enduring the hell back in the village. Waiting till the last torch vanished from sight, the small child ran for the castle.The child felt something off, something strange about the castle the moment he set foot in it. The air felt different, pricking his skin as he tiptoed down the long and winding corridors. There aren’t any signs of life there, but the place looks clean, and all the candles are lit and glowing. It looked well lived instead of an old crumbling heap which he expected, maybe it is a cultured monster living there? The image of a large furry beast wearing glasses and reading a book popped up in his mind, and he couldn’t help but giggle at the image.Bad move. A huge, dark, dog-like beast leapt up from the shadows in front of him. Flaming red eyes stared down at him, with sharp claws gleaming and a huge maw with sharp fangs and dark fluid dripping down on the floor and-The child fainted.“I got to go. Gamunbi spotted an intruder at my place.” A white haired man stood up from the dining table, ignoring the meal he had been stuffing himself with.“Gamunbi? Aren’t you two still not talking to each other?” His companion, a much taller black haired gentleman, asked curiously.“My guard dog.” The white haired man snorted. “They are both as irritating though. And… it’s a child?”“A child? Eun Yul, aren’t you famous for terrorising the village so much they made it an actual law that no one is to even get near your castle?” The other guy asked, only getting a shrug in return.“Dunno. I’m heading back first, don’t you dare touch my food, Choi.” Eun Yul looked disappointedly at the unfinished food. “And if that pipsqueak ain’t worth my time, I’m bringing it back for you to cook.”With that, he turned into a silvery mist, which soon faded away.“But I don’t cook humans.” Choi voiced out, though there isn’t anyone left there to answer him.“Heel, Gamunbi, heel!” Eun Yul groaned as his shadowy dog leapt at him, tail wagging happily. “Damn it, you don’t have to be so happy to see me each time. It just makes me sick.”The shadowy beast didn’t seem to understand his words, just licking his master all over and yipping happily.“Fine, I got a bone from Choi for you. Stop it already!”Gamunbi’s ears perked up when he saw the bone, and easily leapt up, biting it. Eun Yul refused to let go, frowning.“No no, not yet. Show me where the kid is first before I let you have the bone.” He knocked the shadow hound on the head lightly, getting a disappointed whine. The dog let go sadly, but led the way to where it found the child, while constantly looking back at the bone.“So this is the kid? Here, good boy.” Eun Yul dropped the bone, which Gamunbi happily clamped his jaws on it. It quickly vanished into a pool of shadows.“My, what do we have here?” The white haired man bent down beside the unconscious child. The child is tiny, stinking of dirt and dried blood. If he isn’t whimpering in pain, Eun Yul would have thought he is dead.“Oi, kiddo, wake up,” he ordered. The child jolted awake immediately, amber eyes wide open and quivering in shock.
Amber eyes? That’s rare.
“What are you doing here.” He asked, and frowned as the child scrambled backwards in fear, screaming.“Look, I’m not going to hurt you. I don’t hurt children.” But I will if you don’t stop screaming, he thought irritably but didn’t say it out loud. The kid stopped, though he is still shaking, and he had to stuff his hands in his mouth to stop himself from making any sounds./ Eun Yul, that’s not how you treat a kid. / Choi’s voice admonished in his head./ Oi, stop peeking at my thoughts- /“Here, kiddy.” A wisp of black smoke shimmered, and Choi materialised beside him, smiling and offering a hand to the shaking kid. “Don’t worry about the angry looking man, we won’t hurt you.”Eun Yul had to bite down his annoyance when the child pondered for a while before taking Choi’s hand, bawling his eyes out.“Don’t cry, kiddy. We won’t hurt you, I swear.” Choi hoisted the kid up and hugged him tight, while shooting Eun Yul a glance./ What the hell is wrong with the kid? / He asked telepathically. / He has so many wounds and broken bones and he’s just skin and bones. // Beats me, / Eun Yul shrugged. / You’re the one who’s good with kids, you take care of him. And get him to stop crying, he’s getting on my nerves. // Yes yes, no wonder he’s so frightened by you. /“Here kiddy, are you hungry? We’ve got lots of food and you can eat with us.” Choi asked kindly, ignoring Eun Yul’s deathly glare./ What?! You're giving the kid MY food?! /Choi ignored him, smiling gently at the little kid.“I, I, I’m not hungry…” The child squeaked, but the rumble in his stomach at the mention of food gave him away. Choi’s eyes narrowed as the child flinched, as if he’s going to be punished.“Don’t worry, we have lots of food. We have so much that we can’t finish on our own, can you please help us to finish the food?”/ Oi. /The child still looked scared, but gave a very small nod.“May, may I…?” A small blush spread across his face, and he gave a weak and small smile, looking a bit more alive.“Of course. But first-”Without warning Choi flicked the child on his forehead, and his body went limp.“Oi what are you doing- … Crap what do they think they are doing to a child?!” Eun Yul felt sick as he watched the memories Choi drew out from the child. The kid can’t be more than just ten?! But the deprived acts… His stomach churned, and suddenly he doesn’t feel like eating anymore. But he isn’t the issue. Choi’s aura flared up dangerously, and without warning, the other being thrusted the child into his arms, vanishing towards the village./ Take care of him, I’ll be back soon. / / Oi what?! You are giving him to me?! / Eun Yul called out frantically, but Choi cut off their connection, leaving him holding onto a small child who is starting to stir from the hypnosis. / At least the hell tell me what to do with this kid! /He was greeted by silence, and even that might not stay as the kid realised he is no longer in the hands of the friendlier man and is instead being glared at by an angry looking man./ I hate you Choi. / Sighing, he tried to force a smile and ruffled the kid’s hair.“Look kid, Choi’s off somewhere, let’s get you washed up before you eat, alright?”The kid looks like he still wants to run off, and Eun Yul has to bite back the urge to snap at him. “First, you stink, and no way we’re letting you eat like this.”That got him quivering eyes, and a shaky “sorry”. At least the kid stayed quiet and allowed himself to be led to the bathroom.“Here, drop your dirty clothes in the basket- wait, woah, what the hell?!” The kid flinched as Eun Yul grabbed him. There are bruises and long angry welts on the kid’s body. Ignoring them, the kid is just skin and bones, with some jutting out at angles that looked painful. “Crap, oi kid, you stay here and don’t move. I’ll be back soon.”The kid is still standing at the same spot as he left him, apparently too scared to move. He’s shaking from the cold too.“So I have to wash you up myself, huh.” Eun Yul muttered to himself, shaking his head. “Kid, come over here.”The kid pattered over immediately, nearly tripping over on the bathroom floor. Eun Yul had to grab him by the arm to make sure he doesn’t smash his head on the tiles.“Here, you push this knob for water. You turn left for cold water and right for hot water.” Seeing the confused look on the kid’s face, Eun Yul frowned.
So those wretched humans never had such a luxury?
“Here, is this warm enough for you?” He turned the tap on for the child, who touched the water and gave a yelp of pain. But he still nodded, eyes teary. Am I really that scary? Eun Yul wondered, and turned the heat down. “Here, you can bathe yourself right? Or you need me to scrub you clean.”The child shook his head frantically, so Eun Yul passed him the soap and shampoo. The kid took them, but looked at them so curiously it didn't seem that he knew what to do with them.“Fine. Here, sit down on this stool.” Irritated, Eun Yul materialised a stool from one of the rooms, and made the kid sit down on it. He turned on the showerhead and immediately the kid cupped his ears and squeezed his eyes shut. What the hell had those people been doing to this kid?! Despite having witnessed the child's memory when Choi called them out, the rage he’s feeling for the meat bags kept rising, and Eun Yul had to bite back the bile and remind himself Choi’s already there wreaking havoc on the village. “No, this won’t hurt, look, I’m not going to drown you or anything.”He turned on the shower to its lowest setting, and started lathering shampoo and massaging it on the small kid’s hair. His hair is all matted and oily, and took quite some effort to be untangled. But at least the kid is having fun with the soap and the soap bubbles, though there are occasionally cries of pain when the soap touched his wounds.“Sorry kid, your wounds have to wait till you are all clean.” Eun Yul said as he washed soap and shampoo from the kid. “Here, dry yourself up.”He threw a towel over, which the kid quickly caught.“It, it’s warm!” The kid exclaimed joyfully, and quickly wrapped himself in it. He’s smiling, Eun Yul thought, and he’s kind of cute when he isn’t so scared. “Um, Monster-nim, you are really a very nice person!” WHAT. But the kid’s beaming so brightly he had to swallow his question or else he is sure the kid’s going to start bawling again. Instead, he took the towel and helped the kid dry his hair. Once that’s done, he took out the ointment he retrieved previously.The kid looked scared, and explaining will take too much effort, so he opened it and dabbed some of it onto the biggest wound on the kid’s hand. The kid gasped in surprise as the wound closed itself and vanished.“Amazing isn’t it? Took decades before Saeha finally gave some to me, that bastard can really hold grudges. I just ‘accidentally’ hurt his kid once and it’s not like he died or something-”“Um, Monster-nim, is this, is this very precious to you?” Although the kid is asking innocently, Eun Yul can’t help but feel another vein popping.“Eun Yul.”“Huh?”“Or call me Baekjung. Stop calling me ‘monster’, it’s irritating. And Choi’s probably able to get more if he asks, so shut up and let me treat your wounds.” Eun Yul snapped, and almost regretted his words as the kid looked like he is going to cry again. This is why I hate children, he thought, dabbing the ointment on other wounds he spotted. There’s cuts by sharp objects, teeth bites from humans and animals, burn marks, just too many of them that by the time he is done, he's thoroughly disgusted by what was inflicted upon the little kid. Maybe he should raze the village down every fifty years from now on…“Eun Yul, you done?” Choi called from outside the bathroom. “I’ve gotten food over to your kitchen, you two haven’t starved to death right?”“Yeah, we’re almost done.” Eun Yul replied, reaching a shadowy limb to his wardrobe and pulling out a set of clothes. He doesn’t have anything kid sized, that will just have to wait till he can get some from a neighbouring village-Wait, why is he even thinking about clothing the kid? He isn't even going to keep him?!/ Aww, Eun Yul’s a big softie- // You shut up! /As expected, his clothes aren’t suitable for the little child. The sleeves and pants legs are too long, and the one side of the collar is hanging off the child’s shoulder, but he looks much better than previously. Choi squeed and hugged the kid, saying he looks so much cuter now, and Eun Yul hid a grin when the kid looks like he’s being scared to death./ How could you brainwash the little kiddy into being scared of me, Eun Yul... // Hey, I didn’t do anything, ask the kid yourself. /“Here, kiddy, sorry to keep you waiting, let’s go and eat now.” Choi spoke gently, smiling at the kid and trying to get him to relax. The kid nodded shyly, still very scared by the tall man, and they made their way to the kitchen.The feast was almost the same as back at Choi’s abode, even somehow managing to have the same arrangement although their kitchens are so much different. Eun Yul learnt long ago to never question it, just grabbing a turkey leg and gobbling it down. Choi set down the child, and motioned towards the food on the table.“Here, feel free to eat anything you want. I said we have a lot of food, didn’t I?” Choi smiled warmly at the kid, while shooting a stern mental message to Eun Yul./ Let the kid eat first, he’s starving! // He’s human, he can’t even finish a quarter of this food. / Eun Yul retorted back, but refrained from stealing more food off the table. He watched impatiently as the little kid looked at the food in amazement, not sure of what he should be picking. He grabbed a plate from the table, and looked over to Choi, who smiled back at him and nodded. He grabbed a spoon, and tried to scoop a piece of vegetable onto his plate, while constantly looking back towards Choi for confirmation.“Here.” Choi used a pair of chopsticks to put the piece of vegetable on the plate. The kid beamed and whispered a soft thank you, before running off with his ‘prize’ to a corner. The two men blinked, confused./ Is that… is that all they have been feeding him? / Choi asked, disbelief clearly showing./ I’m not looking into his memories again to check, you do it. / Eun Yul rolled his eyes, and shouted, “Get back here, kid.”There’s a yelp of shock and the sound of a plate shattering on the floor, and Choi gave him a hard whack on his head./ STOP SCARING THE KID! / Choi snapped, quickly grabbing the kid from his spot and seating him down on a chair before he could react.“Here, you are still a growing kid, you’ve got to eat more.” Choi put a new plate before the child, and new utensils in his hands. He gestured at the various dishes on the table, smiling patiently at the child. The kid looked on in amazement, not knowing what to do.“Um-”“Here.” Choi cut off the child's words, stuffing a piece of braised pork into his mouth. “Try this, it’s delicious. It’s nice, isn’t it?”And somehow, the kid started taking small pieces of everything he can reach, his eyes sparkling with amazement. Eun Yul supposed he has to hand it to Choi, the guy’s always good at dealing with the newly turned, looks like he’s good with kids too./ So, you’re keeping him? / Choi teased, still watching the little kid. Eun Yul snorted, taking a seat beside the kid and helping himself to the food./ He prefers you. He’s yours. // But you are taking good care of him, Monster-nim. // I swear one day I’m going to kill you. // Nah, you love me and my cooking too much. // Try me. //Though, what’s the kiddy’s name? // Don’t know, didn’t ask. /“Hey, kiddy,” Choi asked, and the child froze in the spot, dropping his fork. “Ah, no, please continue eating. Really, you are free now, please don’t be afraid of us.”He ruffled the kid’s hair, and dumped another serving on his plate.“Um… thank you…?” The child looked at the food on his plate, but is too scared to take another bite.“I’m Choi, and the Monster-nim here’s Eun Yul.” He pointed over to Eun Yul, who glared daggers at him./ OI! /“What’s your name, kiddy?”“I… um… I’m… Maru?” He replied shyly, looking down. “I… um, I, I don’t want to go back…”“Maru? That’s a cute name. And don’t worry, wherever you came from, we’re not sending you back.”/ You razed the entire place. // They deserved it. Don’t think anyone’s going to live there for some time though. // Wait you’re leaving me with no food around here?! /“Um… I, I can help to do cleaning, and I, I, just please, please don’t send me back- Owwie…”/ EUN YUL! /Eun Yul ignored Choi shouting in his mind for hitting Maru, and forced the child to look at him. “Look, Maru. We WON’T be sending you back. You are safe here with us. Whatever monsters that hurt you before, they won’t be coming here. No one will be hurting you ever again.” Wait, crap.He must have said something wrong, because the kid burst into tears./ Some help here, Choi? // Serves you right for bullying a kid. /“Here, Maru. We promise we won’t let you get hurt ever again. So please don’t cry? And look, Monster-nim’s going to eat you up if you don’t stop crying.” That got the child to stop abruptly, but still,/ Fuck you Choi. // Language. /“The two of you… really won’t send me back…?”“Yup! Here, pinkie promise. We’ll cook lots and lots of food for you everyday, so how about it?”The bright smile the two are greeted with is so blinding that Eun Yul swore it is worse than watching sunrise./You softie. /He chose to ignore that comment from Choi.“Thank, thank you very much, Eun Yul-nim, Choi-nim! I, I’ll do my best to clean this place up!”“Look pipsqueak-”/ Let him have something he can do, Eun Yul. // Just look at him! He’s just a baby! I’m not making a kid work for me! // Then, what else are you going to tell him to do? Just sit there and eat all day? // That sounds great to me- / “Ouch!”“Just ignore him, Maru.” Choi smiled, ignoring the white haired man complaining and rubbing his head in pain. “You’re such a good kid, I’ll make sure to cook even more food for you!” Well, at least the kid looks happy, Eun Yul thought, nursing the bump on his head. And if Choi’s offering to cook more food for the kid, that means he’d gain from it too-/ You don’t even need food to live, unlike this poor little kid. // Fight me. // Not in front of the kid. /Even before the meal is finished, little Maru fell asleep at his plate, which is still half finished. Eun Yul picked it up and dumped its contents on his own plate, continuing with his meal./ He eats real little, is it even normal? / He asked telepathically, not wanting to wake the child./ He’s still a child, and look at him, he’s been starved for quite some time. It won’t be good for his body if he suddenly overeats. / Choi explained. / But even so, it’s worrisome how little he is eating. // What. I. said. // So you better be nicer to your poor kid, and stop being so scary that he doesn’t dare to eat. // I’m not that scary- Wait, my kid?! // Your castle, your kid. I don’t mind keeping him, but he’s grabbing hold on your coat and not letting go. // Tch. /As expected, the kid woke early in the morning, He jolted awake when the flock of birds in the forest woke and started their flight. Enhanced hearing? Choi mused, watching the child panic at waking in a foreign place. He is definitely human though, but that ability, that might explain his mistreatment at the hands of the village. Kids with special abilities are often outcasts and feared, and some mistreated like Maru. And he’s running about near to tears, how cute. Choi decided he should step in before the kid hurts himself or cries.“Good morning, Maru.” He materialised before the kid, before realising he might scare Maru by appearing this way. Though the little kid looks more surprised at that than spooked.“Good, good morning, Choi-nim.” The timid little mouse squeaked. “You’re just like Eun Yul-nim!”“Hm, am I?” He asked jovially, happy that the little kid is more energetic and less afraid compared to the previous day.“Um, when I woke up, Eun Yul-nim went poof and shimmer shimmer and suddenly he’s here! Then he gave me a cup of milk and told me to sleep, he will protect me!”“Is that so,” Choi chuckled. “And I’m like him?”“Yup!” The kid nodded enthusiastically. “He’s like silverish shimmer shimmer, but Choi-nim, you’re like blackish shimmer shimmer! The two of you are so cool!”Cool huh. “So, you aren’t afraid of us, Maru? You were crying so much yesterday.”Maru blushed red. “Um… You two are very, very nice to me! Choi-nim, you gave me lots of food, and Eun Yul-nim’s always there when I wake, telling me it’s alright and he’ll protect me!”Oh, so Eun Yul did that the entire night after that? No wonder he isn’t around when the little kid woke up.“Well, since you are up, want to help me with breakfast? I can teach you how to cook, when I’m not around you can help me cook for Eun Yul. How does that sound?”The bright smile he got in returned is tempting him much to kidnap the little kid./ Oi, he’s MY kid. // Oh, so you’re up. // How can I sleep when the two of you’s chattering so much? And hands off my kid. // Come on, mom’s going to love him. It’s rare to have new blood nowadays- // NO. /In hindsight, maybe teaching Maru to cook isn’t a good idea. He is enthusiastic and eager to learn, Choi has to admit, but he isn’t sure if he trusts the small kid with a knife. That eerie gleam in his eye reminded him much of Eun Yul in his bloody frenzy, and that deep hatred isn’t something a child should have. So he hates the humans he had been living with too, but who wouldn’t if they were this mistreated?“Maru.”The kid dropped the knife, a guilty expression on his face.“I, um, I…” Tongue tied, he looked at his feet, fidgeting.“These knives are for cooking, Maru. They are not for killing.” He bent down beside the small child, ruffling his head. “But if you want to, I’m sure Eun Yul can get you a decent blade and teach you how to kill-”/ WHAT THE FUCK CHOI?!?!?! /“-and he’s a real beauty to behold when he’s slicing up everyone in his path without a care in the world-”He easily blocked Eun Yul’s sword with his foot when the white haired guy materialised and lunged at him with his sword.“What the hell are you teaching to my kid?!” Eun Yul grabbed Maru in his arms and leapt a safe distance away.“Um, good morning, Eun Yul-nim!” The small kid in his arms greeted him, looking very clueless about what is happening.“Well, you’re the best person around to be teaching how to use a blade-”“Maru is just a kid! How dare you poison his mind like this! Don’t you dare speak to him again till you finish cooking breakfast!”With that, Eun Yul teleported to another part of his castle, screaming obscenities at him in his mind about corrupting children.Choi shrugged, and continued cooking.“Um, Eun Yul-nim-”“No I’m not teaching you to kill. You’re like ten max, you should be out playing and having fun instead of having blood on your hands!” Eun Yul snapped at the small kid in frustration, putting him down in one of the playrooms of the castle. That scared Maru, and he took a few steps backwards, not knowing what to do.“No, no, no, I’m not angry at you.” Eun Yul frowned, motioning Maru to come closer. But the kid stayed at the same spot, too afraid to move.“Look, I’m really not angry at you. It’s that block head Choi, you think he’d know better living for hundreds of years. Heck, even I only started killing people for the fun of it when I’m an adult!”That didn’t do anything to comfort the poor child, who is shaking by now. Eun Yul just shook his head, and grabbed the kid. The collar slipped down the kid’s boney shoulders again.“That reminds me, we can’t have you so shabbily dressed. We’re getting you some proper clothes, right?”Maru nodded hesitatingly.“Good. Let’s go.”Maru looked very surprised again as they reappeared somewhere else. He looked around in wonder, mouth wide agape.“Why? Never been to the countryside before?” Eun Yul grinned and asked. Maru shook his head.“That bad huh… Well, I don’t really go out much, but you are allowed to accompany me on my next trip.” That got Maru’s eyes glittering with delight, and he boasted over to Choi proudly./ Yeah, yeah, and you just nearly scared the life off him moments ago. Don’t take too long, breakfast’s done. /…“Maru we are heading back for food.”“Ah?”“Clothes can wait till I’m full.”/ Good choice. // Of course I’m not going to miss food- // Not you, human kids can go hungry very fast, you know- /“Well, that’s fast.” Choi grinned at him as he materialised in the kitchen with a confused kid./ You should have told me earlier that Maru is hungry!? // If you aren’t back immediately I would have kidnapped your son back for breakfast. // He is not my son and I will fucking kill you if you try that. // You’ll have to even be able to kill me in the first place. Want me to break even more of your bones tonight? // FUCK. YOU. /“Um… Eun Yul-nim, Choi-nim… please, please stop glaring and eat, please?” Maru pleaded. Choi immediately turned all his attention to the small kid, and smiled at him.“Sorry, we’re discussing some… things. Here, what do you want to eat? How about this?” Choi heaped item after item onto Maru’s plate, but the little kid seemed more focused on something else.“Choi-nim, the two of you can speak without talking?” Maru asked curiously, the idea extremely foreign to him./ Yup, we can. Can you hear me? /“Eeeek! What, what was that?! Choi-nim, your lips aren’t moving, but, but I can hear your voice in my head-”/ That’s one of our powers, / Eun Yul explained. / We’ve got a link to each other, but we can project our thoughts into other people’s minds too. /“Wow…” The rest of breakfast was spent with the little kid constantly looking at the both of them in amazement, trying to see if they are having another of those silent conversations./ He’s so cute, isn’t he? // Mine. // Yes yes yes, I won’t dare to steal him away from you. // Good. /After the meal, Maru’s amazement shifted to how much Eun Yul can eat, to how they don’t need to wash the dishes or clean the table, just one snap of the finger and everything’s all nice and clean and back in their original positions.“I can bless you with some of my powers, but your papa Eun Yul will kill me for that.” It caused the small adorable kid to blush red, and look at Eun Yul in wonder./ I’m letting that go just this once. /“And, you don’t mind me tagging along too right, Maru?”Maru shook his head, and the three of them reappeared at the countryside they were previously at./ Mom’s domain? Well, she’s going to be so happy you finally visited. // She’s the only one I trust to know how to buy proper children’s clothes. / Eun Yul snorted. / Everyone just turns older humans. And don’t say Chaeeun, did you even see what she dresses up those orphans in?! Even Mu Yeung’s so embarrassed when I found she’s his mother. // True, but her kids look so happy- // No ./It took quite some time to reach their destination. Eun Yul is adamant to let Maru run around and drag him around to see some wildflowers he had never seen before, to where he spotted something fluffy run off, to a cow, then more cows, then even more cows that he suspects Eun Yul’s going to demand beef for lunch./ Bingo. // Noted. But look at the kid, he looks so happy to see them, what if he finds out your lunch’s made of these furry friends of his? // Choi. I’ve never wanted to kill you this badly- /“Look Eun Yul-nim! There’s even more of them here! Look!” Maru’s waving excitedly, looking just so different from the bloody bundle of rags yesterday that Choi can’t help but smile and wave back. Eun Yul just threw him a glare and walked over to Maru.“Yes, there are more cows. There are so many cows around here.”He’d never heard anyone else being so unenthusiastic before and chuckled./ Choi? You’re here to visit? And is that Eun Yul? / A motherly voice asked in his head./ Yes mom, and Eun Yul adopted this cute little kid. We need some kiddy clothes, can you help us? // Of course- // Maru is NOT my kid. I DID NOT adopt him. / Eun Yul cut into their conversation angrily./ Yes, I’m sure he’s a delightful kid, just give me one moment. /A smiling lady materialised beside them.“Ah, another of you?” Maru asked, looking curiously at the lady.“My, what a cute kid,” Jiyul said while ruffling Maru’s hair./ But why is he so thin, have you two been feeding him right? // We just found him yesterday, and he’s already like this. // What?! / Jiyul turned a bit pale, and dug in her pockets. There are still some candies in them, and she put them in Maru’s tiny hand. “Here, have some sweets.“Thank you nuna,” Maru bowed, causing his collar to slip even more.“My, you can’t possibly go about like this. Here, Maru, let’s go to my place, I’ll get you something more fitting to wear alright?”Maru looked back at Choi and Eun Yul, who nodded.“Ok, thank you nuna!”/ What a sweetheart too, you two really have to feed him more. // We are. // Yup mom, I’m sure he’d look much better the next time you see him! // If you need, I can come over and help to take care of him too- // There’s no need. // Yup, Eun Yul’s ultra protective of his son! /Eun Yul didn’t bother retorting to that.It took some time for Jiyul and Maru to pick something Maru liked. The small kid is agreeable to everything the kind lady showed to him, but she’d ponder a bit and pull out another shirt and pants for him to try./ It’s been hours, when are they going to be ready. // It’s not even an hour yet, and look, Maru looks so cute in all kinds of clothes! // This is boring, you stay and look after the kid- // He doesn’t like anything that shows too much skin, and prefers long sleeves and pants. / Jiyul explained. / I didn’t look into his memories, but he seemed to have wounds on his limbs previously, and he just doesn’t like seeing his own body. // That bad, mom? // He looks alright now, but he won’t be able to have a normal life. Eun Yul, are you going to turn this child? // … no. He’s got to grow bigger first, at this size he’d just get picked on by everyone. // Good choice dad! // You shut up. // I’ll have to agree with Choi. Right now would be too soon for him, and he needs to to learn more about us first before making a choice. // Yeah, yeah, Jiyul, I know. /“Good. Now you look perfect.” Jiyul spoke out suddenly, and the two focused their attention on Maru. He’s wearing a more fitting shirt and pants, which looks much better on him than the previous too big clothes.“Here,” Jiyul passed a pile of clothes over to Choi. “Here’s other clothes that Maru prefers, make sure to take good care of him, right?”“Thank, thank you, nuna!” Maru repeated again, while Jiyul just laughed.“I’m not a ‘nuna’, Maru. I’m Choi’s mother. 'Ajumma' would be more accurate.”“Ah?!”
----- CHAPTER BREAK -----
They had a meal at Jiyul’s before they left, at Eun Yul’s insistence. And of course there are beef dishes, though Eun Yul felt that there is no need for Maru to find out. The little kid is already hungry, but still only taking tiny bits of everything in sight till Choi and Jiyul heaped mountains of food on his plate./ Jiyul’s food the best. // Ohoho, then come and visit more often, Eun Yul. Daewon’s going to be so happy. // No way. The old man’s going to force me to hone my skills of the blade or some nonsense. // Speaking of him, where’s dad? //He’s off trying to find some rare ingredients. You know how he is, whenever a traveller tells him about foods in their homelands, he is sure to get all fired up. I’ll inform the two of you when he’s back, I’m sure you’ll enjoy his latest dishes. // If it is just free food I don’t mind. And before I forget, I need some bones for Gamunbi. // The two of you finally made up? But bones, isn’t this a bit too much? // That’s the name of his pet dog. / Choi added helpfully./ Pet dog?! Eun Yul, he’s your elder after all! Even if you still have a grudge against him, this is too disrespectful- Eun Yul! /“Eh? Eun Yul-nim vanished?” Maru asked, blinking and waving at the empty spot Eun Yul occupied moments ago."He got lectured by mom and ran off to hide." Choi took the chance to empty Eun Yul’s plate on Maru’s. “Don’t worry about him, he’s most likely back at his castle sulking. Here, eat more, mom’s cooking’s heavenly right?”“Yes, the food’s extremely delicious! Thank, thank you Choi-nim. And thank you, Jiyul-nim!”/ What a sweetie, no wonder Eun Yul likes him. // I like him too, Maru’s just such a nice kid! And Mom, I’ll be at Eun Yul’s for a while. // Helping to take care of Maru? // Yup! // Hm… he’s got some ability, try to teach him something useful. He’s a human child, but he’s still growing. You can push him a little bit more, but not too much that he breaks. // Got it mom. /“Um… Choi-nim, Jiyul-nim…? Is this… another of the silent conversations?” Maru asked curiously, seeing how they are locking eyes and seem to be communicating somehow.“Ah, sorry, Maru. We’re used to communicating like this, sorry for leaving you out.” Jiyul smiled and ruffled his hair. “Hm, depending on your abilities, you might be able to learn this too.”“I, I might?” Maru looked amazed by the idea. “Wow…”“Yes, but first, you got to eat more. You got to grow up strong enough first and then we’ll teach you even more stuff, pinkie promise.”“Pinkie promise!”/ Good, you packed some food back. / Eun Yul’s lounging in the living room, not even bothering to look up when they returned./ These are for Maru. Steal any of these and mom’s gonna come over and hand you your head back on a silver platter. // Tch. /“Um, Eun Yul-nim, Jiyul-nim gave us lots of food, you didn’t eat much, so please have some food.” Maru shyly offered the package he is holding, and Eun Yul took it immediately.“Good job Maru.” He patted Maru on the head and the small kid blushed happily./ That’s cheating. / Choi frowned, though he made no move to stop Maru./ Hey, I didn’t do anything, he gave this to me willingly. // You’re just taking advantage of a kid who needs food more than you do. // Shut up and let me have my food in peace. // Nope, and here, mom gave you the juiciest bone she could find. // Good. /“Gamunbi.” Eun Yul called out, and his shadow hound leapt out from the shadows.“Eeeeeeeek!” Immediately Maru screamed, hiding behind him and clinging onto his leg, shaking hard. The dog bounced over to look at the human, which only made the screams louder.“Gamunbi, stop.” Eun Yul ordered, and the hound whined sadly.“The big doggie’s scaring you, Maru?” Choi asked, hoisting the shaking kid up high and hugging him tight. Maru nodded./ He’s scary? He’s more of a dumb dog than anything. // Only to you. He’s much bigger and scarier to a small kid. And Maru most likely never seen any creature like this, no wonder he’s scared out of his wits. /“Here Maru, I’ll play with you, let Eun Yul take care of his doggie right?” The two vanished to another part of the castle, leaving Eun Yul with his pet./ Don’t you dare teach him any questionable stuff. // I try. /“So Maru, you think the doggie’s scary?” Choi set down the kid in the library. It is a nice and peaceful place for Maru to calm down.“It’s scary…” Maru shuddered. “They always lock me up and put those big and fierce and angry dogs outside, they keep barking and snarling at me...”Seeing the kid so close to tears, and cupping his ears at the memory, Choi picked him up and hugged him again. “Maru, those people who hurt you, they won’t ever hurt you again, I promise you.”“m’kay…”“And Gamunbi’s Eun Yul’s dog-”/ Wait so you are calling him your bitch?! // That’s the idea, yes. //… Eun Yul you have issues. /“So basically, Maru, that’s Eun Yul’s doggie, and you know Eun Yul won’t hurt you right?”Maru nodded slowly, though it was with much hesitation. Does Maru not trust them enough yet?“He won’t allow the doggie to hurt you either. It won’t be easy for you to get over this fear, but just remember, we won’t let anyone or anything hurt you ever again.”“Thank, thank you Choi-nim…” Maru smiled, and Choi felt his heart melt again./ Stop thinking about kidnapping my son. // How about joint custody? // No fucking way. /It took some time before Eun Yul arrived at the library.“Maru.” The small kid leapt to attention once his name is called, and Eun Yul frowned.“Don’t do that, it’s not like I’m going to scold you or anything.”He handed Maru a stick. “Here, keep this. I spoke to Gamunbi, it agreed not to get any closer to you unless you approach it first. But it’s kind of a dumb mutt, so if it comes too close, just throw this stick or any stick you can find. It loves playing fetch.”“Um, alright…?” Maru looked at the stick in wonder, and tucked it in his pocket carefully.“So what are the two of you up to.” Eun Yul asked, looking at Choi.“I’m been trying to see if Maru’s got any traces of magic, but it seems like only his hearing’s special.”/ You’d think with eyes like these he’d at least have some special sight like Mu Yeung. // Sorry, nope. They just look pretty and that’s about it. If they looked any bit normal he might have had a normal life, poor kid. /“Is that so… Maru, you want us to help train your hearing? There’s quite some cool stuff you can do.” Eun Yul asked but Maru just shook his head.“Eun Yul-nim… is, is there anyway I can… just get rid of it? Please?” The kid doesn’t look too happy at all. “I… hate it…”/ Considering they were torturing him because of his ability, it’s no wonder. Even the dogs, they must have used them to terrorise Maru seeing how sensitive he is to sound. // But think of how cool it’ll be- /“They’ll make those horrible noises and do those disgusting things to me while I can’t move and-”/ WHAT. THE. FUCK. /“Here, Maru, please don’t cry.” Choi wrapped the little kid in a big hug, cooing and comforting him. “Is that why you hate your ability so much?”Maru nodded tearily.“Hm, then how about this? I can eat that ability of yours, but you’ll have to be much older-”/ WHAT THE FUCK CHOI?! // Eun Yul I’m just letting him know it’s an option- // NO. JUST NO. /“Choi-nim…?”Choi sighed, shaking his head as Eun Yul glared at him. “Maybe not that. How about I teach you how to turn it off? If you ever need to use this ability, you can just turn it on again?”“I… I don’t like it at all… But Choi-nim, just said you can get rid of it right? You’d eat it up?” Maru begged, “please, I don’t want to ever live with it ever again!”“Maru, Choi and I are going to have a talk. Now.” Eun Yul grabbed Choi, but the taller guy refused to move.“Maru, yes I can eat your ability up, but that will have to wait till you are older. Much older.”/ And not by you. /“You are too young now, if I do anything you’ll die.” The downfalled look on the child’s face is heartbreaking./ You’re the one who will die if you try to do anything to my Maru. // I doubt so, but look, I don’t eat children. // Who knows, you’ve been looking at him like that since- /“So for now, I’ll just teach you how to control your ability, and turn it off, alright?” He hugged the little kid, ruffling his hair fondly.“And when I grow up, you’ll eat my ability?”/ If you say yes I’m killing you. // If I say no I’m breaking his heart. /“Pinkie promise.”/ You’ve signed your death warrant, Choi. /It took a few minutes to tell that Maru has totally no magical talent. He is unable tell how his ability works, unable to grapse how to tune it out, that even Choi is at a loss how to teach him. All the two managed to do is to confuse and tire out the small kid.“Eun Yul-nim… Choi-nim…” Maru called out weakly before he collapsed, and Choi hugged him tight to stop him from hitting the floor.“It’s alright, Maru, just rest for now. It takes practise, not everyone gets the hang of it on their first try.”“And you’ve been around normal humans for so long, it might take some time for you to get used to this.” Eun Yul grabbed Maru from Choi’s arms, glaring at him./ Aw, let me hug him too. // Hands off my kid. /“Eeek?!” Maru suddenly cried out, turning red.“Maru?! Is anything wrong?!” Choi asked frantically, and Eun Yul quickly scanned the area, but found no other signs of life.“No, I, I can hear your voices…? It’s like… in my head?”“Oh?”/ So that means you can hear me like this? / Choi projected his thoughts to Eun Yul, but the small kid nodded.“I, I can only hear bits… But I, I can hear that Choi-nim um, wants to hug Eun Yul-nim?”Choi made a face. Eun Yul can’t decide if he should look disgusted or laugh.“Nope, I said I’ll rather hug you, Maru. But hm, if you can hear us talk like this, there should be something we can do about it.”/ So we’d have to stop talking like this for a while? // Unless you want any more misunderstandings and hugs, yes. /“More hugs?” Maru asked happily, but shut up when Eun Yul glared.“No hugs. But if you can hear all our thoughts, Maru, there’s so many people we can send you to eavesdrop on-”“True, but remember you are sending a human child.” Choi snapped.“Um, Eun Yul-nim… if I’m useful like this-”“No Maru. Ignore Eun Yul. Don’t even think about it.”“But-”“NO.”After some testing, it appears that Maru can only hear bits of their conversation when he is near them. Any further, the small child is unable to pick them up. But the exercise tired out Maru even more, and he fell asleep clinging on to Eun Yul./ Gamunbi. / The shadow dog leapt up from the shadows and wagged its tail eagerly. / Look after Maru, but don’t get too close to him. He’s still scared of you. /The dog nodded, bounced over to the small kid, and gave him a huge lick. Eun Yul groaned./ You stupid dog. Do you even know the meaning of don’t get too close!? / Eun Yul shook his head as the hound whined. / Never mind, go patrol the grounds, nothing’s going to come and hurt Maru anyway. // You never know- // Gamunbi if Choi ever comes near Maru, bite him. // That’s so mean of you. // You deserve it. /Only when Maru is safely tucked into bed that Eun Yul realised it’s time for lunch./ Let him rest a bit first. / Choi advised. / He’ll wake when he’s hungry. // He’s a troublesome kid. / Eun Yul complained, teleporting to the kitchen and stealing a dish off the table./ You’re the troublesome one, Maru’s been nothing but sweet and adorable. // Don’t make me walk over and stab you. // Hm, but what should be do about his ability? Think Chun Ryang might be able to help? // He’d most likely kidnap my kid to join whatever weird posse he has. // True, seeing how Maru’s ability most likely would be of interest to him. How about Saeha? He’s got this little kid years back, he might be able to help. //… you go try, I’m not going near that weird medicine guy again. And he's not even fun to fight, he didn't even get riled up when I cut his kid up?! // So you really attacked his kid? Wow, it’s a wonder you manage to live till now. // Shut up and cook faster before I stab you from over here. /Maru woke up feeling a little hungry. He’s alone in the room he woke up in in the morning, but without Eun Yul or Choi in sight.“Eun Yul-nim? Choi-nim?” He called out timidly, and strained his ears. There isn’t any reply. Had they gotten bored with him?He climbed out of the bed carefully, and folded the sheets neatly.“Eun Yul-nim…? Choi… nim?” Still, no one replied him. However, a pool of shadows materialised on the floor in front of him, and a dark beast leapt out from it.“Eeeeeeek!” Maru took a step backwards, and scrambled back on the bed. The beast didn’t follow him, just staring at him with flaming orange eyes… and it is wagging its tail? It isn’t going to bite him…?He reached into his pocket, and took out the stick Eun Yul gave him. The beast leapt up and down, tail wagging so hard bits of shadow are splattered on the room walls and vanished almost immediately.“Um, you want this?” Maru recalled Eun Yul telling him to throw the stick, and threw it at the door. The shadow beast immediately pounced at it, and brought the stick back, tail wagging happily. It set down the stick in front of Maru, and returned to its spot.“Um… you want me to throw this again?” Even more frantic wagging. So Maru threw the stick harder, and the beast bounced after it, returning within seconds.“You’re getting along well with it.” Eun Yul materialised beside Maru, and hoisted the child over his shoulder. “Gamunbi, stop playing around and go make yourself useful.”The hound looked disappointedly at the stick, leapt back into a pool of shadows and vanished.“Eun Yul-nim! I thought you disappeared!” The kid called out joyously, but Eun Yul flicked him lightly on the head. “Owwie…”“What, you think we’re abandoning you?”“But, but when I woke no one is around and…” Maru sounds teary, and Eun Yul decided the best thing he should do is to distract the kid with something else. Like food.“Here, Choi finished cooking ages ago, you hungry yet?”“Um…”“Yes you’re hungry. No one’s going to scold you for being hungry.” Making sure that Maru is holding on tight to him, he teleported to the kitchen and set Maru down on a chair.“Eat.”His words didn’t have the same impact as Choi’s, but at least Maru isn’t too afraid to eat when the taller guy isn’t around. He kept looking back to him from time to time though, only daring to take bites when he nodded./ Oi Choi, where are you. / He called out. Choi’s aura isn’t anywhere to be found in his castle or the surrounding area./ Asking Saeha for help like you said. Look, his kid grew up all fine. / The image of a scrawny young man appeared in his mind, nose deep in some medical journal./Hey, Saeha put him back alright, but mine’s cuter. // Agreed. You have no idea how long a rant I had to sit through about how much Saeha wants to wring your neck with your intestines for daring to hurt his student. // That’s old news. // But he gave me some medicine that can suppress abilities, and some which can enhance them. You be good and make sure Maru eats right, I’ll be back once Saeha finishes his rant on how he wants to stew you and feed you to his beloved Bellflower. // Told you he’s a weirdo. // Yeah, I had to correct him so many times how a stew works, and you’d make horrible food anyway. // Oi. /“Eun Yul-nim…?” Maru asked timidly.“I was just talking to Choi. How much are you able to hear?”“This… something about hundreds of years, and… a weirdo? Is, is Choi-nim in danger?”“Nah, as much as I hate it, he’s damn strong. Nothing’s going to hurt him. Heard when he was younger, he almost killed off all humans on this continent just because he was slightly pissed off.”Choi complained almost immediately as Maru’s eyes widened with fear./ I was young then! Maru doesn’t need to know that! /Eun Yul ignored that voice in his head and continued.“And he’d gotten some medicine for you to suppress your ability, so you will be having normal hearing once you take it.”Eun Yul was taken by surprise when the little kid beamed and threw himself at him, tiny hands wrapped around his waist.“Thank you, Eun Yul-nim, Choi-nim, really, thank you very much!” And there are people who wish they have such an ability. Eun Yul shook his head, and patted Maru on his back./ It’s not fair, I want a hug too… And did you see that smile?! He’s just so adorable! /Eun Yul snickered./ My kid. /After lunch, Eun Yul took Maru around the castle. He can find his way around easily even with his eyes closed, but the small kid can’t locate the nearest restroom or his own room. Worst of all, he doesn’t even know the general direction of the kitchen./ Your priorities are very skewed. // You already said he needs more food. // Point. And I can’t come back yet. Remember how Saeha said he’s feeding you to his cow? It just got sick and he’s blaming you for it. // What. /“Eun, Eun Yul-nim?!” Maru jumped in surprise, and Eun Yul had to remind himself the kid can hear parts of their conversation.“Nothing. Just felt like eating beef suddenly. But here’s the library, there’s a playroom over there, and do you still remember where the kitchen is.”“Um… over there?” Maru pointed at the direction they came from, and missed the mark completely.“You are really hopeless at this, aren’t you.” Eun Yul sighed and picked up the small child, carrying him on top of his shoulders. “There must be some way to make sure you can find food when you need it.”“Eun Yul-nim, I, I, I can just, just eat anything! Um, like, when they forget to give me food I can eat dirt to live too- Eeeeeeek!” Maru almost cried when Eun Yul suddenly turned and glared at him.“You are living in my castle now, you are to eat proper food. Whatever rubbish they had been feeding you, forget about it! We won’t ever make you starve, and if Choi isn’t sneaking you any food, tell me. I’ll kill him.” Despite his reassurance, Maru is still tearing up./ You scared him, Eun Yul. You know how senstive he is to sound. / Choi admonished lightly./ Tch. // What he said, Maru./ Choi’s voice spoke up in Maru’s mind. / We are not like those horrible people you lived with, you are our precious little kid. We’ll give you lots of food, and you won’t ever have to go hungry again, alright? // Oi, now you’re the one making the kid cry. // … sorry. /When Choi returned, he found Eun Yul teaching Maru how to raid his food storage.“Choi-nim! Welcome back!” The sweet little kid ran towards him and retrieved the package he’s holding./ It’s not fair, he doesn’t even greet me like this. // You aren’t running errands for him. /“Here Maru, let Eun Yul handle this.” Choi took the package back from Maru, and lobed it at Eun Yul. “Go prepare whatever’s written there.”“Oi, you’re the cook.”“Your kid.” Ignoring Eun Yul, Choi picked Maru up and hugged him tight. “I missed you so much, Maru, even Saeha’s kid isn’t as sweet or cute as you!”That made the little kid blush, and nearly a sword through his gut./ Watch your sword. You don’t want to accidentally chop this little sweetie into half, do you? // Go. And. Die. /After a one sided discussion with Choi, Maru’s bedroom is moved directly beside the kitchen. And the bathroom beside it, together with a small playroom. And many other things. Meanwhile, Maru is sent to play with Gamunbi in the courtyard./ Stop turning my castle upside down! / Eun Yul snapped at Choi in annoyance, watching the rooms in his castle get shuffled over and over again./ Go back and prepare the medicine. Who cares about your castle, what matters more is that Maru can easily make his way through. If I have to raze this rundown thing to ground and rebuild it, I will. /His words only irked Eun Yul more, and he had to actually dodge a heavy strike reeking with killing intent./ Choi, you’ve been pissing me off so much these two days. / Eun Yul snarled, swinging his sword and slicing off a huge chunk on the pillar Choi was leaning against. Choi deftly got out of the way, and planted his foot hard at where Eun Yul was, only to be forced to block an incoming slash with his other foot./ Oh ho? I haven’t seen such a delicious expression for so long, do you really want to be broken so badly? / His grin grew wider as Eun Yul attempted to strike him with a flurry of blows, all of which he managed to block easily by kicking through them. He kicked the air hard, sending a shockwave speeding after Eun Yul. Eun Yul slashed it into half before it hit him, and almost got hit by the kicks that followed. He barely managed to block them with his sword, but is pushed back by the strength of the attacks./ Are you even trying, Eun Yul? You’re just so weak- // SHUT UP! /Another strike-- No, that’s a mirage, where’s the real one-- There! Before Eun Yul could stab him, Choi kicked the blade hard, sending it flying to the other side of the room./ You got your guard down-/The blade zoomed back to it’s owner’s hand, had he not moved out of the way and smashed it with his foot, he might have been stabbed by it./ Damn it. / Eun Yul materalised another blade out of thin air, and charged at him again./ That wasn’t too bad, it might even hit me if you are just a wee bit competent. / Choi taunted, making sure to stay out of range of Eun Yul’s strikes. / Are you even the same kid that chopped my leg off? // I’ll do more than just that, I’ll cut of every single one of your limbs and make sure you don’t regenerate at all this time! / Eun Yul snarled, focusing more energy in his sword and striking more harder. He can still block the blows with his feet, but they are starting to get a little numb--
So that’s what you’re going for-
He is suddenly aware of a presence nearing, and weaved nearer to Eun Yul, getting dangerously close to getting parts of him chopped off. It took Eun Yul by surprise, and before the white haired guy can react, he planted a hard kick on his chest, sending Eun Yul flying hard into a pile of broken debris. He immediately suppressed his aura, and glanced at the doorway./ What the f- // Child alert. /A little kid walked into the room, looking lost and confused. Eun Yul’s shadow hound followed behind with its tail wagging hard. “Ah, Choi-nim! Um… I was in the courtyard and then the rooms suddenly changed and Gammy tried to led the way but…”/ Gammy…? /“So you got lost, Maru?” Choi knelt down and patted Maru on the head. The little kid nodded, looking like he is going to cry. “Don’t worry about it, we are just changing the rooms' layout a bit. It’ll be easier to get around once we are done. Just go and play with the doggie, we’ll look for you when we are done, alright?”“I… is there, is there anything I can help with?” Amber eyes looked at him questioningly, and-/ Oi. /“Eun Yul-nim? Is Eun Yul-nim here too? I can hear his voice, but I don’t see him?” Maru looked around, and was disappointed when he didn’t see Eun Yul around.“Don’t worry about him, Eun Yul’s busy with other things. Just go and play and have fun, we can handle this on our own.” Choi gently pushed the child out of the room, together with the hound that doesn’t seem to realise its owner is there together with them in the room.“Go play with Maru, alright?”The dog wagged its tail hard, and ran down the corridor, with Maru following it.“Gammy, wait, wait for me!”Choi watched till the kid vanished from sight, before swapping the corridor with a dead end./ So Eun Yul. // What. / Eun Yul’s groaning and picking himself up from the debris pile. He’s still irritated, but that bloodlust that was there previously is gone./ Come on, I haven’t even had my fun yet. / Choi complained, grinning at the annoyed glare Eun Yul sent him./ Fuck you Choi. I’m going to see how the kid’s doing. // You’ve already seen how he’s doing, what, you’re running away just like this? / Choi watched as Eun Yul just walked out of the room, no longer interested in picking a fight.That’s disappointing, but hey? He grinned widely, calling out after Eun Yul./ Eun Yul, how many years do I have to wait till I can finally eat him? // … I’ll fukcing end you. /It was several hours later before the three plus a dog had their dinners. Eun Yul looked very tired, and Maru tugged at his sleeve lightly, concern written in his eyes.“Um… Eun Yul-nim? Are you alright?”Eun Yul didn’t say anything, but lifted Maru from his seat, and put him down on his lap, wrapping his arms protectively around the small child. He didn’t say anything, just glaring at Choi the entire time.“Eun, Eun Yul-nim! Choi-nim!” Maru waved his arms frantically, not knowing what to do./ Maru’s just so adorable, it’s not fair for you to monopolise him... // You are not allowed anywhere near my kid! / Eun Yul scowled, refusing to let Maru go./ Told you I don’t eat children already. How else am I going to get you to fight seriously? / Choi pouted, trying to inch closer to Maru but having to back off when a couple of blades materalised around him.“Eun, Eun Yul-nim! Are, are the two of you fighting?! Please, please don’t fight!” Maru looks absolutely terrified, and almost in tears, but Eun Yul just picked up some food and stuff it in the kid’s mouth.“Eat.” He ordered, “just ignore that thing there.”“But, but…”“Don’t ignore me please, Maru?” Choi pleaded, “I’ll cook something real nice tomorrow for you.”/ Make that two and I’ll consider letting Maru play with you for an hour. Maybe. // Deal- /“Choi-nim, you don’t, you don’t need to cook anything! Eun Yul-nim, please, please don’t fight with Choi-nim, please!” Maru cried, and Eun Yul sighed.“Fine. And it’s not even your fault, why do you even have to cry for that jerk…” Eun Yul ruffled Maru’s hair, sighing. He called off his swords, and Maru looks a bit relieved. He still glared at Choi, daring him to come closer./ Because he’s just the sweetest kid ever? // Five. // Hey! /After the somewhat eventful day, and quite a heated discussion when Maru is out of earshot on who should be preparing Maru’s medicine, it is time for bed.“Here, Maru, Saeha said one dose at night, and one in the morning.” Maru nodded as Choi handed him a steamy mug. “It might two to three days for your hearing to become normal, and there may be side effects, but-”/ Hands off. / Eun Yul snarled as Maru tried to balance the cup and give Choi a one handed hug. To prevent Eun Yul from banning him around Maru again, Choi fought hard to resist hugging the lovely kid./ Good. Now stay like this. // T_T /
----- CHAPTER BREAK -----
Eun Yul paced around the room. The sun is up high in the sky, but his kid isn’t waking yet. He’s still breathing, and his heart has not stopped yet, which is good, but Maru is still very sound asleep in his bed unlike the previous mornings where he woke early./ He’s still not up yet? / Choi asked again, only for Eun Yul to snap back at him./ No, no, NO! I said I’ll tell you when he’s up, stop pestering me! // But- // You ask me the same question again, and I’ll feed you to Gamunbi! /Hearing the mention of its name, his shadow hound dropped into the room from the ceiling./ Gamunbi, I didn’t call you. /The dog ignored him and bounced happily over to its tiny friend./ No, Maru isn’t up yet, don’t disturb him. /Not seeming to understand his words, the dog gave Maru a big gooey lick. That seemed to do the job, as Maru rubbed his eyes, blinking and trying to see what is happening.Then the screaming started.“Here, Maru, don’t worry alright?” Choi hugged the little kid tight while Eun Yul had a long talk with his pet. The poor kid is pale and shaking badly and digging his face into his chest, crying./ You cook dogs? / Eun Yul asked, exasperated. Looks like he isn’t too successful in teaching his dog not to be so friendly./ Nope. And I refuse to cook anything that shares the same name as the people I know. / Choi replied, and patted Maru on the back.“It… very scary…” The poor kid cried, refusing to bulge from his spot.“Yes, yes, you must have been terrified. Here, have some food, you’ll feel better.” Choi managed to stuff a spoonful of food into the child’s mouth when he turned, and soon managed to turn Maru attention away from the disastrous waking./ He isn’t crying anymore, but just make sure your doggie doesn’t get anywhere near Maru for now. // Yeah, I know. Threw him at Jiyul to go stare at some cows. // Don’t think that’ll help. /He materalised beside Maru, causing him to jump in surprise.“Eeeeeek- Ah, Eun Yul-nim…”Looks like the kid’s still jumpy from the scare.“I’ve already punished Gamunbi. He won’t be scaring you anymore.” Eun Yul shook his head and dug in to lunch.“That, that was… Gammy?” Maru asked, round orange eyes wide in shock. “I, I, I didn’t know, I, I must have scared it so much! Eun Yul-nim, where is Gammy? I, I got to apologise to it!”He looked around frantically, but the shadowy hound isn’t anywhere around./ … what?! He had the shock of his life and all he’s worried about is that dumb dog?! // Maru’s such a kind hearted kid. /“Maru, you’re just so sweet, you know?” Choi just hugged Maru again, which resulted with Eun Yul calling up and pressing a blade against his neck./ Who said you can touch my son. // But he’s so cute and so sweet how could you not want to hug him- // DIE. /Choi teleported off to dodge the strike, leaving Maru confused why he’s suddenly on the chair.“Choi-nim? Ah Eun Yul-nim!!” That panicked cry stopped Eun Yul in his steps, and he called off his blade irritably./ Good job Maru… wait a minute. Can you hear me, Maru? /“Um, Eun Yul-nim, why, um, why are you always fighting with Choi-nim?”/ So the medicine worked huh. /“Maru.” Eun Yul scooped up the small child in his arms. “This is between the two of us. But more importantly, is your hearing back to normal now?”“Ah? Um… this… this morning, I, I slept really, really well! I, I didn’t hear the birds in the morning at all!” Maru beamed, only to have Eun Yul knock softly on his head.“Yeah, you slept so soundly we’re wondering if you are going to wake at all.”“Ah?! Eun Yul-nim, sorry! I’m really sorry! I, I’ll try to wake earlier!”“Say Maru,” Choi reappeared on his chair. “You’ve never slept till you are no longer tired?”“Um…” The little kid thought hard about it, and took way too long to come up with a response.“I take it as a ‘no’ then.”“It, it’s like there’s noises everywhere, and I, I can just hear everything and it, um, once I wake it is very hard to fall asleep again...” Maru shook his head, looking down.“So the medicine worked, didn’t it? You were able to sleep soundly till noon.” Eun Yul rested his head on top of Maru’s. “Then sleep till you wake naturally.”“But-”“”No buts. It’s not like there’s anything much to do here, and I won’t have to wake up so early each day.” Eun Yul frowned. “Heck, before the two of you crashed here I only wake at sunset?!”“Al, alright…?”/ And no, no getting close to my kid when I’m asleep. // I’ll just make sure you never find out- /“Ah, Eun Yul-nim?! Choi-nim!!!!”There was a loud thud somewhere. Jiyul put down her cup of tea, and scanned her kitchen.
A shadow hound?
/ Do you need any help with that? / Her guest asked./ No, thank you, Gamunbi. It feels like- /The hound, as if sensing something, melted into a puddle of shadows and reappeared by her side./ Watch out, Jiyul-nim. / The younger man materialised a large glaive, ready to stop the hound./ Wait, Gamunbi. / Gamunbi drew back his weapon, calling it off. Though at the same time, the hound wagged its tail friendly. Jiyul knelt down and scratched the dog's ears, causing it to yip happily. / My, you must be Eun Yul's pet. /The dog's ears perked up at the mention of its owner, and its tail wagged even faster./ Eun Yul has a pet? He isn't the type to get close to anyone. // Well, how do I put this? He named this dog after you. // What. // And he’s got a cute little child too. // WHAT. /Gamunbi got along well with the hound, despite the initial awkwardness when he found out the two of them share the same name. He's playing with the dog and doted on it with the scraps of meat she had given him./ Choi, do you have any idea why Eun Yul sent his pet over here? / Jiyul searched for her connection with her son, asking./ Hi mom. The dog scared Maru awake, so Eun Yul tossed it over to feed the cows. // How could he do that to the poor dog! // Help take care of it for a while please? Eun Yul's most likely going to pick him up later, Maru's constantly apologising on how 'Gammy' is sent off because of him. // No problem. I've a guest over now, I'll bring him back in the evening. // Thanks mom! // No problem, love. /“Right, so, is there anything you want to do today, Maru?” Choi asked, after they are done with lunch.“Um… do you and Eun Yul-nim… fight this much?” Maru looked worriedly at Eun Yul, who was forced to brew Maru’s medicine. Although it doesn’t seemed to have worn off, Choi pointed out they better stick to the doctor’s prescription in case anything goes wrong.“Yeah, Eun Yul just likes to fight.”/ What. /“You have no idea how many people he tried to fight back then, he’s just newly turned, and already so eager to test out his strength.”The information surprised Maru. “Wow… So Choi-nim, he’s just like you when you were young?”/ Ha. /Choi made a face. “At the very least, I’m not as bad as him. I mean, I had issues growing up, but I don’t go antagonising those older and more powerful than me. Eun Yul there chopped my leg off, chopped up Saeha’s student, nearly blinded Gamunbi-”“Ah?!”/ You shut up. // Come on, it’s just getting fun! // I’m taking my kid back. // No way. /“Um, but, Choi-nim are you alright? And um, Gammy looks ok?” Maru asked, looking around to see if the hound is back. It isn’t.“I’m fine now, sweetie. And not the doggie. Eun Yul named his pet after someone he knew.”“Oh…”“Yup, so don’t worry so much if we fight alright? We won’t die that easily, and sometimes it’s easier for Eun Yul to fight than to talk.”/ Oi. /“So, anything you want to do today, Maru?” Choi repeated his question, and Maru shook his head.“If, if you need me to do anything-”“Hm, if there’s nothing, let’s see… Maru, do you know anything about the two of us?”/ If you are planning to get “better acquainted” with my kid while I’m busy, I’ll kill you. // I really don’t eat children!!! /“I… I know Choi-nim and Eun Yul-nim, you two are very nice people!”/ Just look at your own expression now. You’re badly tempted, aren’t you- /“Maru”, Choi suddenly hugged Maru tight, “you are just such a sweet little kid!”/ Oi hands off. /“But we’re not humans, you know that right?”Maru nodded at his question. “You two are the nicest monsters I’ve ever met!”/ If he calls me “Monster-nim” again I’m killing you too. // Oh my, I feel so loved. /“We technically are monsters , Maru, but do you know what kind of monsters are we?” Choi asked, waiting patiently for an answer as Maru racked his brain.“Um… very nice monsters?”/ So humans don’t teach about the various types of monsters huh. // Even if they do teach, I doubt if Maru has a chance to learn. // Point. /“We are vampires, Maru. We take blood to survive.” Choi grinned and pointed to his fangs.“Oh… so Choi-nim, you need my blood?” The small child just offered him his wrist, which Choi pushed back./ That… is tempting. // I see your mark on him and I’ll turn you to stew. // Yes yes yes, and since when are you the cook here? // So says the one who refused to prepare this medicine. // Your kid. /“Maru, don’t worry about us. We’ve got places we can get blood from, and I’m pretty sure Eun Yul has a huge stash of it somewhere.” He glanced over at Eun Yul, who nodded.“And I don’t drink blood that young. They got to be at the very least above 25 years old.” He said simply, turning his attention back to the stove and medicine./ And if you dare to... / He left the threat hanging, and Choi winced./ Really, what are you taking me for? I didn’t even touch you till you are way past an adult! And you were the one who initiated- /“Basically, we’re not keeping you as food.” Eun Yul glared, "and if anyone thinks of you like that, tell me. I’ll make sure they never leave this place alive.”Maru still looked very confused, but nodded./ Good boy. /“So, Maru, do you have any questions?” Choi asked, and Maru just stared at him. His eyes are full of questions, and the little kid struggled to put them into words.“Um, Choi, Choi-nim, why? And how, how did the two of you become vampires?”“Why and how?” Choi is surprised by the questions he chose to ask, but he could see there’s still a lot more to come. “Hm, my dad’s a vampire, and fell in love with mom, who’s a human.”“Jiyul-nim is a human? But she, she’s able to speak like the two of you too!”“Mom was human. Many people told me many different things, but when I asked her, she said she wanted to keep cooking and living on the plains she loved so much, and asked dad to turn her into a vampire.” Choi smiled fondly, patting Maru on his head. “But vampires can’t really have kids, and they never really said how I was born, but they really love me. One day I’ll bring you back to see my dad, alright, Maru?”Maru smiled and nodded./ I bet he’d just get scared to death instead. // Come on, dad’s not as bad as you always say he is, he’s just not good at expressing himself. Look at how much mom loves him! // Yeah, yeah. Wait till he drops Maru into his training from hell and say that again. // He wouldn’t do this to such a small child! I… hope. // Ha. /“Then, what else is there to say? For Eun Yul, he was turned by me.” Seeing Maru’s shocked look, he hastily added, “I, I was young back then!”/ Yeah, because you thought it’ll be fun. FUN. // It certainly was fun, but Maru doesn’t need to know this. // And you keep saying I have issues. // Well, you were so cute back then, and it seemed fun to toy with you a bit longer- /In an instant Maru’s back in Eun Yul’s arms. “So Maru, for your medicine, the weirdo doc said to keep it at low heat and stir for an hour.”“Um… alright?” The confused kid looked between the pot, Choi, and Eun Yul, and decided he’d better not ask any questions./ You meanie. /It is evening by the time Choi decided they should have dinner. Eun Yul’s in the living room with Maru, trying to teach the small kid about the different herbs that made up his medicine, when he spotted something round bounce into view. His eye twitched./ ... Why is my dog... ROUND?! /"Wow, Gammy became round!" Maru ran out to greet his friend, but is soon hiding behind Eun Yul again as the hound tried to lick him again. Despite being much rounder, it still appeared scary to the small kid./ Gamunbi stop scaring Maru! / He carried Maru in his arms to keep him away from the dog, but Gamunbi kept bouncing about trying to play with Maru. / And seriously, how did you become so round?! // He's such a friendly dog, we might have overstuffed him with food. / Jiyul materalised in the living room, together with Gamunbi, and gave Eun Yul an apologetic look. / But isn't he adorable now? /"Jiyul-nim!" Maru waved at her happily, and looked curiously at the blonde beside her./ Hi mom. Hey Gamunbi. / Hearing the guests, Choi appeared in the living room too, and introduced the foreign person to Maru, since Eun Yul doesn’t appear to want to."Maru, this is the Gamunbi Eun Yul named his doggie after.” He grinned as Maru looked between the blonde and the hound, trying to spot any similarities between the two.Suddenly Maru's being shoved into his arms and Eun Yul vanished, most likely to hide somewhere till these guests are gone."Um, hello, big Gammy-nim!" Maru waved shyly, and blushed as Gamunbi petted him on the head."And Gamunbi, this is Maru. Eun Yul just adopted him."Strangely, Eun Yul didn't protest, though seeing how he definitely was full papa wolf mode yesterday, he must have already accepted being Maru's father for now."Hello Maru. Eun Yul adopted you?" Gamunbi asked the child. Maru tilted his head, then shook it."Um, Eun Yul-nim and Choi-nim, um, have been taking care of me, and they, they are very nice people!""That's what it means by adoption", Choi added. "We take care of you, so we're are your parents now."The little child's eyes grew wide. "So... um... so it's like... Papa Choi-nim, papa Eun Yul-nim?"/ No. Way. / Even though he is somewhere else in the castle, Choi could sense Eun Yul rolling his eyes./ Yeah, that just sounds… wrong. // Congrats on your marriage, Eun Yul. / Gamunbi snarked, almost immediately earning a /fuck you/ from Eun Yul. Jiyul just laughed."Maru, I don't think your two papas appreciate being called that." She ruffled Maru's hair./ Mom, please don't lump me together with Eun Yul. Please. /"Oh, sorry... Choi-nim...""Maru, just call us whatever you’re used to. And here, I’ve got to cook more food for our guests, would you mind playing with mom and Gamunbi for a while?”Maru nodded, and Choi handed him over to Gamunbi./That’s my kid you’re handling. / Eun Yul complained./ If he’s important you wouldn’t have leave him alone and ran off. / Gamunbi admonished him, while pulling Maru down on the long chair in the living room. Eun Yul stayed surprisingly silent after that.“Maru, has Eun Yul and Choi been treating you well?” The tall blonde asked, and Maru nodded happily.“Eun Yul-nim and Choi-nim have been very nice to me! Choi-nim cooks lots of food and Eun Yul-nim looks fierce but he’s actually very nice!”“Is that so. Looks like Eun Yul finally grew up.”/ Nah, he’s still the same trouble maker, and sometimes he doesn’t allow me to play with Maru. // You said you’ll eat him up. // CHOI?! /“Ah, Jiyul-nim vanished?” Maru turned to look at the empty spot beside him. Gamunbi sighed.“So, Maru, you are happy living here, aren’t you?”“Yup!” A bright and innocent smile greeted him, and he guessed that’s why the two dote the kid.“But, um… Big Gammy-nim…?” He isn’t sure about the nickname though, but“Yes?”“Does, does it hurt? That’s very long wound…” Maru pointed at the scar running down his face.“It doesn’t hurt. It’s a very old scar.” Gamunbi shook his head. “This isn’t anything for you to be worried about.”“Um, … this.” Maru dug out a small container from his pocket./ Wait a minute, Maru?! /“Eun Yul-nim said, um, he didn’t really say it, but this, it can help to get rid of injuries!” The child offered the container, blushing shyly./ What the fuck!? It took me go long to get it from Saeha, and Maru’s just giving it away like that!? // That’s because Maru’s such an adorable and cute kid- // Boys. You are still grounded. /With that, Gamunbi didn’t hear any conversation going on in the castle. He pushed the container back towards Maru, and shook his head. “No, this medicine is very useful. You should keep it for yourself.”“But…” The small kid turned teary. Almost immediately two voices admonished him./ How dare you make Maru cry! I’ll stab out your other eye too! // Gamunbi, just let Maru do what he wants- Mom! // Gamunbi, don’t mind the two of them. Just keep Maru entertained, and dinner is going to be ready soon. // Thank you, Jiyul-nim. /“Maru, this scar has been with me for hundreds of years. It has become a part of me now, so you don’t need to worry about it.”“Al, alright…” Maru looked away dejectedly. “But, but Big Gammy-nim? Choi-nim said, he said Eun Yul-nim nearly blinded you… Is that…?”“... Eun Yul was a troublesome kid, but if he’s taking good care of you”, he ruffled Maru’s hair, “that means he’s finally grown up.”“O, ok…?” Maru looked confused at what he’s talking about. “Um, but Eun Yul-nim is really, very nice to me! I’m sure he’ll be nice to you now too!”“I doubt so, but thank you, Maru. You are a very kind child.” Maru blushed red at the praise. He sat there quietly, though looking over curiously when Eun Yul’s pet dog finally managed to bounce up the long chair and land on his lap.“Ah, Gammy!” The dog immediately turned its head towards Maru, who looks very scared of it. It tried to bounce over, but as Gamunbi petted it on its head, and started scratching its ears, it decided to stay on the spot instead.“Are you afraid of this puppy?” Gamunbi asked, and Maru nodded softly. “Don’t worry, Maru, the puppy is very friendly. It won’t attack you. Do you want to try petting it?”Maru looks hesitant, staying on his spot, but slowly reaching out his hand. He tapped Gamunbi on the head lightly, and drew back his hand hastily when the dog yipped happily.“Look, he doesn’t look so scary now, does he?” Gamunbi smiled at the child, but Maru shook his head.“Gammy… is very friendly, but, but it, it just reminds me of those horrible big dogs and, and…”Is it some kind of phobia? Gamunbi ruffled the child’s hair. “Despite that, would you like to play with it?”Maru nodded furiously. “Eun Yul-nim gave me a stick to play with Gammy! But, but I want to be able to pet Gammy too one day!“Hm, maybe you can try-”“Dinner’s ready!”Gamunbi was cut off by Jiyul’s call, and even before both could react, the dog ran off to the kitchen immediately.“Seems like the dog fell in love with Jiyul-nim’s cooking.” Gamunbi chuckled. Maru nodded in agreement.“Jiyul-nim’s cooking is amazing! And um, I think… the kitchen is here?” Maru pointed at one of the corridors leading out of the living room. And sensing no presence down that corridor, it seems like Maru is still not too familiar with the place.“Here, it’ll be faster this way.” He picked up the kid by waist and carried him with one hand, and teleported to where he felt Jiyul’s presence. Eun Yul’s sitting at the table, muttering to himself, while Choi’s cooking something at the stove.“Hey, Maru.” He waved, by turned silent when Jiyul glared at him./ You are still not allowed to speak to Maru till you learned to behave yourself. / Jiyul admonished sternly, which earned a chuckle from Eun Yul./ And Eun Yul you are still grounded for not respecting your elder. /Ignoring the two pairs of eyes watching him, Gamunbi helped Maru up the kitchen chair. “Can you reach the food, Maru? Just say if you need me to get any food for you.”“Thank, thank you, Big Gammy-nim!”/ He’s still my kid. // I’m not going to steal him from you. // Good. // This isn’t fair! Gamunbi gets to eat with Maru like this, but each time I say anything, Eun Yul just wants to kill me! // Choi ./ Jiyul just smiled and turned towards her son, who swallowed back whatever words he is about to add. Gamunbi glanced over at Maru, at least the small kid isn’t aware of anything happening around him. He’s busy helping himself to the various dishes on the table, although he’s just taking small spoonful of food from each food item.“Here, Maru.” Gamunbi blinked with surprise as Eun Yul, of all people, took a large serving of ribs and dropped it on Maru’s plate./ Stop staring at me like this, it’s disgusting. / Eun Yul snapped./ You really have grown, Eun Yul. // You want to die?! /Jiyul just shook her head as Eun Yul called out his blade, wondering if it is worth the effort to Interfere. A soft yipping at her feet turned her attention away from the looming fight.“Ah, Gamunbi? You want some more scraps?” Jiyul smiled at the dog, and gave a few ribs to the dog bouncing up and down with joy./ Jiyul stop stuffing my dog- / By the time Eun Yul realised what Jiyul is doing, his dog is on the ground twitching and making strange whining noises./ Gamunbi?! // It’s good to know you care more about the dog than me. // You shut up! /Gamunbi suddenly stop twitching, gave a low growl which caused Maru to jump on his seat, and started growing. And growing. And grew till it was almost Eun Yul’s height./ What. The. Fuck. // My, I heard that hell hounds grow larger the more they are loved, but I didn’t this to happen. /The dog looked around, and upon spotting Eun Yul, leapt over the table and gave its owner a big lick in the face. Maru fainted./ Jiyul, what the fuck did you do to my dog! // O ho, I think I had left a pot on the stove on. / With that, Jiyul vanished from the spot, leaving Eun Yul staring at his pet with his jaw wide open./ Gammy, is it? Come over here. / Gamunbi called out to the dog that shared his name, and it trotted over, tail wagging hard and sending some plates flying./ Wait, what, you are kidnapping my dog?! // You two should be more worried about Maru, he’s all out cold. It’s best to keep the dog away from him for now, and you know where to find me when you want your dog back. / Picking up a few dishes, Gamunbi the person vanished with Gamunbi the dog./ What, just what the hell happened!? // No idea, but Maru sure had a huge shock. Look, he’s all out cold, but he’s just so cute isn’t he? // Choi. Let me chop you up into pieces while I try to figure up what is happening! /
----- CHAPTER BREAK -----
It was quite some time before the three managed to have their dinner in peace./ What the hell is Gamunbi thinking, stealing my dog like this?! / Eun Yul stabbed at his steak hard, still irritated at the incident. Choi shook his head at that tiny tantrum./ He’s got a point though. Maru’s still shaking. Small Gammy already scares him, think of how he’d be around such a big dog. / He looked at Maru, taking tiny nibbles of his food, not making any sound./ He. Fucking. Stole MY dog. // You can always go get it back- // No way. He’d better bring my pet back safe and sound! // Though I wonder what mom fed to it that made it grow so big. Think I’d be able to get some for Maru- /“Eeeek!” Unlike his usual plea for the two to stop fighting, the moment Eun Yul summoned his sword Maru vanished down the chair, hiding under the kitchen table./ Looks like he’s really scared by the dog. // It’s your fault. // I was thinking more of foods to help him grow up healthy and strong, get your mind out of the gutter. / Choi snapped annoyedly at Eun Yul. He bent down, reaching his hand out to the quivering kid.“Here, Maru, Eun Yul had already called off his sword, don’t be afraid alright?” He smiled at Maru, trying to coax the kid out from under the table. Maru shook his head.“... scary…” the tiny voice mewed./ Come on. /Eun Yul seemed to be losing his patience. He snapped his fingers, and suddenly Maru found himself sitting on Eun Yul’s lap, and long arms hugging him tight.“Look, I won’t let anything happen to you. I swear I’ll protect you.”“Eun Yul-nim…” Despite his eyes still tearing up, Maru decided that he felt safest in that spot, and didn’t move from there till dinner is over./ That’s cheating. // My kid. /Although Eun Yul repeatedly reassured Maru that it is safe in his castle, the little kid still clung onto them whenever he could./ Maru is just so cute, isn’t he? / Despite trying to hide a yawn, Maru still ran up to him and tugged softly at Choi’s pants. He bent down and smiled, and carried the small child in his arms./ My kid. // Yeah yeah. /“Is there anything wrong, Maru? Are you sleepy?” He asked, but Maru shook his head. “Or hungry? I can make some snacks for you.”/ That’ll be great. // Not asking you. /Maru shook his head again, hugging him tight, making Choi smile fondly at him.“Not hungry, hm… If you want, I can tell you more about us?”Maru didn’t say anything, but the sparkling eyes made him unable to reject the kid.“Hm, what should I talk about? You’ve met Gamunbi. He’s quite a reliable person, you can rely on him if you ever need help.”/ Not if I’m around. /“Eun Yul doesn’t really like him, though he gets along well with many others. In terms of power he is slightly more powerful than Eun Yul, though he slipped up and lost his eye to Eun Yul.”/ You say it like it’s my fault. // It IS your fault. /“It looks like he’s fine with it, though it is such a pity for his pretty face- Maru?” Choi nudged the tiny body in his arms, but Maru didn’t bulge. His eyes are shut, his breathing is calm, constant./ Is he asleep? // Looks like it. He’s such a lovely sweetie. / Ruffling the kid’s hair, Choi shifted to Maru’s room, and tucked the little kid into his bed. / Maybe he just needs someone to tuck him in, or a bedtime story. // Whatever. As long as he doesn’t wake up crying everytime. / Despite his complain, Eun Yul still materialised beside Maru and petted the little kid’s hair. / What a troublesome kid. // I won’t mind taking him off your hands- // No. /But for the next two mornings, Maru kept waking up in a jolt, crying.“Maru?” For the third morning in a row Choi rushed to the little kid’s side, hugging him tight. “I’m here, Maru, it’s alright.”Sobs racked Maru’s body as his tiny hands grabbed Choi’s shirt, burying his head on Choi’s chest. It hurts to see the little kid like this, and Choi rubbed his back, trying to comfort the child./ Something’s wrong with Maru. He can’t possibly be this afraid for so many days. // If you’re awake Eun Yul you should be comforting your kid. // Look. I actually sleep, while you are lingering outside his room waiting for him to wake. // Point but still… maybe I should bring him to Saeha for a checkup? He should know what’s wrong with him. // You go. I’m staying here. // Of course, I’m not letting this darling kid killed just because Saeha still has a huge grudge on you. // Then be gone already and let me sleep! // No breakfast then? // … fuck you Choi. /When Eun Yul made his way into the kitchen scowling, Maru ran to him and gave him a big hug.“Eun Yul-nim! Good- good morning!” Despite not having as much sleep as he would have liked, Eun Yul still smiled at the kid. He picked Maru up and put him back at his seat.“Eat more, you’re still so light.” He scooped a few more spoonful of scrambled eggs onto Maru’s plate.“Eun, Eun Yul-nim!! This, this is too much!! I, I can’t finish this!” The small kid waved his arms frantically, almost squeaking as yet another spoonful is dumped on his plate.“Eat more.”/ I know he’s cute, but you shouldn’t be overfeeding him, little kids don’t really have much appetite. // You’re the one who said he should be eating more. And this is how much he’s been eating these few days, you didn’t even take note!? What kind of cook are you!? / Despite still smiling at Maru, Eun Yul’s snapping at Choi in his head with irritation./ Of course I noticed. But he hasn’t been sleeping well these days; his appetite is affected too. / Choi shook his head and ruffled Maru’s hair.“Don’t worry so much, Maru. If you can’t finish this, Eun Yul will finish it, so don’t worry so much.”“Mkay…?” Looking between his plate and Eun Yul’s, Maru scooped a spoonful of scrambled egg and put it on Eun Yul’s empty plate. “Um, Eun Yul-nim, you like to eat, so you- you should eat more too!”/ Did, did you just see that?! He’s just such a sweet little kid right?!?!? /Ignoring Choi, Eun Yul just ruffled Maru’s hair with a ‘thank you’, causing Maru to beam happily.After breakfast, Choi teleported with Maru to a huge library. Books are shelved haphazardly, with pages seeming to flutter around and vanish when they reach the floor.“This is Saeha’s domain.” Choi explained as Maru looked at awe at the place. “He’s the doctor who made your medicine, though he’s a little strange.”“Oi, teacher’s not strange at all!” A black haired youth leapt down from one of the bookshelves, not seeming to care that pages are falling out from the book he is carrying. Despite biting down on a scalpel knife between his teeth, he is still speaking normally. “And this the kid you were trying to help? Doesn’t look any special.”He peered closer, brown eyes studying the little kid who gave a tiny wave.“Um… hello…?”“Looks like food, but those eyes look useful-”“No.” With one quick motion, Choi pulled Maru up in his arms, and held the kid protectively. “And we are here to look for Saeha, if you don’t mind.”“Teacher’s not free now, but I can cut up this little one and tell you what’s wrong-”Choi grabbed the scalpel pointed at Maru, easily bending it out of shape. “Mano. I know Saeha is around. Can you please get your teacher here now .”“... fine.” Mano rolled his eyes, dropping his ruined blade to the ground. “Don’t blame me if he ain’t too happy to see you.”As Mano had warned, Saeha is extremely worked out.“Look this is already the finest grass around here! Just… eat something!” The blonde doctor shouted at a cow. Maru looked at the two, and back at Choi, a question forming in his eyes. Choi just smiled.“Saeha, you mind helping out here first?”“What- You’re back again?” The doctor turned, fixing an angry glare on Choi. “And that’s the kid? Doesn’t look any special.”“He’s human, and the medicine’s working great so far. But he’s been waking up in tears these few days, are you able to find out what’s wrong?”“Tch, one day one of them’s gonna make it final for you.”“I don’t even hunt nowadays, and this lovely sweetheart’s not going to lift a finger against me.”Choi ruffled Maru’s hair, setting the little boy on the examination table. Still looking worriedly between Choi and the doctor, Maru clung onto Choi’s sleeves, refusing to let go.“It’s alright, Saeha’s just going to see what is wrong, I won’t allow him to hurt you.” He smiled and offered his hand out to Maru. “I’ll hold your hand, don’t be scared alright?”It took some moments of hesitation and an irritated glare from the doctor before Maru let go of the sleeve and wrapped his fingers around the offered hand.The doctor glared him up and down, and Maru shifted his weight uncomfortably. And when Saeha poked his nose too close, greenish yellow eyes piercing into him, he scrambled back quickly with a frightened yip.“It’s alright, Maru, it’ll be fine.” Choi patted his head. “I said I won’t allow him to hurt you, and I mean it. If the doctor tries anything, I’ll stop him immediately.”“Oi, what do you take me for?!” Saeha shot Choi a glare. His student must have been offended by his words too, as a magically sharpened scalpel flew towards his direction./ Mano. / Saeha snapped, and the scalpel fell harmlessly onto the floor./ But teacher- // Kids should just stay out of it when adults are talking. / With a flip of his fingers, Choi sent Mano to one of the bookshelves near the ceiling. There was a yelp of surprise as the teen frantically grabbed onto a ledge before he fall. He stayed there, sending a few books tumbling down./ … if my kid dies again because of you I’m taking this as payment. // If he dies again? So you haven’t turned him fully yet? Waiting for him to blossom? // Not all of us take in humans because we want to fuck them! /A cloud of acupuncture needles formed around Choi, who deflected them easily. Maru squeaked and dived under the table, clinging onto the metal legs and peeking out from time to time. Choi called up a shield of his own, blowing the needles away./ Well I can- // You keep your hands off my student too! // I haven’t even- // Do you even want a diagnosis of your kid?! // … that’s mean. /Still glaring at Choi, the doctor sent his needles flying away towards the bookshelves, forming footholds for Mano to climb down.“The kid’s malnourished. He’s got some worrying internal injuries, what rubbish dump did you pick him up from?!”“Ah?!” Choi quickly dragged Maru out from the table. “He already had some of your medicine.”He tossed the ointment container that Maru had been holding onto to Saeha, reassuring the panicking Maru it will be fine. The doctor’s eyes narrowed.“So you managed to get it from BaekJung. This is for external wounds, and no, swallowing it won’t do anything. Mano.”The teen immediately scrambled to his teacher’s side, a few scalpels held within his fingers. It only earned him a sharp whack on the head.“No we aren’t cutting the kid open.”“But teacher, if it’s internal it’s easily to treat by cutting up-”Another whack cut off his complaint.“Are you saying I haven’t taught you enough?” That question silenced Mano, and he shoved the scalpels in his coat.“No teacher. I- I’ll show you what I’ve learnt from you.”Mano’s eyes glowed. A light red aura surrounded his left hand, while a light green enveloped his right. Choi set Maru back on the table, with a reassuring smile to the small kid it will be alright.“I won’t let him hurt you.” He squeezed Maru’s shoulder lightly, his hand keeping Maru firmly in place.Mano reached out to Maru, his hands stopping just before he reached the child. Maru still flinched, but he didn’t try to run away. As if sewing on an invisible weave, Mano’s fingers danced in front of Maru, though Choi could see his power reaching inside Maru, cutting off and healing various parts. Although he isn’t as masterful as his teacher, Choi could see why Saeha kept this student. Given more time and training, he might even get near to his teacher’s level.“There.” Mano broke off suddenly, hands clenching on the tabletop as his body swayed. He looked drained, his face paler than before, sweating dripping down his face. “Teacher I-”The youth stumbled, and Choi quickly moved to stabilise him. But Mano kept his eyes on his teacher, seeking some form of approval.“You’ve still got ways to go, Mano. This is a human child, they are much more delicate-”“Saeha. Shouldn’t you at least praise him for his effort before the lecture?” Choi cut in, asking, ignoring the glare Mano sent him.“That’s expected of him.” Saeha shrugged, brushing him off. “If by now he isn’t capable of anything as basic as this, there’s no use of keeping him around.”/ You’re not thinking of kidnapping another kid, are you. / Eun Yul snarked in his mind, but Choi ignored that.“Even so, he’s still your kid. You can afford to praise him a little-”“You stay out of this.” Mano spat, “no one asked you about it.”“Mano.” Despite his teacher cutting him off with a stern word, Mano protested.“But teacher! This guy is just being unreasonable!”“Choi is your elder by eons. You don’t speak against him and expect to live.”Choi grimaced at the harsh words./ Come on Saeha, at most I’ll just toy with him a little- // NEVER. Keep your filthy hands off my kid. /Mano just looked away. He appears deflated, but swayed his way to one of the bookshelves wobbly and perched there, watching them. Not appearing to notice that, Saeha spoke.“Now the internal injuries are done, what else do you need.” The doctor’s voice had became more hostile, and Choi felt he should leave soon.“No, Maru kept waking up crying and scared, so the injuries caused that?”“He woke up scared?” The hostility vanished from Saeha’s voice, and he examined Maru closely again. “He’s got enhanced hearing you said?”Choi nodded. “Yeah, previous days he woke up when the birds started chirping in the morning, and when the animals were rowdy.”Maru shifted uncomfortably but nodded too.“And he has been living with this ability since young.” Saeha commented, rubbing his chin. “When you’ve been living with too much sound; Choi, cut his dosage into half.”“Ah?”“Look, the medicine I gave you is to cut off all surrounding sound. When you are so used to having constant sound, having everything silenced at once is not something you can get used to.” Saeha sighed. “Maybe for an adult, it might be possible, but it can feel very suffocating.”“No wonder Maru’s been so clingy these days, but just cutting the dosage into half is enough?”That got him another glare. “What kind of doctor are you taking me for?!”That seemed like his cue to leave. Choi quickly grabbed Maru and got ready to leave. “I’ll just come back if anything happens.”“How bout you don’t ever return?!” Saeha snapped, and Choi could see Mano snickering.“Well, then-”But before he could leave, Maru tugged at his sleeve again and squeaked softly.“Um, Choi-nim, the- the ointment…”“Ah. And Saeha, since I got this sweetie to look after now, you mind giving me more of the stuff?” He pointed to the ointment Saeha set aside on the table.“If it keeps you away from here.” The doctor snorted and tossed it back, together with two more containers. “Now get out!”Grabbing them, Choi vanished from the castle with his kid, leaving Saeha rubbing his head and sighing.“And Mano, well done.”The brown hair youth almost tumbled off the bookshelf in surprise, a proud smile blooming on his face/ Aw, Saeha, you’re such a softie. // Choi. Get the fuck out from my place and my mind! /With his medicine dosage Maru appeared a little bit more comfortable. He didn’t wake up crying anymore in the mornings, though meant he still woke up early in the mornings. It is still a better alternative than having the kid wake up crying, and even Eun Yul agreed on that. Maru still stuck close to the two, especially enjoying when Choi tells him stories.“Um, Eun- Eun Yul-nim, this…” After dinner ended, Maru pattered over to Eun Yul, blushing slightly. “Can, can you um, please, please read me a story too?”/ Ah? / That was surprising, although he should have expected it, seeing how Maru sees both of them as parent figures.“A story huh. Go pick something from the library you’ll want to hear, I’ll read it for you.” Eun Yul’s beautiful eyes were gentle as he ruffled Maru’s hair, though Choi had to chuckle at that sudden glare at him./ Stop being so disgusting! // But it’s true? I wouldn’t have picked you if not for those lovely- /“EEEEEEEEEEEEK!”That might be a record time Eun Yul called off his swords, cursing him in his mind, and trying to coax a scared little kid out from under the dining table.It took quite a while for Maru to pick a book. The little kid could only reach the lower few shelves, and spent quite some time pulling out each book and studying their covers.“This one!” He held up a book triumphantly, showing it to Choi. Choi twitched. Eun Yul did so too./Why are you having such books in your library? /Eun Yul didn’t even try to come up with a reply.“Maru… Is there any reason why you choose this book?”“Because Choi-nim, the cover looks much nicer than the rest!” Maru beamed brightly at him.“So it isn’t because of the title?” Choi asked, retrieving the book from Maru’s hands.“The title…?” Seeing Maru’s quizzled look at him…“Say Maru, can you read?”Maru shook his head, which might explain why he picked such a book.“Um… Choi-nim, did I, did I pick a- a bad book?” The kid asked, looking a little bit crestfallen.“Let’s just say you should only read this book when you are a little older-”/ NEVER! /“-or maybe not, Maru, how about I pick a book for you?”Maru looked a bit disappointed, but nodded his head.“We can also teach you to read too, the next time you can pick stories that you want to listen to, how about it?”That blinding smile hit him harder than anyone ever did, and/ Still no kidnapping of my son. // I should have stolen him while I could... // Too late. /Choi helped Maru pick out a fairy tale for Maru, one where a knight sets off to kill a dragon and rescue a princess. Just a typical story for kids, but when he reached the part where the knight is fighting the dragon“The knight struck the dragon hard- Maru?”Maru suddenly clutched his arm, all tensed up.“Are you worried about the knight, Maru?” He ruffled Maru’s hair, but Maru shook his head.“The knight is horrible! He’s hurting the dragon!” Maru pouted. “I don’t like the knight!”/ Because kids find dragons cool? He might cry at the ending though. // Then what are you expecting me to do. You picked this story. // Make something up, like everyone lives happily ever after, even the dragon? // Fuck you. // I’ve never stopped you from trying. /“Ah?!?!? Eun Yul-nim!?!??!?”For the sake of the scared little kid looking ready to run off, Eun Yul focused on the storybook instead of his rising urge to dice a particular irritating person into bits.“Don’t worry Maru. The dragon roared and rammed the knight into its cave, stunning the knight. Then it gulped down the knight in one gulp.”“Yay!” Maru cheered, though he yawned and rubbed his eyes.“It’s late, I’ll continue the story tomorrow, sleep for now.”“Mkay, Eun Yul-nim. Good night!”Tucking in Maru under the covers, Eun Yul kissed him lightly on the head. “Good night, Maru.”It wasn’t much, but he touched Maru with just a tinge of his magic, and his child soon fell into a dreamless sleep.
----- CHAPTER BREAK -----
“Good, good morning, Choi-nim!” Maru greeted him cheerfully as he made his way to the kitchen.“Good morning, Maru.” He smiled and ruffled the small kid’s hair. “Did I wake you up?”“No, um, I heard the birds chirping.” Maru shook his head frantically. “They aren’t as loud, but I, I can’t fall asleep again, sorry…”“There’s nothing wrong with not being able to fall asleep, Maru.” He wrapped the small kid in a hug, causing Maru to yip in surprise. “But since you’re up, I’ll whip up something nice for you, how about it?”Maru’s stomach grumbled in agreement, and Maru blushed red.“Thank, thank you, Choi-nim…”/ What a sweetie- // My kid. // And you blessed him with some of your powers? There’s a few lighter strands of hair. /Eun Yul didn’t reply him. Maybe he’s shy about it?/ Fuck you Choi. // Yeah yeah, we all know how much you love your little kid, no need to be so shy about it- // DIE. /“Choi-nim?!”After a light meal, it is time for Maru’s lessons again. The small kid is illiterate, never having a chance to go to school, and both decided it will be useful for him to learn. He is at the stage of memorising how individual letters look like and pronounced, and similar looking letters confused him a lot. It was supposed to be Eun Yul’s job, but the younger vampire fell asleep making Maru copy letters that somehow it became his job. Not that he minded, it is adorable seeing Maru so focused on the piece of paper trying to write out all the letters he learnt.After that is magic lessons. There haven’t been any progress the past few days, and although they cut back on the medicine dosage, when he asked, Maru was silent on whether he could hear their conversations. But now that Maru has some of Eun Yul’s powers…“Maru, how about you try to create a fire again?”“I, I’ll try, Choi-nim.” The small child closed his eyes, focusing on the image of fire in front of him. It took quite some time, but he managed to call up the smallest orange flame he had seen.“Hm… like this…? Ah!?”When Maru opened his eyes, he yelped in surprise, staring astonisged at the tiny flame in his hands.“Choi, Choi-nim, I, I did it…? Look, look, I managed to make a fire!”The bright smile that bloomed on the small kid’s face was absolutely heavenly, and he had to keep down the urge to hug Maru tight when a killing intent suddenly flared up somewhere else in the castle.“Yes yes, you did great, Maru.” He ruffled Maru’s hair, barely being able to hold himself back. “Keep practising, I’m sure you’ll be able to call up even bigger flames in the future.”“I, I will- Ah.” Maru suddenly sat down hard on his legs, the flame vanishing. It took some blinking and shaking his head before he could talk again. The poor kid must have exhausted himself from that spell.“The fire… vanished…” That smile vanished, and despite smiling moments ago, Maru is close to crying. “I, I wanted to show Eun Yul-nim too…”“I’m sure Eun Yul saw it too.” Comforting the small kid was a higher priority than the danger of being stabbed, not that he could die, so he hugged Maru close. “Don’t cry, Maru, the flame will last longer with more practise.”“m’Kay Choi-nim…” Maru looked so disappointed, but at least he doesn’t look like he is going to cry.“Go have fun for a bit, I’ll call you when it is time for lunch.”Maru walked around the castle’s rooms, trying to get more familiar with the place. At least now he knows how to get to the kitchen most of the time, with both Eun Yul and Choi praising him when he didn’t get lost. It made him very happy each time, and he is trying hard to learn how to get around to make them proud of him. There is the sound of Eun Yul and Choi bickering somewhere in the castle, which makes him feel less lonely when it is only him around. He wished that Gammy is around, although the dog scares him, he misses it quite a bit. But the last he asked Choi, the elder vampire just shook his head, saying Eun Yul is throwing a tantrum, and they started fighting again. But he didn’t see Eun Yul throwing anything? He could still feel the stick in his pocket, hopefully one day Eun Yul will bring his friend back and they can play fetch again-There is a dragging sound down the corridor? But Choi and Eun Yul don’t sound near? He ran down the corridor, surprised to see another kid looking like his age, with white hair and a couple of scars across his forehead. His eyes look dead, and he, he…He’s dragging a body!?“Eun Yul-nim!! Choi-nim!!” He immediately shouted for the two vampires, and Choi materialised immediately by his side.“Maru- Who do we have here?” Choi spoke to the white haired kid, who looked at him silently. “Isn’t this Mano? You dragged him all the way here from Saeha’s place?”“Ah? Mano-nim?” Maru peeked at the body from behind Choi’s coat, that mop of black hair and white lab coat does look a little bit familiar. “Is he, is he dead? Choi-nim, please, please help him!”“You’re just such a sweetie, you know?” Choi petted him on the head, and he beamed. “No, he isn’t dead yet, I ain’t Saeha, but I promise I’ll try to help.”“Thank, thank you, Choi-nim!”The white haired kid twitched a little, and Maru stepped forward hesitatingly. “Um, we, we will try to help Mano-nim, alright?”The kid blinked at him, his white eyes looking scarier by the moment. But he opened his mouth and said haltingly, “please help him.”“We, we will!”As he suspected, Mano had been exhausted from the journey. Not being a full vampire, to make the journey so far from Saeha’s domain to here must have been very tiring. It might take some rest before he recovers and wakes, but he does have food on standby for the teen./ I don’t recall agreeing to let these two things stay in my castle. // Maru asked me to help, you can’t really say no to him either right? // He’s just too nice for his own good. // Yup, such a little sweetie~ /Maru’s trying to chat with the white haired kid, and so far he only managed to get three words out.“Henry”, which is his name, and “Teacher Mano”. Otherwise the kid is just staring into thin air, as if not even seeing Maru. Not even when Maru asked and he placed a few dishes in front of him. Though the kid himself is a strange being. He could see traces of magic where Mano had sewn him together, and from how he feels, he’d bet that the kid was dead but Mano brought him back to life. He has no issues with that, in fact it seems like a huge achievement, but seeing Mano here instead of his teacher’s domain, he is suspecting Saeha didn't agree with him./ Kids are just such troublesome things. // Maru’s a kid too, Eun Yul. // Except for Maru. // Of course. He’s practically an angel. /There was some groaning, and Mano climbed up from the bed, coughing. Although he had rested, he still looked very pale.“Here, eat something, you’ll feel better.” With a wave Choi summoned a table with a few dishes on it in front of the black haired teen, who just glared at him.“You. Why am I here, and what the hell did you do to me?!” Mano tried to stand up, but fell back to the bed. The teen had seriously severely exhausted himself.“Eat.” Choi ordered, and Mano found his hands moving against his own will and forcing a spoonful of food down his throat. That did the trick; his hunger won over his caution, and Mano is soon wolfing down the dishes he’d prepared. It took only a few moments before he cleared the dishes.“The food… definitely is delicious.”Choi almost laughed at how unwilling that sounded. Maru apparently didn’t notice the reluctance in his words, and nodded enthusiastically.“Yup, Choi-nim’s cooking is extremely good!” Maru pattered from Henry’s side over to his. “Are you feeling better, Mano-nim?”Mano ignored the little kid, instead glaring at him.“Now that I’ve eaten, like you demanded, tell me, why am I here?!” Mano growled, causing Maru jump and hide behind him.“Leave this to me, Maru.” He petted Maru on the head, and the small kid nodded. “Look, you were dragged in by this kid,” he pointed to Henry, “and sweet little Maru’s the one who asked us to help you. You should be more grateful to him than scaring him.”Mano just hmphfed and looked away.“And what are you doing so far from your teacher’s domain anyway-”“I don’t have a teacher!” Mano snapped almost immediately, eyes burning with anger glaring at him, but at the same time, they looked so hurt. Although it had nothing to do with him, Maru ran back towards the black haired teen and hugged him, to their surprise.“Please, please don’t feel sad, Mano-nim! It’ll, it’ll be alright- Wah!”Mano drew back his arm, and before he could react, slapped Maru hard across the face, sending the kid flying. Or he might have, had Eun Yul not quickly warped in and hugged the small kid protectively, while a sword cut of that arm, sending it flying.“What the heck?!”“What, what did you even know!!” Mano screamed at them, despite flinching a little when Eun Yul appeared there, and perhaps not noticing he has one less arm attached to his body. Choi had to try hard to stop himself from murdering the teen too, seeing how Maru is tearily holding his cheek and trying not to cry too.“Let’s see, you brought back a corpse to life, and it was against Saeha's teachings that he discarded you.” He growled, “you have no place left to go, so you ended up here.”Mano just stayed silent and looked away.“We can allow you to stay here-”/ -You out of your mind Choi!??!? /“-having a doctor around can be useful, but provided you are to never, EVER, raise your hand against Maru.” He forced his will against Mano, and the fledgling vampire tried hard to resist him.“I don’t need your pity! I don’t need you people, or Teacher at all!” Mano struggled hard, those raging brown eyes looking more and more beautiful the more he resisted. It would be fun to break the teen, but he’s sure Maru would be sad.“Let me put it this way, I’m guessing this is your proudest work?” He gestured, and Henry walked forward.“Keep your hands off Henry!” Mano snapped, though there is a growing fear in his eyes.“So, if you try to hurt Maru again-”Just one snap and suddenly Henry is reduced to bloody pieces on the ground, those soulless eyes staring at Mano while the black haired teen looked on in horror.“Teacher…” The decapitated head called out, before those eyes shut./ FUCK YOU CHOI MARU IS SCARED!!! // Oops? /With a snap of his finger Henry is whole again, and the kid looked around confused.“Fine, I’ll stay here, I’ll even be nice to your kid. Just keep your hands off Henry!” Mano shouted, trying to make his way over and nearly falling. Although he still looked scared, Maru quickly ran forward and helped him, and Henry copied his movements too.“Are you alright, Mano-nim? Please, please don’t make Choi-nim angry, he is very scary when he is angry!!”/ Heh, Maru’s so afraid of you now. // But I, I was just trying to make sure he stays safe... // Heh heh heh. /Mano glared at him, and Maru shrunk back a little. He reached again, Maru flinched, but he just pulled out an ointment bottle from his pocket, and dabbed a bit on the red spot where Maru got slapped, and had been rubbing in pain.“There.”The redness and swelling subsided, and Maru’s eyes lit up in wonder.“Mano-nim, thank you, you’re a nice person too!”Despite the disgust on his face, Mano let Maru hug him, with Henry copying the kid’s actions too.“Keep that up. And you might want to have your arm back.” He tossed the chopped off arm back, and used his magic to fuse it back. That earned him a glare from both Mano and Eun Yul, with the white haired vampire walking up and grabbing his kid by the waist. He then vanished back to his own room.“Look, Maru, if the doctor wannabe tries to hurt you again, call me immediately.” Eun Yul huffed and set down Maru on his bed, ruffling his hair. Maru nodded./ And I know you’re keeping him here just to fuck him- // I’m not! Maru asked me to help- // Whatever, but remember this is my castle, if I ever catch you fucking that kid- /“Um Eun Yul-nim”, Maru’s tugging at his sleeve. “What is ‘fuck’?”The kid is looking at him so innocently- wait, Maru could hear them talking? Maru realised what he had just asked and grew pale, hands stuffing his mouth shut./ Choi. Didn’t you say Maru can’t hear us now. // Actually he didn't really answer me when I asked, but that would explain why his ears turn so red each time we’re talking about him? /Even right now, Maru’s ears, not, even his face is burning up.“Look, Maru, it isn’t good to eavesdrop on what we are talking about.” He motioned for Maru to come closer, but Maru just hung his head, looking down guiltily./ I’ll adjust the medicine again- /“I'm sorry, don’t, Choi-nim, please don’t!” Maru protested, and looked scared when he looked at him straight in the eye.“Maru. No, we aren’t going to scold you, don’t be so scared.” He sighed and hugged the small kid close. “You know you can always tell us anything, we won’t scold you or hurt you.”Wet drops dripped down onto his hand.“Eun, Eun Yul-nim… I, I… this way, I, no matter where I am, I can hear your voices! It, it is scary when I can’t hear the two of you, but, but this way, I, I can hear both of you no matter where you are!”“You could have said so, Maru.” He flicked Maru on the forehead, earning a tiny ouch from his kid. “There are ways to hear us without eavesdropping on what we are saying, you could have just said so and we can teach you.”“But, but… I don’t want to be a bother-”“You are never a bother, Maru.” Those words hit him hard. So far, Maru hasn’t been asking for much things for himself, in fact, it had been rare when the little kid asked him to read a bedtime story. “You are my kid, you can ask for anything, anything in the world and I’ll give it to you.”“Um, then… um… um...” It took some fidgeting, but Maru finally managed to make a request. “Eun Yul-nim, can you, can you teach me, teach me how to hear the two of you? Please?”“Of course.”Though somehow it only led to Maru bawwing harder, with tiny ‘thank you’s as he clung onto him even harder./ Oi Choi, help?! // It’s tears of happiness. // I rather Maru not cry at all!? // I’ll rather not see him cry either. Your kid. // Fuck- Go and die Choi. /It took some time before Maru cried all the tears out of his system, and the poor kid is hiccupping non-stop.“So Maru, what have you been hearing from us so far.” Choi asked, smiling at him, though Maru prefer to stay on Eun Yul’s arms sitting on his lap. Since it is dinner time, they all gathered in the kitchen, with Mano and Henry joining them.“Um, you two are always arguing, um, a lot more than you two say it out loud.” Maru pointed out, often looking back at Eun Yul worriedly before continuing. “And there is a lot of ‘fuck’?”Eun Yul’s glaring at him, though the one who curses the most is him?“Well, that is a bad word.” Choi explained, and Maru looked horrified and covered his mouth with his hands.“And you need to kill at least a thousand people before you can say it.” Eun Yul added in, while jabbing at a piece of meat. “Or else.”“I'm sorry! I, I won’t say it again ever!” Maru promised tearily, and Eun Yul petted him on the head.“Good boy.”Sitting across them, Mano is trying to stifle his laughter, looking like he’s choking on the meal.
----- CHAPTER BREAK -----
After an intensive and heated discussion with Eun Yul, Mano and Henry were allowed to stay in the castle. Although Maru got along well with the undead kid, as well as getting along with an unresponsive and unblinking kid could be, it still took quite some persuasion before Eun Yul allowed them to take the room beside Maru's. For one Choi is to keep constant watch and make sure Mano or his zombie kid doesn't touch Maru, but seeing how Mano prefers to stay cooped up in the library, he just has to keep his eye on Maru all the time instead. It suited him alright, and he uses the time to teach Maru how to speak with them telepathically./ Like, like this? / After sending the short sentence to him in his mind, Maru melted in his arms, the small kid exhausted by the simple spell."Yup, that's it. I can hear you loud and clear." He ruffled the mop of hair, which is becoming shades lighter by the day. He planted a soft kiss on his head, giving just the tiniest bit of magic to the child. "Just keep practicing, you'll get better at it."/ Oi I saw that. // It isn't fair that only you get to bless Maru with your powers. And this will help Maru get more used to magic. You don't want your precious kid to faint somewhere in your castle due to magic fatigue right? /While they are speaking, Maru turned redder. Looks like they will have to adjust the medicine dosage again."Maru, you can still hear us?""Um, yes... Last night, I heard you and Eun Yul-nim quarreling again..." Maru nodded, "and he said a lot of bad words.""Ah, oops? No wonder you woke up so sleepy today." He ruffled Maru's hair, hugging him close. "We are trying not to fight so much, but we'll adjust your dosage again so you can sleep better, alright?""m'Kay."/ Don't use this as a chance to keep your hands on my kid! /After his magic lesson, Maru went to the library to look for Mano and Henry. Mano prefers to be surrounded by books, and complained loudly at the poor selection of medical books. He only shut up when Eun Yul threatened to turn him back into a meat pile.“You’re back again.” Mano sat on top of a bookshelf, chewing on a scalpel, a book open in his hand. Henry sat at a corner, unmoving and unblinking, eyes focused on Mano. The small undead kid creeped Eun Yul out a lot, but as long as he keeps getting along well with Maru and doesn’t do anything, he is alright with the kid.“Mano-nim, good, good afternoon! Hello Henry!” Maru greeted them cheerfully, taking a seat beside Henry. The undead kid’s head swivelled to look at him, repeating "hello" back at him, then turned back towards Mano with disinterest.“You don’t even understand what I’m saying most of the time, but you keep coming back.” Mano complained, staying on the bookshelf.“But your books sounds so interesting! They are so nice to listen to!” Maru chirped brightly. Mano just sighed and flipped a few chapters into the book.“Why am I even bothering with teaching you two kids.” He shook his head, reading a passage out aloud. Despite all the medical terms, Maru stayed focused the entire reading, while Henry just kept staring. It was only when Choi appeared in the room to announce dinner is ready that he stopped.“So what did you two understand- !?” As Mano climbed down the bookshelf, he missed and step and almost tumbled off. Henry immediately rushed to the bookshelf, the undead kid moving surprisingly fast, enhanced speed?, but Choi managed to pull Mano back by his lab coat collar.“Maybe you should sit somewhere safer next time?” The elder vampire offered, but Mano only glared at him. “Yes, yes, it is up to you, but is this really the way you want to die?”The glare continued till he lowered Mano safely to the floor, and Maru and Henry both helped stablise Mano./ Remember, there are at least two who would be sad if you die. /“Your kid can hear you like this.”/ Sorry, habit. /Mano is a picky eater, sticking to only the greens and ignoring all the meat pieces.“Um, Mano-nim, you don’t like meat?” Maru asked curiously, and as he turned away from his plate, Eun Yul heaped a huge portion of meat on his plate.“Meat stinks.” Scooping a spoonful of beans, Mano chomped down on them. “Teacher can’t cook them, so...”At the mention of his teacher Mano trailed off and looked down on his plate.“Ah, Mano-nim, sorry!” Maru panicked, looking around not knowing what to do. “Um, um, Choi-nim cooks really delicious meat, it’s, it’s really delicious, so please, please don’t be so sad!”Grabbing an unused fork on the table, Maru picked up a piece of meat and passed it to Mano.“Um, here, please, please give it a try!”Mano must have felt Eun Yul’s glare on him, and bit down on the piece of offered meat unwillingly. He chewed and kept quiet for the rest of the meal, still sticking with his greens. Maru kept looking worriedly back at him, till Eun Yul told him out loud to focus on his meal, and he realised his plate is holding a huge mountain of food.“Eun, Eun Yul-nim I really can’t finish so much food!”Meanwhile, Henry just sat at the side, watching the piece of steak on his plate.“Even if you are undead, your body needs food too.” Choi offered helpfully. “It’ll also allow you to drain less of Mano's life.”The undead kid just stared at the slice of meat, then grabbed it with his fingers hard, shoving it into his mouth. Looks like the kid might need some lessons in table manners if he is to continue staying there…“So how was the food?” Choi asked as Mano after Eun Yul and Maru left the kitchen, and Henry’s sitting silent by his side. “You wanted to say something didn’t you?”“Teacher… really can’t cook…” Mano’s voice was soft, and he leaned on the seat, slightly hunched. “But I still miss his cooking…”It took him some moment to realise who he is talking to and growled.“You’re trying to make me drop my guard.” Mano snapped and left the kitchen, with Henry following close behind him.Choi just shrugged.Maru became better at speaking with them in his mind with more practice. Eun Yul has to admit Choi is good at teaching such things, and he often could hear Maru calling out for him throughout the day./ Eun, Eun Yul-nim? / A tiny voice asked in his head./ Yes? / He replied back for the fifth time that morning, and is greeted by a blast of pure joy in return./ Maru is just so cute, he’s beaming so brightly now, can you see? // I rather he actually has something to say. / Eun Yul complained. / He just keeps calling me and when I reply he is just so happy I can’t get mad at him?! // I’ll just tell him to pester me instead- // No way. My kid .// Then stop complaining about it! I’ll rather he keep calling out to me instead... // He’s mine. Go play with your boy toy instead. // Maru’s much cuter to toy with- // YOU WANT TO DIE!??!?!? /Being banned yet again from being near Maru, Choi hung out at the library. He would rather play with the sweet little kid instead, but failing that he’d just have to settle for the third best thing around there.“Hey, managed to find an interesting book?”Henry, sitting beside Mano on the bookshelf, managed to grab hold of Mano and drag him back before he toppled off in shock. Good to know the undead kid learnt something useful.“What the fuck!? Do you not have any sense of privacy?!” Mano snapped, while absent mindedly petted Henry on the head with a ‘thanks’.“Language. And when you are as old as me, you get the right to come and leave as you please.” Choi grinned, while Mano rolled his eyes.“You came. Now leave.” He pointed at the library door, but Choi chose to sit down beside him.“Say, that,” he pointed over to Henry, “is an interesting piece of work.”Almost immediately Mano’s demeanor changed. The sour faced teen puffed his chest proudly.“Look. Henry was just a corpse, he didn’t even have any signs of life in him when I found him. It took everything, everything that Teacher taught me, everything that I know, and I achieved it!” Those eyes became so fired up as Mano gesture wildly. “Teacher said it was impossible, but I, I managed to bring him back to life!”But the enthusiasm faded as quickly as it appeared, replaced by bitterness.“But Teacher doesn’t even see the beauty of it, he didn’t even try to examine Henry, he just said he’s an abomination and told me to dispose of him!?” Mano grabbed Henry’s arm, holding on tight to it while Henry just stared. “When he knew I brought him back to life, he didn’t say anything and just threw me out?!”“Well,” Choi petted him on the head, causing Mano to bare his teeth and growl. “Look at it this way. Bringing dead things to life requires a heavy price, which is why we usually just turn humans. They are so flexible, you can just mould them into what you want to be.”“That isn’t the point!”“Yes yes, I know. But do you even know the price you have to pay to bring life back?” Choi asked, studying the teen closely.“My life.” Mano’s reply was quick without hesitation. “With my life as the cost, I can keep this dead body alive. Isn’t that an achievement itself!?”That would explain why Mano doesn’t seem to be getting any better, being near the edge of exhaustion constantly.“It might be in a way, but.” He flicked Mano in the nose, and easily flicked away the scalpel Mano tried to stab him with in retaliation. “You don’t have much time left. You are still mostly human, and used up most of your life just to bring this corpse back.”Unable to deny it, Mano just huffed.“If you continue, you will die soon, and when you die, this kid here is going to turn dead again.”“So what. I’ve already proved my skills! I managed to achieve what Teacher wasn’t able to do! I haven’t done anything wrong! Why, just why Teacher just can’t see that!”Seeing how stingy Saeha was with his praises during their previous visit, it seemed like all Mano wanted was to be acknowledge by his teacher for his achievement. Even if it costs him his own life. Choi reached out and stroked the teen’s face gently.“If he doesn’t treasure you, then forget about him. I can treasure you instead, acknowledge you, praise you-”“Mano-nim!!”Whatever moment there was, it was shattered when Maru suddenly ran in and squeaked. Mano broke out of whatever trace he was in and punched him hard in the gut, glaring when he teleported away and dodged the blow./ Ah ha ha ha serves you right. /“Mano, Mano-nim”, the poor kid panted, “you sounded, sounded really sad! I, I, um, please, please don’t be angry at your teacher! I, I’m sure if you, if you sit down and talk properly to your teacher he’d understand!! Because Eun Yul, even Eun Yul-nim spoke very nicely to me and didn’t, didn’t scold me for hiding I can hear them and Choi-nim even taught me how to speak to them, so please, please don’t feel sad!!”After throwing all the words he could get out at Mano, Maru’s left panting heaving trying to catch his breath. Mano blinked at the small kid’s words, and a brief chuckle escaped from his lips.“You had it easy being a kid, Maru. Kind of makes me miss the time when I’m a kid whom Teacher doted on.” Mano said as he climbed down the bookshelf, with Henry mimicking his actions and following after him. Maru just looked confused at him.“Um, but um, Mano-nim, um, you look much happier when you are reading a book to us, so can you please, please, please read us a book?”/ Look, you’ve got your prey stolen by a little kid. / Eun Yul’s still laughing, and Choi sighed.“Ah, prey…? Choi-nim, are you planning, are you planning to cook Mano-nim up!? Are you turning him into dinner?! Please don’t turn Mano-nim into dinner???”Mano just smirked at him, then turned towards Maru.“Just ignore that guy. I'll even let you pick a story this time.”And Eun Yul just kept laughing.Choi entered the library just as Mano was demonstrating how he uses his skills for surgery. Maru, still having trouble forming a flame bigger than a tiny speck, wasn’t able to form a blade as Mano instructed. While Henry, being undead, and sharing Mano’s lifeforce, isn’t able to use any magical abilities, he mimicked Mano’s hand gestures perfectly.“You two are just helpless- Woah!”Henry zoomed to Mano’s side immediately, helping to stablise him. the undead kid seldom speaks but is learning to be more useful. Although Mano looks like he is fine, Choi felt he should step in.“Your life is almost burning out.” He warned.“Why else do you think I’m teaching these kids!?” Mano retorted back, wincing as he stumbled in his steps. “Teacher’s skills are too precious to just end with me!”“Well I can-”/ No fucking in my castle. / Eun Yul ordered. Maru turned red.“Eun, Eun Yul-nim said the bad word again!”And somehow he got grounded instead.“You won’t turn Mano right? Since you already have the cutest kid ever.” Choi perched on Eun Yul’s bed and said. “And no before you say anything, I won’t or Saeha’s going to be real pissed off, and Maru still needs a doctor till he grows up.”“Can’t you just shut up and let me sleep?!?!” Eun Yul complained, burying his head under yet another pillow. “I’m not interested in this stray you forcefully invited back!”“Though there is someone else good with kids-”“No way. But if you are going there jolly well get my dog back.”“So Maru, this is Gamunbi’s domain.” Choi smiled as the little kid looked amazed by the greenery in the place.“Wow, it looks, it looks really pretty!” Maru looked around, eyes sparkling. “If only, if only Eun Yul-nim would come with us…”“Eun Yul doesn’t get along well with Gamunbi, Maru.” He ruffled Maru’s head. “And look, here’s Gamunbi, did you miss him?”Gamunbi appeared in front of them, giving a small bow. There are two tiny pops and two little girls, maybe the age of four, appeared by his side, grabbing onto his pants, making meeping noises. From their scaly fingers and tails sticking out from their skirts, baby dragons? Though first Saeha, then Eun Yul, now even Gamunbi, is adopting little kids the norm now?“Hi big Gammy-nim!” Maru waved, and Gamunbi nodded back at him.“Baby dragons? And twin girls at that.” Mano stepped forward, wearing a sharp toothed grin, causing the two girls to hide behind Gamunbi. “It’ll be interesting to cut one up-”The two girls immediately meeped loudly and ran deeper into Gamunbi’s domain. Maru tugged at Mano’s coat, horrified.“Ma, Mano-nim, please, please don’t cut anyone up!!”To prevent anything from happening, Choi flicked Mano away together with Henry, dumping the two in Gamunbi’s library, where he will hopefully stay.“Ah, Mano-nim?!”“Mano? Isn’t that Saeha’s pupil?” Gamunbi asked, amused.“Let’s sit down and talk, shall we. But don’t worry, I left him in your library, he shouldn’t be causing any more trouble.” Choi shook his head, and carried Maru in his arms, the young kid still looking around frantically for the young doctor.“Even if he tries he wouldn’t be able to. Yeon Hwa is here.”“She is?” Choi turned towards the kid in his arms. “Maru, there’s a really powerful dragon here, do you want to meet her?”“A dragon? A real dragon?!” Maru’s looking at him with such sparkling eyes he can’t help but hug him closer.“Yes, if the two of you could come this way.” Gamunbi led the way, and Maru got down from his arms and pattered quickly behind Gamunbi, excited to quickly meet this dragon. He’d rather Maru stay in his arms, but since the kid is so excited, he’ll let it go this time./ I take it that Eun Yul is still not going to take his pet back. / Gamunbi asked.“Ah! Big Gammy-nim, how, how is Gammy doing?” Maru asked, trying to keep up with his strides.“Maru can hear our conversations, we are still adjusting his medicine dosage.” Choi explained.“Gammy is doing well, Maru. You see it later. How have you been doing so far?”“I, I, I’ve been learning a lot from Eun Yul-nim and Choi-nim! I um, I can make a small fire like this!” Maru showed Gamunbi excitedly the tiny flame he could create, though he’s legs are soon wobbling from the exertion. Choi quickly scooped him back up in his arms.“That’s amazing, Maru, keep practising and you'll get better. But don’t overstrain yourself, it won’t be good for your body.”"m'Kay!"They soon arrived at a small clearing with a table in the middle, and a stone coloured egg in the middle. A pink haired lady sat beside it, chatting merrily with the two little dragon girls. She noticed them entering, and brightened up.“Hey Choi, long time no see!” Yeon Hwa waved at them enthusiastically. “You want to hatch this egg for me?”“No thank you, I already have this little darling to look after.” He waved back, shaking his head. “Maru, this is Yeon Hwa. She’s a dragon.”“She is?” Maru eyes sparkled even brighter, and Choi put him down on the ground.“This is Maru”, he told Yeon Hwa as the little kid walk hesitantly towards her. “He really likes dragons.”“Hello Maru”, Yeon Hwa petted him on the head, while the two girls stay behind her, meeping softly and watching him cautiously.“Hello Yeon Hwa-nim!” Maru greeted her while looking at her curiously. “But… you don’t look like a dragon in the books?”“I can’t really move now due to this egg, but hm, what do you think of this?” She called out her huge scaly wings, and Maru’s jaw dropped.“Wow, that, that’s just amazing!” He exclaimed, and the two little dragon girls meeped in agreement.“But they get in the way so much when I’m not flying”, the pink haired dragon complained, shaking her head, and accidentally smacking one of the twin dragon girls with a wing. “Ah, Gabi!”As she turned to help the little girl, she managed to hit both her twin and Maru with her wing. She fell, and both girls started crying at the same time. Though knocked down too, Maru still stared at her in awe.“Garam! Please don’t cry, I didn’t mean it!” She tried frantically to calm both girls, while her wings swept over Maru and hit the egg. "Ah the egg!"Gamunbi just shook his head and sighed.“Yeon Hwa, you might want to keep your wings first.” Appearing beside her, the dark skinned blonde picked up both girls and hugged them.“Sorry…”“Garam, Gabi, you two wanted to go play with Gammy right?” As Gamunbi mentioned his name, the shadow hound rose from the shadows on the ground, looking a lot larger than Choi recalled seeing it. But now it just sat on the spot, watching Gamunbi and the two girls patiently, though his tail is still wagging frantically. Gamunbi set the two girls down, who petted the shadow hound while it barked happily. Though for Maru… the little kid just stay at the same spot and stared.“Gam, Gammy?” He squeaked, and Choi is sure he’s quite frightened, seeing how much the dog had grown. His legs are shaking a little, but he still stay at the same spot, calling out his friend. Gammy gave a happy bark, and walked toward, towards Maru, who back away a little. But the dog sat down right in front of Maru, tail wagging a little faster.“Gammy…” Maru called out again, and the dog gave a happy yip. “You, you remembered me, Gammy!”Maru reached out hesitatingly, and Gammy bopped his hand with its nose, causing Maru to draw back his hand in shock.“Eeek!” At his surprised shriek, Gammy dropped its head to the ground, looking a little bit sad. “Ah, Gammy, I was just surprised, please don’t be sad… Um, this! Look, this is Eun Yul-nim’s stick, do you want to fetch it?”Immediately Gammy bounced to its feet, barking excitedly.“Um, go fetch!” Maru flung the stick as hard as he could, but only landed a few metres from him. Still, Gammy bounced happily after it, and retrieved the stick easily, placing it back down in front of him.“Meeep?” One of the girls, Garam, looked at the stick and meeped at Maru curiously while her twin watched cautiously.“Do, do you want to play too?” Maru asked shyly, and when the girl nodded, he picked up the stick and handed it over to her. She meeped, and flung the stick hard. Despite just being a little girl, she threw the stick so hard it knocked down a tree in its path. Maru just stared at her, stunned.“She’s a dragon too, both Garam and Gabi are dragons. Though they are still small, they are very strong. And they'll become even stronger the more they are loved.” Yeon Hwa grinned and explained. “Wow… that, that's amazing!” He watched as Garam passed the stick over to Gabi, who proceeded to toss the stick nearly as far as her twin, though not taking out any of the greenery unlike her. The impact when the stick landed caused him to jump though, and he ran for Choi. Choi quickly scooped him up and placed him on his lap.“They looked so cute, don’t they?” Yeon Hwa asked merrily, watching the girls play with Gammy with amusement. Both girls meeped praises to Gammy, petting and running their fingers through its fur, with their tiny tails wagging almost as happily.“My kid’s cuter, but what are they doing here?” Choi asked, resting his chin on Maru’s head.“Slave traders. Burnt the whole place down.” Yeon Hwa’s mood darkened immediately. “Humans are such filth.”“Humans are bad!” Maru added in, to Choi’s surprise. “Um, Yeon Hwa-nim, did you, did you kill all the humans?”“Yes, I did.” Yeon Hwa looked uncomfortable replying to those sparkling eyes, even more so when Maru cheered.“Dragons are the best!”“Hm, we’ll tell you more dragon stories when we get home, how about it, Maru?” Choi ruffled his hair, and Maru nodded vigorous./ Your kid has issues, Choi. Isn’t he human too? / Yeon Hwa asked, twitching./ Maru can hear us like this. But we found him like how you found those girls. / Choi shook his head. / No wonder he liked dragons so much. // Is that so… Poor kid. / Yeon Hwa reached out and ruffled Maru’s hair sympathetically, which only made the small kid blush red.“I take it that you gave Gamunbi the two girls to look after?” Choi asked.“I didn’t have any say in it.” Gamunbi shrugged.“It’s more like they adopted him into their family.” Yeon Hwa giggled. “I wanted to look for you too, you should really claim an area for your own and make it your own domain, Choi. You’re an elder, but you’ve never settled down in a place.”“I’m staying at Eun Yul’s now, and no, I’ve already my hands full taking care of this precious little kid. Go look for someone else if you find more kids to give away.”Yeon Hwa just pouted at him.“It’s not like I pick the people to care for these kids, they practically pick them themselves. Like this egg, want to try touching it?”“I’m not falling for that trick.”“Come on! Garam and Gabi are so sweet it makes the hard work here worth it, but I don’t want to carry this heavy ass egg back! It is tough enough hauling it over here! Just a touch, please?”“I refused. Ask Gamunbi.” Choi rejected again, shaking his head.“I tried. It didn’t hatch.” Gamunbi shrugged.“Um... the egg is very heavy?” Maru asked, reaching out and touching the egg. “Ah, heavy!”Yeon Hwa chuckled. “Maru, dragon eggs are our treasures, they weigh even more than a few adult dragons combined. Even I have difficulties carrying one around for far.”“Wow…” Maru petted the egg in amazement, each time Choi twitched.“And Choi, don’t worry about it, kids don’t have the ability to hatch eggs. The eggs know.” Her eyes then sparkled. “How about you try instead?”“Still no thanks.”“Choi, you aren’t here just to drink tea.” Gamunbi pointed out.“Just one moment.” With a snap of his fingers, Mano was forcefully summoned back, and scrambled to get his footing. Henry followed soon after, head swivelling around to take note of his new environment. Upon seeing the two, Gabi and Garam immediately ran to Yeon Hwa, and hid behind her.“An undead?”“Well, you see…”It took quite some explanation, but Choi recommended for Gamunbi to take in Mano (with a free undead thrown in), since he has twin girls now and he should get a doctor to take care of them too. Mano stayed surprisingly silent throughout, though his expression darkened at the mention of his teacher.“If I take him in, this will surely piss off Saeha.” Gamunbi pointed out.“He said he didn’t have a student like me.” Mano spat through clenched teeth. Gamunbi studied him intensely, and sighed.“I can’t let you die just like this. I’ll offer some of my lifeforce to you, but Mano, that’s your name isn’t it? Stop throwing a tantrum, you should return to your teacher soon.”“I’m not throwing a tantrum, Teacher is the one who threw me away first!” Mano glared at Gamunbi, and Choi felt it is up to them to settle the issue, he should be returning back soon.“Maru, you want to bring Gammy back with us?”“Ah Gammy-”The shadow hound leapt towards them when he heard his name, and gave Maru a big lick in the face before anyone could stop it. Maru fainted again, looks like it is still too early to return Eun Yul’s pet to him.
----- CHAPTER BREAK -----
To his surprise, Mano found that he is allowed to wander freely about in Gamunbi’s domain. Back in Baek Jung’s castle, the white haired ripper warned repeatedly that the only places he is allowed to be in is the area between his room and the library, and the dinning room. It suited him fine, even back in his… ex-teacher’s domain he stayed in the library from dawn to dusk. There is just to much to learn in libraries, and when he was young, he was praised for being so studious, though the praises soon tapered off no matter how hard he studied or tried to prove his skills. Even the impossible achievement of bringing the dead back to life got him kicked out of the second place he had grown to call his home...Mano scowled and shook his head. He had already cut ties with his teacher, and now he is staying in this domain that is too bright and too green, free to wander around as he desires. Even despite the threat he made towards the two dragon girls when they first met, though they do stay clear from him, often hiding behind Gamunbi or Yeon Hwa. But they seemed alright with Henry, perhaps due to the close age gap. Sometimes he would hear meeping noises, and the next Henry is dragged off by them. He ignored them, since Yeon Hwa is there. He has read enough on dragons to know not to piss her off, no matter how tempting it is. Though she doesn’t seem to be capable of being pissed off.The adult dragon is strange, being too friendly towards him. At least Gamunbi just nods as he passes. Yeon Hwa stops him, asks him how is his day, what is he doing, what new books he read, and many other questions if he just refuses to answer any of them. Staying at the same spot to care for an egg must be boring, but it is irritating to be stopped by her every single time he is remotely near the area, no matter where he is going.“So, so! How are things going for you?” The pink haired dragon asked cheerfully, not seeming to notice she had magically dragged him through several clearings just to get him there. Spitting out the grass he nearly swallowed, and failing to get the grass and mud stains out of his coat, he glared at her.“I nearly got dragged through a tree, what do you think.” He growled at her, but Yeon Hwa laughed merrily.“You’ll get used to it, look, Gabi and Garam loves it!” She waved as the two girls meeped in glee and zoomed past, and Mano caught glimpse of Henry with them.“They are dragons, they are practically indestructible when you are here.” Mano rolled his eyes. “How many times do I have to remind you-”“That you are human? But Gamunbi can put you back?” Yeon Hwa tilted her head quizzledly.“He might be able to but I’ll rather not die for that.” Mano snapped. “And if you have nothing useful to say leave me alone!”He got forced to take a seat at the table instead. If all dragons are like this, he would rather not meet another one again ever.“Here here, don’t be angry, I’ll give you some sweets alright?” Yeon Hwa just smiled and put a few candies in his hands.“I’m not a kid! Stop treating me like one!” He didn’t want to admit it, but he’d rather be back in Eun Yul’s castle, despite how much less freedom he has, at least he is left alone and not treated like a kid. But if Yeon Hwa is offering…“But if you want to give me something”, he ignored the hand petting him on his head, “I rather have a few dragon scales instead.”“Alright?” Yeon Hwa agreed without hesitation, and called out her tail. She picked a few scales and put them on his hand. “Be careful, they are quite sharp.”“What?!” Mano stared at the palm sized light pink scales in his hand. From his books, he read that dragon scales are very precious and extremely hard to obtain. But he is handed some without any questions asked…“Not enough? You need more?”A few more scales are added to the pile on his hand, and he stared at the smiling dragon.“... You. You are just too easily tricked.” He snapped, and almost immediately Yeon Hwa’s eyes turned watery.“But, but, but you asked, you asked for them...” She stuttered weakly, and the twin dragon girls rushed out from the surrounding plant growth and took Yeon Hwa’s side. Gabi, the quieter one, as Gamunbi had made him tell them apart if he wants to stay there, petted Yeon Hwa on the arm meeping comfortingly. Garam instead meeped loudly and angrily at him. Having been bitten by her once and needing Gamunbi to reattach his arm back although he is sure he could do it himself, he’d rather not have to live through that again.“Fine, I take back my words!” He glared at Garam, who meeped again loudly at him before hugging tightly to Yeon Hwa. Though Yeon Hwa is grinning now-“Gotcha >w<~!”Mano felt very much like flinging that dragon egg in her smug face right now.“But Mano, dragon scales aren’t really that rare.” Yeon Hwa explained while hugging and placing both girls on her lap. “If they are stolen forcefully, or extracted from our corpses, they lose most of their magical properties. The best way is to get a dragon to give you some willingly, but it isn’t easy to earn a dragon’s trust.”“Yeah yeah, and you gave me some- Wait you trust me!?” He stared at Yeon Hwa in shock.“Gamunbi took you in, didn’t he?”Seeing that bright, sparkling grin which flowers seem to blossom from, Mano twitched.He did laugh though when Yeon Hwa turned and accidentally sent Garam flying with a whack from her tail.“Aaaaaah?! Garam!!!”Which sent Gabi flying too, and he ran before he got hit by her tail.“Gabi! Wait Mano don’t run- Garam!!!!!”Mano twitched again as he watched Henry meep at the girls. Somehow, the kid he brought back to life learnt to communicate with them in their language, and even seemed to express some emotions around them, like smiling.“Your kid is growing”, Gamunbi explained.“Stop eavesdropping on my thoughts.” Mano groaned, almost resigned to having no privacy around. Gamunbi ignored him and continued.“Since you are sharing your life with Henry, when I gave you some of my lifeforce, it gets transferred to him too.” Gamunbi pulled out a tea set from thin air, and poured a cup of hot tea for him. “With your level of magic, you were only make him have the lowest level of consciousness, with his mind being asleep most of the time.”“And now, because he has some of your magic too”, Mano’s eyes lit up, a grin growing widely on his face, “Henry’s more capable of learning and thinking-”“No.” Gamunbi cut him off sternly. “Henry is kid. You will not force your own ideals onto him.”“So what if he is a kid, Henry is my kid, I brought him back to life!” Mano snarled through gritted teeth, fighting back against Gamunbi’s will being forced onto him. He slammed his fists on the table, glaring and challenging. “He is my kid, I’m free to mould him into whatever I want him to be!”“You don’t understand it, don’t you, Mano.” Gamunbi shook his head and released Mano from his will, and Mano collapsed to a pile on the floor, panting and struggling to catch his breath. “Sit.”Like with Yeon Hwa, his body moved on its own to return to his seat. Even though he tried to fight it, an order coming from someone much more powerful isn’t something he can fight against.“I won’t hit you, Mano.” Gamunbi looked at him sternly. “But I am fully capable of making you sit here and talk till you finally get it.”“And I am free to not listen to you-?!”“You will listen.” The blonde just smiled calmly, taking a sip of tea, looking amused as he tried to fight against his will.“Fine. I’ll listen to your damn speech!” Mano growled. “Stop trying to force your will on me!”“Oh?” That bemused voice makes him want to fling the teapot on that smug face, but he still couldn’t move. “But isn’t this what you are trying to do to Henry?”“It is different-”“This is the same.”“Henry is my kid-”“And you are my kid now, in my domain, and we go by my rules here.” Despite his tone, Gamunbi still poured another cup of tea for him and pushed it in front of him. Mano ignored it.“Henry should be learning something useful instead of just fooling around with those dragons.” He snapped, and to his surprise Gamunbi nodded.“Yes he should, but he is still a kid. He should learn, but more than that, he should be acting like a kid and playing and having fun. If he wants to learn instead, it should be of his own free will, not you dedicating what he should learn.”Mano stayed silent. Gamunbi’s words sounded logical, and they made sense. But he isn’t willing to agree with him, because that would mean admitting he is wrong."Do you remember Maru? The litte kid Eun Yul and Choi doted on?" Gamunbi asked. "Do you think he is happy?"The image of the little kid appeared in his mind. Maru is always following Choi or Eun Yul around, or hanging around when he's trying to teach Henry. He is a carefree child, with no worries in the world, and very much loved by the two. And he is definitely very happy."That's how little kids should be like, having no worries and all the fun they should be having in their lives." Red eyes stared into his, looking deep into his soul. "Just because you didn't have a childhood doesn't mean you should stop Henry from having one.""I did have a childhood!" Mano retorted back indinigently. "I-""Sure you had. But can you say you were happy?"The question hit him much harder than it should. Of course he was happy when Saeha took him in, he was elastic when someone noticed him and nursed him back to health and gave him a place to stay, but was he really... happy?Saeha praised him for being hardworking initially, but as time passed, it wasn't what that made him exceptional, but something that is expected from him. The praises stopped, and instead, each time he made a mistake, he is scolded, or even punished."I... I was happy.""If you really were, then you shouldn't be crying.""I, I am not crying!" Mano tried to glare back, but his sight is blurry and something is dripping down from his eyes. "I don't cry!""You are still a kid, Mano-""I'm already fifteen!""Yes, yes, you are still considered a kid at fifteen." Gamunbi waved away the protest. "Look Mano, you are too young to be having a child of your own, but no, throwing Henry to me isn't going to change anything. Since you brought him to life, he is your kid."He grabbed the teacup and flung it hard, as hard as he could, his eyes stinging. But Gamunbi dodged it nonchalantly, returning it to the table with a snap of his fingers.“Then what are you saying I should do!” He screamed, “if I’m too young then just take him, else just let me bring him up the way I want to!”“No to both.” Gamunbi took another sip calmly. “He’s your kid, you know well how it felt when your teacher discarded you, are you going to inflict that on him?”Those words cut deep into his heart. He wasn’t able to cry back then, too stunned in shock when his teacher just told him to leave, and never looked back at him. He grabbed onto those sleeves, but Saeha just shook him off.Teacher never once looked back at him. Never called out to him as he left. Never even cared when he ran, ran as far as he could to not feel the hurt cutting his heart up.“No. I won’t. I won’t be like teacher. I won’t ever throw Henry away!” Tears, tears rolled by his face, yes this time he really is crying, because his heart just hurts so much. “I…”“If you can cry, then you should know how your teacher treated you.” Gamunbi put his hands on his shoulders. “Then you should know how you wanted your teacher to treat you.”“How I wanted teacher to treat me…” Mano repeated after him. “I… what I wanted…”He gulped back his tears, rubbing his eyes.“I wanted to teacher… I wanted teacher to spend time with me, I wanted teacher to praise me, I wanted teacher to care for me, to not ignore me! I, that, that’s all I ever wanted, if teacher could just acknowledge me, and said I’ve done well, I just wanted to be useful to teacher!”“Good. Then you should know how to treat Henry now, right?” Gamunbi pulled him into a hug, and he didn’t have the strength left to push him away. Not that he wanted to.“You’re warm. Teacher never hugged me…”“I’m still here, I’ll help you along the way. You don’t have to shoulder this burden of looking after a child alone, you are a part of my family now. You won’t be alone ever again.”It is embarrassing to be crying like a kid, but for the moment Mano allowed himself to cry, allowed himself to feel loved.“Gamunbi, heel, heel, I said heel! Stop it!”Gamunbi looked over at Eun Yul trying to stop his overgrown puppy from licking him all over with little success for the past hour, while Choi poured another cup of tea for him.“That’s about what happened.” He took a sip, petting Maru on the head. The little kid hid under Choi’s cape and peeked out slightly to see Gammy, and shrunk back immediately.“You made him take care of Henry knowing well Mano is just fifteen?” Choi raised an eyebrow./ Wait what, you knew he’s just a kid and you wanted to eat him up?! / Eun Yul glared at him, or tried too, as Gammy kept licking him. “Gamunbi I said STOP IT!”“Look I wasn’t trying to eat him, Mano just needed someone to care for him, why doesn’t anyone believe that I don’t eat children?!?!” Choi complained exasperatedly, pouring a cup of tea for himself and downing it in one gulp.“I don’t even know why Eun Yul still let you take care of Maru.” Gamunbi smirked as he groaned. “But rather than a kid, Mano’s been treating Henry more as a little brother, and Garam and Gabi as his little sisters.”“Good to know they are getting along well.”“He took them out on many field trips, and by doing what he rather his teacher had done, he’s enjoying himself too, smiling more and acting like a kid.” Gamunbi smiled proudly at his achievement. “He’s still a brat at times, but he’ll grow up to be a good person.”“That’s good. He’s a kind hearted child, he just needs someone to care for him-”/ You wanted to eat him. /“Eun Yul I already said-”“Maru?” Gamunbi gently petted the little bundle hiding under Choi’s coat. “Garam and Gabi misses you, come visit some time.”“m’Kay!” The cheerful voice agreed, and Maru lifted the coat a little, but burrowed back inside when he saw that Gammy is still there and still looking like he is going to bite Eun Yul into half.When they reached Saeha's domain, it is empty. There isn't anything left, not even the library which he used to lived and sleep in. Seeing this place being devoid of all signs of life, the place he once called his home, Mano was overcome by something, falling to his knees, mouth agape not knowing what to do. All signs of life that was previously there was gone."Saeha had always been a wanderer, like Choi. He had never stayed in a place for long." Gamunbi said as he took a look around."But, but Teacher had always been here! He said he'll be here forever!" Mano crawled to his feet weakly. "He must still be somewhere around here!""He isn't." Gamunbi shook his head. "He had only stayed here because he said he 'had a student'. Maybe because you left, that he no longer had a reason to stay.""Teacher... stayed here because of me..." Mano muttered, “and since he threw me away, he didn’t need to stay here anymore…”“What would you do now, Mano.” Gamunbi placed a hand on his shoulder. He shrugged it off.“I guess, I’ll stay here. No. I want to stay here.”So it appears that even now, he still can’t let go of his teacher. No matter how much he had learnt, how much he grew, the image of the blonde doctor he had always looked up to never faded from his mind. Was it love? Respect? Obsession?“You are free to do as you please”, Gamunbi smiled, “but if you need help, you’ll know where to find me.”“As if I’ll need your help”, Mano retorted, but he smiled back. “I’m demanding some library books though, this place needs more of them.”“Yes yes, now if you’ll be more honest with your feelings-” Mano snorted, “and it looks like you won’t be alone.”With a poof Garam, Gabi, and Henry appeared.“Mano-oppa! You can’t even take care of yourself, and you want to stay here all on your own?!” The dragon girl admonished with her hands on her hips.“I’m your elder brother, I can jolly well take care of myself!” Mano complained, rolling his eyes at his overly bossy younger sister. “And I’m an adult now, I can live on my own. You three go back to Gamunbi’s place and play instead!”Immediately Garam got teary eyed, and Gabi pouted.“Mano-oppa!” Both girls sounded near to tears, and even Henry joined in sounding sad. Despite knowing well they are just pretending, it still stung a bit to hear them so depressed that he sighed.“Fine, you three can stay here.” Immediately Garam and Gabi high fived. “Oi. And Henry, didn’t you say you want to go out and see the world, you changed your mind?”“Nope, I still want to find my past, but I’ve got to support my sisters too.” He replied looking innocent, while Gabi petted him on the head.“Brat.”“I’ll visit whenever I pass by though, Mano-hyung, so don’t feel too lonely.”He’s sure if back then, he was the only one taking care of Henry, the undead won’t have grown to be so cheeky.“It isn’t fair that you get to travel on your own while I must have two irritating sisters around-”Both girls turned and glared at him, and he shut up.“Look, Mano-oppa, just yesterday you were so busy reading you forgot to eat your dinner. And the day before you fainted from exhaustion because you were so engrossed in practicing your newest technique, and before that…” Garam went on and on, listing down the various times they had to drag him to rest or to eat, while Gabi smacked him on the head each time.“Ouch, I get it, I GET IT! Gabi it hurts, stop it!” It didn’t get his younger sister to stop, and now Gamunbi is chuckling too.“Look, unlike you, I can actually take care of myself, ‘teacher’.” Henry stuck his tongue at him, eyes dancing.
Brat.
How many years had it been since he moved into the castle? Garam had become even bossier as she grew, even tossing out some unruly patients before he can do anything to them. They’d make good experiment subjects, he tried to argue, but a glare from her and he shut his mouth.“They were trying to hurt you, Mano-oppa!” She pointed at the large slash running down his arm. “I’ll make sure they won’t ever come near this place again!”With a huff she took her dragon form and soared out of the window, the strong gust sending all his notes and loose papers fluttering.“Please hold still, Mano-oppa.” Gabi held his arm firm, dabbing his wound with the ointment he created. “Garam is just worried about you.”“I know. And I can handle myself well enough, thank you very much.”Gabi just giggled.It is times like this when he misses Henry’s visit, the brat would bring back all kinds of strange medicinal herbs and they will analyse them for hours without being bothered by their twin sisters, unless he forgets about the time again and gets ranted on by Garam again. Even Gamunbi visiting is fine too, because his sisters would be busy updating their dad on how he was and leave him alone.“Ah, Maru-oppa is here to visit!” Sensing a visitor, Gabi quickly ran to welcome their guest in.Ever since he set up his clinic at the castle, Maru had visited often. His hair had become fully blonde since gaining more magic from his guardians, though he is still clumsy with utilising it. Though ever since Choi took off suddenly one day, Maru had been visiting more often. He doesn’t say much, still a very shy teen, often just listening to him squabble with his siblings with a lonely smile on his face.“-so Gabi no, Choi-nim still isn’t back yet- Hi Mano-hyungnim!” The teen waved happily at him, with Gabi constantly petting his hair looking just as happy. Both she and Garam said his hair is just so fluffy, and each time Maru looks so much like their pet instead of their friend. And behind him…“Oi, what are you doing here.” Mano glared at the Baek Jung, Maru’s overprotective guardian.“It, it’s alright, Eun Yul-nim-”Before he could say anymore, Garam reappeared, standing protectively in front of Mano.“Hi Garam! And Eun Yul-nim’s just here to visit- Eun Yul-nim please put your sword down!”“You’re just a little brat, you think you can stand against me?” The Baek Jung sneered, and Garam called out her claws.“I won’t know till I try.” She grinned back, ready to attack.“Garam, don’t lose!” Beside her, Gabi cheered for her sister, though is she really going to smack the Baek Jung with a book?“Garam!! Gabi!! Eun Yul-nim!!” Maru’s looking frantically around, not knowing who to stop first.Mano could only laugh at the unfolding chaos in front of him, though the door opened again, and someone else stepped through it.“What the hell is happening in my castle-”The voice stopped abruptly as their eyes met, and Mano froze. He had wished, he hoped so hard, since the day he left, and even when he returned, that they’ll meet again. Maybe it had been the same too, seeing those eyes widen with shock.“... Mano?” The person asked, and the room seemed to freeze too.“Teacher...”
----- CHAPTER BREAK -----
Maru thought this precious family he gained will last forever. Eun Yul and Choi promised to be with him forever, which meant they won’t leave him, ever. They will be together forever, the three of them, living happily ever after in Eun Yul’s castle.That was what he still continued to believe in, and held so preciously in his heart.But Choi ruffled his hair, wearing a sad expression that looked so out of place on his usually cheerful face.“I’m sorry Maru.”He didn’t return after that.Not for dinner that night, when it was the first time Eun Yul cooked for him.Not the following morning; Choi wasn’t there when he opened his eyes, unlike how he had always been there. The birds are chirping like usual, but he felt so alone.Not in the afternoon, when Eun Yul tried to teach him magic. He tried his best but wasn’t able to recreate those fanciful illusions Eun Yul called up.Not at night, when Eun Yul cooked again. The food is simple and nice, but he misses the savoury dishes Choi usually cooks. He ate the entire dish, even asking for seconds, not having had anything to eat since morning. Eun Yul looked frustrated, so he didn’t mention anything, eating silently.He kept sending messages to Choi. Choi didn’t reply any of them./ Choi-nim, where are you? // Choi-nim, when are you coming home? // Choi-nim, please, please answer me! /Days turned into weeks. There is still no sign of Choi. Eun Yul looked even more frustrated. He missed Choi too, Maru could see, so he didn’t say anything, just trying his best to learn whatever Eun Yul is teaching him, even though he wasn’t able to call up the beautiful illusions despite trying his best.A tiny flame, a small flower, like the one in Eun Yul’s hands. Maru tried his best to focus, tried to remember how Choi taught him, when he suddenly felt so weak, and his vision turned white. The next thing he knew Eun Yul is carrying him, and cooking something that smells nice. His stomach grumbled in agreement./ You’re up, Maru. / Eun Yul’s voice is always gentle towards him, but there is this tinge of disappointment, sadness? / You should have said you were hungry. /“It-” He tried to open his mouth to say something, but instead, tears started rolling down from his eyes. “It, I, but, but Eun Yul-nim, you, you are so sad too that Choi-nim hasn’t returned! I, I don’t want to make you sadder!”“You silly kid. Why would I be sad at the useless guy that made you cry?” Eun Yul snorted, but Maru could hear the sadness in his voice. It was like how Mano sounded whenever he talks about his teacher, and it hurts. He grabbed Eun Yul’s shirt, burying his face in it and trying to stop his tears from flowing, but it hurts so much.“I miss Choi-nim… Was it, was it because I’m not a good kid? So Choi-nim didn’t want me anymore?”Eun Yul kissed him on the head lightly.“No Maru, it isn’t anything about you. Choi just had something that he had to do, and he said he will return when it is settled.” Eun Yul let out a long, sad sigh. “What is he thinking of anyway, he know jolly well how much this will hurt you…”“Choi-nim…”He started to have more regular meals. After that Eun Yul made extra effort to remember to cook food for him, which he felt guilty about because Eun Yul doesn’t need to eat, yet he always eats with him. It reminded him of the times the three of them will eat together, but seeing how Eun Yul picked at his food without an appetite, it reminded him how absent Choi is, and it… hurts .“Maru, you want to visit Gamunbi?”Eun Yul asked him out of the blue, and he looked away from the spell book in shock.“Um… but Eun Yul-nim, you don’t get along well with Big Gammy-nim?”“Who cares about that self righteous guy, you made some friends there right? Would you like to visit them?” Seeing his hesitation, Eun Yul ruffled his hair. “Don’t worry, if Choi returns when we are not around, that bastard knows jolly well how to find us.”“Um… ok?”It is only when they reached the lush green forested area that Maru realised how stifling and choking Eun Yul’s castle had been. So much reminded him of Choi that it hurts just being there, and seeing Gamunbi and Mano and Henry and Garam and Gabi made him much happier. So much that he felt guilty that he didn’t need to think about Choi.Gamunbi had a long talk with Eun Yul, and he is sent to play with the kids. He doesn’t really know how to play with them, back in Eun Yul’s castle he is either studying or exploring, or lying in Choi’s empty room crying his eyes out as Choi still isn’t back. He just followed behind them as Mano brought them around and tried to teach them about the various plants, but most of them aren’t paying attention. Garam is plucking flowers, Gabi chomping on the plants when Mano isn’t watching, and Henry kept sneaking up and sticking some leaves in Mano’s hair. But Mano looked much happier than when he was staying with them, which made him smile a little.They were all called back for lunch, and seeing the dishes Gamunbi had cooked, he cried. Cried his eyes out. The full course meal is so similar to what Choi usually cooks for them, and it had been so long since he ate such a rich meal he couldn’t stop crying.“Eun, Eun Yul-nim, I, I miss Choi-nim, I really miss Choi-nim! When, when is he coming back! Why isn’t he back yet!”Eun Yul hugged him tight, and didn’t manage to give him any answers. Even Gamunbi shook his head, and told him it wasn’t his fault. He doesn’t know either when Choi will return, but Choi will definitely return for him.It isn’t the answer he wanted, and he couldn't stop crying. Till he is tired out, sitting at a corner on his own, not responding when Garam and Gabi tried to cheer him up with the pretty flowers they plucked.“Um… Big Gammy-nim…”Instead, he went looking for Gamunbi, who seemed to be having one of those silent conversations with Eun Yul.“Yes, Maru?” The dark skinned blonde bent down, a small smile on his face.“Can you, can you please teach me to cook?”“Ah?” Eun Yul looked surprised at his request, but Gamunbi nodded.“Because it reminded you of Choi, right?”The mention of the name cause his eyes to water.“Choi, Choi-nim always cooked lots for us, and we’ll eat together… If, if I can cook like you, we can have meals like when he’s with us, and Eun Yul-nim will be much happier eating too!”His tears made it tough to see, but Eun Yul picked him up and dabbed the tears away.“Maru, you silly kid.” He looked sad too, but Eun Yul still forced a smile. “I’ll look forward to your first meal then.”“I, I’ll try my best!”Slowly, apart from Gamunbi’s domain, Eun Yul began bringing him to other parts of the land. They still stayed in Eun Yul’s castle from time to time, till it got too suffocating that they had to get away again.They met more people, and Eun Yul’s back to his more normal wanting to chop up people if they rubbed him wrong. Most of them are horrible humans, still as disgusting as he remembered, even worse than the really nice monsters who adopted him. He’ll sit at a corner and wait till Eun Yul is done dicing them to pieces before they continued on their journey. He wanted to learn how to, as Choi had said before, Eun Yul was really masterful with his swords, but Eun Yul took his hands and told him:“Maru, you are just a kid. You don’t need to get your hands dirty. I’ll do all the killing for you.”And so he watched. Watched and remembered so one day when he grows up Eun Yul might teach him.There are times they met nice humans, they are rare seeing how most ran away when they see Eun Yul. The BaekJung, the bloody butcher, he heard them call out that name. But Eun Yul had been nothing but nice to him, it is sad that most just didn’t understand and tried to kill him on first sight. Those who didn’t, staying despite many running away in fear, they were mostly outcasts like him. Some stared at Eun Yul straight in the eye; after that they had lived through there is nothing left that they feared, not even death. Some are just resigned to their fate; if they die they die, if not they are as good as dead anyway.“Eun Yul-nim…” He tugged at Eun Yul’s sleeve, a question forming in his mind.“You are still too kind for your own good, Maru.” Eun Yul sighed before he could say anything.“But, but Eun Yul-nim, they, they were just like me, and you said the village is empty right?” He pleaded. Although he never returned to the hellish place he escaped from, he had no reason to, Eun Yul had constantly told him that the land is still empty, no one will hurt him, whenever he had nightmares about his past. So if it is still empty...“It will be tough, but if this what you want, I’ll help you, Maru.” Eun Yul ruffled his hair, eyes forever gentle when looking at him.It took time for the village to grow. Many are suspicious of Eun Yul’s intent, there are the usual troublemakers, but Maru tried his best to befriend them and help them. Although it is nerve wrenching to talk to strangers, some fierce looking, some bad tempered, some ignored him, he tried to see what he can do to help them. It helped take his mind off Choi, being busy reading up how human villages work and what he should do in his free time, and chatting with the various people in the village who slowly accepted him.Somewhere along the way, Eun Yul started travelling without him. He had grown, Eun Yul told him. He is no longer a child, and don’t need someone to watch over him everyday. As much as he rather Eun Yul stay by his side, he is too busy making sure everything is well in the village to spend as much time with Eun Yul as he liked. And even Mano is living on his own in his previous teacher’s castle, he can do it too. But Eun Yul promised, whenever Maru calls for him, no matter what time it is, where he is, he will get back immediately.There wasn’t really any instances when he had to do that, but he did call out to Eun Yul from time to time, and he’s always happy whenever Eun Yul replied.He tried the same with Choi, but Choi still didn’t reply. He tried not to cry./ Eun Yul-nim, Eun Yul-nim, Eun Yul-nim!! // … yes. // Look Eun Yul-nim they taught me how to baked a cake! It turned out fine! Do you want to try some? /“Maru.” Eun Yul sighed as he appeared behind him, arms wrapping his shoulders. “You have grown, but you are still just a little kid.”“Eun Yul-nim!” He turned back excitedly, but Eun Yul just took the entire cake from his hands and reappeared at the dining table.“Hm, not bad. Could taste much better.” Eun Yul cut a large slice of cake and gulped it down, though he looks strangely distracted.“Eun Yul-nim? Is anything wrong? Did you find any signs of Choi-nim?”Eun Yul snorted and shook his head.“Why did you think I’ll be looking for that bastard?! But no, there’s just no signs, no news about him, and I can’t even find Jiyul or Daewon to wring out anything from them about their useless son!” Eun Yul growled, stabbing one of the strawberries on the cake. “And no, nothing’s wrong. Just that Maru, you’ve grown up much.”Maru nodded. In many a few more years he might catch up with Eun Yul’s height. While waiting for Choi to return, he had grown from that child that Eun Yul constantly carried around to caring for one lively village. And yet there is still no news about him…“Have you decided? If you want to remain human, or-”“I want to be a vampire like you and Choi-nim.” He answered without hesitation. “I, I’ll wait. I’ll wait till Choi-nim returns. If I’m human I won’t have enough time. Even Mano-hyungnim chose to wait for his teacher too.”That was what he decided when he was young, after Choi left. No matter how long it takes, he will wait. But there is another reason he didn’t voice out. Eun Yul is still missing Choi, he knew. And if he is gone, as Eun Yul kept complaining how fleeting human lives are, Eun Yul will be sadder./ You are silly kid, Maru. / Eun Yul sighed again. / But since this is your choice, I’ll grant you this wish. // Thank you, Eun Yul-nim. /Between constantly studying and caring for the growing village, Maru had less time for himself. He still tries to befriend every single person who decided to stay in the village, and explain to them what the village is for. He is doing something useful, something fulfilling, but it can get very tiring. He knows he should be sleeping seeing how high the moon has risen, but he heard there is a suspicious new person in the village that he knew he wouldn’t be able to sleep in peace till he checked it out.He closed his eyes and focused, picking out pieces of the villagers’ whispers and thoughts. Although he had once hated his ability, it helped a lot for him to find out what is happening and what the villagers want.A tall stranger. Mysterious. Limping a bit. An eye patch, blind in one eye? Keeps to himself, just asking to stay for one night.He didn’t sound dangerous, but Maru decided he should still go and take a look. Though Eun Yul and even Mano tried to train him to master his new powers, he still couldn’t get the hang of it and had to walk to the inn the stranger stayed in.He wasn’t sure how he knew, he just knew .“Choi-nim…” He didn’t need to see the person, he immediately ran to that figure and hugged him tight, tears pouring from his eyes.“Ma, Maru?!”He shouldn't be crying, Choi often said his heart breaks when he cries, but he just can’t stop. Not after he waited for so many years, not when he wished and hoped for so many years, Choi is finally back, his Choi-nim is finally back./ You bastard. Do you know how much you made Maru cry. / Eun Yul growled, and pulled the two of them back to his castle. There was just the tiniest bit of relief in his voice, and he sounded a bit happy, but was it because he had been up since early morning? Maru felt his eyes close, despite struggling to stay awake. He hadn’t want to fall asleep, what if Choi disappeared again while he was asleep? He could only grabbed onto Choi’s arm as hard as he could in hopes that Choi will still here there in the morning.Choi looks terrible, but more surprisingly, he looks weak. A missing eye, a broken leg, even his magic was almost non existent. Choi looked at the young adult holding on to his arm, and then looked back up at him, confusion clear on his face.“Yes, this is Maru, you’ve been away so long that you can’t even recognise your own kid?!” He rolled his eyes, irritation growing in him.“He had grown so big…” Choi looked at Maru in wonder, reaching out hesitatingly to ruffle his hair. “The last I saw him, he was just this tiny little kid-”“Where the hell had you been?!” Eun Yul called out his sword, swinging it down with all his might. “Did you even know how much you hurt Maru?!”He brought it down, just inches from slicing Choi, before he realised something is wrong. Choi… wouldn’t be able to dodge that.Choi nodded, and looked away.“What, what the hell happened to you?! How, how did you become so weak!” He grabbed Choi by the collar, shaking him. The elder vampire had always been strong, an insurmountable opponent, but now he just felt so weak, so spent.“Mom’s domain is gone, Eun Yul.” Choi said in a soft whisper.“What!?” Eun Yul’s eyes widened.“Not just her domain. She and dad, they’re both gone.” Choi looked away, seeming more lifeless by the passing moment.Eun Yul could only stare at him in shock, unable to comprehend what Choi had just said. Both Jiyul and Daewon… gone? They are older and even more powerful than Choi, they can’t be gone right? But for Choi to end up in such a state, and he doesn’t really lie…“I… don’t have much time left too.” Choi added softly, stroking Maru’s head fondly. “I don’t even know why I’m here, maybe I just wanted to see you two again?”/ What, what do you mean by you don’t have much time left? / Maru’s quivering voice asked in his head. Despite being asleep, it seemed like he found a way to still be aware of his surroundings. / Choi-nim, aren’t, aren’t you coming back to us? Aren’t you staying here and not leaving ever again? /“Maru, stop eavesdropping on us.” Eun Yul admonished lightly, rubbing away the tears that started rolling from Maru’s shut eyes. /Eun Yul-nim said if I’m a good kid, I’m obedient, Choi-nim you’ll return to us! I listened to him, I did everything he told me to, I really was a good kid, so Choi-nim, please, please don’t leave us again, please! /The teary voice begged, and tears just kept falling, but Choi shook his head sadly.“Sorry, Maru. I missed you very much too. But I… I’m sorry…”/ Choi-nim?! CHOI-NIM!!!! /“Choi-nim!!”Choi quickly rushed to the little kid’s side when he suddenly jolted awake with the heart wrenching scream, and looked around frantically.“Maru, I’m here, Maru. What’s wrong?” Immediately Maru clung onto his shirt and started crying, bawwing his eyes out. He frowned, patting Maru on the back. “Did you have a nightmare?”/ Something worse than a nightmare. / Eun Yul spoke to him in his mind, sounding more solemn than he had heard the younger vampire speak. / It feels like he’s unconsciously dream seering. // Dream seering ?/ Choi asked, and prodded Maru’s mind. But the little kid is so affected by whatever it was that he wasn’t able to pick anything up./ Or he had picked up some message. I’ll show you later. Just make him stop crying ./ Eun Yul sounded strangely distracted, although he is usually the one to try comfort Maru whenever he cries, no matter how much he dislikes it. It must be something bad./ I’m trying to! // Try harder. // Why not you try too! / But Eun Yul didn’t answer after that.“Maru, I’m here, don’t cry please, Maru.” He hugged Maru tight, but somehow, Maru just kept clinging on to him and refused to let go or to stop crying. “I’m here, I’ll protect you from any nightmares, nothing will hurt you again, alright?”Despite his words, Maru kept crying till he finally fell back to sleep again, still grabbing hold tight to his shirt refusing to let go. With no choice, he carried the little kid in his arms to Eun Yul’s room./ What…? / He watched the scene Eun Yul showed him. / There, there’s no way mom or dad will fall?! // You are the one who said it, you can’t even believe yourself? / Eun Yul frowned, it seemed that he couldn’t believe it too. / Something that is strong enough to kill the both of them, and to turn you into such a pathetic thing... // As much as I’ll rather not believe it, but… I think I’ll go check it out with mom- / Choi suddenly stood up with a jolt. / I, I can’t find her, I can’t sense mom!? // What!? / Eun Yul immediately called out his blades as Choi pulled them to his mother’s domain, but instead of the green plains they had previously visited, it was a flaming wasteland./ MOM?! DAD?! / Choi screamed for his parents, but there was only his voice echoing down the vast emptiness where her domain once was./ They’re gone. All gone. / A teenage voice spoke out softly./ … Maru? / Eun Yul asked, looking around trying to see the source of the voice. Choi looked down, and the kid in his arms is no longer there./ There’s only Eun Yul left, and they’ll take him too. / The voice continued, breaking into soft sobs. / Please, I don’t want to lose him too, please... /
Please help me.
The plea echoed in their minds, and is gone in a suddenly, with the two of them back in Eun Yul’s room as if they had not left. Choi looked down, Maru is still sound asleep in his arms./ Or Maru’s just that desperate in the future to haphazardly send out these pleas for help? / Eun Yul asked, ruffling his kid’s hair, a worried expression on his face./ … mom? / Choi asked again, and this time, Jiyul answered./ Yes love? You sound worried, anything happened? // Ah mom, this… we’ll come over tomorrow, would it be fine with you? // Tomorrow? No problem, we’ll cook up something nice for you. // Thanks mom, you take care. // You too, love. // So Jiyul is fine, for now. / Eun Yul let out a sigh of relief. / And you’re going to call for a gathering. // My precious little Maru is asking for help, and you’ve heard him cry too. I can’t just ignore this, I’ll rather not make him cry like this again. / Choi shook his head, hugging Maru even closer. / We’ll speak to mom first, and then... / Please help me. He could still hear that heartbreaking cry for help from his kid, and he clenched his fists. He’s never breaking Maru’s heart like this again, he’ll make sure of it./ And then, I’ll call for a gathering. /
----- CHAPTER BREAK -----
Choi knew he should be resting, but after the horrific images he witnessed, he couldn’t. Maru, precious little Maru, crying and missing him, the image stung him horribly that he’s soon back in Maru’s room.Maru’s sleeping soundly, all traces of the nightmare forgotten. He sat down on the bed, and ruffled Maru’s hair. What could have happened to make him leave behind this precious treasure? Maru is still a small kid, he is still growing up. He needs all the love he can get, especially seeing how his life was before they found him. How could he bear to leave Maru behind and disappear?It irked him that he didn’t know the reason why. The dream Eun Yul caught didn’t show much, other than how much Maru had been hurting, how much he had been missed. It showed him battered and weak, to the point of almost vanishing, but he didn’t know why. It would have been much easier if he knew, but at the very least, he knows never, ever to leave Maru’s side./ Oi, go and sleep already. I’m keeping an eye on Maru. / Eun Yul called out to him. Usually, the silver haired vampire will chase him away from his kid by any methods available, mostly with a sword to the gut; it is rare he is gentle like this./ Just tonight, let me stay here. / He laid down beside Maru, stroking his hair, watching the gentle raising and falling of his chest. / It hurts, it hurts so much to know I’ve hurt him so badly, I just... // Yeah, yeah, and then you’ll make it every night after this. / He could feel Eun Yul rolling his eyes through their link, and smiled a little. / Just tonight, any more I’ll chop you into pieces. // Maybe? / He laughed as Eun Yul tried to stab him through their link. / But say… Eun Yul, you want to join us? I doubt if Maru ever had the chance to sleep together with his parents like this. // … I’m only doing this for Maru. / Eun Yul appeared in the room, complaining./ I know. /For the past few days, Maru had been waking up as the flock of birds from the surrounding forest flew off at dawn, but for today, it is a very different sound that woke him.Breathing.Rubbing his eyes, he noticed a hand holding his, and another wrapped over his body. He nearly called out in surprise when he realised it is Choi holding on to his hand, and Eun Yul with his hand wrapped protective around him.The breathing sounds came from them, and he could only stare in surprise at the two vampires. Eun Yul and Choi let him have his own room, and usually he will only see them after he had woken up. But now… they are in his bed, being so close to him…He pinched himself hard.
Owwie…
It hurts, which means that he isn’t dreaming, that Choi and Eun Yul are really there with him. The two powerful beings who cared much about him are just in his bed, sleeping with him, like… like a family.He pinched himself on his cheek again, just to make sure this isn’t a dream./ You aren’t dreaming, Maru, stop hurting yourself. /Another arm wrapped around him, and Eun Yul hugged him close, sounding very sleepy.“Eun, Eun Yul-nim! Good, good morning!”/ Still early, go back to sleep. We won’t be going anywhere. / Eun Yul admonished lightly, and he’s soon asleep again.Even though Eun Yul told him to sleep, but Maru remained wide awake. He feels so safe and snug in Eun Yul’s embrace, and… Choi’s squeezing his hand too./ If you like it, we can always sleep like this. Every night. / Choi sounded amused, and his heart almost skipped a beat.“Can, can I? Really?” He asked softly, not wanting to wake Eun Yul up./ Of course, Maru. Eun Yul and I, as long as you want it, we will grant you any wish you desire. /That moment, Maru felt that he was the world’s happiest kid, being so loved and cherished.“Thank, thank you, Eun Yul-nim, Choi-nim! I love the two of you!”/ Damn it, why does Maru have to be so sweet?! // I don’t know, but I’m definitely never, ever leaving him again. /When Choi woke, Eun Yul is still hugging Maru tight. He let go of the tiny hand he held in his, and ruffled Maru’s hair. The little child still deep asleep, and he seemed so peaceful, so at ease./ I’ll fucking kill you if you dare to leave. / Eun Yul warned, his killing intent snaking around his neck./ Good to know you love me so much. / He grinned, and those beautiful cyan eyes burst open and glared at him./ You want Maru to cry because you are not there when he wakes?! // Point, but how am I going to cook anything for breakfast like this? // Your mom promised food. / Eun Yul snorted, and stroked the little kid’s hair when he shifted a bit in his sleep. / And if it isn’t ready by the time we reach there, we’re chopping you up for breakfast. // Yes, yes, I’ll whip something up somehow if that’s the case. // Then shut up and sleep! If you wake Maru up before sunshine I’m kicking you out. // You’re so cruel, Eun Yul. /He laid back down on the bed, but didn’t fall asleep. Maru is still deep in a dreamless sleep, with a happy smile on his face. He prodded his mind, there isn’t any hint of the last night’s nightmare, which is good. The little kid shouldn’t be remembering traumatic stuff like this, especially after what he lived through in the past./ Stop staring at Maru and sleep. That’s creepy. // It’s not my fault that he’s just such a sweet little kid- // SLEEP! /He tried to swallow back his laughter, and planted a soft kiss on Maru’s cheek.
Sleep well, Maru.
Holding the small kid’s hand, he closed his eyes, and for the moment nothing else mattered.“Wake up, Maru.”Hearing Eun Yul’s voice, Maru climbed up from the bed and rubbed his eyes.“Good, good morning Eun Yul-nim…”Eun Yul is there, smiling at him, ruffling his hair. And Choi is there too, holding his hand, lying on the bed beside him.“So, it, it wasn’t a dream?” He muttered to himself softly, looking from Eun Yul to Choi in wonder.“Of course it wasn’t a dream”, Eun Yul rapped his head with his knuckles lightly. Choi let go of his hand, and pulled him closer into a hug.“I said it didn’t I? We’ll sleep together, we’ll wake together-”/ You wanted to get up first to cook breakfast!? /“-and it will be this way forever and forever.”Wonder-filled eyes stared at him, and he bent down to kiss Maru lightly on the forehead. Immediately the little kid blushed bright red, the happy grin still bright on his face./ Let go of Maru. Now. // He’s just such a lovely darling how can I just let him go like this- Hey, that’s cheating! / He frowned when Eun Yul snapped his fingers and Maru appeared in his arms.“Ah, Eun Yul-nim!” That sweet child smiled at Eun Yul too, and Eun Yul looked as if his heart melted again.“Maru.” He sighed, his voice soft and gentle. “I’ve said it before, but please… Just tell us what you want, anything. Even this, to sleep together and wake together, this is such an easy thing to grant to you, if you have just asked we could have given to you so much earlier.”/ Eun Yul, I don’t think this is Maru’s fault? He never had a family love him, he couldn’t have known that he wanted this. / He nudged Eun Yul gently, as the small kid looked so confused in his arms./ But still! / He could kind of understand Eun Yul’s frustration, but for Maru to voice out what he wants, it might take a lot more time.“Um… this…” Maru squeaked from Eun Yul’s arms. “Um, Eun Yul-nim, can you, can you please don’t fight with Choi-nim so much-”“No.”/ That defeats the purpose of asking him, doesn’t it? /It must have taken all of Eun Yul’s willpower to not stab him that very moment.Eun Yul ended up making him come up with a list of at least ten things that he wants. What he wants…Maru couldn’t think of anything much, other than he wants to be with Eun Yul and Choi forever. He loves the two of them dearly, as long as he is with the two of them that is enough for him. He doesn’t really need anything else.But Eun Yul rapped him lightly on the head and said that doesn’t count, because they won’t leave him, ever. And they are going to visit Jiyul for breakfast, he can slowly think on his way there.“What I want…” Maru muttered to himself, before realising Choi had taken his right hand. “Choi-nim?”On his other side, Eun Yul took his left hand.“Eun Yul-nim?”He looked from one to the other, both hands warm. Choi smiled at him, and Eun Yul ruffled his hair. There is this strange warmth in his heart, and it felt so right. He couldn’t help but beam in happiness, letting the two lead the way to Jiyul’s place.“Eun Yul-nim, Choi-nim, can, can you two please, please hold my hands when we visit again?” He asked, his eyes sparkling. Eun Yul gave him a very strange look./ ’Can you please’? I rather he say ‘I want you to’?! / He complained to Choi./ I know, Eun Yul, I know. /“Of course we will. Not just when we visit Jiyul, wherever we visit, we’ll hold your hands, I promise.” But then Eun Yul smiled at him, his eyes so gentle that Maru can’t help but look forward to the next trip together./ That’s really sweet of you, Eun Yul. / Jiyul chuckled, calling for them from her place. / The food’s ready, don’t take too long. // If you run for the food now I’m sure Maru will understand- // Hell I’m letting go of his hand! /Daewon scared Maru when they met; the fierce, guff looking man took one look at Maru, and immediately the small kid hid under his coat, shaking.“Maru, don’t be afraid. This is my dad, he’s a really good cook.” Choi chuckled and tried to coax the small child out, but Maru refused to leave the safety of his coat.“Hi, hi Choi-nim’s dad”, Maru squeaked from under his coat, his voice shaking.“Daewon, leave this to me, you said there are dishes that you wanted to cook right?” His mother petted his father on the back, who left looking disappointed. Only a few moments after his father left did Maru step out, wobbling, and Choi quickly hugged him in his arms despite Eun Yul’s glare.“Sorry…” Maru’s voice is still shaking, as he stared at the direction Daewon left./ You’re used to it, Choi, but your father’s aura can be… overpowering for such a young kid. He was looking so forward to meeting your little kid too. / Jiyul petted Maru on the head, who is still apologising softly./ Sorry mom, I guess I didn’t think about that. // It’s fine, love. /“You don’t need to apologise for that, Maru.” She led them to the dining table. “Here, we’ve cooked a lot of food, is there anything you want to eat?”Maru shook his head, but before he can say anything, Eun Yul took him from Choi’s arms and set him down on a chair. In an instant, a mountain of food is heaped onto his dish.“Eat up, you are still so tiny”, Eun Yul ordered, while filling up his own plate.“Eun, Eun Yul-nim! I, I can’t finish so much food!” Maru frantically protested, turning to him. “Choi, Choi-nim, please, please help!”/ Why do you have to be so cute, Maru? / Choi sighed, and he could hear his mother chuckle.“Don’t worry about it, Maru, if you can’t finish your food, Eun Yul can always help to finish it.” He ruffled Maru’s head, looking at Eun Yul. The silver haired vampire is just too busy stuffing himself with food to agree./ I’ll leave you three to enjoy your meal, we can talk after you have eaten. // Thanks mom! // So, what is it that you wanted to talk about? / Jiyul asked as they watched as Maru tried to play with a puzzle box she dug out. / Since you took him over, this has something to do with Maru, right? // Yes mom, and this… Eun Yul caught this dream that Maru had. / Choi explained, trying to hold himself back from solving the puzzle for the little kid./ A dream? // Maru sent it himself, just take a look at it. / Eun Yul shared the memory unwillingly. It hurt to view it again, and Choi hugged Maru closer, promising himself over and over again never to leave his precious little kid. But as he watched his heartbroken kid wish for him to return over and over again, tears refused to stop falling from his eyes.“Ah, Choi-nim? Are you, are you crying?! Choi-nim!!”Hearing Maru’s frantic cries, he tried to smile. Tried to say he is alright. But he wasn’t able to do any of that, and could only hug Maru tighter in his arms./ What… how, how could this happen?! / His mother asked, and Eun Yul answered for him./ Hell if we know. But it’s sent out by Maru, that’s all that matters. / Eun Yul snorted. / Choi said you might know anything about it, or find out anything we missed. // An opponent so strong that both Daewon and I can’t handle, and leave you in such a state… but Choi, if anything, in the future try to say what happened to you? It’ll be of more help. // Mom. I’ll rather this doesn’t ever happen. / He still couldn’t stop his tears, his heart hurting too much to reign in his emotions./ Stop scaring Maru, you’re making him freak out. // Sorry... /Rolling his eyes, Eun Yul summoned his kid back into his lap. “Don’t bother about Choi, he just remembered something sad.”“Um… alright?” Maru still turned towards him worriedly. “Choi-nim, um, it, it’ll be fine, so please, please don’t feel sad!”/ Sorry, I, just give me a moment alone... / He ruffled Maru’s hair, and took off, hopefully to find a place and clear his mind./ And anything else you know about this. / Eun Yul asked. Maru is still looking up every now and then waiting for Choi to return, while clumsily shaking the puzzle box and trying to get it to open./ Hm, I haven’t really heard of any hunts, but for sudden disappearances, I can think of two. / Jiyul rubbed her chin. / A very long time ago, before I was turned, there was a very powerful vampire. // A powerful vampire. / The mention of a powerful opponent excited him, but Jiyul just laughed./ From what I've heard, you’ll be trashed even before you try to pick a fight with him, Eun Yul. / Jiyul shook her head. / But he vanished one day, and was never seen or heard of again. // What a waste. / Eun Yul grumbled. / There just isn’t enough strong people to fight nowadays. // Haven’t you already settled down? You already have Maru, you shouldn’t be picking so many fights. // Right, and be bored to death. / Eun Yul signed and ruffled Maru’s hair, the little kid now rolling the puzzle box around, running out of ideas how to open it up.“Eun, Eun Yul-nim, I, I’m still trying!” Maru’s near to tears, but there’s still determination in his eyes.“I know.” He smiled as Maru kept on rolling the box./ You don’t look too bored now, / Jiyul mused, only to get a glare from him./ How did that vampire vanish anyway. There must be some reason why we’ve never heard of them. // I don’t know much, but around the same time, an entire village of humans with special abilities is wiped out. There were rumours of a war before that, but they were just rumours. // Which means... /“-those humans took him and themselves out?” Choi reappeared, looking much more composed and wearing his usual smile. Maru immediately dropped the puzzle box and hugged him./ Oi Choi. / He glared, and at least Choi grinned a bit sheepishly back at him.“Welcome back, Choi-nim! And um… humans?” The little kid looked up at him curiously.“We’re just discussing something, Maru. Here, you still need help with the puzzle box?” Choi asked, but Maru shook his head, turning back to the puzzle.“Humans are bad people.” He said softly as he rattled the box. “They are all bad people.”“But there are nice humans too?” Jiyul petted him on the head. “Like you, you are a nice human, Maru.”Maru looked up at her and shook his head.“I’m not a human, Jiyul-nim.” Maru chirped to her surprise. “I’m a sub-human, a freak?”Immediately Choi hugged him tight, while Jiyul stared at him, horrified.“You are not a freak, Maru, much less a sub-human. You are a normal human kid.”“Because I can hear things very well, they said I’m not a normal human. That’s why they did those disgusting things to me.” Maru shook his head, and dropped the puzzle box on its side. That must have triggered the mechanism for the box, and it sprang open. “Ah, it opened!”He took it to show to Choi proudly, but Choi and Jiyul are gone from their spots.“Choi-nim? Jiyul-nim?”Eun Yul sighed and put Maru in his lap.“Eun Yul-nim?”“Maru, you don’t just say things like that.”“Ah?”/ Mom, you’re going to destroy the plains like this. / Choi looked worriedly as the plains rumbled; his mother fuming and barely being able to keep her temper in check./ Just what, what did Maru had to live through! / She growled, sending another rumble down the plains. The grazing herds are stempeding in fear, things might become really messy if she doesn’t calm down soon./ Jiyul. / His father appeared by her side, and placed his hands on her shoulders. / You are tearing this place apart. /His mother sighed, those words stopped her rage from overflowing. Her eyes are still burning though. / Choi, you’ve never told us how you found Maru. /Choi nodded./ He was escaping from some humans, and hid in Eun Yul’s castle. Those humans aren’t around anymore, I made sure they won’t be hurting Maru again. // And I thought he was just a lovely street kid you two took in… The poor kid... // What’s why mom, please, please tell us all you know that can help us. Maru’s already suffered much enough, I really, really don’t want to make him get so hurt again. He really doesn't deserve this... // I’ll try, dear, I’ll try. // You might want to check out Cheo Yong. // Dad? // He was turned by that vampire, and he vanished too. // I will, thanks dad. And I’m calling for a gathering later. // A gathering? It’s been such a long time since anyone called for one, even in our era we never had the need for one. // I know. But the others should know about this, especially Gamunbi, he just got four adorable kids to take care of. // Four kids? My, we surely have to visit him one day. // But thanks for the food, mom, dad. We should be going, Eun Yul’s already starting to raid your kitchen. // Take care. // I will. You two take care too. /Maru fell asleep early, having tinkered with the puzzle box for hours trying to put it back. Jiyul lent it to him to play with, saying he can return it after he put it back. It kept Maru distracted the entire day without worrying about where Choi went. Not that he didn’t ask, but the small kid easily accepted that Choi is busy somewhere else and focused on the box instead. And now, he’s all tired out, lying in bed asleep with pieces of the puzzle box scattered around him. Eun Yul shook his head and gathered those pieces, putting them on the bedside table./ Ah, Maru’s asleep. /Choi appeared suddenly, collapsing on the bed./ Wha- what the fuck Choi?! You look like you’re half dead. // It… wasn’t too good. / Choi sighed. / Sure, they said they will keep an eye out for whatever this threat is, but to them, this threat is still non existent... // Why am I not surprised, your era’s just full of useless bastards. // Most who kicked your ass, Eun Yul. But- Hmpfh!? /Feeling irritated, he pulled Choi over by his collar, kissing him hard and shutting him up./ Shut up and rest already, or you need me to help you with that too?! /Choi didn’t reply, forcing him down and kissing him back hard. He’s hungry, Eun Yul could feel it, biting and sucking hard./ You’ve been too busy taking care of little kids to take care of yourself huh. / He bit back a gasp as Choi bit on his neck, drawing blood. Nimble fingers quickly undid his collar, and his nightshirt is half open-“Ah?”Crap. Wide orange eyes stared at them in shock.“Maru-”No, it wasn’t shock, more of… anger? Those small hands grabbed a pillow, and Maru started battering Choi with it.“Let, Let go of Eun Yul-nim! LET GO OF EUN YUL-NIM!” Maru’s screaming, hitting Choi over and over again, and the black hair vampire's just staring at in shock. “How, how can you hurt Eun Yul-nim!”“Maru-”“You’re a bad person, you’re evil, I hate you!”Even though they are not directed at him, those words stung, especially coming from Maru’s lips. The hurt is clear in Choi’s eyes, and he took a step back, and vanished. But Maru’s still dragging that pillow and flinging it hard at that spot, his body is shaking, tears rolling down his face.“It’s alright now, Maru.” Eun Yul reached to comfort Maru, but the small kid flung himself onto him, hugging him tight.“It’s, it’s alright now, Eun Yul-nim, I chased him away. He won’t hurt you anymore!” Those orange eyes burned with hurt and determination, though tears are still rolling non-stop down his eyes. “I won’t, I won’t let Eun Yul-nim be hurt by that monster!”So he got downgraded from ‘Choi-nim’ to ‘monster’ huh? And for Maru to be so hurt by that, and think Choi is hurting him-The first time they met, when he found the quivering kid in his castle. Choi drew out his memories to know how he got there, and those vile memories he had tossed out of his mind because they disgusted him so much. The memory of a small, scared child being pinned down by those disgusting creatures, struggling but unable to escape, all the deprived acts committed on the small child-Is that what Maru think is happening to him?“Maru, you think Choi is forcing himself on me?” He asked, ruffling Maru’s hair. He could look into Maru’s memories again to be sure, but he’d rather watch his kid cry for Choi over again than to watch that.“I’ll protect Eun Yul-nim, I’ll protect Eun Yul-nim!” Maru repeated, the tears still not stopping.“Yes, yes, you will, Maru." He hugged Maru close, and that got the little child to calm down a little. "But look, do you think I’m weak?”Maru looked at him, confused, and shook his head.“Good. Then if Choi’s forcing himself onto me, you think I won’t fight back?”There was a longer pause, and Maru shook his head slowly.“But Eun Yul-nim…”“Whatever those wretched humans did to you, it’s wrong.” He sighed, petting Maru’s head. “Not the act itself, but forcing themselves on a child like you. But when it’s between two willing adults, it’s something normal.”“It… is normal?” Maru is looking so confused he can’t help but chuckle.“Yes, Maru. You’ll understand it when you grow up.”The small kid's expression turned from confusion, to somewhat understanding. “So, so Choi-nim isn't... trying to hurt you? He, he's not trying to force himself onto you?” "No, Maru, he isn't. In fact, we're almost always like this a few hundred of years ago?" "Ah...?"“I think Choi vanished from existence when you screamed you hated him.” He teased gently, though maybe he shouldn’t, seeing how horrified Maru became.“Ah!? Then I, I got to, I got to apologise to Choi-nim!! I, I was wrong about him!” The small kid is looking around, almost back in tears again./ Oi Choi, you better get the hell back now, Maru’s going to cry- /“Maru.” Even before he finished his words, Choi reappeared on the bed, immediately retrieving Maru from his arms and hugging him tight. “I’m sorry, Maru. If you don’t like I won’t do that again. I… Just don’t hate me, please?”“Choi-nim…” Maru looked tearily up at Choi and burst into tears. “I, I’m sorry too, Choi-nim! I, I thought you were hurting Eun Yul-nim! I, I don’t hate you at all Choi-nim!!”By the time Maru finally stopped crying, Eun Yul’s already asleep, stuffing a pillow on his ear to drown out the noise. He still had one hand holding on to Maru’s though. Maru is still hiccuping and apologising, having cried too much. His heart still hurts, but at least he knows Maru doesn’t hate him.“But… Choi-nim, you really won’t hurt Eun Yul-nim? You really won’t force yourself on Eun Yul-nim?” Those round eyes stared at him worriedly.“I won’t. I swear I won’t, Maru.” It hurts that Maru didn’t trust him that much, but knowing what Maru had been through in the past, it made sense why Maru is hesitating.“m’Kay…?”/ You might as well tell him to watch the next time so he doesn’t need to worry so much. // Eun Yul?! Are you out of your mind?! Maru’s just a kid?! // Your issue. Now you shut up and let me sleep?! /“We’ll talk more in the morning about this, let’s sleep for now, alright, Maru?” He petted Maru on the head, and the small kid nodded. The gathering had taken enough out of him, but it seems like the following morning will be worse.
----- CHAPTER BREAK -----
Maru watched as Choi cooked breakfast. Although he didn’t say anything, he looked as if he is talking to Eun Yul in his mind, or even arguing with him. Eun Yul is smiling smugly, but somehow, Choi who is usually smiling and very nice to him, feels like he will take the frying pan and smack Eun Yul in the head with it at any moment.“Um, Choi-nim?” He got up to Choi’s side and tugged his pants. “Choi-nim?”“Yes, Maru?” Choi bent down and smiled at him, popping a potato nugget into his mouth. “Ah, don’t worry about that, Yul and I are just discussing some… stuff.”At the dining table Eun Yul sounds like he is holding back his laughter, while… the flying pan just shot past the top of his head towards Eun Yul?! Eun Yul dodged that, and it smashed into the wall with a clung that rang throughout the castle.“Cwoi-mim!!” Maru frantically tried to drag Choi further away from Eun Yul, while trying to swallow the piece of potato nugget.“Chew and swallow first before you talk, Maru.” Choi’s smiling at him and picking him up from the floor, and hugging him close. “You don’t want to choke on your food.”Maru nodded, though why does it seem that the two are still glaring at each other? It didn’t feel like they are angry, but Choi took out another frying pan and Maru is sure before breakfast starts a few more will get destroyed.Matters didn’t improve any bit during breakfast, where Maru is sure a lot of unspokened words are being exchanged.“Eun, Eun Yul-nim please, please eat more?” He’s shaking Eun Yul’s hand, to stop him from glaring at Choi, and Eun Yul grinned at Choi with a smile that is all teeth before turning to him.“You’ll understand when you are older, Maru.” Eun Yul’s voice sounded almost a purr, sounding much like the wildcats in the village about to pick fights. Maru gulped and nodded, trying to focus on his own meal instead. He very much preferred the fights where Eun Yul just try to stab Choi with his sword, though he rather they not fight at all…After breakfast Choi told he to go play first, they need to clean up. It is strange since usually with a snap of his fingers everything’s all clean and put away, but seeing how they have been around each other since morning… are they going to fight?!“Choi-nim, Eun Yul-nim, please, please don’t fight!!” He pleaded, hugging onto Choi’s leg refusing to let go. Though… is Eun Yul laughing?Choi bent down and made a strange expression on his face.“Maru, we just need to settle some… stuff.”Now Eun Yul’s choking on his laughter, and Maru looking between the two, confused.“Just go play for a bit, I’ll talk to you later, alright?”“But Choi-nim-”“I’ll read you two stories later, alright?”The mention of stories and his eyes lit up. Choi has a very soothing voice and he likes it when Choi reads him bedtime stories, and he likes Eun Yul’s voice too. If Choi says it is alright, and he’ll read stories to him later… it should be alright, right? He slowly let go of Choi’s leg.“Choi-nim, please, please don’t kill Eun Yul-nim, alright?”Somehow Eun Yul laughed even louder.Maru ended up staying in the library and practised his reading. It is kind of lonely that Mano and Henry are no longer there, and he hopes Mano is happy at Gamunbi’s place. Or maybe his teacher had gotten him back, maybe he can ask Choi about it later. Eun Yul might not know anything about that seeing how he doesn’t get along with Gamunbi…He tried to focus on the book instead of thinking about the two. Choi had been teaching him for weeks, but he still gets the letters mixed up from time to time, and he still can’t read even the first sentence of the kiddy book Eun Yul dug out. Mano could read entire books all on his own, and even teach him and Henry about medicine; he looked so dislainly at him when he said he can’t read. Although Choi said it is alright, he can take his time to learn, he wants to make Choi and Eun Yul proud of him and read to them too. Huffing, he tried to focus on recognising the letters dancing in the book.“Choi-nim… Eun Yul-nim…” Maru called out softly as he is starting to see stars floating in his eyes. Words are just too tough to read, and he is thinking of taking a break.“Yes, Maru?” Suddenly, arms wrapped themselves around him, and Choi’s voice rang out beside his ear. Choi sounded so much more relaxed compared to the morning?“Choi-nim?” Maru turned back and shrieked in shock when he saw Choi. His neck is all bloody, with sharp slashes on it? “Choi-nim, what happened to your neck?!”“My neck?” Choi reached up and smiled after a pause. “Ah, I was just taming a wild cat, don’t worry about it.”When Choi lifted his hand, his neck was no longer bloody and ripped.“A, a wild cat?! Choi-nim, what happened?! Why are you fighting with a wild cat?! What about Eun Yul-nim, is he injured too!”Despite his frantic squeaking, Choi just laughed and patted him on the head.“Don’t worry, Maru, it is not an issue now.”Why are Choi’s eyes twinkling? But since Choi said it is alright, he hoped it is really alright.“But, Maru, can we talk for a while?” Choi hugged him, resting his chin on the top of his head.“Um, alright?” Choi’s cheerful tone changed suddenly, to an emotion he doesn’t recognise. He could only nod, not knowing what Choi is going to talk about.“Don’t be so worried, Maru.” Choi ruffled his hair. “This isn’t anything much, it’s just that Eun Yul and I have spoken. Remember the 10 things he wanted you to come up with?”Maru nodded. He still haven’t thought of what he wants, having spent the previous day trying to put the puzzle box together.“Although he did make you come up with what you want, we still”, Choi sighed, “we still don’t know too much about you, Maru.”Maru tilted his head, not understanding what Choi meant.“Like, Maru, do you know who your parents are?”Maru shook his head.“I… I don’t remember, Choi-nim…”“Hm, an orphan?” Choi looked surprised by his answer. “Then, is there anything you remember when you are young?”“What I remember… Um, the earliest I remember… I was always kept in a cage?”Choi suddenly hugged him tighter.“Choi-nim?”Choi just shook his head and sighed again, so Maru thought he should continue.“Um, I, I was passed from hand to hand, but, but I was one of the lucky few!” He grabbed Choi hands and squeezed. “I, um, I’m too small and useless and ugly so most of the time they just beat me up for laughs!”His voice is shaking as he remembered what happened to him in the past, but Choi squeezed his hands encouraging.“But when I’m unlucky, when I get picked, I, I, I really hate it!”“Maru-”“I hate them, I, I really hate them, I really hate those humans! Choi-nim, Eun Yul-nim wanted me to tell him what I want right? Then I, I want all the humans dead!”Immediately, Eun Yul appeared by his side, and took him from Choi’s arms.“If that is what you want, I will-”“No you won’t Eun Yul.” Choi’s voice and tone is the same as usual, but Maru felt something suffocating, something strong, powerful, that for the moment he cannot move or speak. Even Eun Yul stiffened, though he could move a little and snarled at Choi.“Look, Maru’s the one who asked for it, and even you promised you will-”In an instant Eun Yul vanished, and Choi shook his head. That force around him vanished, and Maru felt he could breathe again.“Maru. Not all humans are bad. There are many nice humans out there.” Choi said, and suddenly he is back in Choi’s arms.“There are nice… humans?” He asked, tilting his head. “If there are nice humans… then, then why didn’t anyone help us? Why didn’t anyone help me? I, when I cried, when I begged, no one helped me, I spent, I spent years wishing I had died somehow so I don’t need to live through this!”“Maru…” Choi sighed, and didn’t give him an answer./ I should have reighed them in much sooner, I could have found you so much sooner and saved you. / He could hear Eun Yul’s voice in his head. Eun Yul sounds sad, and he could almost feel Eun Yul petting him on the head.“Eun Yul-nim…”/ Are you happy now, Maru? / The vampire asked softly, and Maru nodded furiously.“I, I’m really happy now, Eun Yul-nim! I, I, no one had hugged me like this before! I’ve never had so much food to eat! And I even have a bed to sleep in, and I have the two of you, I, I’m really, really happy now!”/ Good. /“But Maru, how did you know to come here for help?” Choi asked. “Eun Yul isn’t known as the nicest person around humans.”“This… I…” Maru shook his head. “I… didn’t come here for help. People kept whispering that there is a merciless monster living in the castle who kills anyone who gets close-”“You weren’t here to look for help.” Choi shook his head, turning a little pale. “You were here to die. Even though you are just a kid!”Maru nodded.“I, I really, really, really don’t want to live like that anymore! And they won’t let us die, so when I had the chance, I thought, I thought I’ll run for the castle!”/ Even so, you got frightened by Gamunbi and fainted. /“But, but you two are very nice monsters, and bathed me and gave me food…” Maru trailed off, looking down. “Maybe this is just a dream-”Immediately there is a hard knock on his head, as Eun Yul appeared by his side.“Eun Yul!” He flinched as Choi roared, but Eun Yul just hugged him tight.“Did it hurt, Maru?” Although the hit was hard, and it hurt a lot, Eun Yul’s voice is gentle. And if it hurts, it means he is not dreaming, and if he is not dreaming...“Eun Yul-nim… Waaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaah”/ He doesn’t seem to be improving at all. / Eun Yul complained, but he smiled at Maru when the small kid showed him the tiny flame he created./ He doesn’t really have the gift for it, and Maru only managed to create his first flame after you blessed him with some of your powers. / Choi sighed, hugging Maru closer. / He’s just a small kid, give him more time. // Yeah yeah, and I was able to create my own blade within a few days without nearly fainting like him. // You had this rage burning so beautifully inside you, and you have the desire to hurt others. / Choi held up Maru closer to Eun Yul, and Eun Yul petted him on the head. Maru beamed at him, and the flame vanished as his focus is lost. / Just look at this lovely kid, even though he hates humans so much, Maru’s just so gentle he doesn’t really have the ability to hurt anyone. // But one thing’s for sure, he’s capable of dream seering in the future. / Eun Yul drew out a couple of cyan flames, and Maru’s eyes opened wide in surprise. He reached out hesitatingly to touch them, and the flames danced on his fingers./ Hm, it’ll be good to find out more about his lineage, but Maru doesn’t know anything about his parents. Think Mano would be able to help? // Yeah yeah, you just miss your boy toy. // Considering that it might be dangerous to approach Seaha now, his student should be sufficient. Why, are you jealous? // As if. /
“Oi, you really don’t have anything useful around here don’t you.” The white haired vampire loafed around, drawing a book out from the bookshelves, and tossing it at the ceiling. The book turned into shreds with the snap of his fingers, and page fragments rained down.
“No one asked you to stay around, and stop messing up my library.” Teacher growled, one of the few times he had seen teacher so angry. In fact, before the rude and lazy BaekJung crashed at teacher’s castle, teacher had always been patient and nice.
“It’s not like these useless things are in any form useful, they are all junk and the sort.” BaekJung drew out another book, and its pages fluttered out to the ground. “A picture book huh, what’s even the use of something like that when you can’t even eat it.”
“This is part of my collection, keep your filthy hands off my books.” Now teacher’s really angry, his acupuncture needles leaping up from his work desk and forming a cloud around him. In response, BaekJung called up his own swords; they danced mesmerisingly around him and teacher’s needles dropped to the ground, sliced into pieces. BaekJung then grinned, icey cyan eyes glowing.
“Is that all you are capable of, Saeha. Come on, show me something more fun, something more.” He’s pointing his sword at his teacher, and although he’s scared, although teacher told him to hide and not get out, BaekJung looks like he is going to kill teacher and he ran out, tossing a book at BaekJung. It didn’t do anything, and white haired reaper slowly swivelled his head to look at him, those eyes and the cruel grin forever imprinting in his mind. He froze on the spot, unable to move.
/ Mano, get out! /
Despite teacher screaming at him to move, he couldn’t.
He felt metal slicing flesh. His own.
Cleaving cleaning through bone.
He could feel it, every single slash on his body.
From his right shoulder to his left waist. A clean cut through his midsection. From his left knee across his thighs. He even felt his face being split into half. Then quarter. And more.
It wasn’t painful at all, he didn’t feel any pain. Maybe he just hadn’t the time to react.
In fact it hurt more how horrified teacher had looked. How teacher kept rambling on about how he shouldn’t fall asleep, and how he won’t allow BaekJung to hurt him again.
How he will put him back together again.
No matter how long it takes.
But then he remembered those cold yellowish green eyes telling him to leave. Telling him to dispose of that corpse he brought back.
Maybe these memories aren’t worth holding on to, since he can never get back to the days where he is that doted little kid.
Or maybe it is the BaekJung’s fault, since teacher had always been nice to him before that.
Or it was his fault for rushing out although teacher told him to stay as far away as possible-
“MANO-NIM!”A voice cried loudly into his ear, and Mano sit up on his bed in a jolt.“What the heck!?” He complained, and saw little Maru looking at him worriedly.“Mano, Mano-nim, you, you were crying in your sleep, is, is everything alright?” The little kid reached out hesitatingly and petted him on the shoulder, and he snorted.“I don’t cry in my sleep. And it’s late already, go sleep.” He ordered sternly, before lying back down to sleep. The little kid had always been too nice for his own good-“Wait a minute what the hell are you doing here?!” It took him a good few seconds to realise Maru shouldn’t be here since he lives in Eun Yul’s castle, and the last he checked he is staying in Gamunbi’s place. “Who the hell brought you here?!”Maru just pointed at the window, where Choi is leaning.“Yo.” The tall vampire smiled and motioned for Maru to return to his side. Maru gave him a worried look, and one last pat, before pattering back to Choi’s side.“What the fuck!?” Maybe he still is dreaming, there must be something wrong with the herbs Garam plucked and stuck in his hair during the day which is making him have such strange dreams.“That’s real cold of you, Mano. As I said, there isn’t any place where I can’t go, so why don’t you listen to me for a while?” Suddenly Choi’s leaning in too close, so close he could see those dancing black eyes clearly even without his glasses. “It won’t take long, I just need-”A glavie slashed down hard on his bed, and might have cut Choi into half had he not taken his initial position at the window again.“Choi-nim!?”“Choi, I would greatly appreciate if you don’t assault my kid.” Gamunbi appeared, standing protectively in front of him, glavie in arm.“Big Gammy-nim!” Maru waved cheerfully, and Gamunbi smiled back at him.“I’m not assaulting Mano, I’m just asking-”“Then why would you visit in the dead of night.” Gamunbi’s tone is civil, though…/ Just saying, Mano, you should run. // What, I’m trying to sleep. Why should I run. // As much as I would like to protect you, I am still weaker than Choi. // … thanks for taking away my confidence in you to protect me. // Look for Yeon Hwa, Choi won’t dare to do anything with her around. /“Come on, you two don’t need to be so on guard around me! Look, this is something regarding Maru-”Choi easily dodged the blow, and it looked like he’s going to kick back, but Maru’s quickly tugging at his coat.“Choi-nim!? Why, why are you fighting with Big Gammy-nim! We are supposed to ask Mano-nim for help!”Thank goodness for the little kid, because Choi stopped and hugged him close.“Well, it looks like we should come back tomorrow morning-”“You can come back tomorrow, only when the sun is up, but Maru’s free to stay.”“That isn't fair.”"Maybe I’ve been too used to staying in a castle.” The blonde perched on the castle ruins, a cow mooing by his side. He looked into the distance and sighed.“Then go back.” His purple haired companion rolled his eyes. “No one is forcing you to make this journey.”“It took so much effort to put him back together after the BaekJung is done with him”, the blonde shook his head, “and he had to waste his life like this. Using it to bring someone dead back to life, and it’s even some stray kid he didn’t know, what is he even thinking of.”“Isn’t that what you have done.” His companion looked off in the opposite direction. “They’re coming soon, either stop moping, or go back to your castle..”“I was only able to give him so much time, he should already be dead by now. There isn’t any reason to go back anymore.” The blonde stood and shook his head. “Maybe I shouldn’t have taken a student at all.”“Maybe. But now isn’t the time to think about that, you have plenty of time to reflect on your life choices after you survive this.”
----- CHAPTER BREAK -----
Despite Gamunbi’s offer for him to stay, Maru shook his head.“Choi-nim and Eun Yul-nim promised to sleep with me every night!” The small kid beamed brightly at the dark skinned blonde, so brightly even Mano averted his gaze and went back to sleep instead, pulling a pillow over his head. Though Gamunbi is glaring daggers at him…/ He meant like kids sleeping with their parents. / Choi explained resignedly./ Eun Yul I still can trust, but not you. / Gamunbi smirked, pointing his glavie at him. / Now if you can please leave this place? /“Big Gammy-nim! Please, please don’t fight with Choi-nim!”Although he knows Gamunbi is having a lot of fun at his expense, and he would love to convince him otherwise, it would have to wait for a time when Maru isn’t around and frantically trying to stop both of them from harming each other.“Since I’m not welcomed here right now-”“Oi I’m still trying to sleep here, can you leave quieter?!” Mano snapped out from under the pillows./ Your kid. // Considering you are the one who woke us all up, he’s doing a good job. Now please go. // You’re cruel, Gamunbi. // I’m so sorry that I’m no longer the guy you can twist your finger around. // I can always try again- /“Big Gammy-nim!? Choi-nim?!”“CAN YOU ALL SHUT UP?!”“Eun Yul-nim, Eun Yul-nim! We went to look for Mano-nim but he didn’t help us! And Big Gammy-nim told us to return when the sun is bright!”Maru sat down on his lap and began updating him on their trip. He had allowed Choi to make the trip at such a late hour because Maru couldn’t fall asleep, having had a long nap after the cry after lunch, but his kid somehow returned even more energetic./ Sorry. But I can bring him somewhere else -// You’ve had your chance and failed. Now hands off my kid. /Before Choi can protest, he warp himself and Maru out of the castle.“Um, Eun Yul-nim?”He took Maru to a piece of barren land. Despite the length of time, there is still the stench of death and burning.“Maru, you remember the village you came from?” He asked, looking at the small kid. Maru dropped his head and nodded. “This is that place, Maru.”At his nudging, Maru look a good look around, his eyes getting wider by the moment.“Ah…? Eun, Eun Yul-nim…?” There is first understanding in those eyes, then happiness, then glee, and then a strange blend of horror and joy.“You can laugh if you want, Maru. Or cry. Or shout or scream or do anything you want. These people here who once hurt you, they don’t exist anymore. Choi made sure of that.”He set Maru down on the ground, but the small kid wasn’t able to stand, dropping to the ground.“Eun, Eun Yul-nim…” That tiny body trembled, but Maru didn’t cry. “I, I don’t know… I, I, I think I’m happy? But, but but but! But it means… it means the entire place, the entire village died-”“I couldn't care less for them.” Eun Yul patted him on the head. “I only let them settle here to have things to feed on, they are just food.”His nonchalance seem to horrify Maru more, those orange eyes looking at him in shock.“Look Maru”, he sighed. “You were brave enough to step foot into my castle, and you are a kid. That’s why of all these useless things living here you became my treasure.”That got Maru blushing, and he gave a little nod of understanding.“If you weren’t such a scared and injured kid I might have killed you.”That scared Maru too, but he still clung in tight to his shirt.“Um, so, Eun Yul-nim… you hate humans too?”“They are so weak, yet so irritating.” He frowned and shook his head. “They aren’t even strong enough to fight, yet they won’t stop trying-”/ Maru doesn’t need to know about this. / Choi sighed in his head. / And you are supposed to tired him out so he can sleep, not fan his hatred for humans. /He snorted, and patted Maru on the head.“Don’t worry about the humans. Those who hurt you don’t exist anymore. Just look at this scorched land.”Maru climbed to his feet clumsily, his emotions still a mess. He stare at the ruins for a few moments, before asking:“Eun, Eun Yul-nim, can we, can we go to the edge of the village?”“The edge of the village?” He asked, and Maru nodded.“I… I’ve always been caged up, or it’s the few houses we are always forced to go to. I… I’ve never seen what is outside this place.” Determined orange eyes looked up at him, and Eun Yul nodded. He took Maru’s hand, and the little kid took him around the place./ You are just going around in circles. // I realised even without you pointing out. // Maybe because he has never been out, that’s why Maru is so bad with directions? /He ignored Choi’s comment, and took Maru in his arms.“Eun Yul-nim?”“Here, it will be faster this way.” It took just a few minutes for him to clear the ruins, and reach the edge of the village, on a cliff overlooking the sea.“... Wow…” Maru looked at the choppy waters, mesmerised.“You’ve never seen the sea before, Maru?” He asked, and Maru shook his head.“And this is so high up…” Suddenly Maru turned towards him, eyes unreadable. “Eun Yul-nim, if I jump down from here, will I die?”He immediately hugged Maru more protectively in his arms, just in case his precious child makes any sudden movements.“If I, if I had known this is just so near, I could have, I could have struggled harder and escaped so much earlier-”“Do you still want to die now, Maru.” Eun Yul asked, and Maru looked at him with his eyes clear.“No. I want to be with you and Choi-nim forever.”Even without looking into his thoughts, Eun Yul knew that is what his kid truly wants, and nodded. Maru smiled and turned back to towards the sea.“But the sea is really beautiful, and it sounds so nice too…”He can’t say he understands what Maru finds so delightful about the sea, but if it is what his kid wants, he will grant it. He warped to the sandy beach, far away from the rocky landing below the cliff.“Here, you’ve never had the chance to play at the beach right?” He set Maru down on the sand. The little kid bent down and touched the sand, scooping up some and giggling as the grains fell from his hands.“Wow, Eun Yul-nim! This soil doesn’t feel like soil at all!” He scooped up another handful, showing it to Eun Yul, as the grains kept falling. “And, ah…”The waves behind him caught Maru’s eyes, and he dropped the sand he is holding in his hands. The small kid ran towards the waves, watching with his eyes sparkling. He bent down and touched the waves, and yipped in surprise.“Ah, it’s cold! And… wet?”“The sea is water, Maru. Don’t go too far into it, it’s dangerous.” He sat down on the sandy beach, watching as Maru ran up to the waves as they ebbed, and quickly backtracking when the waves came too close./ If he wasn’t a human, he could have been a merman. / Choi mused. / He would have been so much happier living in the sea. // He doesn’t even like seafood, you’ve seen him make that face each time you serve fish. // True, but if he’s a merman maybe he might like it? // There’s no use thinking about something he’d never be. /It took quite some more bickering with Choi before Maru started yawning.“You’re tired, Maru. Let’s go back.” He held Maru’s hand, sandy after playing with the sand and digging up some seashells. Maru looked up at him and nodded.“Um, Eun, Eun Yul-nim?”“Yes?”“Can we, can we please, please come back tomorrow?”“Of course.”Carrying his sandy treasure carefully in his arms, he returned to his castle. After a bath, Maru quickly fell asleep, dreaming of a calm and serene sea.“Choi-nim, Choi-nim, Choi-nim!!! Eun Yul-nim took me to the sea last night! It is very beautiful!!”The first thing Choi saw when he opened his eyes is Maru tackling him, and immediately telling him about his trip to the beach last night. Eun Yul ruffled Maru’s hair, and Maru quickly turned towards him with a cheerful ‘good morning’, before continuing his tale.“Maru, let’s get breakfast first, you can tell me about your trip after we eat?” He hugged Maru in his arms, and warped them to the kitchen when Maru nodded. When he set Maru down on the floor, the little kid quickly helped to set the plates and chairs in place. Although he can do that with his magic, Maru is always asking what he can help out with, and being so happy when he completes tasks he can’t really take that away from the small kid.“Thank you Maru.” He petted Maru on the head once he is done, and Maru beamed at him. He sat down on a chair, waiting for the food to be ready. Though today Maru is fidgeting quite a bit, being extremely excited to continue with his story. Eun Yul warped in and hugged him tight, preventing him from vibrating off the chair.“Um, Eun Yul, can I, can I please go to the sea to play after this? Please?” Maru asked, looking up at him excitedly.“Of course.” Eun Yul ruffled his hair, though…/ Last night he said he WANTS to be with us forever, but today it is back to ‘can I please’ again!? // Well, that means Maru doesn’t really need anything else, but he wants, no, he needs us by his side forever. // He needs more things that he wants. // Not everyone is as selfish as you Eun Yul. But hm, maybe I should teach him water magics instead, since he likes the sea so much. // You can’t even teach him proper fire magic, now you are moving on to water. // He might learn better since he likes the sea so much, it’s worth a try. // Whatever, your job. /Eun Yul stayed in the shade, conjuring up a small cove to hide from the sun. Choi’s shading Maru with his coat, while teaching him about the various seashells they come across. Just as he thought it is monotonous enough for him to fall asleep-“Gamunbi?!” His overgrown dog appeared before his eyes, and he was tackled off before he had the time to react.“Oi, Weren’t you guys coming over?” Mano walked up to Choi and Maru, having gotten off Gammy before it ran at full speed for its owner. He’s holding an umbrella, looking as if he is melting from the heat. “Dad even prepared food for you two.”“‘Dad?’ Wow, Mano, I know he’s a good guy, but I didn’t expect you to accept him into your life so readily.” Choi smiled at him, while trying to coax out a small kid clinging onto his coat. Mano just made a face.“Some of us here never had two dragons as younger sisters, and it shows.” Mano rolled his eyes, and bent down to collect a couple of seashells into a bucket. “You’re thinking I want to be here too, aren’t you.”“Tell Gamunbi we’ll head over soon, Maru just wants to play at the beach a little longer-”“Gammy.” Before he could finish his sentence, Mano called for the shadow hound, who bounded back to his side immediately. “And you won’t be keeping dad waiting for long.”Mano smirked triumphantly- Since when is he carrying Maru in his hands? He leapt on Gammy’s back, and with a single leapt they disappeared from view.“What the fuck?!” Eun Yul warped to his side, looking disheveled with sticks and grass sticking to him. Flicking his hair, those vegetation vanished, but he is still fuming. “That bastard just appeared like this and he stole my kid?!”He thought Eun Yul would give chase, but instead, he turned back towards his castle./ Since you will be following them anyway, I’m sleeping. // Come on, aren’t you worried about Maru? // No. But if Maru gets hurt you’re getting kicked out of the castle. // That’s so cold of you Eun Yul. // Give chase already?!?! // Yes yes, I won’t allow anything to happen to Maru. /When he arrived at Gamunbi’s domain, Maru’s sitting on the floor with Gabi and Henry. Maru’s trying to place the pieces of seashells on the floor from the bucket, but Gabi and Henry kept grabbing them and chomping on them. Gabi he can understand, young dragons like to bite stuff when they are teething, but Henry looks like he is doing it just because he can.“Choi, Choi-nim!” Maru ran over to his side, and showed him a small cowrie seashell. “This seashell is very pretty-”Before he could finish his words, Gabi grabbed the shell from his hands and chomped on it too."Mano mano mano", she complained. Looks like she hasn't mastered talking either, but Mano must have had a huge impact on her for her to make his name her first word. Petting her on the head, he quickly hugged Maru tight when it looks like his kid is going to cry.“Yes yes, the seashell is pretty. We can always go back and pick up more seashells, how about it?”“m’Kay, Choi-nim!”“Well, no matter how you look, Choi’s just normal to his kid?” Yeon Hwa appeared, with Garam following her./ What have you been telling Yeon Hwa about me, Gamunbi? / Choi sighed, and got a rumbling chuckle as a reply.“Hello Yeon Hwa-nim!” Maru waved at her, and the little dragon by her side. “Um… Garam?”“Yup!” Yeon Hwa ruffled his hair, and Garam smiled at meeped at him. “That’s your first correct guess of the day, here, you can have a sweet!”“Thank, thank you, Yeon Hwa-nim!” Maru blushed happily, accepting the sweet dropped in his hands.“And Choi, I’ve heard about most of it from Gamunbi-”He shook his head, cutting her off, pointing at Maru. Yeon Hwa nodded understandingly.“Garam, here, we’re going to have a chat, play with Maru alright?” She pushed the little dragon forward slightly, while Choi put Maru down on the ground.“Choi-nim?”“I’m just going to chat a bit with Gamunbi and Yeon Hwa, don’t worry, I’ll be fine.” He smiled and petted Maru on the head, and Maru nodded.“I’ve already made my stand clear, I will not be helping.” Gamunbi said the moment they stepped into the small clearing with the dragon egg. He is there with Mano, though standing protectively in front of his kid.“I know. And I am not here for your help.” Choi turned towards Mano. “Mano, would you be able to trace a person’s lineage?”The young teen rolled his eyes.“Sorry to disappoint you, but I don’t think even teacher can help you with that.” Mano shrugged, and added. “We are doctors, not some historian.”“Is that so… Hm, maybe Hanarin might help-”“You’ve already seen how much she is fuming at being called from her beauty sleep”, Gamunbi pointed out. “You’ll need more than your flimsy reason to get her help.”“That’ll be my problem, thank you for your concern.” He brushed off Gamunbi’s words with a sigh. “Yeon Hwa.”“Yes?”“Mom said there was a very powerful vampire who vanished one day in her era, would you be able to find out more information about them?”“I’ll have to ask grandpa about that.” Yeon Hwa nodded. “He existed even before Jiyul and Daewon are around, he might know.”“Thanks, Yeon Hwa.”“But”, her eyes glittered, “this help won’t be for free.”Immediately he tried to warp away from the dragon, but Yeon Hwa grabbed his hand, and pressed it on the egg.But nothing happened.“... Ah?”It took some time before Choi and the others to return. Gabi had chomped up the remaining seashells and moved on to munching on the greenery around her, Henry lost interest halfway and got into a meeping match with Garam. Maru didn’t know what to do, and just watched them, waiting for Choi to return.“Why, why, why?!” He heard Yeon Hwa complaining before he saw the adults returning. Immediately the twin dragon girls ran to her side.“Meeep? Meep meep meep?!”“Mano mano mano mano?”They hugged her tightly, but Yeon Hwa turned towards Choi pouting.“I’m so sure you would be able to hatch that egg! Why, why weren’t you able to hatch it?!” She stomped her feet angrily.“I told you, I’m all devoted to my sweet little kid, no matter how you ask I won’t take in a dragon kid.” Choi petted her on the head, smiling, like he always does with him.“Choi-nim?” He asked, pattering over to Choi, but stopped when Gamunbi ruffled his hair. “Big Gammy-nim?”“You’re real selfish, Maru.” Mano mused as he passed by. “To monopolise an elder like this.”“Mano-nim?” He tilted his head at Mano’s words, not understanding what the teen meant. But Mano just laughed.
----- CHAPTER BREAK -----
For the entire week, Maru had been asking to go to the beach after breakfast. And having those excited glittering eyes asking him, Eun Yul agreed readily, keeping a close watch on his kid while remaining in the shade. Somewhen Choi went to town and bought a sailor’s outfit for Maru, with the sleeves altered to cover his arms all the way to his hands, navy blue long pants, topping off with a small sailor’s hat. He had to admit it looked cute on his kid, although Maru didn’t seem to understand what a sailor is, only understanding vaguely it has something to do with the sea and had been wearing it wherever they go to the beach. There aren’t many ships that come close to this place, especially seeing how it is part of his domain, but no way he is letting Choi bring Maru any further to look at real ships. He doesn’t need his sweet little kid running off and becoming a sailor, rolling his eyes when Choi chuckled."Eun Yul-nim, Eun Yul-nim! Look, I found a pretty shell that looks like you!" Maru ran up to his side excitedly, holding up a pearly white cowrie to him. That bright smile almost blinded him, and he petted Maru on the head. Maru beamed at him, and he couldn’t help but give the small kid a hug before letting him off to 'find' more shells./ Come on, Maru looks so happy when he sees these perfect shells sticking out of the sand, how can I not help him? / Choi chuckled at the glare sent his way. Maru ran up to him and held his hand as they made another round around the beach. / Let him find them on his own. / Eun Yul rolled his eyes. / And doesn’t he have other things to play without other than finding shells, I’ve got buckets of these things by now?! // You don’t need to keep them, and you’ve seen how well he is at building sandcastles. / Choi winced, but quickly smiled at Maru when the small kid offered him a shell he found sticking out of the sand. / Maybe I should bring him to Gamunbi more often? With other kids around he might understand what playing is, instead of making lots of those sandy towers because I asked him to. // Bleh. // I just know you’ll say that. Hm, maybe mom might help, she might have other toys for kids to play with. // … Think she can cook a collection of seashells? // No offloading your ‘treasure collection’ to mom- Wait, cook them?! // Just asking. /It turned out that no, Jiyul can’t cook seashells either, but she accepted the buckets of seashells he made Choi bring over, saying she’ll use them for her plants. Maru looked extremely surprised that Eun Yul actually kept buckets of the shells he found, and hugged Eun Yul tight, while telling Jiyul excitedly about how he found the seashells.“And then, and then, I saw one, um, um-”“Cowrie, Maru.” Eun Yul ruffled Maru’s hair, and moved Maru to sit on his lap instead.“One cowrie!” Maru smiled widely at Eun Yul and turned back to Jiyul. “I saw one cowrie that is very white!! It looks like Eun Yul-nim!!”He dug into the bucket, and took out one white one, holding it in his hands carefully and offering it to Jiyul.“Yes, it’s just like the colour of Eun Yul’s hair.” Jiyul smiled at him. “You really like the sea, don’t you, Maru?”/ A lot. // Really. /He and Choi answered almost immediately for Maru, but the small kid pondered for a while before responding.“Um, I, I like the sea, but I, I like Eun Yul-nim and Choi-nim more! I like them, I love them very much, much more than the sea!” Maru said, and gave a small yip of surprise as he found himself in Choi’s arms.“You are too sweet, Maru.” Choi sighed, hugging him tight. He planted a soft kiss on Maru's hair. “You are just so precious, you know?”Eun Yul would love to stick a sword through that vampire for stealing his kid from his lap, but he is busy clutching his chest and trying to stop his heart from pounding with so much love for the precious little kid. If any other kid escapes to his castle in the future, he is definitely killing them outright. Jiyul just laughed.“Your Eun Yul-nim and Choi-nim loves you very much too, Maru.” She petted him on the head, and took him from Choi’s arms. “Say, there is a lullaby about the sea in this area, would you like to hear it?”“A lullaby?” Maru tilted his head, asking curiously.“Choi knows it too, it goes like this.”
The sea is the one which grants us our lives
Father sun and mother moon watches over us
We swim in its vastness and feed off from it
We send our prayers to its bountiful depths
“Ah, it’s that lullaby!” Choi remarked in surprise. “It was such a long time since I last heard it?”“It’s been a very long time since you were a kid, Choi.” Jiyul chuckled at her son. “I’m surprised you can still recognise it after so long.”“Um, Jiyul-nim?” Maru looked at Choi and then his mother. “Can you, can you teach me to sing this, this lullaby please?”“Sure, Maru.” Jiyul smiled and ruffled his hair. “The first line is: The sea is the one which grants us our lives.”“The sea is the one, um, which grants us our lives.” Maru repeated after her, going so off pitch the three of them winced./ Maru certainly needs a lot more practice singing /, Jiyul shook her head. / You two never let him sing before? // Maru… didn’t try before. // Hm, say, how about you leave him with me for today? I’ll see what I can do, but you can ask Chun Ryang for help too, he- // Yes to the first, no to the second. That weirdo’s going to do strange stuff to my kid- /“Um, Jiyul-nim?” Maru looked between the three of them, and tugged her hand softly.“Yes, Maru, you’ve got the words right.” Jiyul smiled at him, and the small child blushed happily. “But the tune is a little wrong, let’s practise together, alright?”“m’Kay!” Maru nodded furiously. “Um, it goes, um, the… sea? The sea, the sea… um, our lives?”“The sea is the one which grants us our lives, Maru.” Jiyul shook her head again. “It means we are given life by the sea.”“Um, the sea is the one which grants us our lives…?” Maru sung again, his tune still a little bit off.“That’s right, Maru, now listen closely? I’ll sing it for you, and you try to follow the notes I’m singing?”“I, I’ll try!”Somehow, that doesn’t sound like it will end anytime soon, and Eun Yul snuck out of the room to steal a snack or some meals, and have a break on his ears.“Eun Yul, mom’s not going to be too happy to find you raiding her kitchen again?” Choi materialised just as Eun Yul took out a roasted chicken from Jiyul’ food cabinet.“Aren’t you sticking with Maru.” He frowned, ripping a drumstick off and chomping on it. / You’re always going on about how adorable Maru is. /“Weeell, if mom kills you because she found her food missing, Maru’s going to be really sad?” Choi grinned, a glint in his eyes. He pressed closer, leaning against the food cabinet, eyes looking down and staring into his.“So you are still hungry, huh.” He grinned back, pressing that drumstick to Choi’s lips. “I won’t be that easy a meal this time-”/ Boys. MY KITCHEN. / Jiyul roared, and Eun Yul found himself being evicted roughly from Jiyul’s domain. He still had a roasted chicken in hand, and no Choi in sight, well, that isn’t that bad a trade off. / Now stay away till I finish teaching Maru, OR ELSE. /It took less than an hour for Jiyul to call them back, and it was funny she had to check if she is interrupting anything./ No, your idiotic son didn’t dare try anything after that, / Eun Yul smirked. / He didn’t tell you what happened the last time with Maru did he. // … what did he do to Maru this time?! / Jiyul’s temper flared up through their link, and Eun Yul grinned./ Mom, Maru just walked in on us, I didn’t do anything to him, really! / Choi protested weakly, not even having the energy to glare back at him./ It isn’t as much of Maru walking in, but he got woken up? / Eun Yul purred, his smile getting wider the more uncomfortable Choi shifted./ Boys, are you just going to go at it now, or do you two want your kid back. / Jiyul’s irritation is clear in her mental voice to them, and Eun Yul stopped his taunting immediately./ So Maru can actually sing now? / He asked, warping to Jiyul’s domain.“Eun Yul-nim!” Maru immediately ran to his side and hugged him tight, “Jiyul-nim has been teaching me to sing the lullaby, she said I’m getting much better!”/ Considering how bad he was with singing any bit of improvement is ‘much better’. / Eun Yul deadpanned internally to them, but he he still smiled at Maru encouragingly. / And oi Choi, get your ass over here right now, Maru’s- /“So Maru,” Choi just appeared beside Maru, and hoisted the small kid up in his arms. “Mom said you’ve become much better at the lullaby, will you sing it for me ?”/ Oi! /“Choi-nim!” Maru gave him a hug too, and nodded shyly. “I, um, I’ll try my best!”The little kid looked at Jiyul, who nodded and smiled encouragingly at him.“So, um…”
The sea gives us life la la la la
Eun Yul chuckled. Seemed like Jiyul amended the lyrics so that it is easier for Maru to remember. And from her nodding she is quite proud that he is able to memorise it. And he doesn’t sound bad actually, and is much, much better than his first attempt.
Choi-nim and Eun Yul-nim watches over me
That sentence hit him hard in the heart, and he could see Choi almost dropped Maru in surprise. He would love to rub it in his face about it, but his heart is just making him want to hug the small kid close and cherish him so much. It took all his effort to hold himself back and allow Maru to finish the lullaby.
We swim in the sea and feed from it la la la
We send our prayers to the sea la la la la la
“There, Choi-nim, Eun yul-nim-”Before Maru could finish his words, he immediately retrieved his kid from Choi’s arms, hugging him tight.“That’s a great song, Maru. You’ve done well.” He stroked Maru’s hair gently, and Maru blushed red, a proud smile on his face.“Jiyul-nim said the two of you will like the lullaby! And thank you, Jiyul-nim, for teaching me the lullaby!” Maru chirped happily while Jiyul chuckled./ The part about the two of you was added in by Maru, he’s just a precious little kid isn’t he? / Jiyul mused, petting him on the head. / Bring him over more often, I’ve got other lullabies to teach him. // Mom, / Choi shook his head, / no more lullabies. I don’t think my heart can take anymore of this. /Jiyul just laughed.And for the rest of the day, Maru’s wandering about in his castle and singing his lullaby. Eun Yul wanted to tell him to stop, but when his precious kid is so happy singing, he can’t find the heart to stop Maru. Despite it doing horrors to his heart./ Why is Maru just so precious? / Even Choi complained while following Maru around in the castle, stopping every few moments to hug the little kid close. / There has to be a limit to how precious he can be… // Hell if I know. / Eun Yul groaned. / And stop him from singing, I think my heart’s going to give out soon!? // Yes yes, I’ll try. / Choi sighed, and turned towards the kid in his arms. “Say, Maru, do you know what a lullaby is?”“Um, it’s a song?” Maru stopped his singing and looked at him with curious eyes. “Jiyul-nim said the two of you will like it!”“We love it, Maru.” Choi stroked his face gently. “But Maru, a lullaby is a song you sing before you sleep. Not every moment during the day time.”“Ah!?” Immediately Maru looked horrified. “Sorry, sorry Choi-nim! I, I won’t sing it again, I won’t sing it-”“Maru.” He called out to the small kid gently. “It is not wrong to sing it now, you are not doing anything wrong. But lullabies are usually sung at night, so it will be even better if you sing it at night before you sleep.”“Um, so, so it isn’t wrong…? It’s just better if I sing it at night?” Maru looked even more confused by his words but nodded slowly. “Then I, then I’ll sing it tonight instead!”“Thank you, Maru.”/ Good to know you aren’t going to be doing any sleeping tonight?! / Eun Yul snapped. / I can’t even focus on anything with him going on and being so sweet right now, if I can’t sleep tonight I’m killing you. // I… didn’t think that far, but I can bring him over to- // NO. /Maru technically didn’t sing for the rest of the day, though he hummed softly to himself as he wandered around the castle. Even so, Eun Yul could feel constant pangs to his heart and the burning desire to hug the little kid close from time to time that by night time, he is thoroughly exhausted./ You don’t need to keep hugging him you know? / Choi said jovially, and he glared back./ Maru’s my precious kid. And aren’t you sticking to him like glue too?! / He snapped back to Choi’s laughter, hugging Maru close in his arms./ You’ve already said he is precious. / Choi said simply, and reached out to pet Maru on the head. / He’s just so precious... /“Um, Eun Yul-nim, Choi-nim, can I, can I sing the lullaby for you two?” Maru asked, one hand holding on to his, and the other on Choi’s hand./ No way. / Eun Yul winced, but he still smiled at Maru. “Of course you can.”He ignored Choi’s laughter in his mind, bracing himself for Maru’s song. The small kid repeated the same as he had sang for them previously.
The sea gives us life la la la la
Choi-nim and Eun Yul-nim watches over me
We swim in the sea and feed from it la la la
We send our prayers to the sea la la la la la
Whoosh
It still hit his heart hard, especially with how much love Maru put in so innocently in his song. Though there seemed to be an extra part added in to the end of the song? But seeing how happy and satisfied Maru is with that, and burrowing under the covers to sleep, he didn’t question any further, just hugging his kid close./ Maru... / Choi sighed, planting a kiss on Maru’s head. / Sleep well, Maru, my little treasure. // MY kid. /
----- CHAPTER BREAK -----
Maru hummed happily to himself as he made his way around Eun Yul's castle. Ever since Jiyul taught him the lullaby about the sea, both Eun Yul and Choi had been hugging him a lot more. He love their hugs, feeling their warmth surrounding him, and making him feel so safe and so loved. Having more hugs is extremely amazing to him. Maybe lullabies have the power to cause more hugs? Still humming to himself and beaming, Maru continued down the path-Did he... just hear a voice? Maru looked around, straining his ears. Although it is faint, there is no mistaking it. There is someone outside the castle. Although he is still taking the medicine that Choi brought back to him, and loud sounds no longer affect him that much, he can still pick out noises when it is quiet. And when he focuses... Closing his eyes, he could hear someone out there, and that person seemed tired? In pain? He immediately remembered his meeting with Mano and Henry in the castle, maybe that person got injured and escaped here too? He should check it out, and see if there is anything he can do to help.Following his ears, Maru tiptoed into the forest outside of Eun Yul's castle. He never had the need to venture out, but there might be someone injured out there. The forest still looked as dark and scary as when he first set foot there, looking for an escape from the hell he lived in, and his heart pounded hard against his chest.Eun Yul-nim and Choi-nim are here, I don't need to be scared, he told himself. Eun Yul-nim… Choi-nim… He repeated in his head, while trying to follow the source of the sound.There is a sharp intake of breath, and suddenly he can't hear any breathing sounds anymore."Um, is, is anyone there?" He asked, his voice quivering. "Um, you sound hurt, I, I might be able to help…?"As Maru grabbed the ointment container in his pants for comfort, telling himself he will be fine, he heard a small gasp."A child?!""Um, is anyone there?!" He repeated, his voice much squeakier, looking around, but ready to run back to the safety of the castle at any moment-A figure just dropped out from a tree beside him, and he screamed. "Eeeeeeeeek?!""Hey, sorry for that, but a small kid like you shouldn't be in the forest at this hour?" A dark skinned blonde haired guy with friendly green eyes smiled weakly at him, petting his head. "It's dangerous."Maru recognised that voice immediately; it was the one he heard. And he wasn't wrong about the person being injured, he does have a few bloody scratches on him, and... is that his stomach rumbling? Recovering a little from his shock, Maru quickly dug out the handful of cookies from his pockets. Choi sneaked some to him during the day, giving him strict instructions to not give then to Eun Yul, which means he should be allowed to give them to this hungry man?"Um, mister, are you hungry? I, I have some cookies, please eat them!" Maru offered them to the blonde haired man, whose eyes widened at the sight.“I, I can’t take your food, you are just a kid, you need it more than me.” The man protested weakly as his stomach growled again, this time much louder. Maru just shoved one cookie into his mouth as he spoke, remembering how Choi used to make him eat more. That did the trick, and the man soon stuffed all the cookies into his mouth. Maru giggled."Um, if you are still hungry, you can come with me? I'll ask Choi-nim to cook you some food, Choi-nim is a very good cook!" Maru tugged at the man's sleeve as his stomach growled again."Nah, I've already taken all your cookies, kiddo. Thanks." The man said as he petted him on the head. "I have food at home, just that I got lost and can't find my way back… Say, can you please show me the way out of this forest?"The man sounded much like he is missing the place he came from, so Maru nodded. "I, I'll try!""Thanks kiddo." The man grinned at him, and took his hand. Maru tried to lead him the way he came from. "What's your name? I'm Ignatio.""Hi Ig-- Ig-- Iggy-nim! I'm Maru!" He chirped while trying to remember which path he came from. The trees look the same, and somehow, he isn't hearing the usual sounds of the castle? Usually Choi follows close behind him so he can hear soft footsteps, or he'd be cooking in the kitchen, and Eun Yul's usually falling asleep somewhere and he'd hear that gentle breathing, or he'd be stealing food from the kitchen or fighting with Choi, but he is hearing none of such sounds. Instead he hears leaves rustling and chirping sounds and he is feeling a little lost. "I think, I think I came from this way…? Or wait, I, I think it is... over here?""... You are lost too, aren't you." Ignatio made a face and sighed."But, but I, I, I just walked out from the castle, I, I can find my way back!" Maru quicken his steps, trying to look for anything he can recognise. "I, just give me one moment!"/ Choi, Choi-nim, please help! / He called out to Choi, and for a moment his vision turned white and he sat down hard on the floor."Maru?! Are you alright?!" Ignatio is at his side immediately, looking worriedly at him."I, I, I'm fine…" Maru blinked till he can see properly again, and he thought he felt a hand petting him on the head./ Are you alright, Maru? / Choi asked in his head. He tried to answer back but Choi cut him off. / Don't answer, Maru, you'll get even more dizzy. Just nod or shake your head, I can see you from over here. /Maru nodded frantically./ Good. You are some distance from the castle, and looks like you've made a new friend. I can bring you back to the castle, or you want to try walking back while I guide you? /Maru nodded again. As much as he wants Choi to appear and bring them back, he wants to be able to do this on his own instead of always relying on Choi and Eun Yul. Choi chuckled, the soft rumble a comforting sound to him./So you want to learn to get back? Sure, I'll give you the directions, just follow them, you'll be back in no time. /Maru felt his hair being petted again. This time, he is sure it is Choi petting him. Is it some kind of magic too?"Thank, thank you, Choi-nim!" Maru cried out, and realised Ignatio is looking at him strangely. "Ah, Iggy-nim, Choi-nim said he will guide us back, I'm sure you'll be able to eat soon!""You are talking to someone aren't you? So… you have some ability in you?" Ignatio asked, and Maru nodded."I, I can hear quite well, so, so…" Being reminded of how he was treated in the past, Maru looked down to his feet and shook those memories out of his head. "But, but it's alright now, Choi-nim killed all the humans in the village, so they won't hurt me anymore! They won't do things to me anymore!"The new look in Ignatio's face is something he recognised: horror. He immediately tried patting the blonde, but failing to reach his shoulders he squeezed his hand."Don't worry, Choi-nim is a very nice vampire, he's-""A vampire?!" Ignatio sounded even more fearful for some reason."Um, yes? Choi-nim is a very nice vampire, you don't have to be afraid of him?" Maru smiled and tried to reassure Ignatio, but the taller man just sat down beside him."Maru." He spoke, his voice solemn. "Vampires are, how do I put it? They feed on humans, there is no way they can live around humans without harming them.”“But, but, but I live with two vampires?” Maru stuttered, not knowing what is the issue. “They have been very nice to me, really! Like, like Choi-nim always cooks lots for me! And, and-”“That’s because you’re just a kid, Maru.” Ignatio sighed. “There isn't anything they can feed off from you right now, but it will be different when you grow up."Maru just stared at him blankly."Look, Maru. I've seen many vampires before." Ignatio shook his head, somehow sounding a little sad. "Even the ones who seem to be nice, in the end they are just monsters who treat humans like food-""But, but, but! But they have been really very nice to me, they have really been really nice to me!" Maru cried, tugging Ignatio's hand. "Even big Gammy-nim and Mano-nim have been really nice to me, ah, I, I'll bring you to them, you'll see they are really very nice monsters!"There's a light chuckle, and before Maru could react, he found himself in Ignatio's arms? The man is shaking a little, and he feels a little different now? But at the same time, Choi appeared before them, smiling."Choi-nim!" He called out happily, but Ignatio's hugging him tight in his arms and not allowing him to get closer to the black haired vampire."You vampire scum." Ignatio snarled, his voice dripping with hatred. Maru clasped his ears, the venom in the voice making him uncomfortable. “Brainwashing little kids, huh, you vampires are all despicable bastards!”“I can assure you we have been nothing but nice to Maru. Isn’t that so, Maru?” Choi asked, his eyes twinkling merrily. Maru nodded furiously. But before he could say anything, Ignatio gave a low growl and struck Choi hard. Maru squeaked in surprise and grabbed onto Ignatio’s arm hard, afraid that he might fall off.Ignatio kept trying to hit Choi with something, it looks like a cross with a sharpened end? But Choi’s blocking all of his strikes with his kicks, and from his wide grin he looks like he’s enjoying himself. One firm kick and the cross flew off, but it shot back to Ignatio’s hand, cutting a deep gash on Choi’s leg.“Choi-nim?!” Maru cried out horrified, but Choi just laughed. Although there is some sizzling on the wound, it soon healed and vanished, while the tear on Choi’s pants still remained. Dodging Ignatio’s strike, Choi got close enough to pet Maru on the head, before jumping back to not get hit.“Stop fooling around and let me kill you!” Ignatio roared. Maru recoiled from that, letting go of his grip on Ignatio’s hand. He easily slid out from Ignatio’s arm since Ignatio is too occupied with fighting Choi, landing on his feet.“Iggy-nim, Choi-nim, please stop fighting!” Maru cried out, while trying hard to stay out of their way. A beam of light shot out from the device that materialised on Ignatio’s hand, shooting pass him and blowing a huge hole where Choi was. Maru’s jaw dropped, and he could only look on dumbly as Choi reappeared beside the gaping hole through the trees, his grin getting wider.“Come on, is that all you can do?” Choi taunted, his voice sounding like Eun Yul when he’s egging the taller vampire for a fight. Ignatio only growled in reply. “That gun of yours, that looks like something fun, but you can’t shoot with it so quickly again right?”Ignatio didn’t reply, he instead used that gun as a weapon, hitting Choi hard with it. Choi blocked it with his shoe, sending a loud clang echoing in the forest. Ignatio snarled, his eyes turning a glowing orange. He felt much different from the lost man Maru met, so much his mind is screaming for Maru to run. But he doesn't want to leave, what if, what if Choi gets injured or even killed by Ignatio? From Ignatio’s voice, the hatred in it told him he won’t give up that easily, and if he fires his gun again Choi might get seriously injured./It’s alright, Maru-/Choi petted him on the head again, but Ignatio quickly grabbed him by the hand and he is being held tight by the light hair man.“Keep your dirty hands off the kid!” There is a tinge of protectiveness in Ignatio’s voice which told Maru he isn’t really a bad person, but then he fired his gun at Choi who didn’t managed to get out of the way and then there was a hole where his right shoulder and arm was and he looked shocked and Ignatio’s rushing in to stab him with that sharpened cross and he has to do something to stop Ignatio from hurting his Choi-nim anymore and so he pushed himself away from Ignatio and tried to protect Choi- stop Ignatio- he clenched his fists and his eyes shut and tried to- Everything became silent.He’s shaking, a little cold?Maru slowly opened an eye, Ignatio looked… shocked? Frightened? The light hair man stumbled a few steps back, and collapsed on the ground, eyes wide with horror.“Ig, Iggy… nim…?” He asked, but why, why does he feel a bit strange?A little bit… not right?He looked down, the cross… is a little bit too near? Sticking out of his tummy? What is happening? Suddenly, there was this deafening roar, and everything went black.
----- CHAPTER BREAK -----
Watching a very familiar figure getting more and more lost in his forest, Eun Yul grinned./ It isn’t like you to toy with your prey like this, Eun Yul? / Choi commented, while looking an eye out for Maru. / You never tire them out before fighting them? // Nah, this’ someone different, / he snorted. / These twins are fun to mess with, but too bad it’s only one of them this time. // Good to know you’re having fun, but I think Maru’s picked up his sound- Yup, your precious treasure’s going to help that guy out. // Up to him, Ho’s an alright guy, he won’t hurt Maru. // But haven’t you been keeping him trapped for some time? He’s a half, what if he sees Maru as a meal- // I’ve only kept him here for a day!? His vampire side won’t get hungry this easily, at most it's just his human side grumbling. / He turned to Choi who appeared by his side, looking out at the forest over his shoulder. / And you’re the one who’s hungry, just a new pretty face and you’re already smittened. // He does look delicious. / Choi licked his lips, eyes never leaving the two tiny figures wandering in the forest, lost. Eun Yul just rolled his eyes. / Don’t look at me like this, I’m keeping an eye out for Maru too? // As if. And if you dare to look at Maru this lustily I’m cutting your head off. // Yes, yes, I told you I don’t eat kids. / Choi groaned, but perked up suddenly. / Maru’s calling for my help, I’ll lead them back. // Your move. There’s stuff I need to check with Ho anyway, but- // No, don’t alter your forest yet. Maru wants to walk back on his own. // … fine. // Isn’t he just such a sweet little kid? Although this guy’s just a stranger, Maru- // I know. MY KID. // And he’s trying to convince Maru that we are the bad guys? // They did get their entire family wiped out by vampires and turned into such halfs, heck, for the first few years they kept trying to kill me? // And you let them? // They seemed like they had potential, it’s just so bad they stopped trying. Said they had better things to waste their time doing. Maybe they lost interest cos I kept beating them. // Well, you know I’ll never lose interest in you- Ah, I think I better step in? /With that, Choi vanished to join the two lost people in the forest. At least he got his peace back, and with Choi by Maru’s side, he won’t need to worry about his kid. But still, it looks like Ho still isn’t over his prejudice of vampires, and he watched their fight in interest. He seemed to have improved a bit, but-But there is something worrying about having Maru caught in the crossfire between the two. Sure, Choi is a vampire elder, hell if he’d die, double if he’d let Maru get hurt, but for the sake of his heart, he would rather his lovely kid be somewhere further away. At least Maru managed to get free from Ho’s grip, but it is worrying how the kid isn’t getting away. And Choi seems like he is enjoying himself too much to realise the danger Maru is in, he’d better go in and get his precious kid with no self preservation instincts away from these two idiots-Eun Yul had to blink to make sure he isn’t seeing wrongly, because what business has a cross to be sticking through his kid…? His link with Maru turned out only a silent confusion, even the one with Choi went silent too.And then, there was a roar. One of just pure rage. It came from Choi, which meant Choi is losing control of his emotions. Which is kind of the opposite of him, Eun Yul thought as he warp to the clearing the trio are. He knows, he understands well his precious little human kid had been stabbed, and maybe he is in danger of dying, but everything just seemed not to affect him emotionally. Instead, his mind is just listing down logically what he should do.First, break Choi up from whatever this berserk state is. His roar knocked out Maru, and the tiny kid is lying unconscious on the ground on his side. He isn’t in too much danger yet, the cross still stuck in his body and preventing blood loss, so he is fine for now. And Ho’s just staring at Maru in shock, his mind most probably stopped working. As long as he doesn’t try to remove his cross from Maru’s body there’s no need to care about him. Which meant, he can focus all his attention on Choi, which he severely needs seeming how much stronger Choi is than him usually, and now fueled with rage by Maru being hurt… Well, he just have to try.Summoning his blades, he rushed at Choi. The taller vampire didn’t seem to recognise him, eyes dull. One kick of his sent most of his blades flying, and Eun Yul barely had enough time to block before another powerful kick came his way. That sent him flying, but he dug his heels in the ground, stopping himself from ending up too far away. He summoned his swords back, they were easily dispelled by Choi’s kicks easily, but gave him enough distraction to hit Choi hard on the head with the side of his sword."Wake up you idiot, are you going to let Maru die like this!?" He scream, shouted into Choi’s ear, and that broke Choi from whatever trance he was in. Though Choi’s legs still managed to land a hard kick on his chest, and he is sent flying again."Ah, Eun Yul-""Maru!" Eun Yul snapped. Though struggling to climb to his feet, feeling a couple of things broken or bursted in his body, he still pointed towards his kid. One look at the fallen body Choi turned paler, frantically rushing to the kid’s side. He doesn’t seemed to know what to do, a stark difference from the normal calmer and more mature vampire he knew that Eu Yul can't help rolling his eyes again."Choi. Go get help. The doctor wannabe." He snapped, having difficulties getting his words out. Looks like Choi had hit him much harder than their usual sparring sessions, and he’d love to make the payback as painful as he could, but that would have to wait till Maru’s no longer in danger. Choi just stared at him blankly. "Look for Mano you idiot!"At least that made some sense to Choi, and he cradled the tiny body in arm before vanishing."Yul, is that you…?" Ho climbed to his feet shakingly, and made his way over. His hands are shaking, his face is pale, and Eun Yul can just smell the fear in him. But when a hand is offered to him, Eun Yul took it. "I, I hadn’t meant to, that kid just jump, jump out and I can’t stop myself, I just…""I saw. And that’s my kid." Eun Yul growled as Ho grow even paler. "And I can’t move so much, you be my support. And no, you have no right to complain after what you’ve done."Ho nodded unwillingly, and wrapped a hand around Eun Yul’s waist to support him. With a snap, Eun Yul warped both of them to where his kid is.It was yet another night where he was dreaming about his teacher, but somehow his teacher’s face is blank and it started to look more and more like-"Mano! Mano, are you awake, Mano, please save Maru!"With that sudden cry he is jolted from his dream. Sitting up on the bed, he sees a kid being held out towards him. Maru? Choi’s looking especially worried, and for Maru-"Why is there a cross sticking out of your kid." He asked, not really expecting a reply. "You do know he is human-""Please, please just save him! Maru’s just a kid, please don’t let him die!" Choi didn’t seem like he heard any of his words, and even if he did, he is panicking too much to answer him."Fine, stop waving your kid around in my face?! Just give me a minute, what’s up with you people barging in at night?!" Grumbling, Mano climbed out of bed, and pulled a nearby drawer."Maru just jumped out from nowhere and I wasn’t able to stop him and I wasn’t able to protect him-""You shut up." He pointed a scalpel at Choi’s neck. "I need to focus to save Maru."He noted with satisfaction as Choi gulped and shut his mouth, the first time ever having any advantage over the elder vampire, but he doesn’t have too much time to enjoy the moment. Retrieving Maru from Choi’s shaking hands, he set the child on the drawer.Maru’s injury didn’t look good. The cross pierced through his stomach and intestine, he would have to be very careful-/ Do you need help? / Gamunbi asked, though he appeared by his side without waiting for an answer. Mano just snorted. Vampires, always coming and leaving as they please. "Oi dad, you can do something about that nervous wreck, he is getting on my nerves." He said, pointing over to Choi pacing around the room."‘Dad’ isn’t supposed to be a nickname, Mano." Gamunbi admonished lightly, and Mano returned his attention to Maru, ignoring the both of them. He’ll need to remove the cross slowly, mending the gaps caused one by one to make sure Maru doesn’t die of bleeding or anything. He would need-Two presence appeared in his room, and suddenly, his body started spazzing. He is shaking involuntarily, cold sweat rolling down his body."Eun Yul, quell your aura." Gamunbi ordered. So the BaekJung is here too, and someone else he doesn’t recognised. And that guy’s being forced to kneel on the floor, he must have something to do with Maru’s injury. The BaekJung spat and quelled his aura, and at least his shaking stopped."This’ the guy who skewered Maru, feel free to use any spare parts you need from him." He snapped while glaring at all of them there."I’ll take note to." Mano remarked neutrally, turning his focus back to Maru. He’d just have to remove the cross slowly-As he touched it, he felt a burning sensation on his fingers. Is it because he had taken some of Gamunbi’s blood that he is becoming more of a vampire, that such things like crosses will hurt him?/ It’s best that you don’t touch that further. / Gamunbi spoke to him through their link. Mano nodded./ Henry’s just going to jerk the cross out, remind me to finetune his muscles more. And Gabi and Garam’s going to panic and cry if they see Maru injured. // It won't hurt me that much, but it's best if I keep an eye on this bunch here.. /Mano frowned. Gamunbi isn't wrong, he trusts the vampire to keep the two problematic people in check, at least for now. That leaves the guy kneeling on the floor. He nudge him with foot. "Oi you. You stabbed Maru with this cross right."The guy grew a few shades paler and looked away guilty, answering with a soft "yeah.""Good, so that means you can actually touch this thing." He motioned for that guy to come closer, and glared till the BaekJung gave a nod for him to proceed. "I’m going to mend this kid’s wounds one, you pull out the cross slowly, get it.""But, but I-""That or this kid dies. Your choice." Mano grinned at him, baring all his teeth, and he shrunk back a little."I, I get it." That guy gulped and touched the cross. His hands are still shaking a little, and…"Mano… nim… I, am I, going to die?" A soft and quivering voice asked, so Maru had regained consciousness? Immediately BaekJung is much closer than he wants that guy ever to be for the rest of his life."You won’t die, Maru. I won’t let you die." BaekJung spoke to the child so tenderly he felt like puking, and he could only breathe normally only when Gamunbi pulled him away."I won’t let you die either, Maru." Mano said while petting Maru on the head. "And you’ve seen what I can do before right? You won’t die."Maru nodded, big round tears rolled down his face, but he bravely bit back any cries. Even that guy who stabbed Maru held his hand encouragingly."Good. Oi you, now start pulling slowly- No, not so fast- Stop right there! Good. Now stay there till I tell you to move." Forming a pair of scalpels in his hands, one red one green, Mano weaved them around Maru’s wounds, putting his magic into them to make them close. Working from the inside to the outside, he made sure everything the cross passed through is sealed up to the cross itself, before motioning for the cross to be removed a little. It is a tedious process, and he had to focus, only stopping for a moment to take a breather. That was a mistake as he found himself suddenly sitting on the floor, with the room somehow spinning around him."Here, drink." A wrist is offered to him, pressed against his mouth, and he bit down by reflex. As blood flowed into his mouth he drank deeply, feeding a hunger he never knew he had. To subject himself to this just to save a kid’s life, he had never imagined this is how his life will turned out. Although he had never imagined being kicked out of the place he called home and then being adopted into a strange family of a vampire, one zombie, and two dragons. When his body finally isn’t protesting that it is hungry, he ran his tongue over the puncture marks he made, sealing them up. He felt a bit different, a bit… more powerful./ Thanks dad. /There’s just a soft chuckle which he didn’t care to retort back, and returned his focus to Maru. He is hearing soft sobs now, and that guy is still softly telling him it is alright, he will be fine. He just blocked out that voice, and focus on mending the rest of Maru’s wounds. Having fed so much from Gamunbi, it didn’t strain him as much to use his scalpels, and he is surprised how much easier it is to mend the remaining sections. The entire cross is removed from Maru’s body, and immediately the small kid wailed. Well, that isn’t his issue anymore."You’ve done great, Mano." Gamunbi patted him on the shoulder. He looks a bit tired, was it because of his feeding?"Of course I’ve done great. Were you expecting any less from me!?" He snorted, a little pleased with himself at being praised, but trying not to appear too happy at that. He isn't that childish after all."I expected you to save Maru's life, and you did that. But next time, don't almost die doing that." Gamunbi pointed out, and Mano decided to pretend he didn’t hear that. / I need to rest for now, I trust you should be able to handle things here on your own for now- // Yeah, yeah, I know, you look like crap. Go already. / He waved dismissively. Gamunbi vanished from the room immediately, leaving him to kick out three trespassers. Maru he doesn't mind, if he doesn't cry he's good company, but hell if he is letting the other three remain there."Oi, you guys done yet," he snapped. The BaekJung glared at him for a second, before quickly turning back his attention to the still crying kid in his arms."Idiots, we're heading back." He called, and in an instant his room is emptied. Mano would love to complain about how they just come and leave as they please, but his fatigue has finally up with him after the initial euphoria of getting so much power. And he was thinking he had become more powerful after taking so much blood. Sigh.Hopefully they won't be back anytime soon-The moment his head hit the pillow he is out cold."It's alright now, Maru." Eun Yul hugged his crying kid close, patting him on the back. It is heartbreaking to hear the small kid so terrified, and it doesn't help to have two idiots there who just didn't know what to do."Oi Choi." He called out, and put Maru in his hands. Immediately Maru cried even harder, and Choi hugged him tight."Maru, I'm sorry, I'm sorry, I'm sorry…" Choi repeated over and over again, running his hands over Maru's face, resting on his chest and feeling that tiny heart beating. "I should have protected you."Whatever Maru had wanted to say, he wasn't able to get it out before he wailed even louder. Looks like Choi isn't even able to comfort Maru in his current state, how useless. Though he has to say the same for himself, although Maru is well and alive now, and that is all that matters, but he is shaking somehow.Or maybe he's just hungry. Some food might just help with the situation. Grabbing his kid back, with Choi making a weak protest, he glared."Go cook something, I'm hungry.""But Maru-""Are you hungry, Maru?" He turned towards the kid in his arms, despite still sobbing, Maru gave a very small and hesitating nod."You're hungry, Maru? I, I'll cook a big feast for you, just wait for me for a while, alright?" Choi ruffled Maru's hair before vanishing off to the kitchen. Maru still sobbed, but he must be tired out, his sobs getting softer."That's your kid, Yul?" Ho asked softly. One glare and he's back to kneeling on the floor."Eun, Eun Yul-nim…?" Maru asked between his sobs, rubbing tears off his eyes. "Can I, can I, sob, talk to Iggy-nim?"/ You're using that name for kids huh? / Eun Yul asked, but Ho didn't answer. He set Maru down on the floor, but kept a hand on his shoulder."Look, if you dare draw your weapon again around my kid, I'm turning you into sashimi." He warned Ho, and that half vampire nodded. Maru took an unsure step forward."Um, Iggy-nim, please, um, please, please don't try to fight Choi-nim! He and Eun Yul-nim, they have really, really been really nice to me!" Maru cried, begging, despite nearly being killed by Ho. He really has to drill some form of self preservation into his kid somehow soon."Yeah, I know." Ho patted Maru on the head with a weak smile. "They were really worried about you, they aren't evil vampires. Sorry for that, I won't be fighting them.""So, so, you won’t, sob, you won’t fight with them anymore? Really?" Maru looked up at him, and as he nodded, a very small smile grew on his face. "Thank, thank you, Iggy-nim!"Maru gave him a small hug, before running back to Eun Yul's side. Eun Yul immediately hoisted him up in his arms."You're just too nice to everyone, Maru," he sighed, hugging Maru tight. "Even though this idiot almost killed you, you don't even hate him?!"Immediately Ho repeated he is sorry over and over again, but Maru just looked down."Eun, Eun Yul-nim… I… You and Choi-nim are very important to me, I, I cannot lose any of you! I really cannot lose any of you!" Maru started sobbing again although he had almost stopped, and Eun Yul patted him comfortingly on the back. "But I, I wasn't able to do anything, I thought I'm going to die and it is even more scary!"Tiny fingers grabbed his shirt tight and Maru buried himself in them, crying. His entire body is shaking, Maru must have been really scared."We won't die that easily, Maru." Choi appeared beside him, smelling like freshly cooked food. "Here, food is ready-"Somehow, upon hearing Choi, Maru cried even louder, that the elder vampire froze in place. Eun Yul gently pried the small kid's fingers from his shirt, and put him in Choi's hands, who kissed the crying kid lightly on the hair before wrapping his arms around Maru."Nothing can kill us that easily, Maru," Eun Yul told his child while ruffling his hair. "Really.""... Really?""Really. We are monsters after all, and Ho here's a lot weaker than you think he is." He ignored the weak protest Ho made. "But Maru, you are human. You are not like us. If anything happens to you, you'll die, and we'll be really sad.""Eun Yul-nim… Choi-nim..." Maru looked even more scared, and Choi hugged him tighter."We can talk about this later, you're hungry right, Maru? I've cooked lots for you." Choi forced a smile for the small kid, and was taken aback when Maru shook his head."Choi, Choi-nim, I, I'm not hungry, but Iggy-nim is very hungry! Please, please let him have some food!"Eun Yul almost dropped his jaw and he shook his head. Maru is just too nice for his own good, and one day, he is worried that will get his tiny little treasure killed."Yeah yeah, he can eat too, but you should eat a bit too, Maru." Glaring at Ho, he grabbed the half vampire by the collar and warped to the dining room, leaving Choi to follow along.For his precious little kid, Choi cooked a huge sumptuous spread, one much bigger than what he usually cooks. Although he knew Maru wouldn’t be able to eat that much, cooking was the only way he could take the guilt off his mind. It stung a bit when Maru said he isn’t hungry, and wanted Ho to eat instead, and he had to remind himself that Maru is always so kind hearted.“Even if you are not hungry, just eat a bit, please?” Choi asked. Maru nodded lightly, and he warped both of them to the dining room to join Ho and Eun Yul.Both are busy digging into the food, though Ho met his eyes and froze on the spot./ Just eat, Maru asked for you to have food. Don’t break his heart. /Ho nodded and returned to his plate, taking a bit more of each dish and adding to his plate. Choi set Maru on his lap and took a few pieces of everything on the dish in front of him."Maru…" He kept a hand on Maru's wrist, the tiny pulse giving him a small comfort that his kid is still alive. "Don't try anything this dangerous again, alright? You really scared me, Maru."As Maru looked like he is going to cry again, he quickly popped a piece of braised meat into Maru's mouth, distracting the little kid."You're always so nice and so sweet, Maru, if anything happens to you I really won't know what to do…" He sighed, stuffing Maru with a piece of vegetable. "Though I should have had gotten you to safety first too-"As Maru looked up at him with teary eyes and pressed a piece of meat on his lips, he figured he should eat in silence too.Ho finished eating first, looking much more sated than before. However, the cloud of guilt still hung over his face. He walked over, and Maru quickly picked up a piece of meat with his fork, really to stuff it in someone’s mouth."Here, take a seat." Choi gestured at the chair next to him, and Ho sat down fidgeting."This, the food's delicious, thanks. I, I, I'm sorry-" Immediately Maru reached out and pressed that piece of braised meat into Ho's mouth, catching him by surprise."Maru just learnt how to stop anyone from saying unnecessary things,” Choi chuckled softly, only to have a piece of meat pressed to his lips. He took the fork from Maru’s fingers, and feed it to Maru instead. "It's alright, Maru, we're just going to talk, we won't fight."Maru chewed quietly, keeping his eyes on the both of them."Maru's a really nice kid, don't you agree?" Choi asked Ho, eyes still on his kid. Immediately Maru’s ears turned bright red, and he looked down shyly."The two of you really love him very much." Ho pointed out, and Maru nodded frantically."Of course. He's our lovely treasure.” As Maru turned redder, a happy smile growing on his face, Choi hugged him close.“How, how did the two of you end up with him?” Ho asked, curious. “Vampires usually take in humans to groom them or to feed on them.”“Maru was kept as a playtoy by humans.” Choi explained, eyes never leaving Maru. Ho gave a soft gasp. “He managed to escape somehow, and Eun Yul took him in. I’m just here to make sure there’s food for him, teach him, and play with him. He’s just a small kid, he needs all the love we can give to him.”“Choi-nim, I love the two of you too!” Maru beamed at him, and Choi felt his heart hurt badly. The guilt that he wasn’t able to stop the poor kid from nearly being killed weighted on him, yet despite that, Maru still loves him.“I know, Maru. I know.” He smiled, lifting Maru up and bumping his nose against Maru’s. “I won’t ever let you get hurt like this again, I promise.”That only caused Maru to turn even redder, and when he set the small kid back down, Maru immediately climbed down from his lap and ran to Eun Yul. He is promptly scooped up and placed on the seat Ho previously vacated.“He gave me cookies when he found out I’m hungry.” Ho recounted. “I, I really, I really never thought of hurting him.”“If you had, you wouldn’t have been alive right now.” Choi smiled as he watched Eun Yul heap a mountainful of food for Maru. “In fact, the only reason why you are still alive is that Maru will be sad if you suddenly vanish for no reason.”Ho gulped nervously, nodding./ Don’t worry, I will let you return home alive. I wasn’t able to protect my kid, I don’t have any right to raise my hand against you. / Choi spoke to him in his mind, not wanting Maru to overhear what they are talking about. / Eun Yul’s going to be a different problem totally, he seems very intent on turning you into sashimi. /Ignoring how Ho is squirming at his seat, Choi kept watching Maru squeak and protest about the amount of food he is getting, and Eun Yul wanting him to eat more and recover from his shock faster.That night, Ho’s tossed to one of the guest rooms in the castle, with Eun Yul warning sternly he will deal with him in the morning. Despite looking like he wants to run off any moment, Ho instead steeled his will and promised to stay and accept any punishment that Eun Yul would dish out to him. Maru had long since fell asleep in Choi’s arms, if he had been awake he would have helped say a few words for Ho, he’s sure. But after this long day, the only thing Choi wanted is just to sleep, with his precious treasure alive in his arms./ What makes you think I don’t want that too. / Eun Yul snapped, retrieving his kid from him. / Seriously, Maru really needs better survival instincts, and a much better bodyguard. // I know. / Choi sighed. / It’s late, let’s continue tomorrow. /Eun Yul wanted to protest, but stopped as Maru murmured his name in his sleep.“Yes yes, we’ll going to bed now.” He kissed Maru lightly on the head, and calling away whatever bad dreams that may come. “Sleep well Maru.”
----- CHAPTER BREAK -----
Choi was the first to wake in the morning. Immediately he checked out his kid. Maru's still asleep, his tiny hand warm holding onto his. He is still alive, still breathing. Though the small kid soon yawned and rubbed his eyes, he must have woken Maru up."Goo, good morning Choi-nim…" Maru murmured sleepily, ready to climb up from the bed and start his day. But Eun Yul snaked an arm around his kid and pulled him back into his embrace, and those sleepy orange eyes soon shut./ Go cook, don't you dare wake us up before food's ready. / Eun Yul complained, while planting a soft kiss on Maru's locks. Looks like the vampire is hungry, and there is no use trying to talk to him when that happens. As much as he'd rather have Maru around while he is cooking, Maru does look very snug and comfortable in Eun Yul's arms, sleeping very soundly. Maybe if he cooks more he might be able to hug the small kid a bit more while Eun Yul's distracted by food-/ No. /Eun Yul's friend got to the kitchen after he started cooking, guided to the location by his nose."You're hungry?" Choi asked, flipping a sausage over and tossing it over with his spatula."Not really but thanks dude- Ah hot hot hot!" Ho tossed the sausage from hand to hand, before finally chomping down on it when it didn't seem that hot anymore."Take a seat first, Eun Yul's only going to be up after the food's ready." He gestured over to the dining table, and a chair slide out. Ho turned it around and sat down on it."So like, the two of you really are just taking care of Maru? No ulterior motives?" The half vampire asked. There isn't suspicion in his voice, he just needs more confirmation from them?"Yes." He nodded, and Ho looked visibly more relaxed. "Maru's such a lovely kid, we really just want to make him happy. When we first found him he is a scared little kid just skin and bones…"He trailed off, remembering how frightened Maru was when he first saw him, and how Eun Yul nearly scared him to death. It was because of them that Maru is able to smile so brightly, too brightly for both of them to take sometimes, and because of his mistake that lovely smile was almost extinguished forever."Yo dude, you alright?" Ho waved a hand in front of his face, concerned."Yeah, I'm fine." Choi shook his head, absentmindedly cracking a couple of eggs into his saucepan. "Say, you ever have a kid die on you before?""No!" Ho protested, making a face. "We don't kill kids. Even when we find those brainwashed by vampires, we try to tie them up or knock them out before bringing them back to mom and pops."“Hm?” Choi asked, curious.“Sooyang and Chaeeun, you heard of them before?” Ho asked. “They’re like these two scatterbrained lovebirds who really love kids?”“Those two babies?” Choi rubbed his chin, flipping the eggs over. “They’re your parents?”“Long story man,” Ignatio sighed. “They thought we’re normal kids and took us in, but they’re like just so, just so clueless that we’re just hanging around to protect them instead?!?”"... Huh?" Choi blinked, there’s some strange way to describe the two vampires? At the same time, he held up a spare saucepan just as a sword pierced through it. One firm flick on the sword is sent flying for the ceiling, embedding itself there."Oi, stop flirting and cook- Maru?!" Eun Yul's complaint is cut off when the small kid walking beside him suddenly burrowed under his coat, hugging his leg tight. He quickly grabbed the small kid and held him tight in his arms."It's alright, Maru, I'm here, I won't let anyone or anything hurt you." Eun Yul cooed gently, rubbing his back as the tiny body trembled. It felt similar to the time when Maru was scared by Eun Yul's shadow hound, the poor kid was terrified of all forms of violence around him. Looks like they will have to tone it down for a while, or keep it out of sight and earshot from Maru."Here, Maru," he called out to the small kid, and Maru turned to look at him, refusing to let go of Eun Yul’s shirt. He popped a small piece of sausage into Maru’s mouth. "We'll protect you, so don't worry and join us for breakfast?"Maru chewed down on the offered piece, and hesitatingly reached out for his hand. But that very moment Eun Yul's sword dropped down from the ceiling and clattered noisily on the floor, and Eun Yul’s back to having a terrified child clinging onto him refusing to let go no matter what."Oi, cook faster!" Eun Yul complained, dismissing his sword. It vanished from the spot, but didn’t appear to comfort Maru any. He took a seat beside Ho, still hugging Maru close and rubbing him on the back. The small kid didn’t seem like he wants to let go anytime soon."You're jealous," Ho pointed out, helping himself to another piece of sausage. Choi whacked down hard with his spatula without looking, sighing."I want Maru to cling on to me too…"Ho repeated over and over again that the food is amazing, it is delicious, and he had never eaten anything that nice before. He seemed much more relaxed, and even managed to chat with Maru a little, agreeing with Maru that the food is great, and thanking him when the small kid tried to put more food on his plate. Even though Eun Yul kept glaring at him, the light hair man is still very easy going and cheerful around them, no wonder they somehow became friends.“Are you feeling any better, Maru?” Ho smiled and ruffled Maru’s hair, as the small kid picked up a piece of sausage and tried to offer it to him again.“Um Iggy-nim, my tummy still hurts a little-”Immediately the four of them are transported to Gamunbi’s domain. Ho fell to the ground as the chair underneath him vanished, Choi still had his fork and knife in hand but managed to find his footing, while Eun Yul had Maru in his hands shoving him in front of the very amused Gamunbi. The elder still looked pale though and tired; Garam and Gabi quickly ran to his sides and grabbed his hands protectively.“Get your wannabe doctor out.” Eun Yul demanded with a snarl, while Maru waved shyly at Gamunbi.“Mano isn’t up yet,” Gamunbi smiled back at Maru, but his tone towards Eun Yul is hostile, icy even. “He exhausted himself thoroughly saving your kid’s life, let him rest.”Choi put a firm hand on Eun Yul’s shoulder too.“Eun Yul listen-”“Look, Maru said his tummy still hurts!” Eun Yul shouted, cutting him off. "Get the fucking doctor out now !"“Can’t a person rest in peace around here?!” Mano bellowed, though his voice turned out more hoarse than intimidating. He staggered into the dining room, with Henry supporting him. Despite looking pale and being unsteady on his feet, Eun Yul still shoved Maru into his face.“Look, Maru said-”“I heard that clearly!” Mano snapped at him, the anger in that voice scaring Maru and caused the little kid to clap his hands to his ears. Garam let go of Gamunbi and ran in front of Mano, meeping loudly at Eun Yul. Her twin remained behind, but barred her teeth at the white hair vampire.“Look I hadn’t surpassed Teacher any bit yet, if you want nothing to hurt go look for him! It’s already good enough I stopped your little kid from dying!”The shouting, together with the word ‘dying’, caused Maru to burst into tears.“Maru!?” Eun Yul’s focus quickly returned to his kid, and Choi took the chance to drag him away from Mano. Both Gamunbi and Henry helped Mano over to a chair, while Garam and Gabi kept glaring at Eun Yul, as if daring him to get any closer.“I, I don’t want to, I don’t want to die Eun Yul-nim…” Maru cried, grabbing onto his shirt tight.“Maru, it’s alright, I won’t let you die.” Eun Yul hugged the small, frightened kid tight in his arms, pressing Maru’s head against his chest. Choi petted him on the head, trying to comfort the little kid too.“Look, Maru.” Mano spoke tiredly from the seat. “You are fine now, you’re not going to die.”That got Maru to look up hesitatingly, although he is still sobbing.“You are fine,” Mano repeated. “The wound will still hurt from time to time for around a week, I’m not that good yet. Just avoid anything strenuous for this month.”“m’Kay…?” Maru answered timidly, not seeming to understand Mano’s words.“Look just rest for a month and you’ll be fully recovered,” Mano rolled his eyes. “Seriously does no one here know how to deal with surgery patients?!”Seeing the blank looks from everyone around him Mano just groaned.“Alright, there, now go back already! Or you need me to tell you how to get back!?” Mano glared at them, and Ho nodded uncomfortably."We should probably be heading back?" The half vampire offered, though no one seemed to be paying any attention to him. Eun Yul's still cooing and wiping away Maru's tears, trying to convince the kid everything is fine, while Choi walked up to Mano. "No?""Mano, thank you, really, thank you for saving Maru's life." Choi bowed low towards Mano, and he just smirked."You owe me one now, Choi." Mano grinned widely, barring all teeth. Immediately that earned him a smack on the head by Gamunbi. Garam meeped and tried to pull him away from Mano."Mano, you don't put an elder in your favour if you want to live." Despite admonishing Mano, Gamunbi glared at Choi, daring him to make a move."Come on, I haven't even said anything?" Choi groaned. He shook his head and got ready to leave, but at the same time, Yeon Hwa rushed in."Ah, sorry I'm late! My hair isn't agreeing with me!" The pink hair dragon complained, still working a comb through her curls. Despite being all frizzy haired, her eyes quickly narrowed when she spotted Ho standing aside and trying to appear inconspicuous."You are the one who nearly killed Maru." Yeon Hwa accused. Maru burst into tears again in Eun Yul's arms, and the adult dragon gulped. She pulled out a couple of candies and tried to offer them to Maru, but it didn’t do anything to stop Maru’s cries."Let’s talk somewhere else," Gamunbi offered. Yeon Hwa and Choi nodded, allowed Gamunbi to warp them to another part of his domain, with Ho in tow. Eun Yul is left behind with the other kids, though he hadn't cared much about that, busy trying to get Maru to stop crying."So, no mention of anything related to dying around Maru?" Yeon Hwa asked Choi guiltily as they appeared in the room with the dragon egg. Choi nodded."He's still very spooked, but seeing what he went through it's best not to mention it around him.""But what exactly happened to Maru?" The dragon asked curiously. "Gamunbi just said he got injured, and Mano healed him, but he looked like he almost died in the process?""Well…" Choi turned towards Ho, a grin growing on his face. Ho took a few steps back and paled. "This is Eun Yul's friend Ho, and he turned Maru into a kiddy skewer.""I, I hadn't meant it, it was an accident!" He took a few more steps backwards as Yeon Hwa processed what Choi just said."A kiddy… skewer?" She asked, turning paler as Choi made a stabbing motion with his hand. "What, what the fuck ?!""I really hadn't meant it!" Ho shrieked as he backed off into a wall, watching on horror as Yeon Hwa slowly morphed into her dragon form. Scaly wings sprouting out from her back, her hands thickened with scales./ Just saying, you should most probably run. / Gamunbi told Ho. / Yeon Hwa isn't someone me or Choi is able to stop. /Of course the half vampire ran, but seeing how it is Gamunbi's domain, and the elder appeared to have not made an exits for this area, Ho isn't able to get anywhere./ You're cruel, Gamunbi. // Yeon Hwa's just stressed since you weren't able to hatch the egg. / Gamunbi watched in amusement as Ho is starting to realising something is very wrong with the place. Yeon Hwa fully took her dragon form, roaring in rage, sending fireballs speeding towards Ho. / If you had hatched it- Wait, is that what you are planning?! // It's worth trying, I need the information Yeon Hwa promised to help me check out. / Choi watched the scene before them smiling. Ho finally summoned his gun, though he is using it more as a shield than a weapon, trying to block the fireballs. Choi's itching to join in the fight, but held back remembering it is the reason why they ended up here again."It really is an accident!" Ho screamed, diving for the table in the middle of the room. He grabbed the egg nested on the table, perhaps trying to use it as a shield, only for the egg shell to crack on the contact."Ah…?" Ho blinked. He froze for a split second, quickly withdrawing his hands and leapt a few steps back. Yeon Hwa got to a screeching halt, freezing in place, staring at the broken egg with her mouth agape./ Looks like your gambit worked. / Gamunbi said, watching in amusement as tiny scaly hands reached up and grabbed the edges of the broken eggshell. A sparse mop of red hair soon popped up as a baby dragon pulled himself up, yellow eyes blinking."Meeeeep?" The little dragon asked softly, looking around, then finally resting his eyes on Ho. Ho gulped."It, it's an accident…?" He offered weakly, but the dragon just meeped louder and reached his hands out towards the half vampire."Your kid wants a hug." Choi said, petting Ho on the back."My kid- Huh!? There, there must be something wrong-""MEEEEEP!" The red hair dragon cried out, cutting out Ho's protest. Choi just gave him a push, sending him stumbling forward."MEEP MEEP MEEP MEEEEEP!" The dragon kept crying out. Ho gave a backward look, and Choi nodded, motioning him to go on. Ho walked up to the little dragon, reaching out. The dragon wrapped its scaly fingers around his."Woah, you're warm." Ho gave those fingers a soft squeeze, and the dragon meeped happily at him. Ho then let go, to a very soft and confused meep, before putting his hands around the kid and lifting him up. He made a face."You're heavy," he complained. Gamunbi chuckled."Yeah, dragon kids can be heavy. And they’ll become heavier and more powerful the more they are loved." He watched as Ho hugged the little kid in his chest despite the weight. The tiny dragon meeped merrily, smiling at him, eyes never once leaving him."So like… he's mine now? I'm his daddy? Really?" Ho asked, still sounded very stunned. "Rang's really going to kill me this time…""Yes." Yeon Hwa answered him, sounding very much still in denial, shaking her head. "He's calling you his daddy, but, but why! Why would the egg choose you!""I rather someone much better takes care of the egg, why would you hatch for a kid murderer!" Yeon Hwa complained, petting the little kid on the head, only to get her hand chomped down by the pouting little dragon. "Ouch!""Meeeeeeep!" The dragon squeaked, turning from her and grabbing Ho's arms protectively."Hey kiddo, no biting others!" Ho admonished him lightly, and the baby dragon hung his head down. He meeped apologetically."This, sorry about that, but I," Ho tried to pull the dragon off him, but the kid kept clinging on to him. "I, I really hadn't meant to hurt Maru, and I, um, I'm sorry about the egg? And this kiddo um refuse to let go?""He likes you." Yeon Hwa pouted and sighed. "Well, since he likes you I guess I can let it go this time, but still!! Choi if you had hatched the egg this wouldn't have happened!!"Choi just smiled and dodged the eggshell Yeon Hwa threw in his direction.Yeon Hwa eventually gave out the baby dragon’s name: Yu Jin. Yu Jin stuck to Ho, eating everything that the half vampire fed him. He sat on Ho’s lap obediently, meeping softly from time to time to Gabi and Garam as they petted him on the head. Mano watched Yu Jin with interest, chewing on a scalpel, though with so many dragons around the small kid he couldn’t do anything if he wanted to./ You planned this. / Eun Yul accused, keeping a close eye on Maru while clearing out many plates on the table. His kid joined the twin dragon girls in petting the small kid on the head, looking very much in awe./ You're not the one being pestered each time to hatch the egg, / Choi mused, / and the sooner she returns the sooner she can help gather information for me. // Yeah yeah, and now that he got a kid I can’t kill him?! / Eun Yul glared at Ho, only to get glared back by Ho’s tiny kid. Ho noticed that.“Hey, Yul, ‘bout Maru-”“... just scram, if you or your kid dare to come back here I’ll-” Cutting Ho off, Eun Yul warned, though he didn’t continue with his threat when Choi put a finger on his lips and pointed to the clueless Maru.“Um, please come and visit us one day!” Maru said cheerfully, causing Eun Yul to roll his eyes and pick up Maru in his arms. “Ah, Eun Yul-nim-”Before Maru should say anything else, he and Eun Yul vanished from the place.“Ah, Yul!?” Ho around frantically as Choi chuckled.“Don’t mind him, Eun Yul’s always like this.” He shook his head, “I’ll drop you off near your hometown later, bring Yu Jin over to play with Maru sometime too?”“Yeah… thanks dude,” Ho petted Yu Jin on the head, the docile little dragon meeped happily back at him. “Though like, I got lost for ages, and suddenly I get a kid, I really don’t know how to tell this to Rang when I get back…”“Good luck with that.”
----- CHAPTER BREAK -----
Eun Yul woke up with a start drenched in cold sweat again, plagued by another nightmare. He checked his arms. Yes, his precious kid is still warm and alive in his arms, sleeping very soundly. He's breathing, having a dreamless sleep, and for that moment that's all that matters to him./ You're the one hugging Maru, but you're the one having nightmares. / Choi pointed out, moving his hand from the sleeping kid's back and ruffling his hair. / Sleep, nothing will happen to him right now. // You think I don't want to?! / Eun Yul snapped, pulling Maru closer to his chest. / You think I want to keep seeing Maru die in my dreams?! /Choi didn't reply to that, but he could feel the pang of guilt from the elder vampire. / He's just such a tiny kid, if anything happens to him... / Eun Yul sighed softly, twitching as Maru shifted a little in his arms. The little kid soon stopped moving, settling in this new position. At least he didn't wake Maru up, the small kid needs all the rest he can get and recover from his experience faster./ If it comes down to it, I'll turn him. / Choi ruffled Maru's hair absentmindedly. / It's not ideal to make him a child forever, but I won't let him die. // I'll rather it not come down to that at all?! // I know, he shouldn't even have to experience this... /Watching his sleeping kid, proding his mind again to make sure Maru's not having any nightmares haunting his dreams, Eun Yul can't help but feel envious at how soundly he is sleeping. It would take sometime for the nightmares to pass for himself, and before that day comes, he's not letting go for his precious little treasure./ Let me hug him too? // No. /After some discussion, both Eun Yul and Choi agreed that they should teach Maru something to protect himself. Of course the first thing he should do is to run for safety, failing that then he should try protecting himself, but all Maru understood about running for safety is to grab hold of the closest leg to him and not let go. Eun Yul had to admit it was kind of adorable, having a tiny koala clinging to his leg as he walked about, but it isn’t what he wants if any of them are involved in any fights. Which is why Choi is trying to teach Maru to summon a shield to protect himself from being stabbed.“Here, this is how a shield looks like, try picturing it in your mind.” Choi pulled out a metal shield from somewhere in his castle, letting Maru play with it and understand what it is like. “Once you can picture it in your mind, try calling it out, like how you called out a flame.”“Um, shield… shield…” Clenching his eyes shut tight, it took several attempts before Maru finally managed to conjure anything up, while thoroughly exhausting himself. He had only managed to call up a small piece of white ribbon, doesn’t look any useful to protect himself against anything. At least it doesn't seem to be vanishing anytime soon, unlike the flames he called up.“Maru, this won’t protect you-”/ Encourage him a little! Can’t you see Maru’s trying his best!? / Choi shouted at him in his mind, and Eun Yul grimaced./ Yeah, yeah, I’m getting to that. /“Hm, it's not bad you can call up this ribbon, but Maru, how is this going to protect you?” He pulled the ribbon by its ends, it seemed strong enough to not tear in his hands, and appears quite flexible too. Maru just looked between him and the ribbon blankly.“Um… I don’t know…” Maru stared at the ribbon he summoned, taking it from Eun Yul’s hands. He took it by the tail and wriggled it a bit, then suddenly lit up with a thought. “Ah, Eun Yul-nim, can you, can you please call up your sword?”“My sword?” One easily appeared beside him, and Maru went up to it. Eun Yul immediately dulled his blade, not wanting his kid to cut himself, and watched in astonishment as Maru tied the ribbon into a bow around his sword.“There, um, so, um, Eun Yul-nim, please, please don’t kill me?” Seeing that bright innocent smile on Maru’s face, and feeling Choi groaning through their link, Eun Yul wondered if they will ever be successful in teaching Maru to protect himself."Ah, the ribbon vanished..."They were having lunch when Gamunbi sensed two vaguely familiar presences nearing his domain. He opened out his area to the three guests, allowing his forest to part. Seeing how they included one stranger whom he hadn’t met before, instead of letting them into the heart of his domain where his kids are eating, he let them enter some distance away, where he can judge if they meant any harm.“Yo dude!” Ho waved. He’s still wearing that easygoing smile on his face when they first met, not any ounce of malice in him. “Thanks for that, Rang didn’t believe me that we’re in the right place!”“You got lost for weeks trying to find Eun Yul’s place.” The dark hair man behind him smacked him on the back of his head. He seemed more annoyed than anything, appearing just as harmless as Ho for now. “And you came back with a kid.”“No fighting!” The tiny dragon in his hands squeaked, pouting.“No Yu Jin, we’re not fighting,” the man said while ruffling Yu Jin’s hair, a faint smile on his face. He then turned to Gamunbi. “I’m Mu Yeung, the twin of this idiot here. Thanks for putting up with him.”“Gamunbi.” Gamunbi offered his name, satisfied that they didn’t mean any harm for now. He waved them deeper into his domain, just as Gabi and Garam ran out curiously. Both chirped happily when Mu Yeung let Yu Jin down to play with them. “We are just starting lunch, please join us. I’m sure Gabi and Garam would love to play with Yu Jin a bit.”“Of course!” Ho replied cheerily, ignoring the look Mu Yeung shot him. “Actually we’re just trying to find a way to Eun Yul’s place, but food sounds great too!”“If you don’t mind us intruding,” Mu Yeung bowed towards Gamunbi politely, being such an opposite to his twin that Gamunbi chuckled.“Then please make yourselves at home.” With a wave everyone is warped to the dining table, where Mano sat picking at his food, and Henry resting his head on the table, staring at Mano unblinking.“What happened again- Hey twins again.” Mano looked up at them and grinned widely, showing all teeth. “So I can finally cut one up-”In an instant Gabi and Garam are at his side, giving him a firm smack on the head each, while Yu Jin grabbed both of his guardians protectively.“No fighting!” Yu Jin squeaked angrily, glaring at Mano, who just shrugged.“That one's a quick learner," he pointed out waving his spoon around. "Would be more fun to cut open-"Two more smacks by Gabi and Garam and Mano stayed silent, rubbing his head in pain while Henry snickered. Yu Jin clung on to Mu Yeung making frightened little meeps, while Mu Yeung wrapped a protective arm around the small dragon and kept a close eye on Mano. Only when Mano focused on his food instead of frightening his kid did he feed Yu Jin spoonfuls of food. Ho outright ignored them and helped himself to the food."The food's great, it tastes just right?" Mu Yeung asked after tasting a spoonful, looking amazed, and helping himself with more of the food."We're vampires, we have ways to cook so we can enjoy the food. And Choi's cooking is much better, you should try it if you have the chance." Gamunbi replied, though his girls shook their heads frantically."Dad, best!" Gabi complained haltingly, slowly learning to speak other words than just 'Mano'. "Dad food, best!""Da, dada dad, dad, dad dad dad da dad dad!" Her twin complained too, having just recently learnt how to speak, and fixating on the word 'dad' instead."Choi's cooking's much better, you two just-" Mano rolled his eyes at his sisters, though he quickly shut his mouth again when they glared at him."Yup, Choi's food's amazing, though dude, I think I'm seeing why you said dragons are willful back then?" Ho grinned at the sight, while ruffling Yu Jin on the head. "Jin here keeps bossing us around to rest and eat and sleep too?""That's more of the two of you not being able to take care of yourselves." Gamunbi smirked back. "Garam and Gabi took months to learn how to speak, but look at your little kid. He made himself grow up to better take care of the two of you."Both Ho and Mu Yeung looked away guiltily, while little Yu Jin looked from one to the other and tilted his head confused."Eat, eat?" Yu Jin called out. "Eat, Iggy, Mumu?""Yeah, we are eating." Mu Yeung ruffled his hair fondly. "Here, eat some food too.""Eat, eat!" Yu Jin repeated, smiling, and gulped down the spoonful of stew Mu Yeung offered him. They ate in silence after that, with Mano complaining he is full first, then Henry and the twin dragons helping to clear away the dishes when they are done."Garam, Gabi, please take Gammy on a walk. And Henry, please collect herbs." Gamunbi ordered, and his kids nodded. There is frantic yipping when he said the word walk, and Mu Yeung and Ho watched in shock as a huge hound bounced out from the shadows underneath the table, barking excitedly."Here boy, take care of Gabi and Garam." Gamunbi scratched behind the hound's ears, and it nodded frantically, sending splatters of shadowy matter flying about, which quickly faded away. Gammy first bit down on Gabi, and flung her high up in the sky as she squealed happily. She landed nicely on its back, and Gammy did the same for Garam. It is soon gone with one strong leap, as both dragons squealed. Meanwhile Henry walked off into the forest, stomping through the greenery."We should be going too, thanks for the food." Mu Yeung said while trying to get up from his seat. His eyes narrowed when he found out he couldn’t do so. Ho noticed that too, reaching down for something, his weapon?“Don’t worry, I’m not going to keep you here for long.” Gamunbi waved away that unease as Mu Yeung kept his hands tight around Yu Jin. “It seems like you will be in this area often, I’d prefer to know what kind of people I’m dealing with.”“We aren’t here to cause any trouble!” Ho immediately protested weakly, “we’re really looking for Eun Yul, like, to check and see if Maru’s any better? Cos I like, stabbed him?”“Firstly, the two of you are halfs, aren’t you.” Gamunbi ignored that protest, calling up a tea set for those present. One flick on his hand and the teapot poured a cup for each person.“Yes.” Mu Yeung answered, while keeping an eye out on any possible escapes. “Both Ignatio and I are half vampires.”‘Ignatio’? The dark skin blonde nodded, so that’s the name he uses for those not as close to them? Though he did hear Maru refer to him as 'Iggy-nim' previously.“Mano here’s a half too.” Gamunbi pointed over the black hair teen, who is grinning at the twins while biting a scalpel between his teeth. “Though asking you two to get along with him might be a bit impossible.”“Don’t worry, I’ll put you two back together with no issues.” The teen grinned widely, an unnaturally bright gleam in his eyes. The twins immediately shifted a little further away from him.“You and Choi seem like decent people, that one over there’s like scarier than you all combined!” Ignatio complained pointing at Mano, who grinned back at him. He shuddered, ignoring Mano, and took a sip of tea. “Hey, the tea tastes great too!”“I can assure you Eun Yul and even Choi were way worse had you met them in the past.” Gamunbi smiled as he poured himself another cup of tea. “They had mellowed out a lot, but back in the days…”He downed the entire cup, sighing and shaking his head. “Back in those days Eun Yul is all about going on bloody rampages after bloody rampages, because he felt like it, and it is troublesome to stop him.”Both twins paled.“At least now if we stuff him with enough food he usually just goes to sleep?” Mu Yeung said weakly.“Yeah, like he eats everything we have but leaves us alone?” Ignatio agreed too, looks like they’ve really gotten to know Eun Yul well. “And Choi- Hey wait, Choi as in that dude who really dotes on Maru?”“The same one.” Gamunbi nodded, wincing. “He nearly sunk this continent because someone pissed him off, and not to mention the places he wiped the life off.”“What…” Mu Yeung looked stunned at his words, while Ignatio looked like he is going to faint anytime soon.“My god, I, I actually fought him, and I, his kid…” He gulped hard.“... Teacher warned me about angering him.” Mano added in sourly. “Said he isn’t someone I should be pissing off.”“He’s right. Of all people, Saeha would have seen the most of the results of his tantrums.” Gamunbi nodded, petting Mano on the head. The teen just swatted his hand away, irritated. “If either of them in the past were to meet Maru, they would have just killed him outright.”“Then… then, were you like that too in the past?” Ignatio asked curiously, but Gamunbi just smiled without answering.“So it also means this guy,” Mu Yeung pointed to Mano, “he’d also get better once he grows up?”“I’m sure Mano will still remain this way no matter how much time passes.”“Oi!?”“But this issue aside,” Gamunbi waved Mano’s protest away, “from what Choi said, I’m guessing you two have some issues with vampires.”“Yeah, we do have.” Mu Yeung nodded. “Not particularly with you guys, from what Ignatio said, you all seemed much different from those we had to… put down.”“I can't say I agree with your actions, but if you can share your reasons for this displeasure?” Gamunbi smiled, curious at their reasoning. Even Mano leaned in, interested. Ignatio’s mood changed immediately, the smile vanishing from his face.“Our village was wiped out by a vampire who brought us up.” Mu Yeung forced those words out of his lips, his voice almost a snarl. Yu Jin, who had been sitting silently on his lap nearly falling asleep, gave a small meep of surprise and quickly hugged him tight.“I’m fine, Yu Jin.” Mu Yeung forced himself to smile kindly at the little dragon, while Ignatio continued.“Yong like just turned into a completely different person one day, and everyone we knew, he killed them all before our eyes. He brought us up, but he, but he! Then he just went up and vanished?!” Ignatio grimaced. Yu Jin grabbed into his sleeve and tugged softly, and got petted in the head by him. “But yeah, we became hunters to like, find him, but all we found are vampire scum, I mean no offense, but yheah...”“None taken. I do not have much contact with the young ones these days, they could have changed, but aren't the two of you Chaeeun and Sooyang's kids?" Gamunbi waved the issue away, asking. "I take that it happened after your guardian vanished, but aren't they vampires too?""Choi asked the same thing too," Ignatio shrugged. "They thought we were just normal homeless kids, and back then we didn't know they were vampires.""They were just like… like that." Mu Yeung winced. "It would raise questions why Ho and I were homeless so we went with them, and by the time we found out they were vampires, well…""How to put it? They just feel so normal, so human? They just love kids and kept taking in anyone they can to love and care for, that we can't just kill or leave them?" Ignatio sighed. "But they were the only exceptions we've seen so far, yeah.""Those two are nice kids, I'm sure." Gamunbi smiled at the twins. "Well, I've kept you here long enough. Choi said they have all woken up, we should get going."One wave and the four of them appeared before Eun Yul's castle."Why do I have to come here too?!" Mano complained, suddenly looking very much uncomfortable, shifting his weight from foot to foot. "Maru would be happy to see you-""Big Gammy-nim! Mano-nim!" The excited kid ran out from the castle and gave him and Mano a hug. Despite his glare, Mano still allowed Maru to hug him. "Iggy-nim and Yu Jin's here too! And…"Although Mu Yeung smiled at him, Maru ran back towards Gamunbi and hid behind his coat, peeking out curiously."Maru?" Gamunbi asked, petting him on the head."Eun Yul-nim told me not to speak to strangers, and to hide when I see one!" The small kid squeaked, smiling at him."Maru, this is my twin, he's not a stranger." Ignatio offered with a bright grin, and that got Maru out of his coat."I'm Mu Yeung," his twin knelt down and took some lollipops from his pocket. "Here, these are for you.""Ah?" Maru's eyes widened at the candies. "Um, Mu Yeung-nim, thank you!"Maru bowed a little clumsily and took the candies, a smile growing on his face."The lessons for your kid doesn't seem to be working much." Gamunbi commented, swiftly summoning up his glavie to block a fury for sword slashes. Immediately Maru burrowed under his coat, hugging his leg tight. "And you are scaring your kid."Eun Yul appeared beside him, glaring. He called off his swords, and with a snap, Maru appeared in his arms."Ah, Eun Yul-nim!" Maru is still quivering a little, and shakingly offered the bunch of lollipops he just gotten to the silver haired vampire. "Eun, Eun Yul-nim, Mu Yeung-nim gave me some sweets, you can have them!""These are for you, you should keep them." Eun Yul ruffled Maru's hair with a loving smile on his face, which made the small child beam and stop shaking."Wow, it's really true you got a kid, Eun Yul?!” Mu Yeung exclaimed, looking very taken aback from the exchange. Ignatio gave him an irritated jab on the waist. “Ouch!”“That’s for not believing me,” Ignatio rolled his eyes. “Hey Maru, you much better now?”Maru nodded vigorously in Eun Yul’s arms.“Eun Yul-nim and Choi-nim made me rest lots! I’m much better now!” The little kid smiled at him, though Eun Yul glared back instead, wrapping his arms even more protectively around his child.“What business do you have around here.” The silver haired vampire snapped, his tone much more acidic than when he is speaking to his kid. “If you have nothing better to do, leave.”“Come on Eun Yul, they’ve just arrived, you can’t make them leave like this?” Choi appeared beside him, easily retrieving Maru from his arms. “Say Maru, would you like to invite everyone in and rest a bit?”Despite his obvious displeasure, Eun Yul didn’t make any moves to stop Choi from inviting them in, mostly because of the bright smile on Maru’s face./ You’ve gotten really soft, Eun Yul. / Gamunbi mused as he passed by, petting Maru lightly on his hair./ Go and die!? / The younger vampire snapped back at him, most likely holding back for the sake of his kid. If that is so, he should invite Maru over to his domain more often, and his kids seem to enjoy his company too-“Eun Yul-nim?! Big Gammy-nim!?!??!”“So, you all are here to check up on Maru?” Choi asked jovially, his eyes never leaving Maru. The small kid is sitting beside him with a some seashells, showing and playing with them with Yu Jin.“After the ample rest Mano ordered,” Choi nodded at Mano, who grinned back showing all teeth. The teen still looked slightly uncomfortable in the place, staying near to Gamunbi and looking ready to run at any moment. “Maru hadn’t complained about any pain. He does seem very restless though, and we are bringing him to the seaside later.”The mention of the sea caused Maru to look up, and excited eyes glittered at him, though the small kid didn’t say anything.“Looks like your wannabe doctor is at least useful for something,” Eun Yul complained.“A thank you would suffice,” Gamunbi admonished. “This wannabe doctor saved your kid’s life, although he isn’t as powerful as Saeha yet, Mano’s already very impressive for his age.”Those words took Mano by surprise, and a blush crept up his face. He beamed proudly, not seeming to notice that his emotions are slipping out.“Mano, you look so much better with a proper smile-”Even before he could finish his words, Choi found himself facing a glaive and several swords. Maru gave a terrified meep and burrowed under Eun Yul’s coat, leaving Yu Jin looking around confused, while Mano quickly snapped back to his usual scowl.“Come on, there isn’t anything wrong with what I’ve said,” Choi complained.“Ignatio, Mu Yeung, this vampire here has been harrassing my kid.” Gamunbi turned to the twins with a smirk on his face. “Would you mind putting him to an eternal sleep?”“He said he wanted to eat Maru up too,” Eun Yul added in, almost the same smirk reflected on his face.“What the hell dude!?” Ignatio nearly choked, even Mu Yeung’s looking at him with a disgusted expression on his face. Choi groaned.“You guys are never letting me live this down aren’t you.”“Never.”Seeing those two matching grins, Choi sighed. He turned towards the twins.“It was just a misunderstanding, Maru here can attest that I’ve never done anything to him against his will.”“Right duuude,” Ignatio squirmed uncomfortably at his seat. “But like, we’re here to check up on Maru, we should be going, right, Rang?”He glanced over at his twin, who looked like he’d rather be somewhere else too.“I apologised for this idiot hurting your kid,” Mu Yeung bowed, “and we’re glad to know he is better now, so if you will excuse us-”“Sit.” Eun Yul ordered, and both he and his twin dropped to the couch, unable to move. “You don’t just barge in here and leave like this, though you two,” he pointed to Gamunbi and Mano, “scram.”“And we just said you’ve changed so much, Eun Yul-”Before Eun Yul’s swords can hit him, Gamunbi and Mano vanished from their spots. Maru peeked out slightly to see what is happening, and burrowed back quickly into safety.“Come on, Eun Yul, they are your guests.” Choi sighed, calling up a few snacks on the table. “Here, please make yourselves more comfortable.”/ Eun Yul won’t kill you two if Maru’s around, so don’t worry so much about that. / He added, though it didn’t make the two more comfortable. Ignatio gulped and pulled Yu Jin towards himself, putting the small dragon kid between him and his twin protectively. Yu Jin seemed to prefer that to playing with seashells on his own, and gave a happy little meep.“So you guys came all the way here just to check up on Maru?” Eun Yul asked, sounding disbelieving.“That’s part of the reason,” Mu Yeung admitted, “it’s Ho’s fault, but we sincerely apologise for hurting your kid. Maru seems like a really nice kid.”“Of course he is.” Choi smiled, and when Maru peeked out form Eun Yul’s coat at the mention of his name, Choi motioned for him to go over. The kid ran over to his side and sat on his lap, and Choi wrapped his arms protectively around him. “What’s the other part of the reason?”“Well, this…” Ignatio scratched his head. “Rang’s saying you guys might be of some help since you seem like around his level, but have you two heard about a vampire called Cheo Yong?”“Ah?!”
----- CHAPTER BREAK -----
“Cheo Yong?” Choi repeated the name after Ignatio in surprise. Of all the places he thought he might find out about the name, he hadn’t expected to be from the half vampire. “You two know about Cheo Yong too? Where, just where had he been?! And why, why did he kill everyone!” Mu Yeung demanded, immediately overwhelmed by his emotions. He grabbed onto Choi’s shoulders hard, though to Choi that amount of force is nothing much, although that sudden action frightened Maru, who evacuated his lap immediately with a squeak and ran back towards Eun Yul. Mu Yeung didn’t seem to notice that. “Rang, wait-”“No, we had only heard of his name, we had never met him before.” Choi shook Mu Yeung’s hands off him easily, shaking his head. “We are facing an issue, and were told that Cheo Yong might have something to do with it. If you can tell us more about him, we would greatly appreciate it.”“...Oh.” Despite his sudden outburst, Mu Yeung dropped back to his seat, all energy gone from him. Even Ignatio, who had looked at him expectantly, looked away disappointed.“Mumu? Iggy?” Little Yu Jin asked worriedly, tugging at Mu Yeung’s arm. “No fighting?” Mu Yeung immediately patted him on the head, sighing softly. He forced a pained smile for the little dragon’s sake.“We were orphans, the entire village were.” Mu Yeung spoke softly, pain and hurt present in his voice. “I don’t remember where or when Cheo Yong took us in, but he took care of all of us and protected us.”“Yeah, he’s kinda like our father?” Ignatio added in sourly. “He’s standoffish, but he makes sure we have food and shelter, and he even taught us how to use our abilities. But then one day…” He clenched his fists hard, so hard that a cracking sound could be heard. Yu Jin quickly threw himself at him and grabbed his hands.“Iggy?! Iggy!!” The little dragon squeaked, and Ignatio hugged him tight.“I take it that something bad happened?” Choi asked. Mu Yeung nodded.“Cheo Yong went berserk killed everyone.” Mu Yeung said plainly, as plainly as he could, while petting Yu Jin on the head to not make his kid worried. “We could only watch as our friends’ throats were ripped open, and Cheo Yong feasting on their blood. It was... a really horrifying sight...”“I was pretty sure Yong killed us too back then, but we were still living and moving unlike all the corpses around us. It took us a long time to find out what monsters he turned us into.” Ignatio shook his head. “So we, we became hunters to find him, to find Yong, to ask him why he killed everyone, why he did this to us. But like, all we found are just wretched monsters who, well, yeah, that’s ‘bout it.”“A guy like that shouldn’t be too hard to find?” Eun Yul asked. “If like you said he turned you into halfs, you two should have a link with him-”“But you don’t.” Choi’s eyes narrowed as he looked from twin to twin. “You two do have vampiric blood mixed with human blood, but I don’t see-- no, I can’t sense who is your master.”“Well, we do know you are a useless elder by now-” “Eun Yul!?”“- for getting Maru hurt, though oi Rang, how long ago was that?” Eun Yul jabbed Mu Yeung with his elbow, and got glared by Yu Jin. The little dragon quickly climbed to Mu Yeung’s lap and barred his teeth, trying to protect his guardian.“How long… I don’t know.” Mu Yeung shrugged, and put an arm around Yu Jin. “We lost count a long time ago. I don’t even remember it was before or after we heard about the ‘BaekJung’.”“Yeah, it’s like so long ago, dude, and like-”Ignatio paused abruptly, staring at Choi for a while, not knowing how to continue. Knowing what he is thinking about, Choi chuckled.“Whatever Gamunbi told you about me, it was even longer back in the past.” Those words didn't put any of them at ease. The twins glanced at each other, and Mu Yeung asked, "did you really kill continents of people just because you felt like it?"Choi grimaced as Maru nodded frantically for him."I was young back then," he sighed at the old memory. "Humans or anything, I don't really care much about them now, as long as my little Maru is fine."He smiled at Maru and offered a hand to him, but Eun Yul hugged Maru closer and rolled his eyes."Maru's my kid," Eun Yul complained, and Maru beamed brightly in his arms cluelessly."I, I love both Eun Yul-nim and Choi-nim!" Choi would love to hug the little kid in his arms instead, but seeing Eun Yul's grip on his kid, he only pet Maru on the head. Though..."Hm, about Cheo Yong, would you mind if we take a look around the place he went berserk? We might be able to find out something.” Seeing the expecting looks on the twin’s faces, he added, “though please don't have your expectations up too high."Mu Yeung nodded. "It's just near where we live, and Eun Yul's been there several times actually.""Where you live- You mean that old mass grave?" There's a hint of recognition in Eun Yul's eyes, and Mu Yeung nodded. "Oi Choi, you go and-""Maru. We're going to visit the twin's house, do you want to go with us?" Choi cut off Eun Yul's words and asked the excited kid in his arms. Immediately Maru nodded hard, then turned towards Eun Yul with sparkling eyes./ Fuck you Choi?! / And so, as Eun Yul had previously promised, he held onto Maru's hand as they left the castle. Maru's happily walking behind him, also holding on to Choi's hand, humming his lullaby. Mu Yeung led the way and carried Yu Jin in his arms, his eye twitching."Yul, you really going to walk to our place?" Ignatio asked. "Your kid's going to become an adult even before you reached by foot."/ Look I promised Maru, I'm not going to break my promise. / Eun Yul snapped back, his voice full of hostility. As the twins groaned, with Yu Jin looking around confused, Choi offered: / Well, the earlier we reach the earlier I can cook lunch? / In an instant they are all in a place he isn't familiar with, which Choi is sure where the twins lived. "Oi, go cook."Although Maru looked confused as to why they are suddenly in a foreigh place when they should be out for a walk, he giggled upon hearing Eun Yul's words."Are you hungry, Eun Yul-nim? Choi-nim gave me more cookies, you can have them!” Maru reached into his pockets and pulled out some cookies, offering them to the silver haired vampire.“Those are for you, Maru.” Choi petted Maru on the head and glared at Eun Yul, daring him to take the cookies.“Go cook already!?” Eun Yul snapped back at him, while somehow having enough willpower to not take Maru’s cookies from him. He turned towards his kid and said, “keep them, Maru. Choi’s cooking, there will be lunch soon.”Choi nodded in agreement. Maru hesitated a little, turning to look at Eun Yul before putting the cookies back into his pocket. Is he disappointed? That’s adorable.“I’m going to check out the area, want to come with me, Maru?” Eun Yul asked, and immediately that bright smile returned to his face."I, I want to!" The little kid took Eun Yul's hand excitedly, tiny fingers wrapping themselves against his. Eun Yul closed his fingers around Maru’s and turned towards Mu Yeung."Oi Rang, lead the way.”“What.” Mu Yeung glared at him. “Don’t you already know the way there?!”“It’s not like you got anything better to do.” Eun Yul rolled his eyes, and dragged the half vampire out by the collar despite his protests. Yu Jin meeped excitedly in his arms, perhaps thinking of it as a fun ride?“Well, looks like I better start cooking,” Choi chuckled and shook his head. “You mind showing me where the kitchen is?”“Ah, me?” Ignatio asked, looking around uncomfortably. “Yeah, sure, dude- I mean yes!” “Really, there is no need to be so uneasy around me.” Choi sighed and shook his head. “Everyone’s young once, and you haven’t heard any major disasters happening recently?”“Not really,” Ignatio shrugged and admitted unwillingly. “But the village around Yul’s place…”“They mistreated little Maru to the extent he came here looking to die.” Choi shook his head, his tone hardening. “There is no way I’ll allow the village to exist after seeing what they had done to a child, even if his ability scares them.” “Riiiiight dude.” It didn’t make Ignatio any more at ease around him, though…"I don’t think I had the chance to do so previously, but thank you.” Choi smiled at the half vampire, who looked back at him, confused.“For like checking up on Maru? You’re welcome?” Choi had to chuckle at that cluelessness. “No, for hatching the egg. Yeon Hwa’s been bugging me to hatch it for ages, but there’s no way any dragon kid will ever come close to being as sweet and adorable as little Maru.”“Well, about this…” Ignatio gulped and shifted his weight nervously- Oh.“Choi, would you like to take back your words?” Yeon Hwa’s wearing a smile, but her words are a tone lower, almost a growl.“Why should I?” He challenged, “Maru’s just the sweetest and most adorable little kid ever, have you even seen anyone nicer than him?”“Of course! Just look at Yu Jin, he’s just weeks old, but he can already speak! And he can already care for his dads all on his own!”“Yeah? Maru worries about us every time, he even keeps snacks in his pockets to make sure Eun Yul doesn’t go hungry!”Seeing the two don’t seem to be stopping their bickering anytime soon, Ignatio slid out of the kitchen the first chance he could.Eun Yul held onto Maru’s hand and followed Mu Yeung’s lead, following the half vampire to the place the massacre took place. “Mumu?” The dragon kid in his arms meeped and squirmed, and Mu Yeung put him down on the ground. “Yu Jin, you want to walk too?” Hearing the half vampire speak so gently to his kid, it just feels wrong. Although Eun Yul had heard himself speaking to Maru with almost the same tone, he still felt irritated by that. Yun Jin nodded to Mu Yeung’s question, and grabbed onto his hand. So the kid’s behaving just like Maru huh. But as the dragon's a much smaller kid than Maru, with shorter legs, Mu Yeung had to slow down considerably for his kid to catch up. Eun Yul clicked his tongue irritatedly, to wait for them.“Look, my Maru’s much better than your kid,” he boasted to Mu Yeung, who glared back at him.“Oi, this isn’t a competition at all- Ah.”Perhaps seeing how much trouble Yu Jin is having in keeping up with them, Maru slowed down and took Yu Jin’s free hand.“Yu Jin, let’s walk together!” Maru told the little kid, and Yu Jin lit up with a bright smile. “Meep!” Yu Jin agreed readily, eyes sticking to Maru and just looking at him in wonder. And Maru seemed very happy to have this little brother to play with, so Eun Yul thought he should go check out the place and let them have their fun instead. “You kids take your time, I’m going first-”He only managed to take a few steps forward without Maru before the little kid let go of Yu Jin’s hand and ran for him, frantically calling out for him.“Eun, Eun Yul-nim, Eun Yul-nim!” Maru sounded close to tears despite just smiling and chatting with Yu Jin moments ago. “You said, you said you’ll hold my hand when we go out, please, please, please don’t let go!”Seeing Maru nearly crying, Eun Yul had no choice but to scoop his kid up in his arms. “You’re a troublesome little kid, Maru.”Maru immediately shrunk back in horror, his face turning pale. “Eun Eun Eun Eun Yul-nim I’m sorry-”“Even so, you are still my precious treasure.” Eun Yul kissed Maru lightly on his hair, and the little kid blushed red. “If this is what you desire, then I will grant it to you.”Making sure his grip on Maru is firm enough, Eun Yul took to the skies. Mu Yeung and his kid soon became a tiny dot on the ground, while in his arms…“Wow… Eun Yul-nim, this, this is so high up…” Maru’s looking around in wonder, looking so awestruck he pressed Maru closer to his chest. “There’s a lot more things I can show you, Maru,” Eun Yul chuckled lightly, though…/ Keep your eyes on Maru?! Don’t you dare drop him!??!? / Choi’s screaming at him in his mind, and him being an elder vampire meant Eun Yul couldn’t just shut his voice off because he felt like it. / Look, I AM holding on to Maru tight, I’m never dropping him!? / He complained, though he soon spotted a barren spot of land and ignored that growling voice./ Oi Rang, this the spot? / He asked, projected the image of the place to Mu Yeung’s mind. / Yeah, that’s it, but wait- /Before waiting for Mu Yeung’s reply, Eun Yul zoomed towards the spot, landing lightly on the ground. The place looked similar to the barren piece of land now around his domain, with courtesy from Choi. If this Cheo Yong razed this place, he must be a very powerful vampire-“Eun, Eun Yul-nim…” Maru squeaked suddenly from his arms, his voice shaking. No, not just his voice is shaking, his entire body is shaking too. “Maru?!” He quickly hugged Maru tighter, and that was when he felt it too. There is something wrong about the place, he couldn’t tell exactly what is wrong, but he knows he shouldn’t be there. Something is screaming for him to leave; as much as he would love to stay and challenge whatever that is, his main concern the precious bundle in his arms who seemed moments away from a panic attack. He sped back towards where Mu Yeung and Yu Jin are still waiting.“That’s fast, did you-”“Get inside. Now.” He growled lowly, and Mu Yeung immediately obeyed without a second word. He rushed in with Yu Jin in his arms, who is still meeping away merrily without a clue what is happening.The moment Eun Yul stepped inside, the uncomfortable feeling vanished. Though seeing a familiar pink haired figure he figured why. “Oi Yeon Hwa, what are you doing here!?”“Yul! I haven’t seen you in ages and I don’t even get a ‘Hello’?”Yeon Hwa pouted at him, but she spared a smile for Maru and petted him on the head. Instead of greeting her back, perhaps because he felt much safer, Maru cried, shocking Yeon Hwa and even little Yu Jin.“Ah?! Maru?!”“Meep!??!”Maru ate quietly, sitting on Choi’s lap and chewing everything the black haired vampire fed him. / I hadn’t felt anything, but Eun Yul, there aren’t really any right now who even faze you? / He asked Eun Yul, while opening up that mental link to the adults around. / Dad’s much more powerful than mom, and even he doesn’t strike any fear in you? // Whatever. Oi you two, you didn’t feel anything wrong at all all this while? / Eun Yul rolled his eyes and asked the twins, while petting Maru on the head. / Well, we’re never really here due to our job, and we’ve only been staying in recently to take care of Yu Jin? / Ignatio answered. / Even just now, I didn’t feel or see anything out of the ordinary. / Mu Yeung added, / Yu Jin didn’t feel anything wrong either? // And it’s not just you who felt it, Maru definitely felt it too. / Choi quickly stuffed a piece of sausage into Maru’s mouth when the little kid looked around at them questioningly. / I’ll go check it out later, even if you say the presence is gone, there should be something left behind. // … you… most probably shouldn’t be going there alone. / Eun Yul said unwillingly, and for a moment Choi saw the lonely Maru who had grown up without him around./ I’ll go with you then? / Yeon Hwa offered. / Whatever that was, I don’t want it so near to little Yu Jin. // Yeah, that’ll be great. / Choi sighed softly, and found a piece of sausage pressed to his lips. He smiled back at Maru, ruffling his hair. / Preferably it is just nothing, but just who or what was it... /No one was able to answer him, eating their own meals in silence.“Choi-nim, Choi-nim, where are you going?” Choi had wanted to leave without Maru noticing, to not make the little kid worried, but he had been sticking close to both him and Eun Yul, unwilling to let any of them out of his sight. Despite being told to go play with Yu Jin, the moment Choi tried to step away, Maru’s running for him and grabbing onto his leg tight.“I’m going out for a while, don’t worry, I’ll be back soon.” He ruffled Maru’s hair, but Maru shook his head, still refusing to let go.“Choi-nim, don’t go, please don’t go! Please!” His little kid pleaded tearily, his words piercing his heart hard and making him want remain by Maru’s side. But it is for Maru’s sake too, he reminded himself, he might find out something useful to advert the future where Maru had to grow up missing him.“I’m going with Choi too, so don’t worry Maru, I’ll protect him!” Yeon Hwa tried to coax Maru off Choi to no avail. The little kid shook his head, still refusing to let go.“Yeon Hwa-nim, please don’t go too! It, it’s dangerous, it’s very scary! Please!” Maru begged, and it looked like he wouldn’t be letting go anytime soon. Shaking his head, and despite knowing how much Maru would be hurt by it, Eun Yul snapped his fingers and called his kid back in his arms.“Ah, Eun Yul-nim…” Maru muttered in surprise to find himself hugged tight by the silver haired vampire, before realising Choi took the chance to leave together with Yeon Hwa. “Choi-nim?! Yeon Hwa-nim!?”Hearing the little kid keep calling out for both and shaking so badly in his arms, Eun Yul can only hope Choi would find something useful and return quickly, before his Maru would die of a broken heart.There wasn't much to find, as the twins had put it, the massacre took place a long time ago. Whatever that was left had been weathered off, though there was a faint presence that indicated someone or something was there a few moments ago. However, whatever that was, it was too faint for either of them to trace. “It looks like something’s been removed too,” Yeon Hwa pointed out, “someone didn’t want us to find out what took place here?”“Perhaps? But there isn’t anything else here to find, let’s head back. Maru just knocked himself out crying.”“Hm, I think I should be able to relocate the twins somewhere else too? This place might be too dangerous for Yu Jin to grow up in…”Both Mu Yeung and Ignatio didn’t look too willing to leave their home, despite Yeon Hwa’s insistence that she’d be able to find them somewhere else much better to live in. It was their one last remaining link with the person they are seeking, and not having encountered that presence which spooked Eun Yul, they didn’t see the need to leave. Yet.Seeing how she couldn’t sway them, Yeon Hwa didn’t push the issue too far, promising to return every now and then to check up on little Yu Jin. As for the little dragon, he seemed quite fixated with Maru, and before Eun Yul and Choi returned back, he pattered up to Maru.“Protect, protect!” He meeped at the confused Maru, who petted him lightly on the head.“Protect?” Maru asked, and Yu Jin beamed at him, nodding.“Protect!” Yu Jin gave him a hug before returning back to the twins./ He meant he will protect Maru when he grows up, so Maru wouldn’t have to cry again. / Mu Yeung chuckled, hugging his kid in his arms. / What?! That little pipsqueak wants to protect my Maru?! / Eun Yul rolled his eyes, carrying Maru up in his arms too. / He’s still got years to go, and Maru’s my kid. If anyone’s protecting him it’s me. /With that, he warped back to his own domain, bringing his kid back to where he felt the safest. Choi followed soon, with a promise to keep in touch if they ever felt anything else out of the ordinary.
----- CHAPTER BREAK -----
It had been a few weeks since Maru’s last visit. Garam learnt to say words other than just 'dad', though she had been very fixated on Maru’s name for the past few days. It led to Gabi asking him if Maru could come and play, and Gamunbi felt it wouldn’t be a bad idea to invite the little kid over./ Mano, would you mind taking Gammy for a walk? / He asked, and Mano grumbled from his library. / Yeah, yeah, I know it’s my turn, no need to keep pestering me about it!? / Despite how unwilling he sounds, Mano soon warped to him, and called Gammy from the shadows. “Oi boy, it’s time for your walk.”Gammy immediately leapt up, barking excitedly. He give Mano a big lick, and the half vampire chuckled, petting it on the head. “Stop it, you’re getting your saliva all over me.” Gammy didn’t seem to understand his words, and whined sadly when Mano leapt to its back, sitting down in place and ready to go.“And invite Maru over too, you should know where to find him-”“What the fuck?!” Mano complained loudly, a tinge of terror appearing in his voice. “I’m not going to just waltz in and let the BaekJung kill me again!?”“Language, Mano. And I’m asking you to invite Maru over.” Gamunbi had to shake his head at his adopted son’s words. “And you’re my kid now, he won’t do anything to you.”“Yeah, sure.” Mano didn’t sound too convinced by his words. “If I get sent back here in pieces I’m off Gammy duty for the year.”Before Gamunbi could say anything in reply, Gammy gave a great leapt and the two vanished from his domain. Mano returned much sooner than he expected, leaping off Gammy and shoving something into his arms. He then sped off back to his spot in the library, leaving Gamunbi blinking.“Hello, big Gammy-nim!” Maru greeted him cheerfully from his arms, and he has a vague idea why Mano looked as if he is running for his life. Before he could admonish his kid, Eun Yul appeared in his domain, fuming.“Gamunbi.” Eun Yul snarled, and grabbed Maru back from him. At the same time Gammy resurfaced from the shadows upon hearing his name. “Your fucking kid kidnapped my precious- Gamunbi heel!”Maru is quickly shoved back into his arms before the little kid is traumatised again by the overgrown hellhound, and Gamunbi quickly took a few steps back, getting Maru away from Gammy. The overly excited puppy kept licking his owner all over, borking happily.“Gamunbi! Stop it!!”/ Wait, the Baek Jung named the puppy after you? / Mano asked, surprised, listening in from the library. / No wonder it looks so excited each time it hears your name? // Let’s just say I have no say in this, and take Maru to go play with your sisters? Looks like it’ll be quite some time before Eun Yul’s going be able to get him back. / / Yeah yeah. / Mano warped to his side, and took Maru from his hands. He immediately ran for it, not wanting to stay any longer near to the raging but distracted BaekJung./ And next time, invite Maru back properly. // … NO. /The next time, Gamunbi sent Gabi and Garam over on Gammy. The two girls were excited to visit their friend, chattering excitedly as Gammy tossed them onto its back. They should fare much better than Mano did; despite how much the young doctor enjoys Maru's company, he just refuses to get anywhere near to Eun Yul to properly invite Maru over."Let's go play with Maru~""Play with Maru~"“Bark bark bark!”"We’re going to play with Maru~""Play with Maru~"“Bark bark bark!”Gamunbi kept an eye on them as both girls sang happily, with Gammy barking along on the way. Both are more than capable of protecting themselves and Gammy by now, seeing how Garam set an entire patch of his forest in flames while arguing with Mano that he should rest, while Gabi threatened to slice him up into pieces with the claws she called up. Mano had never agreed to rest for the night so eagerly. Despite that, Gamunbi would rather the two girls not get into actual combat at such a young age; they should be having fun and enjoying life instead./ Yup, your kids arrived safe and sound, / Choi informed him merrily, sending him the image of the two girls dancing around him happily. As usual, Gammy immediately leapt for its master. / They even have a song for playing with Maru? // They made a song for almost everything after they heard Maru's lullaby. / Gamunbi shook his head. / It's cute, they managed to get Henry to join in too, but Mano refused to sing with them. // What a pity- // Do not make me tell Gabi and Garam to attack you, Choi. / Gamunbi warned before cutting off their connection. Since Choi is inviting them into the castle, the elder should be enough to make sure the two kids plus one puppy would remain safe. Now to go see Mano and Henry's progress with that new kid…Gabi and Garam energetically updated Maru on what happened since his last visit, both being very enthusiastic about it. Garam ended up meeping through her sentences, while Gabi is able to speak more coherently, and somehow they were able to understand each other perfectly. Maru seemed to get more and more confused the longer the conversation became."Don't you think it's a cute date, Eun Yul?" Choi asked as he watched the kids, paying no mind to how much Eun Yul’s trying to calm his overly excited puppy down. “Um, a date? What is a date, Choi-nim?” Maru asked, not knowing how to talk to the two dragon girls. As he turned to look at Choi, Garam reached out shyly to touch his hair.“Hm, a date…” Choi wonder how he can explain that to the little kid. Eun Yul’s glaring daggers at him too, but that is just a small issue. “A date’s spending time with the people you like.”“Ah, then, then, then I want to be on a date with Choi-nim and Eun Yul-nim too!” Maru exclaimed innocently, not seeming to notice Gabi is petting him on the head too. “I want to spend more time with Choi-nim and Eun Yul-nim, please?”/ One day I'm going to stab you for all these useless stuff you're teaching to Maru. / Eun Yul threatened, though he is still very preoccupied with his very happy pet puppy. / Seriously what did that blockhead teach to this dumb mutt?! /Choi ignored him, leaving Eun Yul to attempt to pull his puppy off him. "Maybe next time, Maru. How about you show girls around?""m'Kay!" Maru turned around, only to notice both girls playing with his hair."Fluffy!" Gabi giggled, and Garam meeped with agreement. “So soft!”"Um, Gabi, Garam?" Maru frailed helplessly, but both didn’t seem to notice his distress. “Gabi, Garam?”“Here, girls.” Choi petted both on the head, and both turned their attention towards him, meeping. “Maru would like to show you two around, would you two come along?”Both nodded, and helped Maru to his feet, pattering behind him. Gamunbi sure brought up two obedient kids, and as long as Maru remain good friends with them, there’s no need to worry about him being bullied when they are around.“Um, here! Eun Yul’s got a big forest too like big Gammy-nim!” As Maru led the two outside, Choi could already picture Maru getting horribly lost. Though before that could happen, just a few steps into the forest Gabi and Garam are already telling Maru their forest is much nicer, he should go over and play again one day. That huge smile on Maru’s face faded, and Choi felt he should step in before Maru cries, although he knows well the girls weren’t trying to be mean.“Well, Garam, Gabi, from here we can reach the seaside, has Gamunbi brought you to the seaside before?”“No, Choi-nim.” Gabi answered him respectfully, while Garam shook her head. Maru lit up immediately when he heard him mention the sea, a smile creeping back to his face.“Then… here, what do you think of this?” Since it might take some time for them to walk to the seaside, and to prevent the girls’ comments from hurting Maru further, Choi warped them to the seaside. Both girls meeped and delight, running towards the waves.“Water! Water!” Garam’s giggling and stepping on the waves, making splashes, while Gabi stuck a hand in the sea water and tasted it.“Salty,” she made a face and complained. Garam pouted, knocking her on the head lightly.“Dad said, no tasting everything you see!” Gabi pouted back, though it didn’t seem to bother Garam. Instead, she took her twin’s hand, and dragged her across the waves, making bigger splashes. Gabi seemed to like that, and quickly ran after her. The two stayed near the shore, running back and squealing when the bigger waves came in.“You are not going to play with them, Maru?” Choi ruffled his hair while keeping an eye out for the two girls. “Um, Choi-nim, um, Eun Yul-nim told me not to go close to the water. If I get wet, he said I’ll fall sick…” Maru tugged his pants and looked up at him. “And I prefer to collect seashells with Choi-nim and Eun Yul-nim! Eun Yul-nim always smiles when I show him seashells, and he kept them!”Choi had to marvel at how sweet the little kid is, and hoisted him up in his arms, hugging him tight. “We’ll come back to the beach later with Eun Yul, alright? For now, just watch over Gabi and Garam, and make sure they don’t go too deep into the water?”“m’Kay Choi-nim!” After the two girls tired themselves out playing with water, Choi prepared a picnic for them. Some sandwiches and cut fruits, for the little dragons to regain their strength to go back home, and some heavy, savory dishes for Eun Yul, who took his shadow hound with him too. It looks like he managed to get Gammy to calm down quite a bit, though the puppy barked happily when he saw Gabi and Garam. Maru immediately burrowed under Choi’s coat, tiny orange eyes peeking out curiously.“Here, Gammy!” Garam picked a larger sandwich and fed it to Gammy, meeping happily when it gulped it down whole. “Good boy!” Gabi petted it on the head, and Gammy wagged its tail frantically./The dumb mutt would rather listen to these two babies than me!?/ Eun Yul complained, while tossing a bone towards Gammy. The shadow hound immediately leapt for it, barking and nosing Eun Yul excitedly with the bone clenched between its teeth. / That’s because it misses you just that much, Eun Yul. You are its master, but you never come visit it ever. / Gamunbi chuckled and appeared beside his kids, and both dragons ran towards him and hugged him. “Did the two of you have fun?” He asked.“Fun, fun! Maru fluffy! Water fun!” Garam reported back excitedly.“Dad’s forest still the best!” Gabi squeaked, and Choi could hear the little kid under his coat giving a soft mew of protest. To stop Maru from being further saddened, Choi changed the topic.“So I guess you are going to send Henry over next?” He asked Gamunbi. The vampire elder shook his head.“Not so soon, we have a new issue at my place.”Garam beamed and exclaimed, “new brother!” Gabi smiled widely too./ A new brother? / Choi asked, taken aback, and Gamunbi nodded. So Gamunbi got another kid? But from the memories that Maru had shown them previously, it had been Mano, Henry, Gabi and Garam. If there is a new kid, could the future had just changed a little?“We’ll bring him over one day, but for now, Gabi, Garam, we should be heading home.”The two dragons got to their feet, and bowed towards him. “Thank you for the food!” Both said at the same time, before running for Gammy and letting it toss them onto its back. One leapt and they are gone, and Gamunbi warped back to his domain too, leaving just him, Maru and Eun Yul on the beach./Stop thinking so much about it,/ Eun Yul retrieved Maru from under his coat, hugging him. /Maru wants to collect seashells with us, that’s all that should matter to you right now./“Eun Yul-nim, Eun Yul-nim, um, can I, can I go collect seashells please? I’ll bring back pretty ones for you!” Maru squeaked happily, and Eun Yul kissed him lightly on the forehead before putting him down. “Of course, Maru.”Seeing that smiling kid running towards him to hold his hand and around the beach, perhaps Eun Yul is right, this is all he needs for the moment.
----- CHAPTER BREAK -----
Eun Yul found himself bored. Very bored. There isn't anything around to do, and usually he would be glad about that, but he just feels bored out of his mind for some reason.He could feel Choi's presence in the kitchen, working on that special dish he promised Maru. There was a snappy warning from the elder vampire not to disturb him when Eun Yul cast his gaze in the direction, and to make sure he gets to eat whatever that dish is, Eun Yul unwilling complied. With that, there is only little Maru left in the castle to look for, but his kid had fallen asleep after another round of alphabet tracing. He is getting better at recognising letters, and can read simple words like 'food', 'kitchen', 'eat', and simple sentences, but it will still take time-Ah, it seems like his kid had wakened, and is stumbling around lost again. No matter how often either of them tries to teach Maru directions, it seems he is just hopeless with them, being horribly lost after taking a turn in the castle. It is a wonder how Maru even managed to make his way to his castle in the first place."Maru." Eun Yul warped to his kid's side, and Maru brightened up with a huge smile, running up to him and hugging his leg tight. He grabbed Maru by the sides and hoisted him up in his arms."Eun, Eun Yul-nim!" His tiny bundle of joy called out to him cheerfully, and he planted a kiss on Maru's forehead. That smile of bliss caused all traces of his boredom vanished. As he walked down the corridor with a precious treasure in his arms, a smile growing on his face, he couldn't help remembering Jiyul's words about him not being bored with Maru around. Looks like she was right after all?"Maru, I'm going out for a walk, is there any place you want to go to other than the sea or Gamunbi's place?" He asked, ruffling Maru's hair. The fluffy mop is getting lighter by the day as he and Choi kept giving Maru bits of their magic, the little kid will become fully blonde very soon."Um, Eun Yul-nim… I, um, I, I want to go to any place where Eun Yul-nim and Choi-nim is at!" Maru leaned against him, thin arms wrapping themselves around his neck. "As long, as long as the two of you are there, I, I want to be there!" Which meant that Maru has no idea where to go huh. Chuckling softly at the adorable response, he thought of where he should bring his kid then. So far Maru has been to the plains where Jiyul lived, the forest where the irritating guy lived, the twins' place, and the sea. He should show him something different, something special.
Hm…
"Well Maru, Choi is busy right now, but I'll be going to a place you've never been to before, do you want to come with me?"Even before he finishes asking his question, Maru is already nodding frantically. "I want, I want to go out with Eun Yul-nim!" The adorable kid squeaked, eyes sparkling bright with excitement. Since his precious treasure wants it, he held on to Maru tighter and warped to his destination."... Wow…" It took some moments of staring around in wonder at the wintery plains before Maru could get a word out. "It's winter here, and the white thing on top of everything is snow." Eun Yul explained, putting Maru down in the snowy ground. "You shouldn't have seen snow before, it doesn't snow back at home."Maru shook his head, still very awestruck by the scenery."This is, this is cold- Achoo!" His kid sneezed, and immediately Eun Yul carried him back in his arms. He could feel the tiny body shivering in his arms.
Damn it, he's just a weak little human.
Although he did think of Maru being wowed by something he never saw before, he forgot his kid is human after all, and being so small he would get cold more easily. And cold he did get, seeing how Maru is snuggling closer to him trying to get whatever warmth he can offer. Focusing on his castle, Eun Yul pulled out a long woolen scarf. It looked much bigger than Maru is, and he wrapped up his kid in it."Are you warmer in this, Maru?" He asked, but seeing how Maru quickly clung on to him again shivering, he isn't too much warmer. There's even some mucus dripping out of his nose, which Eun Yul quickly wiped away with his handkerchief."We'll return again after we get you some suitable winter wear, alright?" He asked Maru gently, and the small kid nodded, turning back towards the snowy landscape. He seemed to be trying to take in as much of the landscape as possible before they leave-"Yul? And a human kid?" A white haired man dressed in mostly black clothes appeared beside them, white iris with black sclera studying the little kid in his arms. Maru shrunk further back into his arms, which is good, he isn't trying to interact with a stranger, but he could feel the little kid being curious at this new person."Yo, Gotaya." Eun Yul waved, petting Maru on the head. "He's my kid, hands off him.""Yeah yeah, I already have my hands full trying to deal with the idiot here, as if I want another bundle of headache." Gotaya rolled his eyes. "And your kid looks like he's dying from the cold, go back.""I'm planning to but you called me back." Eun Yul shrugged. "Well, see you around."With a wave he vanished back to his own castle to thaw out his kid, hoping that Maru won't catch a cold just from that."Choi-nim, the place is very cold, but it is so white and so quiet and so beautiful!" Maru sniffed in Choi's arms and told him about his short adventure, the elder vampire hugging him close and summoning a few fires around him to keep him warm. He glared at Eun Yul for nearly causing Maru to come down with a cold, but his attention soon returned to the little kid as Maru continued. "And um, we met this white long hair person with white and black eyes!""So you met Gotaya?" Choi asked, cutting a thin slice of steak and feeding it to Maru. "He's an alright guy mostly if he doesn't have to deal with Ja Yun, and he's one of the few rare people Eun Yul actually gets along well with.""Go, Go… taya… nim? … Taya-nim…?" Maru repeated the name after him, but he sounds very hesitant. It sounded like when Ho gave his name as 'Ignatio', and Maru kept calling him 'Iggy-nim' instead. And he called Gamunbi 'Gammy' too. Could he have problems with longer names? Names do hold power after all."I'll introduce you to him later, first let's get you some suitable winter wear?"Maru nodded at that, though Eun Yul's glaring in his direction./ Oi, what about the special dish. These are just normal things you usually cook. / Eun Yul complained, clearing through numerous dishes./ Maru's nearly sick and all you care about is food?! / Choi snapped back, feeling more irritated than he usually is. / Do you know that he can actually die from falling sick?! // I took him back didn't I?! / Eun Yul growled back at him, though sounding a bit guilty. / Go get him that can actually keep him warm. // Of course, no way I'm letting him freeze to death if I can help it?! / "Um, Choi-nim, Eun Yul-nim isn't coming with us?" Maru asked, taking a look around, disappointed."Sorry Maru, Eun Yul had some things he has to reflect on, would you mind if it's just me this time?" Choi smiled apologetically at Maru, having made Eun Yul stay behind and think about his actions. Maru shook his head. "Eun Yul-nim took me out just now, I want to go out with Choi-nim too!"“Sure, Maru.” He kissed Maru on the head fondly. “We’re going to a human settlement to get you some winter wear so you won’t feel cold, how about it?”“Um, human…?” Maru frowned, shrinking back a little in his arms. “Do we, do we really have to go to human places?”It looks like Maru still doesn’t like humans, but there isn’t many non human places he can get clothing for his kid.“Maru, I won’t let any human hurt you, I promise.” He set Maru down on the ground, and knelt down before the small kid, holding his hands tight. “And we’ll just be buying some clothes for you, we’ll leave once that is done, would that be alright with you?”“Um…. m’Kay...?” Maru still sounded hesitant, the frown still on his face and looking very out of place for a child who is usually full of sunshine. Choi squeezed his hands tight, and Maru squeezed back.“Don’t worry, Maru. If you really don’t feel uncomfortable later, I’ll take you back immediately, alright?”Maru nodded lightly, and clung on tight to him when he lifted the little kid back up in his arms. As much as he would love to keep little Maru by his side forever, he is a human kid after all. He should at least interact with some other humans as he grows up, and learn that not all humans are out to hurt him. Choi warped them some distance away from the human village. He hadn't want to surprise anyone with his sudden appearance; the better he can pass himself off as a normal human, the smoother this trip will be. "Maru, do you want to walk there?" He asked the little kid in his arms, and Maru shook his head. Usually Maru would prefer to walk and hold their hands, but since he isn't comfortable with that now, Choi just petted him in the head and hugged him along. On the way to the village they met some ladies chattering and walking away from it with baskets of laundry. Going to the nearby river to wash their clothes? Choi would love to stay a while and chat, to find out any pieces of interesting information happening in the area, but Maru shuddered in his arms and shrunk back further as they neared that Choi instead just tipped his hat at them as they passed./ Are you alright, Maru? / He asked softly, and all he could feel in response is the poor kid being overwhelmed with terror. The tiny body spasmed and quivered as they passed more humans, that Choi quickly walked into the first alley he could find. / It's alright now, Maru, here, we're going back. /"But, but Choi-nim…" The poor kid squeaked, then froze as he heard footsteps nearing. Choi quickly pulled both of them into shadows, melting into the darkness and travelling quickly out of town through this interconnection network. This is worrying, it seems like Maru could tell between humans and non humans, and he certainly doesn't prefer humans. Maybe he should start by getting Maru some human kiddy friends to play with first, though that would have to wait till he recovered from this ordeal."Here Maru, there are no humans around, you know I won't let any hurt you." Eun Yul took Maru back in his arms, comforting the now sobbing little kid."No, no more humans…" Maru pleaded, burying his head in his chest, trying to wipe his tears away. But he is still shaking despite there being no one else there except for him and Choi./ You saw it too, we didn't even make contact with any humans, and he is already so affected. / Choi sighed, going to his food cabinet and pulling out a bag of candy. He offered one to Maru, who is sobbing too much to accept it. Eun Yul grabbed it by a shadowy limb and popped it into his mouth instead./ I thought he hated humans, not feared them. / He complained, crushing the candy between his teeth./ Maybe he's afraid of what they might do to him again? / Choi whacked away the limb when it tried to steal another candy. / And these sweets are for Halloween, stop stealing them. /Eun Yul shrugged. / Well, then there goes your plans for Treat or Tricking. But wait, you think Jiyul got any kiddy winter wear? // One moment… mom says she has- /"Maru, we're going over to Jiyul's, I'll hold your hand there, so please cry, alright?" Eun Yul didn't even wait for him to finish his words before turning to Maru and trying to distract the sobbing kid with a trip. It didn't stop Maru from still being scared, but at least the sobbing got softer."Sor, sorry, Eun Yul-nim… Choi-nim..." Maru squeaked, still grabbing on to his shirt. "Sorry, sorry I'm scared-""There's nothing to be sorry about, Maru." Eun Yul tried hard to smile at Maru while groaning inwardly. "It's alright to be scared, everyone gets scared from time to time.""That's right, Maru." Choi petted the small kid on the head. "Even we get scared too, it's normal.""Eun Yul-nim, Choi-nim, you get scared too?" Maru asked curiously, at least he is distracted enough to not cry now. Choi quickly popped a candy into his mouth, while locking up the remaining candies before Eun Yul could steal another."I was a kid once, Maru." Choi told him with his eyes twinkling. "Even though it was a very long time ago, I still remember if anything scared me, I'll run for mom and dad and they will protect me. So don't be sorry for being scared, and let us protect you alright?"Somehow, that only sent the tears back, and he ended up having to hug Maru till he stopped crying./ Damn it, if he doesn't cry he is just the most perfect kid?! / Eun Yul complained, wincing. It hurts much to hear his kid cry, and worse that he could do nothing to stop it./ I don't want my heart to hurt this badly either, stop complaining... /Maru cheered up much on the trip to Jiyul's place, holding both their hands and beaming happily. He even managed to hum his lullaby, though that changed abruptly when they reached where Jiyul stayed and found out she is having some human visitors. Maybe because Maru is an adorable little kid, one of the ladies cooed at him, and tried to pet him on the head. Already trembling in fear, Maru wailed. Choi quickly carried him in his arms and excused himself, leaving Eun Yul to glare at those visitors. His mother can worry about stopping Eun Yul from slaughtering them, right now it is more important that Maru stops crying./ So, Maru fears humans? / Jiyul asked worriedly as the small kid hiccuped on Eun Yul's lap. Her visitors had left, and she informed the others she would be occupied for the rest of the day. No one went near her place after that, which both Choi and Eun Yul are very thankful for. / Just how traumatised was he? // Mom, you won't want to know, / Choi said, shaking his head. Jiyul turned paler, and vanished from her spot, reappearing moments later with huge roast duck on a dish. "Here Maru, eat as much as you want."/ Mom, Maru's not like Eun Yul. / Choi chuckled, and petted Maru on the head as he bowed and accepted the dish, his hands trembling from the weight."Thank, thank you Jiyul-nim!" The little kid squeaked, before quickly turning to Eun Yul. "Eun Yul-nim, Eun Yul-nim! Jiyul-nim gave me this roast duck! You can have it!"Even before Maru finished his words, Eun Yul already took the platter from his hands. He ripped off a drumstick first and passed it to Maru before digging in, though the small kid just stared at it, not knowing what to do."Um, Choi-nim?" He offered it to Choi, who shook his head. "Mom gave it to you, you should eat it." He petted Maru on the head, but Maru shook his head."I, I don't feel like eating…" Maru squeaked softly. "Eun Yul-nim, Eun Yul-nim, please eat this too?""At least take a bite please, Maru? Mom cooked it, it's really delicious." Choi smiled when Maru obediently took a bite, but he wasn't able to eat anymore than that. Eun Yul immediately took that drumstick and gulped it down."... Sorry, Choi-nim, Jiyul-nim…" Maru apologised, staring at his feet. "It's alright, love." Jiyul ruffled his hair. "There's more in the pantry, you can eat later."But Mau didn't seem to hear her words."Humans… disgusting… I, I don't like them, I hate them!" He cried out, and Choi quickly hugged him in his arms again. "Please, Choi-nim, I, I don't want to see another human again!""It's alright, Maru." The small kid's plea broke his heart. It looks like he still haven't recovered enough. "There really are no humans around here now. I'll make sure no more humans come close to you, so please don't cry, alright? Please." / I told you, just kill off all the humans and there'll be no problems. / Eun Yul rolled his eyes, clearing the plate and tossing it back to Jiyul's kitchen sink. / No Eun Yul, you won't be killing any humans. / Choi glared back. / Killing all humans isn't going to resolve this issue. // It'll make Maru happy, and that's all that matters! / Eun Yul snapped back, and took Maru back from Choi. "Maru-"One quick chop on the head by Choi and Eun Yul's on the ground holding his head in pain. Before he could say anything else--“EUN YUL-NIM!?” Maru pushed himself from Choi's arms and dropped to the ground, falling on his hands and knees. A suspicious sounding crack nearly sent all three vampires panicking, but Maru pushed himself up from the ground and ran to Eun Yul, hugging him tight. "Eun Yul-nim?! Eun Yul-nim!! Choi-nim please don't hurt Eun Yul-nim-" "Nah, I'm fine, Maru." Eun Yul petted Maru on the back, his voice quivering a little. "We are discussing something but. Maru. Don't ever jump like that again."“m, m’Kay…?” Maru flinched at that harsh tone, but Eun Yul pulled him back into a tight hug, reminding himself to never ever let go again no matter what the circumstance is.“You could have hurt yourself, Maru.” Jiyul heaved a sigh of relief that Maru appeared to be fine. “Look Maru, I’m sure Eun Yul and Choi had told you before, but we are vampires. Other than having our heads cut off, nothing much will hurt us.”Choi nodded in agreement, and called out one of Jiyul’s knives. “Look at this, Maru.” As he cut his right arm cleanly off, Maru gave an unnaturally sharp shriek, and nearly fainted in Eun Yul’s arms. All three vampires winced at that.“Don’t be afraid, Maru, just look at this.” A flick of his wrist and his arm is attached back again. “We can regenerate back, not all vampires can though, but we are powerful enough to regenerate our limbs if they are cut off. We only truly die if our heads are cut off, even then, I’m sure even dad can recover from that.”Maru still made a garbled sound, so Eun Yul kissed him on the head. “Really, Maru. We don’t die that easily, but you are very different from us. If you fell wrongly, you could have died, just like when you got stabbed.”/ Maru was stabbed?! / Jiyul roared in their link, and Choi groaned. / We’ll tell you about that later, mom. But Maru's fine now. /“And Maru, it sounded like something got injured when you fell. Did you get hurt anywhere?” Eun Yul asked as gently as he could, taking Maru’s palms and rubbing them. Although Maru shook his head, he’d better check to be sure. And when he moved to Maru’s knees-“Eeek!” Maru cried out in pain, looks like something really was injured. “Ah, sorry Eun Yul-nim…”“You didn’t do it on purpose, Maru, there is no need to be sorry.” Eun Yul ruffled his hair. “Just don’t do it again, alright?”Maru nodded softly back at him, looking so sorry for his actions that Eun Yul didn’t say anything else. He just rubbed Maru's back to let him know he isn’t being punished.“Hm, here, let me take a look at it.” Jiyul rolled up Maru’s pants, and the little kid looked away. His knee is red where it hit the ground, and there is a slight crack in the bone. If untreated it will only swell more as time passes, and hurt more. She laid her hand over it and focused on the spot, and when she lifted her hand the patch is no longer red. “Try moving your leg, Maru?”“Ah, it, it no longer hurts!” Maru wriggled his foot, and a smile is finally back on his face. “Thank, thank you Jiyul-nim, and I, I’m very sorry!”“Eun Yul’s already told you that you don’t need to be sorry, just don’t do that again, love.” She ruffled his hair fondly. “Go back and rest, you’ll feel much better tomorrow.”“Ah, mom, about that, we’re looking for some winter wear for Maru, do you have any?” Choi quickly asked before they get ushered out of her domain.“Winter wear? Sure, I do have some. Here, come take a pick.”Eun Yul still complained about how boring it is to watch Maru get dressed up in various winter clothes, though this time he complained too when Jiyul dressed Maru up in clothes that are “too cute”./ Usually people would love to dress up their kids in cute clothes, Eun Yul. / Jiyul chuckled, choosing between a blue and a green coat for Maru to try./ Look I’ve already had my kid kidnapped twice by a wannabe doctor!? Any cuter he’s going to be kidnapped more!? / Eun Yul complained, and Choi quickly explained before his mother’s temper flared up./ That was Gamunbi’s kid, and Mano’s just too shy to invite Maru over. / / As if, and if he comes any closer to Maru I’m chopping him up again. // And that. That’s why Mano resorts to sneaking Maru back. // My, he does sound like a nice kid too. / / As if. / Eun Yul snorted and shook his head, pulling out a dull brown coat for Maru to try instead./ Though mom, you really have a lot of kiddy clothes? I don’t think I had this many clothes when I was a kid? / Choi asked amused, and Jiyul shook her head, smiling./ These aren’t your old clothes, Choi. I finally got a lovely little grandkid, of course I’ve got to buy lots of clothes for him. // Grandkid!?!?!?!??!? Oi Maru’s MY kid, not Choi’s!? /It took a long time to pick something suitable for Maru with Eun Yul’s constant picking. Jiyul eventually ignored all his complaints, and gave Maru a couple of coats to wear. By then Maru’s stomach is grumbling, and he happily agreed to join them for a meal before heading back. But before that…/ Dad!? Since when were you here!? / Choi called out in surprised when his father reached out and petted Maru on the head. His father must have suppressed his aura just so he won’t frighten the small kid, but to be able to suppress it to the point where he didn’t even notice he is there…“Um, hello Choi-nim’s dad!” Although Maru is still a little afraid of Daewon, he still managed to squeak a greeting, and to their surprise gave him a tiny hug. That caused Daewon to unsuppress his aura in surprise, and Maru’s back scrambling to Choi and hiding from the vampire.Jiyul chuckled as her husband sighed at the failed attempt to get closer to Maru. Well, Eun Yul and Choi would surely bring their lovely little grandkid to visit again-/ Maru's still my kid?!?! // Eun Yul, return with Maru first, he's nodding off already. / / He looks so adorable like this too. // Of course, he’s my sweet little baby. // Maru’s not a baby- // Choi, you mind telling me more about Maru being stabbed? // Crap. // LOL /Gotaya was swimming in the icy ocean when they visited, and pulled himself up from the water lazily.“Choi, long time no see,” he waved, and changed back to his normal black clothes, flicking the icy water off his hair.“Yo,” Choi waved back, and turned to Maru. “Here, Maru, this is Gotaya. And Gotaya, this is Maru.”/ Isn’t he Eun Yul’s kid? He sure looks much warmer this time. / Gotaya studied the little bundled up child, who hesitated and gave a small wave./ Still mine. / Eun Yul rolled his eyes, still holding tight to Maru's tiny gloved hand.“Hi, Taya-nim…” Maru squeaked, and Gotaya raised an eyebrow./ He has issues with names, / Choi explained. Maybe he should get that checked out by Mano some day just in case./ As long as that idiot doesn't start calling me that too. / Gotaya shook his head and petted Maru on the head, and the little kid smiled brightly at him. "So what are you guys doing here?" He asked, "that idiot just went off somewhere, you should come back in a few years' time.""We're bringing Maru to places he had never been to before," Choi explained. "After the previous trip Maru seemed to like this place a lot.""It, it's very beautiful and it's so quiet!" Maru nodded furiously, knocking his hood off his head. Eun Yul quickly pulled it back in place."Yeah, this place's real nice and calm. You're welcome to come again if you need some of that, just stay quiet." Gotaya said, looking very much in peace./ Judging by how you practically live here now... // Look, if I have be around that idiot the entire year I will go crazy. // Point. /"So Maru, since this is your first time here, would you like to see the northern lights?" Gotaya asked. Maru just blinked back at him, never hearing those words before."They are very pretty lights in the sky," Eun Yul explained, and lifted Maru up in his arms into a hug. "We will bring you to see them, remember, no jumping." Maru nodded furiously, turning a little pale and grabbing on to Eun Yul's arms tight."Oi Gotaya, lead the way."/ Next time, don't bring Eun Yul along. / The vampire told Choi while glaring at Eun Yul. / I'll love to, but sorry, he and Maru comes as a package. // Throw him at that idiot, then bring Maru over. // Oi. /Maru stayed in Eun Yul's arms, staring at the sky above and the dancing lights, too stunned to say anything. / Maru seem to love it even more than the sea, / Choi chuckled as he watched Eun Yul getting more bored by the moment. But he still petted Maru's head from time to time, though Maru is too enamoured by the sight to realise it. Then the little kid gave a small sneeze and shuddered."... Maru?"There is another sneeze, and then another, and before Maru could sneeze again he vanished together with Eun Yul. / Try teaching him some fire magics if you're bringing the kid back. / Gotaya sighed and shook his head. / At this rate he's going to turn into a popsicle. // I… I'll take that into mind, thank you. / With that, Choi quickly sped back to make sure their lovely little kid is alright."Eun Yul-nim, Choi-nim…" The small kid squeaked weakly from the bed, trying to hold back a sneeze. He wasn’t able to hold it back, and his entire body shook with a soft “achoo”.“Rest,” Mano told him sternly, flipping over the damp towel on his head. Maru’s temperature is still high, not that he is worried that he couldn’t treat Maru-- of course he’s good enough-- but the little kid is evidently in pain before the fever subsides. It is just frustrating he can’t do anymore of the little kid, other than waking him up for his medicine and replacing the damp towel./ Look, I don't care how you think Maru would find it nice, he is just a kid who grew up without any winters?! What kind of idiots are you to let him stay outdoors immobile for so long?! / He ranted at Maru’s two guardians. BaekJung ignored him, holding Maru’s hand tight and telling Maru he is there, while Choi at least had the decency to look sorry that the little kid became so sick./ Seriously, are you even an elder?! First you almost got him killed, and now he’s sick!? / Mano snapped, venting his frustration of not being able to help more./ Mano. / Gamunbi put a heavy hand on his shoulder, shaking his head. / I'm sure Choi and Eun Yul hadn't wanted Maru to fall sick too, and no, no kidnapping Maru again. // Tch. /Maru slowly got better after a few days of stay at Gamunbi’s domain. He is still sniffing from time to time, and very weak on his feet, but he regained a bit of his appetite and moved on to munching on fruits when he is hungry."Here, Maru." Eun Yul diced up an apple into tiny bits and fed them to Maru one by one. "I, I can eat on my own, Eun Yul-nim…" Maru chirped, sounding more energetic than the previous day. But just taking a few steps from the bed and he is already tired out. Gabi, Garam and Henry kept visiting him; Gabi picks pretty flowers to decorate Maru’s pillow and for him to enjoy, Garam brought him mint leaves daily when she found out he likes their scent, and Henry reads him a book to sleep each night./ Your kids really like Maru, don’t they? / Choi asked, watching as Henry picked up his two younger sisters after Maru fell asleep and bring them back to their rooms. / How about that new kid? // He isn’t doing too good. Mano’s focusing all his efforts on his, hopefully his condition takes a turn for the better soon. / Gamunbi petted Henry on the head as he passed, but otherwise looked preoccupied with some other thoughts./ So… we came at a bad time? / / Maru’s always welcomed here. The kid’s condition isn’t the main problem, his mindset is, and Mano’s deadset on changing it. You two being here just meant he has someone to rant to at the end of the day. // Good to know that’s what we are good for. // Take better care of Maru, Mano’s really intent on making him stay after this, and if anything happens to Maru again I’ll be inclined to agree too. // Don’t worry, we’ll try not to give you such a chance ever. /When Maru is well enough to get out of bed, walk around, and eat on his own, despite Gamunbi’s kids’ complains, Eun Yul hugged him home. It took Gamunbi quite some time to explain to Garam why burning the place down wouldn’t result in Maru staying longer, and she only gave up after Maru repeated over and over again he wants to go back to Eun Yul’s castle because that is his home. Though it was interesting to see Eun Yul being caught unaware by those words and smile with such gentleness at Maru. Then he teleported back to his domain without even a goodbye. Gabi just cried and Henry kept walking past their guest bed, hoping that Maru would be there somehow. “Hm, Gabi, Garam, Henry, would you like to visit Maru?”
----- CHAPTER BREAK -----
“Hm… It’s going to be time for Halloween, Maru, do you know what Halloween is?” Choi asked as Maru balanced on his toes, peeking curiously over the table at what he is doing.“Um, no…?” The small kid shook his head. Choi had suspected that much, maybe he should introduce other holidays to Maru too when the time comes. “Um, Choi-nim… what is it?” Maru asked, looking up at him with eyes sparkling with curiosity. “Halloween’s a time for sweets.” Eun Yul explained from his couch, refusing to leave his spot after the previous meal. “There’s also pumpkins and other stuff-- oi Choi go make some pumpkin pie.”/ No, and that doesn’t help any bit, Eun Yul. / He admonished lightly, only to get a snort from the silver haired vampire.“Sweets and pumpkins?” Maru repeated after Eun Yul, and looking at the various candies Choi is working on, he asked, “Choi-nim, are you, are you making these for Hallow… ween?”“Yes, these are for Halloween. But Maru, Halloween isn't just about sweets and pumpkins. It’s a special day where we non-humans and magical beings are at our strongest, but it’s also a fun day to go Trick-or-Treating.” Choi picked up a piece of candy from his tabletop, and placed it on Maru’s hand. “Trick-or-Treat’s when you dress up and visit people, and then they give you treats, just like this.”Accepting the piece of candy from him, Maru smiled. "Thank you Choi-nim! And um, Choi-nim, so, so I, I’ll visit Gabi and Garam and Henry and-”“Yes, yes, I’ll bring you to visit them for candies closer to the day. But first, let’s get you a nice costume for the day. Dressing up is a major part of it too.” Choi had seen the various outfits his mother had bought for Maru, he could already imagine some of them would just make this adorable little sweetheart even cuter-“Eun Yul-nim, please wait for me, I’ll bring back lots of candy for you!” “No Maru that isn’t the main point of Trick-or-Treating!” He could only sigh as Maru ran back to Eun Yul and gave him the candy he just received. Why is it that as long as it is food, Maru feels it should be given to Eun Yul instead of eating it himself?/ Hell if I know, and the moment Maru gets hurt I’m taking him back. // I, I’ll try- // Try not. Do or I’ll fucking chop your head off. // T_T /After a few hours of seeing Maru in various cute outfits, Choi and Jiyul still couldn’t agree on an outfit for Maru to wear. And sweet as he is, Maru looked as if he will cry if he has to change out of his clothes again. Jiyul kindly told him to take a break first, and he sat aside, swinging his legs on the chair, watching them as they narrowed down their clothes choices./ Maru dressing up as Death is adorable, and I have plenty of scythes to lend him. / Jiyul picked up the death cape and folded it back neatly. / How about it? // No mom, Eun Yul’s adamant Maru don’t touch any bladed weapon till he’s an adult, he even refuse to let Maru touch his swords. / Choi picked up the sailor’s outfit, thought about it for a while before putting it back down. / Hm… no, this is too similar to what he usually wears to the beach. // How about the dragon outfit? Maru looks so happy wearing this but it might be too heavy for him to wear for long. // Yeah, Maru loves dragons, but no for that weight. Hm… How about a wizard? But Maru isn’t good at magic yet, he’ll surely be bullied about this. // No one will bully such a lovely kid, Choi. How about- /“Um Choi-nim, Jiyul-nim, do you, do you have any vampire clothes?” Maru finally spoke up after watching them toss out outfit after outfit for some time. “Can I, can I dress up like Choi-nim and Eun Yul-nim too, please?”/ Look Maru, why do you have to be so sweet!? / Eun Yul complained all the way from his castle, shaking his head. / Seriously, just what kind of kid is he!? // He’s a darling, Eun Yul. / Jiyul smiled at that, and petted Maru on the head. “Sure, I do have some clothes that might be just what you want. Just give me a moment.”Digging through the clothes pile, she pulled out a silky velvet coat, satin blouse, a vest, and a pair of fanciful pants. Even though he was tired from constantly changing clothes moments ago, Maru ran eagerly to change into this set of clothes. “Don’t trip and fall, Maru.” Choi called up after him. The small kid eeeeped and quickly slowed down to a walk. / I should have known, I should have expected this. // Maru really loves the two of you a lot, / Jiyul chuckled. / Hm, I'll try to find some clothes that look like yours for Maru next time. // Thanks mom. /Moments later, Maru is out, beaming proudly at his new outfit.“Choi-nim, Choi-nim, look, I look like how Eun Yul usually looks!” With Maru looking so excitedly at him, Choi shouldn’t say anything much but call Maru closer to him.“Here, your buttons are all crooked.” He kissed Maru on the head as he helped rebutton the silky shirt and smoothen out the creases. He also redid the ribbon on the cape, reminding himself it is already an achievement Maru was able to put on the outfit all on his own, it doesn’t matter how badly he put it together.“Now you look more like a mini Eun Yul.” Jiyul chuckled, and Maru beamed with the brightest smile they had ever seen. “Um, Jiyul-nim, can I show this to Eun Yul-nim?” The small kid asked, looking at his reflection in the mirror proudly.“Sure, Maru , you can have these clothes too.”“Ah, I can? Thank, thank you very much Jiyul-nim!” / Really, I think I can understand why Eun Yul’s always complaining about how he can’t stand Maru sometimes. // He’s just so sweet sometimes I feel I can die from it too, mom... /They made a quick stop back at the castle for Maru to show off his outfit to Eun Yul, and for Choi to prepare something for the gluttonous vampire because he couldn’t stop complaining. “You look great Maru,” Eun Yul smiled at the small kid and ruffled his hair, and got back the brightest smile he had ever seen. “Jiyul-nim said I look like a mini Eun Yul-nim! I, I want to be like Eun Yul-nim and Choi-nim when I grow up!” Maru declared proudly, oblivious to how much the vampire is cursing in his thoughts./ Is there even an off switch to make him not so sweet!? I nearly died from that smile!? /Choi had to try hard to stifle his laughter as Eun Yul had to work hard for the smile to remain on his face. / Alright, you’ve had your fill, I’ll take Maru over to Gamunbi’s and spare you the torture. Make sure you recover enough when we return. /Despite leaving Eun Yul’s castle full of smiles, Maru remained quiet while walking towards where Gamunbi and his kids are resting. The tiny hand Choi was holding was shaking a little, looks like the little kid is starting to get nervous.“Um, Choi-nim, I, I just have to say 'Trick-or-Treat?'” Maru asked while squeezing his hand for comfort, and Choi squeezed back, smiling kindly at Maru."Don't worry so much, Maru. This is just for fun. Nothing will happen if you say it wrongly; no one will get angry at you. Just think if it as how you usually play with Gamunbi's kids.""m'Kay!" Maru nodded, the slight unease vanishing. / Isn't it too early to be celebrating Halloween? / Gamunbi asked as they neared, / or you just wanted to have Maru dressed up. // He's just so adorable, but this is more for him to have some fun. Ever since what happened that time, Maru's been a bit more nervous about everything he did. He still thinks it is his fault for falling sick and being weak. // And Trick-or-Treat would help? / Choi could already hear Gamunbi's skepticism through their link and chuckled. / As long as Maru is having fun, that would be enough. /"Um, so… Mano-nim," Maru pattered up to Mano first, and asked him "Trick-or--""Trick." Mano answered without waiting for Maru to finish his words, baring his teeth in a wide grin."Ah, this… um… Choi-nim?" Getting an answer he isn't expecting, Maru quickly ran back to Choi's side, not knowing what to do. / You could have given Maru candy for being such a little sweetheart?! / Choi glared, while petting Maru on the head./ Why should I. And I doubt if Maru is even capable of playing tricks on anyone. / Mano grinned back, his smile getting even wider. / All the more to pick ‘Trick’. /Rolling his eyes, Choi dug into his pockets and gave a round ball to Maru."Here Maru, just give this to Mano." He petted Maru on the head again, and pushed him lightly towards the half vampire. "Here, Mano-nim, here is your trick!" Maru handed the ball over, beaming happily. Mano's eyes narrowed and glared at Choi, but he still accepted it with a "thank you" to Maru./ How is this even a Trick-- / Before Mano could complain more, the ball blew up in his hands, sending confetti flying around him. / Fuck you Choi. // That's childish, Choi. / Gamunbi chuckled at the sight of Mano having colour papers fluttering around him and sticking to him, though the teen just ignored them and took his seat, pouting./ Doesn't he like Maru? How could Mano bully such a sweet little kid like that! / Choi complained while petting Maru on the back and praising him for completing his first Trick-or-Treat. / If Maru asked me, I would have showered him with all the candies he can ever eat! // Really? You would pick ‘Treat’? / Gamunbi asked, bemused. / Wouldn't you of all people want to be tricked by Maru? /There was a long silence as Choi looked as if he is suffering from some inner conflict./ Don't… tempt me... / It took the elder some time to get those words out. Meanwhile, Maru continued on with Gabi, Garam, and Henry, all three of them took one look at Mano still having confetti raining down him and picked Trick immediately."Choi-nim, Choi-nim, can I, can I please have some more Tricks?" The sweet little kid ran back up to him, and Choi passed him three more confetti balls for the three kids. They squealed with delight when the confetti balls burst open, and Gamumbi could already feel the pain of cleaning the place up./ Make sure your kids better not bully my Maru on Halloween itself, or else. / After that deflated warning, Choi hugged Maru close and warped them both back to Eun Yul’s castle."Eun Yul-nim, Eun Yul-nim! We went Trick-or-Treat at big Gammy-nim's place! And everyone said 'Trick!'" The moment he is back, Maru ran for Eun Yul and chattered non-stop. Eun Yul smiled and hugged his precious kid close to him, ruffling his hair fondly. "Then Choi-nim gave me these things that went poof and made coloured papers fly out!"“Maru, did you have fun?" He petted Maru on the head, making the little kid giggle happily."Yup Eun Yul-nim, and, and, Trick-or-Treat!" Maru beamed up at him, of course Eun Yul is going to pick-"Trick." Eun Yul’s reply was immediate./ What the hell Eun Yul?!?! Why?? How could you??! / Choi groaned, and Eun Yul just smirked at him. Maru tried pattering back to him, but Eun Yul snaked an arm around him and prevented him from moving./ Why not. It's not like I have any candies to give him; you're the one who made lots of candies for him, you pick Treat. // But, but I want Maru to Trick me too... /Eun Yul ignored Choi, hugging Maru up and putting him on his lap. "Maru, those things Choi gave you, they are not Tricks.""Ah…?" Maru froze on the spot, eyes widening. "Those, those aren't Tricks? But, but Choi-nim gave them to me!" “Trick means you do something naughty, something bad, Maru.” He had never seen Maru so shocked before, the poor child turned ridgid, his face turning paler and paler.“I, I, I, I have to do, do something bad…?” Maru repeated after him, his voice quivering at a higher pitch than normal. “But I, but I, I don’t want to do anything bad to Eun Yul-nim! I really like Eun Yul-nim, I, I don’t want to!”Seeing how horrified the little kid is, getting nearly close to tears, Eun Yul quickly grabbed a lollipop from Choi's stash./ Hey?! /"Here, Maru, if you don't want to, you don't need to force yourself to play a trick. You can have a treat." "But, but, but Eun Yul-nim wants a Trick, I, I!" Maru refused to accept the lollipop from Eun Yul, shaking his head furiously. "I don't want to do something bad to Eun Yul-nim, I, I, I, I'll do something good to Eun Yul-nim!"Eun Yul sighed internally; he hadn't wanted Maru to cry, it hurts to hear the sweet little kid cry. Not knowing how else to comfort his little treasure, he kissed Maru lightly on the head. That seemed to give Maru some inspiration, and he leaned closer in and planted a tiny kiss on Eun Yul's cheek, his own cheeks turning bright red."Eun Yul-nim, can this, can this be a trick?" The little kid squeaked, eyes studying him intently and not daring to make another move./ Why, just why, why is Maru just so precious?!?!? How could he?!?!??! // Eun Yul. You just got a kiss from the sweetest kid ever. Complain about that again and I'll fucking kill you. /"Yeah, that's a lovely Trick, Maru." Struggling to hold back his emotions, Eun Yul cuddled that tiny kid closer to him, smiling as Maru squealed in delight that his trick worked. "But Maru, that Trick's just for me, you can’t give it to anyone else."/ That's not fair at all Eun Yul?!?! /"Um, m'kay, Eun Yul-nim?" Maru nodded, not seeming to understand what he meant. "Maru, can I have a Trick too?" Choi asked deflatedly. Eun Yul smirked at how hard he is trying to keep his jealousy buried, and put Maru down on the floor. The little kid immediately ran for Choi and gave him a big hug, as big as his short arms could reach."Here, Choi-nim, here's your Trick!" Feeling Maru hug him, and petting him on the back like he usually does to comfort the small kid, feeling that tiny heart pound with so much love for him too, Choi nearly melted on the spot. / This is more of a Treat than a Trick... / He complained weakly to Eun Yul, while lifting Maru up and his arms and hugging him close. "Thank you for the Trick, Maru, I love you so much too." Maru's eyes widened with surprise from those words, and he hugged Choi even tighter, murmuring his name happily. Choi carried Maru over to his cabinet, and pulled out a bag of sweets for him."Here Maru, for the Trick, here's a bag of sweets for you." "Ah, thank you, Choi-nim!" Maru accepted it happily, and opened up the bag curiously. He is immediately wowed by the beautiful handcrafted candies. Taking out one carefully, he rolled the transparent ball with shimmering colours in them on his palm in wonder. "Choi-nim, Choi-nim, they are beautiful! Can I give them to Eun Yul-nim? Please?"Having those sparkling eyes asking him, Choi sighed and nodded his head. He let the small child gently down on the floor. "But Maru, you don't like candies? You can eat them yourself, you know?""The sweets are nice, but, but, but Eun Yul-nim likes to eat! If I give him food he is happy, and I feel happy too!" Maru exclaimed proudly, and immediately found himself very snuggled cradled in Eun Yul's arms. He smiled back at Eun Yul happily, offering up the entire bag plus one candy to the vampire./ Can I order him not to be so sweet- // No, it doesn't work that way, Eun Yul. // Damn. /
----- CHAPTER BREAK -----
As far as he could remember, Eun Yul is strong. He is very strong. He and Choi are the strongest people he had ever met, and he never thought there would be anyone stronger than these two extremely nice vampires who love him very much. But seeing how that monster is striking at Eun Yul with such vicious strikes, which some of which Eun Yul didn’t manage to dodge, and is slowly being pushed back, it… it scares him.It scares him very much.He doesn’t want to believe Eun Yul can lose, because seeing that black haired man with bright red bloodstained tips enjoying the fight so much, if Eun Yul loses, that would mean he could die. He didn’t want to believe that, wishing and hoping hard that Eun Yul will win, because Eun Yul promised him. Promised to be by his side and protect him forever.Choi said before, unless their heads are cut off, they won’t die. They will just recover from their injuries easily, even if their other limbs are cut off. But he is still scared.He is very scared.Eun Yul’s gritting his teeth, and deeper cuts are slipping through. He didn’t bleed, but he looked like in pain. Not that confident smirk he usually wears when he fights with Choi. This is just so wrong from the usual Eun Yul he knows that he wants to rush out and stop that monster from hurting Eun Yul, but...Eun Yul taught him before, told him over and over and over and over again, the very moment something remotely dangerous happens, he is to run and hide. And don't get out till they told him it is safe enough. He is human, he is not a vampire like them. Just a bit of injury he could die. Even years back, he was just at a wintery place for a few short but magical moments, and he came down with a horrible fever. If he is to go against this dangerous looking and feeling man who walked up into their castle and dealt a heavy strike against Eun Yul without any provocation, he will surely die. He dived under the couch immediately, and Eun Yul even praised him for that, but after that the vampire is too busy fighting for his life that he didn’t manage to say anything else.So he stayed there under the couch, eyes peeking out. He hadn’t dared to move, hadn’t dared to make any sounds, hadn't even dared to breathe at first. He could hear Eun Yul and Choi repeating over and over again in his mind; he is human.He is human.He can die easily.And if he dies, they will be sad. Really sad.So even though it hurts to see Eun Yul getting cut over and over again, he bit back his sobs and breathe as lightly as he could. He watched quietly. Watched and hoped desperately that Eun Yul will win somehow. That he’ll smirk proudly and proclaim himself the strongest, because of course he is, and then tell him everything is alright. But Eun Yul isn’t winning, he is being pushed back and he’s getting more hurt and he is in pain. And a bloody red line traced itself diagonally across his body, he wasn’t fast enough to dodge, and his arm dropped to the floor, clanging noisily together with the sword tightly clenched in his hand.He screamed. Eun Yul is losing. Eun Yul is losing and he is going to die.He couldn’t think anymore, and just rushed out, trying to get that monster away from Eun Yul, trying to get him to stop hurting Eun Yul. Trying to save the vampire he loves so much.But he is still a kid.That monster clamped his fingers on his arm and yanked him off the ground. It hurt, it hurt a lot, it felt that his arm is going to be torn off. It hurts so much he wants to cry, maybe he is crying, but he still clawed desperately at the air trying to reach Eun Yul."My, so the Baek Jung actually has a kid." That venomous voice purred. Maru looked up in fear, glowing yellow eyes burned into his memory with such malice his blood turned cold. "That's not my kid, let him go!" Eun Yul roared, and his words stung, but in his mind he could hear Eun Yul pleading at him. / Run, just run, Maru! Run as far as you can, I'll buy you as much time as you need! Please just run! /The monster ignored Eun Yul’s words, tightening his grip so hard on his arm he could feel something cracking. It hurt, it hurt so much his vision turned white; he wanted to scream out in pain but he gagged instead, and that voice, that voice seemed so gleeful, as if he is enjoying this. "Wouldn't it be fun to tear this filthy little creature apart-"“Keep your hands off Maru!” That roar filled with so much rage hit him hard, and he struggled hard blink and clear his eyes, to see what is happening, trying his best to break free of that bone crushing grip on his hand. Eun Yul's cyan eyes are burning with hatred, he could feel the anger coming from the vampire, but his strikes are weak and--A dull red line appeared on Eun Yul's neck. He watched in fear, feeling something very wrong had happened. Time slowed down as he watched the red line crawled slowly across Eun Yul’s neck, he tried kicking and struggling, but he couldn’t break free from that vise grip and the only thing he could do is to watch."Eun, Eun Yul-nim...?" He asked, he squeaked, he pleaded, and the vampire tried to reply him. Opened his mouth. Tried to say something. But before any words could leave his mouth his head toppled over cleanly off--"AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA"Choi had never been so horribly jolted awake and nearly leapt from the bed, taking a few seconds to realise the unholy screeching not an enemy but coming from the tiny kid beside him."Maru?! It's alright, everything's fine, I'm here!" He immediately hugged the small kid close, but Maru didn't seem to feel him, thrashing about furiously and screaming his lungs out. Eun Yul didn't seem to fare much better either. He's sitting and staring down on the bed, pale, sweat rolling down his face. He is trembling, his hands wrapping protectively around his body. He's scared, Choi realised, and he had never seen the vampire show fear before, even when facing down his parents./ Eun Yul? / He asked, and Eun Yul could only get a soft word out.“Maru.”Choi quickly put the small kid in Eun Yul’s arms, and immediately the silver haired vampire hugged him close, petting his head and running fingers down his hair.“I’m here, Maru. I’m here, I’m fine.” Eun Yul spoke softly and gently, though his voice is quivering. But Maru didn’t sense him, still screeching and thrashing about, making his heart ache just to see the little kid like this. It took a long time for Maru to be thoroughly exhausted, and dropped down unconscious. Eun Yul still cradled that tiny body in his arms protectively, whispering his name over and over again./ What happened this time, Eun Yul? / Choi asked. For Maru to be this distressed, the only thing he could think of is that he saw an unwelcomed future again. / You… just look. / Eun Yul shared the memory very unwillingly, his hand moving up to his neck and making sure there isn't a cut there this time./ Just… just who is that?! And why aren’t I there! I could have protected both of you- / / Dunno. I’m tired, I’m going back to sleep. / Eun Yul answered him so deflatedly and tiredly Choi couldn’t bring himself to press the issue. He could only pet Maru on the head, ruffling his hair. Even though unconscious, the little kid’s thoughts are a jumbled mess. He couldn’t see what the small kid is thinking or feeling, unlike when he first dream seered, with the memory vanishing after his dream ended, this time Maru is really traumatised by what he saw. / Sleep well, I’ll protect the two of you. // You’d better. /Choi thought things would be much better in the morning. Maybe for Eun Yul, the vampire is back to his normal, hungry self, but for Maru… The little kid didn’t speak a single word. He didn’t smile. Instead of the usual good morning that he gave to them when he woke, Maru just sat up on bed dumbly, staring at them. “Good morning, Maru,” he smiled and petted the small kid on the head. Maru looked up at him and nodded, then quickly crawled to Eun Yul’s side, grabbing hold onto his hand. Looking into Maru’s thoughts, the little kid is still terrified out of his own wits, and all he wants is to be by Eun Yul’s side.“I’m alright, Maru. Look, I’m fine.” Eun Yul hugged him close, but it didn’t do much to comfort the small kid. When he withdrew his hand from Maru’s and got out of bed, Maru immediately panicked and scrambled after him, only relaxing a little when he realised Eun Yul still standing there by the bed. “I’m not going anywhere, Maru.”Maru nodded lightly, but still stuck close to Eun Yul, following him as he stepped away from the bed. His short little legs aren’t enough to catch up with the vampire, and when Eun Yul disappeared from the room, Maru froze in his steps.“Here, Maru, I’ll bring you to Eun Yul,” Choi offered, but Maru shook his head. He didn’t cry out loud, which Choi is thankful for, but the soundless sobs as tears started rolling down his face hurt just as much as hearing him cry out. Even when he hugged Maru close, those tears didn’t stop, and Maru didn’t stop crying till Eun Yul summoned his kid back to his arms with a snap.“Don’t cry please, Maru, I’m here.” Eun Yul kissed him on the head, and wiped those tears away with his handkerchief. Those tears slowly stopped as Eun Yul cooed at him, and Choi quickly took the time to whip up breakfast for them. Maru kept his eyes on Eun Yul throughout breakfast, and perhaps for the rest of the day. He didn’t eat much, his appetite is already very small usually, now it had became almost non existant.“Here, Maru, just one more spoonful of scrambled eggs please?” Choi coaxed. Dispirited orange eyes looked at him, and he thought Maru didn't understand him. But the small kid slowly opened his mouth and gulped down that offered spoonful, chewing slowly, returning his glaze to Eun Yul./ He hadn’t really seen you die before his eyes that time, he's really terrified right now. / Eun Yul complained glumly, stroking Maru's hair lightly. / And where were you during this time anyway, why weren't you here. // I don’t know. I don't think I vanished without a word this time, but I really don't know. / Choi admitted, the same question plaguing his thoughts. What could have happened to him to not be there to protect Eun Yul and his tiny treasure? / If I was here... // But at least we know who we are up against, / Eun Yul pointed out. / I don’t know if he’s that same person who made you vanish that last time, but if that bastard dies my Maru’s having one less reason to cry. // Point. But I’ve never seen anyone of note who looked anything like that-- // Ja Yun. / Eun Yul cut him off, calling up that bit of memory where Maru caught sight of that attacker’s eyes. / Those eyes are just like his, that is if he’s a bloody thirsty psychopathetic heartless murderer child torturer. // … true. But it will be a pain to find him. You know well how he is. / As Maru looked up at him, Choi took the chance to stuff another spoonful of scrambled eggs into his mouth. / Gotaya’s going to be really pissed if I mention Ja Yun around him-- // That or Maru doesn’t stop crying. Your choice. / With Eun Yul glaring at him, Choi sighed. As much as he’d rather be taking Maru out for Trick-or-Treating instead, it doesn't look like Maru is capable of going out today, and making sure this future doesn’t come true is more important than anything else. “Alright, Maru, I’m going out for a bit-- Maru?!” As he petted Maru on the head, the little kid pulled his sleeve and refused to let go, those eyes watering and threatening to overspill. / He’s just such a troublesome little kid, / Eun Yul complained, but made no move to loosen Maru’s grip on Choi’s sleeve. / Fine, you stay here till Maru recovers more, once he’s better you better get your ass out and find where the hell Ja Yun is. // Yeah, I know. The dream looked like it is a few years down the road, we still have quite some time. / Smiling at Maru, Choi told the little kid, “alright, I’ll go out some other day, is that alright with you, Maru?”Maru didn’t say anything, but let go of Choi’s sleeve, shrinking back into Eun Yul’s arms. And he sat there silently till Eun Yul finished his meal. Eun Yul spent the rest of the day loafing around in his castle, like he usually did, but he moved surprisingly little from his spot. / Oi you want me to make Maru cry!? / The silver haired vampire glared at him, hugging Maru close to him. / Go bring me another book to read to Maru, but damn it, this just feels so wrong. // Yeah... / Looking at the small kid who sat there without a word, he just seemed so different from their usual lively and sweet little kid. Maru is a child of pure sunshine, with a smile so bright nothing can rival it. And with his innocent chattering hitting them so hard each time, it is just heartbreaking to see him this quiet and lifeless. He quickly pulled out a few children’s books for Maru, keeping his complains to himseld about the lazy glutton being too lazy to go find them. Eun Yul quickly grabbed one and read it to Maru, usually the small kid enjoys their reading much, but right now, nothing seemed to be able to reach his heart. “Oi, are you guys even coming over--” Before Mano could finish his words, Choi called up his will. The shadow hound Mano had been on dropped to its feet and sat down obediently, its tail wagging hard, though it almost threw Mano off its back in the process./ Sorry Mano, we are having some issues right now, tell Gamunbi we’re sorry. / Choi offered a hand to help the young doctor off Gammy, but he just hmfphed and leapt the puppy, landing softly on his feet. “Maru, here--” Mano walked towards the small kid, glaring at Eun Yul, though he soon paled and bent down to check on Maru. / What, what the fuck is wrong with Maru!? What the hell you two did to him!? // He saw a future that hurt him a lot, Mano, / Choi explained, seeing how Eun Yul’s glaring back at the teen without any interest in explaining anything to him./ Because of Halloween, huh, / Mano’s eyes narrowed. He studied Maru closely, and shook his head. / No, there doesn’t look like anything’s physically wrong with him, mentally he’s so messed up he probably won’t be able to talk for some time. // Tell me something else I don’t know, / Eun Yul snarled back, and despite starting to quiver with fear, Mano ignored him./ What the fuck happened, / he turned his glaze towards Choi. / Who dared to break Maru like this. /Choi had to chuckle at how protective Mano sounded, ignoring the death glare the teen is sent his way. / Maybe you can help me ask Gamunbi about this too, since I don’t think I can leave here anytime soon. / He conjured up an image of that black haired man for Mano, mainly for him to inform Gamunbi and get any pieces of information he might offer. Choi hadn’t expected hatred to flare up so suddenly behind him, and it hadn’t been coming from Eun Yul. The silver haired vampire seemed taken aback too by the animorsity, and it seemed so wrong to coming from the little kid sitting on his lap.“Maru, it’s fine--” Before he could say anything to calm Maru down, bright orange flames burst up around him, glowing with same colour as the small kid’s raging eyes. / Mano! / He quickly pulled the teen doctor back when he tried to touch the flames, calling up a barrier to keep the flames at bay, but he wasn’t fast enough. A small flame landed on his sleeve and burned through his clothes and flesh. Though as suddenly as the flames appeared, they vanished just as quickly. One glance showed Maru out cold in Eun Yul’s lap, with Eun Yul hugging him protectively. / What, just what was that!? / Mano stared with his mouth agape at the small kid, while pushing Choi away from himself. / That was the person who traumatised Maru-- // I know that, shut the fuck up. Those flames, they’re definitely Maru’s magic, but he, he definitely doesn’t have the gift of it... / Mano tried to study Maru closer, but Eun Yul called up his blades to surround him and his kid./ You should go back for today, Mano. / Choi sighed, petting the teen on the shoulder and ignoring that glare he got in return. / Let Maru rest, he’s traumatised enough, tell Gamunbi we’ll visit when Maru’s much better. / / I don’t care how you do it, make sure Maru’s back to his normal self fast. / With that, Mano unwillingly returned back to Gammy’s side. Choi ordered the puppy to leave the castle, not taking the chance for it to overwhelm its owner and further scaring their scared little kid. / Well, at least we now know Maru’s capable of hating someone-- Eun Yul? / It took him by surprise when Eun Yul tossed a roll of bandages to him./ Cover that up. You’ll scare Maru. / The vampire just said plainly, laying down the unconsciously body on his lap and stroking Maru’s hair gently./ Cover what up-- Oh. / The part of his arm where Maru’s flame burnt is regenerating, but it kept being eaten away by the phantom flames. / Wow, it looks like Maru can be capable of powerful magics too. // Yeah, yeah, go get that treated soon or else Maru’s going to cry even more. / Eun Yul rolled his eyes, focusing on his kid instead. / You’ve seen the flames, I don’t think this is anything Mano will be able to treat. Maybe Saeha might be able to help, hm... /It took longer than a week before Maru could finally speak again. “Eun, Eun Yul-nim… good, good morning...” The little kid squeaked softly at Eun Yul when he woke, and Eun Yul had to admit he had never been so overjoyed to hear someone call his name. He hugged the small kid close, petting him on the back.“How are you feeling, Maru?” He asked softly, and winced when Maru shook his head.“I… scared…” Maru mewed, looking so tiny and helpless. “I… very scared…”He quickly looked into Maru’s memories. He couldn’t see any trace of that dream inside his mind, and his emotions aren’t all messed up anymore. There is still some residual fear in him, but with enough rest he should be getting much better from this point on.“It’s alright, we’re here, Maru.” Choi smiled and ruffled his hair. “We will protect you, Maru.”“Good, good morning Choi-nim…” Maru reached up and grabbed his hand, and placed it on his cheek. The small kid closed his eyes and enjoyed the warmth, almost killing the elder vampire by just how adorable that gesture was./ If you’re going to ask me if I saw that I’ll fucking stab you. // But he’s just so sweet, did you see that, Eun Yul? /It took a lot of effort for Eun Yul to swallow the urge to plant a few swords in the elder vampire, reminding himself over and over again that will only spook his terrified baby. Maru doesn’t need that right now, watching a tiny smile return to his face, perhaps staying like this for a bit longer wouldn’t be too bad--Maru’s stomach grumbled, and immediately both of them warped the little kid to the kitchen. “Just give me a moment, Maru, I’ll whip up the most delicious feast for you, alright?” Petting Maru on the head, Choi quickly rushed to the food cabinet, pulling out various ingredients and starting to prepare their meal.“Choi-nim…” Maru called out softly after the black haired vampire, but stayed quietly on his lap. “Choi’s busy cooking, how about I read you a story in the meantime, Maru?” Eun Yul asked, and upon seeing the brightest smile then entire week on his kid’s face, he couldn’t help but hug Maru tight. / I’m sorry, Maru, sorry for making you so scared like this. I swear, I won’t ever die like this in front of your eyes... / He promised, and even if Maru couldn’t hear his words, this is a promise that he won’t be breaking.Maru beamed throughout the story. Finally seeing that lovely smile again Eun Yul set the book aside and hugged Maru tight, not letting go till Choi announced breakfast is ready. Maru seemed confused by that, but didn't say anything, just sitting on his lap and enjoying the hug, even humming his little lullaby happily.The small kid managed to eat a lot more than he did for the previous few days. Although his appetite hadn't returned to normal, Choi didn’t have to keep coaxing him to eat just another spoonful. He even let out an adorable giggle when Choi tried and failed to pick up a fishball with his chopsticks, and it bounced on the floor.“Sorry, it was slippery,” Choi told Maru, his eyes twinkling. He easily tossed it to the sink with his magic, and refrained from using his right arm to eat from that moment on./ Your hand isn’t recovering, how useless. / Eun Yul shook his head. / And stop bragging about how amazing Maru is. // But isn’t he amazing? Even you didn’t manage to hurt me so much, I’m sure Maru’s going to be real powerful when he grows up. / Seeing that proud look on Choi’s face, Eun Yul could only roll his eyes. / Yeah yeah, wait till Maru cries because he sees you are injured. / / Speaking of that, I’ll bring Maru to Gamunbi’s place later, to see if they managed to find out anything. / As Maru quickly scooped up a fishball for him and placed it carefully on his plate for him, Choi petted Maru on the head again, watching the little kid smile happily back at him./ Maru has just recovered!? You are already bringing him out?! // He should be getting some air and a lot more moving about. You had been hugging him everywhere the last week, let him go out and play a bit. He’ll recover much faster this way. // … … fine. /“So you two finally decided to show your faces,” Mano complained as he led them to where Gamunbi is waiting. Despite his general dislike of Eun Yul, Choi guessed he is there only for Maru. And as Maru pattered up to him and gave him a hug, his features softened with a smile. Though it vanished quickly when Mano realised he was looking. / Oi, stop staring you creep-- Your arm. /As those doe brown eyes narrowed, Mano carried Maru up in his arms and quickened his footsteps. The two vampires followed him./ You are worried about me, Mano? I’m touched-- // Why would I!? I’ll rather Maru not cry just because you are a useless elder who can’t take care of yourself?! / Mano complained, and for once, Eun Yul nodded and agreed with his words. / I’m so hurt right now-- // Choi would you mind not harassing my kid just for once? /That got Eun Yul laughing, and even Mano wore a smug smile on his face. Well, as long as Maru remains so cluelessly smiling, he isn’t going to complain. For now.“Are you better, Maru?” Gamunbi asked kindly, petting Maru on the head. Maru just tilted his head, not understanding what he meant.“I, I, I’m fine, big-Gammy-nim?” / Maru doesn’t remember anything, try not to dreg up anythings, please. / Choi sighed softly, petting Maru on the head. Mano’s still hugging him close, and glared at him./ I’ll take note of it. Mano, let Maru go play with Garam and Gabi. Leon won’t be able to do anything for the next few hours, let him rest for a while. Don’t worry, Henry’s watching over him. / Gamunbi glanced over at Mano, and the teen nodded.“Maru, do you want to play with Garam and Gabi?” Mano asked, and Maru looked back towards Eun Yul and Choi. “Don’t worry, Maru, we’re still here. Go have fun, we’re just going to talk with Gamunbi for a while.” Choi smiled at him, and Maru gave a small nod.“m’Kay!” Maru squeaked softly, and allowed Mano to carry him deeper into Gamunbi’s domain. Even so, Eun Yul kept his eyes on his kid for quite some distance, only relaxing when he saw the two dragon girls petting him on the head and chatted with him./ Leon…? / Choi asked./ He isn’t ready yet, it was tough enough to keep him alive. And right now, I don’t think it’s the right time to introduce him to Maru. / Gamunbi waved away the issue, and summoned Mano back to join them. “So, from what Mano said-”“That wound. Show it to me.” Mano cut off Gamunbi and demanded. Choi sighed deeply and rolled back his sleeve, showing the flesh on his arm being constantly regenerating and being eaten away.“Maru’s just so amazing--”Eun Yul immediately struck him hard with his blade, though Choi blocked it easily with a kick. Gamunbi pulled Mano back by his collar, standing protectively in front of him and summoning his glaive.“Fuck you Choi, how many times are you going to repeat that!?” Now with Maru no longer in range, it seems like Eun Yul finally has a chance to let out his frustrations. “Just go and die already!?”“Choi, don’t you want your wound looked at?” Gamunbi’s words got Choi to stop, and the elder vampire easily kicked off the various swords Eun Yul summoned. Eun Yul glared at him and walked off, and from the direction he is going, he is most probably going back to Maru’s side.“Sorry ‘bout that, here Mano, do you think you can do anything about this?” Choi held up his arm again as Mano tched irritatedly, though his expression soon turned into a frown.“The fire certainly was called up by Maru, but this, I’ve never seen such flesh eating magic before.” The young doctor admitted, stumped. “You might… have to check with Teacher, just go to his castle or something.” Mano spat out those words, hurt surfacing in his eyes, and Gamunbi put a hand on his shoulder. “Saeha’s not at his place--” “Wha--”“-- the entire place is abandoned. He took with him all his books.” Gamunbi said while keeping Mano in place under his firm hand. “But, but, but Teacher has got to be there! He said, he said will be there forever, he said he won’t wander anymore!” Mano seemed to turn weak in the knees, his face becoming paler. “That was because he had a student, Mano. His place had been emptied days after you left.”Hearing those words Mano fell to the ground, having much trouble processing that his teacher is no longer... there./ You… could have told him much sooner. / Choi shook his head. He moved to help Mano up, but Gamunbi stopped him./ Mano’s much stronger than you think, Choi. Just look. / Despite looking as though his world just came crashing down, Mano soon picked himself off the ground. “Fine, it’s not like I’m his student anymore, of course he can go anywhere he wants.” The young teen muttered darkly under his breath, and walked towards Gamunbi, resting his forehead on his chest. Gamunbi gave him a hug, petting him on the back. Seeing Gamunbi’s glare at him, Choi stayed quiet./ What would you all do from now? / Gamunbi asked as Choi watched Eun Yul fend off two unhappy dragon girls and hug Maru in his arms. / I guess we’ll have to find Saeha first, while trying to find out more about that guy who killed Eun Yul. But Maru’s not in any state to travel yet, and I don’t think he’ll allow us to travel without him. / Choi shook his head, and smiled back when Maru looked at him. The lovely kid smiled back at him, sending a warm feeling to his heart./ Hm, I was thinking of letting Mano travel with you if you are planning something like that-- // What no!? I’m not going to travel with the BaekJung?! You want me to die?! / “So Gabi, Garam, what do you two think about traveling?” The two dragons cheered immediately, and pattered over to his side. Mano made a face at his sisters’ excitement./ And you’ll make me come along too this way. / / It’s a good way for Leon to get adjusted to his new life too, and you won’t be able to sleep in peace if you don’t find out where your teacher went. // Tch. /“Stop pretending you’re asleep, Mano. You are too excited for the trip to be asleep, aren’t you?” Gamunbi chuckled and petted him on the head. Snorting at those words, Mano grabbed his blanket and threw it at the elder vampire. Gamunbi stopped it from hitting him, freezing it in the air, and folding it neatly before placing it back at the foot of his kid’s bed.“And I thought only Choi would come and look for me deep in the night.” Mano complained, but sat up on the bed, putting his glasses back on.“I’m just here to talk, Mano, and if Choi ever visits at this hour again tell me,” Gamunbi said while sitting down beside his kid. “We will be going to find Saeha, have you thought of what you’ll say to your teacher when you see him?”Mano snorted. “He tossed me away. There’s nothing left for me to say to him.”“That isn’t what you really want,” Gamunbi smiled kindly at him and stroked his hair. “And no one’s going to be calling you childish if you admit you miss him.”“Who, who would miss a guy like him!?” Mano snapped, but he still leaned closer, his voice filled with hurt. “Teacher… would he even remember me if we managed to find him?”“You are his student, there is no way he will forget about you.” Gamunbi reassured the young teen, who hummed quietly in response. “It’s alright to just say what you want to say to him, Mano.”“I…” Mano sighed quietly. “What I want to say huh…”Gamunbi stayed quiet and sat beside his kid till Mano is ready to speak.“I… miss Teacher.” Mano said softly, sounding less of his usual cocky self and very much like a vulnerable little kid. “He’s always this insurmountable mountain that I can never overcome, I just want to show him how much I’ve grown, I want him to acknowledge me! But I… I hadn’t grown any bit at all…”“You’ve grown much, Mano.” Gamunbi reassured him, squeezing his shoulders. “Not just your techniques, you saved Maru’s life, remember? You’ve grown as a person too.”“That won’t matter to Teacher,” Mano sighed. “Only my skills mattered, and look, even after I treated him Maru still complained about the pain, I’m just, just not that good enough yet!”“That’s because you are still a kid, Mano.” Gamunbi chuckled lightly. “It took Saeha decades to reach where he is now, to become his equal straight away, that’s impossible.”That got Mano to glare at him. “Great deal of comfort you are,” the half vampire complained.“I’m just stating the truth,” Gamunbi shrugged, laughing lightly as Mano rolled his eyes.“Teacher… had always been my goal.” Mano sighed. “He said, he said once that I had the talent, I had the skills to surpass him, he looked so proudly at me that I just, I just want him to praise me more! Make him proud of me! Proud to have me as his student! But I… I...“Mano trailed off, staring down at his hands. He interlocked his fingers and rubbed his knuckles, trying to get his thoughts out.“If Teacher asked me to return to his side, I, I’ll go back to him,” Mano spoke softly. “But I… I don’t think I’ll be happy there… I… I just…”“Just follow your heart, Mano.” Gamunbi squeezed his shoulders again. “If you aren’t happy, you are always welcomed back. If Saeha doesn’t allow you to return, I’ll come personally and get you back.”As Mano tried to protest, Gamunbi grinned.“I’m an elder, remember? I protect those who are weaker than me, those who need protection, and--”“Yeah yeah, I get it.” Mano rolled his eyes and threw his blanket at him again. He then flopped down to his bed, tossing his glasses to the nearby drawer table. Although it is dark, Gamunbi could still make out a slight blush and a smile on the teen’s face.“You could have said thanks like a normal person,” Gamunbi petted Mano on the head, taking it as his signal to leave. “Good night, and don’t worry so much. Things will always work out in the end.”"Maru, sorry, but for tonight, can you sleep first on your own?" Choi planted a kiss on Maru's head, and the small kid looked up at him curiously."Choi-nim, is there, is there anything wrong? If I can help-""We're just going to spar a little." Eun Yul explained, petting him on the head. "We'll be right back when we're done, don't worry so much alright, Maru?""m'Kay, just don't, don't get hurt, please?" Maru squeaked, and allowed Choi to tuck him safely under the blanket when he promised they won't get hurt. The little kid felt lonely, but Choi swore silently they will be back by his side before he wakes. If they can't be there when he sleeps, at least they will be there when he wakes./ I won't be going easy on you, / Eun Yul warned, and he chuckled at those words./ You have never won against me before, it isn't going to start now. / / My little baby's depending on me to not lose, get ready to die, Choi. /Seeing that hungry grin on Eun Yul's face, he grinned back too. It had been a long time since they last sparred seriously, and for the sake of their little kid, they will have to keep getting stronger and stronger to protect him./ Let's see if you are even capable of getting anywhere close to that, Yul. /
----- CHAPTER BREAK -----
While watching his kids sans Mano playing with Gammy, Gamunbi felt the half vampire twins nearing his domain. Mu Yeung’s hugging Yu Jin, who had grown up a bit more and looking like a normal human child with his baby scales no longer showing. Ignatio is having a one sided conversation with a pale human he hadn't seen before, who seemed intent on ignoring the cheerful man. Are they looking for Eun Yul?Opening his domain up to them, Gamunbi went to welcome his guests.“Yo dude, ‘cha doing well?” Ignatio waved good naturedly, while Mu Yeung gave a simple ‘hi’. Little Yu Jin gave him a bright smile, and looked around curiously.“I’m well, thank you,” Gamunbi said, petting the little red haired dragon on the head. “Yu Jin, do you want to play with Garam and Gabi?” “Play, play!” Yu Jin nodded frantically in Mu Yeung’s arms, and the half vampire chuckled. As Yu Jin is set down on the floor and looking at him expectantly, Gamunbi called for his daughters./ Garam, Gabi, Yu Jin’s here to visit. / The two dragon girls ran towards his direction immediately, with Gammy following them excitedly, while Henry stood on the spot for a while unmoving. Looking around disappointedly at the emptiness, the zombie boy went to join Mano in the library instead. "Ignatio and I will be leaving on a mission after this," Mu Yeung said while waiting for the two dragon girls to arrive. "We will be taking Yu Jin with us, but we're hoping you can help us look after Leon while we're gone."“I told you to just leave me behind to die,” the pale figure snapped, so Leon’s his name? Ignatio smacked him on the head, ignoring his complaint about the pain. “Leon here’s got some illness, we’re hoping your doctor can treat him too? Mano right?” Ignatio asked, “we’ll pay for it, we promise. We don’t really have much gold with us now but-” He is cut off as Garam and Gabi ran in and hugged Yu Jin, meeping happily to see their friend again.“Yu Jin Yu Jin, let’s go play!” Gabi giggled and led Yu Jin towards their playroom, while Garam stood at the spot staring at Leon.“Oppa, are you... dragon?” She asked haltingly, tugging his hand. He does have some slight scaling around the edges of his eyes and on his hands, is that why Garam asked if he is a dragon? Taken aback by her question, Leon just stared at her not knowing how to respond.“Garam, this is Leon. He will be staying with us for a while, please help to take care of him.” Gamunbi smiled at his curious little daughter and petted her on the head. “And Leon, would you mind helping me look after my kids while they play with Yu Jin?”“Hey, I’m not a babysitter-” Garam squealed happily, ignoring his weak protest. She quickly dragged him off to play with them. "Woah you're strong- Stop dragging me!" Ignatio chuckled as he watched his friend struggle to keep up with the little girl, then turned back towards Gamunbi. “Thanks dude, we’re worried what we should do about Leon when we’re not around-”Before he could finish his words Gamunbi warped them to a cozy little room with a round table and a pot of freshly brewed tea. “Here, this is a better place for us to talk.” Gamunbi gestured for them to take a seat. /And Mano, would you mind joining us?/Mano warped to his side, though his attention is still very much on the book in his hands. Henry found himself alone again, and went to find his sisters instead with a disappointed frown on his face. “So there’s going to be a patient huh. I can finally cut someone up?” Mano asked, so he had been eavesdropping on them again."Mano, no." One firm chop on the head and he shut up, deciding his book is much more interesting than the topic at hand. Seeing Mano making himself comfortable at the table the twins took a seat too, though still watching him cautiously.“Since Leon is going to be staying here for a while, would you two mind telling me a bit more about him? How he is like, what we should look out for.” Gamunbi asked while pouring a cup of tea for each of them. "Leon’s quite a pessimist,” Mu Yeung sighed lightly and shook his head. “He’s an outcast because he has a poison touch, but he’s a nice guy to hang around. But we might need to be away for a longer time for this mission, we’re worried that without us to protect him, he might die before we return.”Beside him Ignatio nodded. “Yeah, Leon kept saying things like we should just leave him to die, but he helped us out quite a bit. He cooked for us when we’re too tired to move after missions, not that his cooking is any good, and he helped play with and teach Yu Jin when we’re not free too.”“So he is a handful-”“Leon wouldn’t cause much trouble for you,” Mu Yeung protested, “really, at most he’ll just complain all day, but he’s really a good guy!”“Yeah, Leon’s really nice and it’s just because how everyone treated him that he’s just bitter inside, but he’s a swell dude!”Seeing the twins defend their friend, Gamunbi chuckled. They must have been really close to Leon.“I’m sure that he isn’t a bad person from your words, but I do have four growing kids-”“I’m not a kid!?”“-here. I’ll rather they not be influenced by pessimistic thoughts when growing up.” Gamunbi explained to the twins, and they looked away.“Well, Leon really is a handful, but…”“Mu Yeung, I didn’t say that I won’t take him in. We will certainly take good care of your friend.” Gamunbi poured another cup of tea for the half vampires. “And no, asking Eun Yul wouldn’t help, and I’m sure Choi will route Leon back here for Mano to care for him.”“Thanks dude, but good luck with that. We tried for years to make him more optimistic but...” Ignatio gulped down that offered cup gratefully, and Gamunbi poured another cup for him. “But wait, if Choi’s just going to send him him, does that mean Leon’s…”“He’s in that bad a state,” Gamunbi confirmed. “Don’t worry, Mano will-”“So I can cut him up?” Mano finally looked up from his book, a grin growing on his face.“No, Mano, you are treating him.” Gamunbi spoke sternly, and the young teen rolled his eyes.“Spoilsport.” “So… so thanks, Gamunbi-hyung,” Mu Yeung said, although he still looked like he has some lingering worries, twitching as he looked at Mano. “This mission might take some time, we might not return so soon, but we’ll surely pay you when we return! Be it gold or anything, just name it!”“There is no need for any payment,” Gamunbi shook his head. “I am an elder, it is our duty to take care of the young ones.”“An elder?” Ignatio asked, looking him up thoroughly. “But you’re like, not very old?”“I can assure you I am much older than you think I am,” Gamunbi chuckled. “But an elder doesn’t just mean we are older, hm, I’m sure the two of you aren’t very sure about the power structure of us vampires?”“Not really…” Mu Yeung answered honestly. “No one explained it to us, we had to figure this out on our own. We just told Leon we’re wizards because we didn't even know ourselves that well.”“Yeah,” Ignatio nodded, “we found out we need to take blood, get a bit wonky when we see blood, the sun hurts us a little, but other than that we don’t really know much about ourselves.”“That’s because the newly turned often have someone to guide them, but hm… For vampires, we have a king. And for each king we have, it is a generation.” Gamunbi explained.“A king? So there’s a vampire king?” Mu Yeung asked, with Ignatio looked very surprised by the information too.“Our generation does have a king, but he vanished a long time ago. Without him passing his power down, your generation ended up without a king, which might be why your generation is so much more chaotic than ours.” While explaining, Gamunbi poured another round of tea for his guests. “That isn’t anything for you to worry about, but because we are from the generation before yours, to you, we are your elders. We are stronger than you young ones, and our duty was to protect and nurture you.”“That’s… good to hear?” Mu Yeung said, “so if we have any other issues we can come to you?”“That was the rules set by the generation before us, but since we no longer have a king, not all elders choose to be chained down by them.” Gamunbi chuckled as both twins squirmed at their seat. “Don’t worry, I will still help to take care of the two of you and your friend, since Yu Jin is a friend of my kids too, but do not expect the other elders to offer such. Choi maybe, depending on how much it interests him, but the rest…”“We, we understand, but Gamunbi-nim, thank you very much for your help?” Ignatio gulped, and Gamunbi laughed at how polite he suddenly became. “There is no need to be formal about it, I’m just a normal person taking care of four lovely kids," he said, and despite seeming like he isn’t paying any attention, Mano’s ears grew red behind his book. “But that aside, regarding Leon, would the two of you mind if I turn him?”The twins looked at each other and gulped. “Well, this… we know Leon is weak but… no, we won't mind!" Mu Yeung begged, “whatever you do, please, please just save him!”“I will,” Gamunbi promised solemnly. “Don’t worry, we'll make sure your friend alive and well when you return.”The twins stayed for lunch, amazing the little kids at how much food they wolfed down. Little Yu Jin watched them intently, before getting off his seat halfway and pattering over to Gamunbi's side. The little dragon tugged his pants, asking, "teach, teach cook? Please?"Seeing the guilty look on the twins’ faces, Gamunbi chuckled and nodded. "Sure, Yu Jin, when you return I'll teach you to cook some simple dishes.""Thank, thank!" The tiny dragon meeped happily and ran back to Mu Yeung's side, meeping happily at his father."Thank you," Mu Yeung gave a small bow, carrying Yu Jin up in his arms, while Ignatio gave a cheery wave to them. To their friend, Mu Yeung gave Leon a firm pat on the back and told him to take care, and Ignatio gave him a big hug. Though Leon ignored both of them despite enjoying lunch with them just moments ago. He did give a small wave to Yu Jin when the little kid waved goodbye to him. Hm… seeing how he allowed Garam and Gabi to drag him around before lunch, their newcomer seems to have a soft spot for children. "Henry, please wash the dishes. And Garam, Gabi, please keep the furniture. You can go play after this. Mano and I will be talking to Leon." As the kids voiced their agreement and he patted them on their heads, they went off on their tasks. "I don't have anything to say to you," Leon growled, the hostility in his eyes returning now that the little kids are no longer around."Sure, all you need to do is to shut up and let us cut you up-" One quick chop on the head and Mano decided he'd rather remain quiet and listen."Leon, Mu Yeung and Ignatio asked us to look after you while they are not around." Gamunbi started, calling up a few snacks and a pot of tea to the table. Leon's eyes widened, before looking away and muttering a sulky 'wizards' under his breath. "Mano here's a doctor in training, but I can assure you that he is very capable of taking care of you.""Really." Leon's voice dripped with sarcasm as he glanced over at Mano, "all I see is just a brat.""Yeah?" Mano glared back at him, "you're a brat yourself too, and you have no say in this. You are going to stay here and let us make you better.""... Get any closer and I'll bite." Leon snarled back, now fully hostile against Mano. His eyes narrowed, and fangs elongated, more scales appearing around his eyes and on his fingers. Mano just grinned back, drawing out his scalpels and twirling one on his fingers, eyes never leaving his new prey."Kids, get along with each other." Gamunbi gave the two a firm smack on the head, and both turned to him and complained."Look, it's his fault in the first place, and I'm not a kid!" Leon snapped back, rubbing his head in pain. "I'm already twenty!""I'm not a kid either, I, I'm… old." Mano pouted back at him, puffing his chest and trying in vain to appear older, though to Gamunbi both of them just look like two little babies squabbling. "Listen Leon. Mu Yeung and Ignatio entrusted you in our care, and we will make sure to take care of you till they return." Gamunbi explained patiently, while watching Leon closely for his response. "We have a resident doctor here, and despite his age and mannerisms-""Hey?!""- I can assure you Mano is a very capable of making sure you stay alive till your friends pick you up."Leon rolled his eyes, hissing. "Yeah yeah, look, I can still take care of myself, and I don't need your help or pity!""We are not pitying you, Leon." Gamunbi couldn't help but reach out and ruffle the white haired teen's head, seeing how he's like a kid throwing a tantrum. That caught Leon by surprise, and for a while he just stared as Gamunbi petted him on the head absent mindedly. It took him some moments to swat that hand away. "I accepted Mu Yeung and Ignatio's request, and I intend to fulfill it no matter what. Helping you is just part of that agreement.""They didn't need to do this at all!" Leon muttered under his breath, a tint of gentleness returning to his eyes at the mention of his friends which soon faded off. "Look, how much are they paying you?! I, I can't pay you back but just, just write it off or something-""They didn't pay me-""You can just repay us with your body," Mano cut in, grinning. He called up his red and green scalpels, his eyes glowing. "I'll cut you up, cut you open and into tiny meat chunks and put you back together slowly, you'll be so much better- Dad!?!?"One harder smack on the head and Mano turned away from the conversation, sulking. Leon shrunk back, turning a little green, wrapping his arms around himself protectively. "Mano aside, no, Mu Yeung and Ignatio do not owe me a favour or any payment." Gamunbi shook his head, but his words didn't seem to convince Leon, doubts still lingering in the pale man's head. "Hm… how about this? My kids seem to like you a lot, I'll consider this written off if you keep my kids company till the twins return.""I'm not a babysitter!" Leon muttered under his breath, then looked up and glared at him. "Fine. I'll look after those kids for you, in return you better not keep those two idiots in your favour!""I will keep my word-""And make sure that, that monster doesn't come near me ever!" Leon challenged Mano with his glare, and the young doctor just grinned back. "I, I'll bite if you come any closer!""Suuuure you can try," Mano drawled, his eyes lighting up at the challenge. Another smack on the head."Dad?!?!?!?"True to his word Leon did try to look after Gabi and Garam. When Gamunbi announced to his kids that Leon is staying with them, both girls excitedly overwhelmed him with their chatter, and Henry had to help him to a seat to take a breather."Leon, Leon!" Gabi squeaked, "you are not feeling well?""Not feeling well?" Garam echoed, both looking at him worriedly as he petting both on their heads. “I’m fine, I just need some rest-”“Mano, Mano! Mano is a great doctor!” Gabi meeped, putting her tiny hands over his, a faint trace of scales observable around her fingers. “Mano will make you better!”“Mano mano mano mano!” Garam agreed, nodding frantically. “Mano helped, helped Maru lots too!” “Teacher is really great,” Henry added, unblinking eyes never leaving his. “He will make you better.”Hearing the little kids’ words Leon made a face. Chuckling, Gamunbi gathered his kids.“Let Leon rest first, Garam, go make sure Mano is taking breaks from his research. Get him down for lunch later. Henry, Gabi, get the ingredients you want, I’m going to prepare lunch.” At his words, the three kids nodded and ran off, though Garam still turned back towards Leon with a worried expression on her face before she left.“They are… nice kids,” Leon said softly, watching the directions where the kids had headed off. “Unlike Mano.”Wincing at those words, Gamunbi can only hope things become much smoother between the two of them eventually. But with Mano treating Leon as a new toy…“I am going to prepare lunch with Henry and Gabi, would you like to join us?” Putting the topic aside for now, choosing to believe things will eventually work themselves out, Gamunbi asked. Leon gave a non committed shrug, then a firm nod.“Should make myself useful now that I have to live here,” Leon rolled his eyes at his bemused look.“Don’t push yourself too hard, the little kids will cry if anything happens to you.” Gamunbi chuckled at Leon’s annoyed glare back at him.“Yeah, yeah, I’ll try.”Leon was able to help with some simple chopping and cooking. But seeing how little spices and seasoning he used, he might be the reason the half vampire twins complained about flavourless food.“Five more pinches of salt, two pinches of pepper, three more stems of saffron,” Henry complained after tasting the chicken Leon marinated. Leon looked split between complaining about adding more spices and the kid shouldn’t be tasting raw meat while Henry added the spices he mentioned into the mix. Mano sure had been working hard on fine tuning his senses after the zombie kid requested to have an ability that can help out at his home. “Dad, dad! Is this ready?” Gabi asked while stirring the rice. Gamunbi nodded, and wiped a few grains of rice from her face, the little dragon had stealing from the pot again. Her teething period seemed to be lasting much longer than he thought it would, perhaps he will ask Yeon Hwa about it the next time she visits. As he turned away to check up on another pot, Gamunbi heard Leon’s panicked cry. “You don’t put your hand in the boiling pot!”“Rice is crunchy!” Gabi pouted back at him, hiding her hand behind her back. “Look, the water’s boiling, it’s too hot for you to put your hand inside-”Gamunbi watched amused as Leon became much paler as Gabi dipped her hand inside the rice pot and stealing another handful of uncooked rice. “Gabi, don’t steal from the pot,” Gamunbi put a hand on her head, and his daughter put her hand down unwillingly. “It’s unhygienic, go wash your hands, I’ll get you some hard cookies to munch on.”“Meep…” came her deflated reply as the little dragon pattered off to the sink. “She’s a wizard too?” Leon asked, looking at her in amazement. “But she’s just so small…”Gamunbi just smiled back at him, perhaps he might find out the truth one day. Lunch passed without much issue once they started eating, but before that it was Mano grinning at Leon barring his teeth while Leon glared back defensively. “Wow, your marination’s great!” Leon exclaimed after taking a bite of the cooked chicken, and Henry’s eyes lit up. “I cooked the rice!” Gabi pouted, expecting to be praised too, and Leon chuckled lightly. He petted her softly on the head, to which she smiled widely back.“But no more stealing from the boiling pot alright?” Leon told her worriedly, and she nodded, the pout returning to her face. “I dragged Mano for lunch!” Garam declared proudly too, getting off her seat and pattering over to Leon’s side. “Mano refused but I dragged him here!” Seeing Mano wince, Leon smirked back and petted her on the head too, before the little girl pattered back to her seat happily. “Eat your lunch and stop running around,” Mano glared, while heaping a serving of chicken for Garam. “And I said I’m coming for lunch in just a moment!”As Garam and Gabi both turned to look at him, he quickly shut up and focused on his own dish.“Yesterday Mano skipped dinner!” Gabi complained, “and Mano missed breakfast!”That earned him two smacks on the head by Garam, and Henry moved his chair closer and mimicked her motion too.“And before that Mano slept late, and-”“Garam, Gabi, Henry, I’m sure Mano is reflecting on his actions. If you continue he won’t be able to eat his lunch.” Gamunbi couldn’t help but smile as the three kids looked guiltily at him. "Look I'm doing something important-"Immediately all three turned towards him, and three more smacks later Mano decided to eat in peace. Despite his misgivings towards Mano, Leon looked thoroughly amused by that, trying to hide his growing smirk.After lunch it is Mano's turn to clean up. Gamunbi assigned Leon to help out too despite his protests. "What?! He's going to kill me?!" "Everyone takes turns to clean up," Henry told him emotionlessly, stacking up the plates and bringing them to the wash area. Seeing how much weight the small kid can carry, Leon followed him, making sure to keep Henry between him and Mano. "And teacher won't kill you, he will just chop you up into pieces.""That's the same as killing me?!" Paling at those words, Leon looked around for Garam and Gabi who seemed much friendlier, but they ran off after Gamunbi assigned their task to them. "Teacher's skilled enough to put you back together, I died but he brought me back to life." Henry shrugged, ignoring Leon's shocked look and placing all the dishes in the water basin. Turning to Mano, he said, "dad said no bullying Leon, if not…"The little kid frowned suddenly, and nodded unwillingly. "Dad said if you bully Leon he won't invite Maru over to play.""What." Mano took a couple of dishes from the pile, lattering them with a layer of soap. "Maru has nothing to do with this- Fine, stop it with that look. Go prepare the herbs you found yesterday, I'll check up on you later. And tell dad to stop meddling in this!"That got Henry to smile, and the kid ran off from the washing area. Without the shield between him and the young doctor, Leon tried to shuffle away, but Mano called out."Oi, and you, start washing." He tossed a sponge over, and Leon scrambled to catch it. Flailing his arms about, he still missed it and the soap wet sponge dropped to the floor with a splash. That got an irritated 'tch' from Mano, and Leon glared back, daring him to make any moves or raise his arms, but instead the teen just continued washing, ignoring him. Climbing to his feet, and picking up the sponge, he went over to the washing area, trying to still put some distance between him and Mano. And blinked.Mano is already done with the towering pile of dishes somehow, and is stowing them away in some place he has no idea where. "What." "What what." Mano smirked, his voice daring and challenging him. "If I got the ability, why not use it?"At the mention of an ability, Leon felt his anger flare up inside and had to swallow it in. An ability, it's something useful, something helpful, something valued. If only he had one, instead of whatever is eating him away inside, he wouldn't have hurt, wouldn't have killed those close to him, wouldn't have been shunned. But he promised Gamunbi to help look after the kids in exchange for him not putting the idiotic twins in his favour, and that man looked like one who keeps his word. For that, he won't allow himself to lose his temper over this infuriating youth in front of him."Then you won't need me to help," he snapped back, tossing the sponge back as hard as he could. It didn't hit Mano in the face as he had hoped, the teen used some form of magic to take it out of the air and then it vanished like the dishes did too. "As if I even asked for your help, Dad's the one," Mano shrugged, "but I do have other uses for you."As the teen grinned back unnaturally widely at him, Leon gulped and took a few steps back, wrapping his arms protectively around his body. "Come any closer and I'll bite," he warned again, though that did nothing but make Mano grin even wider, sending chills down his back."Oh?" The black haired teen asked, eyes never leaving him. He didn't say anything or did anything else, the inaction making Leon even more uncomfortable. Mano called up a mop which danced itself over the wet spots on the floor. Not knowing how he can contribute to the cleaning up Leon just stood aside and observed what is usually done."Teacher, my hand dropped off." Henry walked back in, holding up his own arm. The little kid said previously he was brought back to life by Mano, does that mean he is a zombie? Gulping back his nervousness and unease, Leon watched as Mano knocked Henry on the head. "How many times do I have to tell you to be more careful?" Mano shook his head and took the arm from Henry. "Dad said I don't need to keep count on that," the pale kid stuck his tongue out, but stayed on the spot waiting for Mano to study his fallen off arm. After a few moments of silence, Mano sighed.“I told you not to play so rough with Garam and Gabi, it will take time to attach this.” Frowning, Mano walked away from the washing area, with Henry following behind.“Hey, what about me?” Though hesitant, Leon asked, he was given a task after all but…“Go play with the girls or something,” Mano shrugged dismissively, not even looking back at him. He sounds much more preoccupied with Henry’s predicament, questioning the little kid on his recent activities as they left the area. When he could no longer hear their voices, Leon heaved a sigh of relief, at least he survived this chore without being dissected by the teen.For the rest of the day, very thankfully, Leon wasn’t paired up with Mano again. He spent more time with Garam and Gabi, mostly being dragged around by the two of them. He thought he had been more energised being in such a natural forest untouched by other humans, finding even breathing is much easier and the constant pain eating his body away gone. But seeing how he is still being easily being pulled around by two little girls, it might just have been wishful hoping. Gabi and Garam are two curious little girls. They have some very faint scaling on their fingers, but they don’t seem to be “cursed by a snake spirit” or what other names the wrenched villagers called him. Energetic and curious little girls, they didn’t seem to have any worries in the world. Of course, with their father picking such a place to live in, they hadn’t need to worry about scrutiny from the normal humans. Gabi likes to put things in her mouth and munch on them, it seemed that every time he looked at her she has a new leaf or item in her mouth, with her twin smacking her on her head to get her to stop. Garam stumbles over her words sometimes, and if she cannot find any words to describe her feelings, she kept repeating “dad” and somehow Gabi is able to understand her. Doing everything together, from chores to exploring to asking him all sorts of questions about himself, the two remind him of older versions of Yu Jin, and he would rather spend more time with them than with Mano. But for the next few days, Leon noticed he would be paired with Mano for at least one chore, a futile attempt perhaps to get them to get along well.“Stop it,” he snared, washing the dirty dishes while feeling familiar chills down his back of hostile eyes glaring at him. “Stop what,” Mano drawled. He hadn’t needed to turn back to know the teen’s wearing that horrifying wide grin again, somehow seeming like he is barring a mouthful of impossibly sharp fangs. “Stop staring,” Leon growled, trying to sound as intimidating as he could while not showing any signs of fear. “I’m not a piece of meat for you to ogle.” “I don’t ogle at meat.” Mano rolled his eyes. “Aaaaaaaaand, you are a lot more precious than mere meat.”Those words sent even more shivers down his spine, the teen’s definitely has a lot of screws loose, and the further he stays from he, the better his chances of survival would be. And even if he dies in their care, which he seriously suspects he would, he doesn’t want his body to end up in this crazy teen’s possession.“Just… stop staring!” He shouted back in frustration, even turning back to glare at Mano, who just shrugged.“Come on, it’s not like I get live specimens to experiment on everyday,” Mano said nonchalantly, while a pair of red and green scalpels appeared in his hands, causing hairs to raise on his neck at the power used, "such an interesting one in fact-"Fearing for his life, and perhaps sanity, Leon threw the washing rag at Mano and ran for it.Not that Leon could run for long, his stamina had never been good for strenuous activities in the first place. He could still hear Mano laughing. His legs gave up first as his lungs burned, as he panted for breath he realised he isn't alone. Somehow, a pair of curious blazing eyes blinked at him from the shadows-- he must be hallucinating isn't he?-- which gave a curious… bark. Laughing at the absurdity of it, and seeing how he would die anyway, Leon reached out to pet that curious barking shadow--A muzzle emerged from the dark, silky shadows and barked, much louder this time."Gammy." Mano called out, the young teen easily catching up with him, and grinned at his shock as an entire huge dog leapt out from the shadows and bounced to Mano's side, barking excitedly. "No it is not yet time for your walk-- Gammy stop that!"Despite his protest that dog licked Mano all over, leaving trails of shadow on the young teen which dripped to the ground and vanished. Leon watched on in amazement, he heard wizards have pet familiars, but a hound from shadows, that isn't something he expected. Entranced, he reached out hesitatingly to touch the hound, only for it to turn suddenly. Without warning the oversized hound licked him all over too with excited barking, and maybe he heard Mano laughing but that doesn't matter to him anymore for the moment. There is this fluffy dog in front of him, which doesn't seem to be dying from his touch unlike other small animals he encountered. A very friendly animal who looks like he wants to play, and despite how it looks feel just like a normal but oversized dog who just happened to be dipped in and dripping with shadows."Woah boy, woaaah boy," Leon called out and petted the dog on its muzzle, in which the dog barked back happily. Encouraged, Leon scratched the dog behind his ears too, which got even more barking. "You're so warm too…""That's Gammy, he's just a big dumb puppy," Mano snorted, and the hound whined sadly, ears drooping down. Glaring back at the young teen, Leon petted Gammy on the head."Don't listen to that guy, he’s an ass," Leon to Gammy, ignoring the glare from Mano. "Your name is Gammy, right? You're a good boy!" Immediately the shadowy hound perked up, bouncing up and down on its feet happily. "Hm… how about this? Sit?" As Leon called, Gammy flopped down to the ground, though tongue and tail still wagging hard. "Shake hand?" Gammy placed an oversized paw on Leon's outstretched palm."Now the other hand."As Gammy repeated with its other paw, Leon's eyes beamed and he almost but flung himself at the shadow hound. "Wow, you're a clever doggie, you know? You’re a clever boy, a good boy!" "It's a hellhound, they grow bigger the more they are loved, which just make them useless as stealth killing machines," Mano continued on, though Leon very evidently isn't paying him any attention, busy showering Gammy with lots of affection and pats. "Like sure it can still hide in the shadows, but one giant mutt is not a replacement for dozens of well trained killing machines.""Dozens of what?” Leon asked, half hearing his words. “There's even more Gammys here? I want to see them?"Annoyed, Mano gave him a firm smack on the head and ignored the yelp of pain. "Were you even listening to what I'm saying?!""No." Leon replied immediately, attention still very much occupied by the excited puppy, giving it instructions such as rolling over, play dead, and showering it with even more praise.Rolling his eyes at how childish that seemed, Mano instead asked, "you really like dogs, don't you."Leon continued petted Gammy on the muzzle, nodding absentmindedly. "Yeah, I like animals, but I can't really touch them; they die." Leon gave a soft sigh, but as Gammy borked him on the head with its wet nose, he laughed. "You're trying to cheer me up? You just such a good boy, you know? Good boy!""Hellhounds won't die from such weak poisons like yours," Mano snapped in irritation, though a grin soon crept back to his face. “I could make that poison even more potent…”But realising Leon would rather focus on playing with Gammy instead of paying anymore attention to his words, he tch’ed and walked off.“It looks like you are enjoying yourself,” Gamunbi appeared in his room that night. Leon jumped at the sudden intrusion, and he had to remind himself that he’s staying with a family of wizards, his fate is still at their mercy-“Is that still what you think of us so far?” Gamunbi chuckled, and Leon quickly tried to empty his mind of thoughts in horror. “Don’t worry, I am here just for a chat, nothing more.”Despite the reassurance, Leon found it hard to relax, especially when he is at his most vulnerable right now, and he’s sure if he makes a wrong move.“Gammy.” Gamunbi called out, immediately the shadowy hound leapt up from the shadows with a happy bark. Without any words from Gamunbi, the hound bounced over to his side and placed its muzzle on Leon’s lap. Although its eyes are still flaming, Gammy looks like it is pleading for some pets, giving soft happy barks when Leon reached out and petted it. “You like Gammy don’t you?” Gamunbi asked, smiling. “It says it likes you very much too.”“Yeah, Gammy’s a good boy,” Leon agreed, though still guarded against Gamunbi’s words. “And? Is there anything else you’ll like to say?”“No. Its just nice to see that you are getting along well with everyone.” Gamunbi chuckled and ruffled his hair, making him feel like a little kid. Although he dislikes being touched by others, somehow Leon doesn’t mind this warm touch, even perhaps feeling a little disappointed when Gamunbi soon vanished from his room, leaving as abruptly as he arrived.He wasn’t the only one who likes Gammy, Leon found out. The other kids had been helping to take Gammy out for walks daily; Garam and Gabi especially enjoyed riding on the shadow houndas it ran around the forest freely, squealing with delight as their clung on tight to its back. “Leon, Leon!” Gabi waved and leapt off Gammy, nearly giving him a heart attack. She managed to land on her feet somehow, wizards, and ran up to him. “You want to play with Gammy too?”Unlike her twin, Garam climbed down carefully, with Gammy helping to lift her down with its muzzle. “Gammy, Gammy wants to play with us! Leon Leon play with us too!”As both girls grabbed his hands and dragged him along with them, and Gammy followed behind happily, Leon asked. “You two like Gammy a lot too?”Immediately both girls nodded vigorously. “Gammy is youngest here!”“We protect Gammy!”Both beamed brightly back at him, and Gammy yipped happily in response too. “Henry likes Gammy a lot too! But Gammy bites his hand off…” Gabi added in after some thought. “Dad gives Gammy lots of food, and Mano, Mano brings Gammy for long walks!” Mano too huh? Leon wondered as he is dragged away by the two young girls. Looks like of them all, he is the only one in danger of being bisected at any time…It took Leon quite some more time before he realised, as long as he ignores Mano, ignores his provocation, the teen generally leaves him alone. Although Mano still goes on his usual threat to cut him up and dissect him, especially during the washing up duties they are usually grouped together, if he focuses on the task at hand, nothing usually happens.“You’re no fun,” Mano complained, picking up a few clean dishes and tossing them back to the shelves. As much as Leon would like to retort back, he held back the urge to say anything, focusing instead his promise with Henry to read to Gammy later. Imagining how happy the friendly oversized puppy would be, it motivated Leon to focus on finishing his task instead of responding to Mano’s words--“Mano mano mano mano mano!!!” Garam ran in panicking, and holding up her arm to Mano. Gabi’s close behind her, almost in tears, squeaking in panic too.“What did you do this time,” Mano frowned, immediately bending down and petted both on the heads, before studying Garam’s wound. Immediately two scalpels appeared in the air around him, one red one green. Mano grabbed them, and in a smooth moment, somehow managed to cause the wound to vanish without a trace. “Go have fun, don’t do anything dangerous again.” Despite his stern admonishing, both girls meeped happily and gave him one tight hug before running off to where they came from.“Girls,” Mano shook his head and sighed, and noticing him staring glared. Leon quickly turned back to his washing, though Mano remained uncharacteristically quiet before…“What the fuck!?” Leon leapted as Mano suddenly cursed, nearly dropping a plate from the shock. Fingers hooked themselves to his collar, and Leon found himself being dragged away from the spot despite his protests. “Garam, Gabi!?” The teen called out, and somehow, he is able to cut through the various shrubs in the way and entered a small clearing where the kids are playing. There are many butterflies in the area, and Garam is happily dancing around and chasing them. Henry is there too, with a notepad and pen in hand, quickly scribbling away. And Gabi…Leon looked around for the other girl, but realised a butterfly had landed on his sleeve. As he tried to swat it away before his poisonous touch could kill it-“Gabi.” Mano called out to the girl sternly and smacked her on the head. Leon somehow hadn’t noticed her nearing, and tried to comfort her as she teared up from the hit.“Mano stop bullying her-”“That’s how Garam got injured isn’t it, Gabi.” Mano asked sternly, and Gabi pouted. Another butterfly flew up and stopped on Leon, and as the little girl opened her mouth wide to chomp down on it, Mano gave her another smack on the head. “Look Gabi, Leon’s human. He’ll die if you bite him,” Mano explained irritably, and immediately both girls just turned to stare at him, then towards Leon.“Leon, Leon, you are not a dragon?” Garam grabbed his hand and tugged softly. Gabi did the same too, both looking at him with the same questioning eyes.“No, I’m human,” Leon replied, confused at why they would ask something like that.“But, but scales!” Gabi meeped, pointing to the scales that dot his hands. Is that they they thought he was a dragon?“Sorry Gabi, but this is just some illness I had when I was a kid.” Leon explained, calling up his poison fangs and showing the twin girls how it caused more scales to appear on his flesh. “Then Leon, Leon, is this illness caused by a dragon?” Garam asked, looking even more teary by the moment.“No, sorry.” Immediately both girls looked away disappointedly. “I’m sorry I’m not a dragon, but you two like dragons a lot?”His words got Gabi to beam brightly. “We’re dragons!”To Leon’s surprise wings sprouted out from Gabi’s back, and a tail stuck out from under her skirt. As Leon just stared at her with mouth agape, Garam immediately ran between her twin and Mano.“No stepping on sis' tail!” The little girl squeaked, glaring at Mano. Gabi quickly meeped in fear, her wings and tail disappearing.“Mano always tripped on our tails,” Gabi complained and Garam nodded frantically. Mano groaned.“Look I already apologised,” Mano complained, but as both girls kept glaring at him, he sighed. “Fine, I’m sorry, I won’t step on your tails again.”It took some time for Leon to process that bit of information, blinking as the little girls carefreely playing with butterflies. Dragons? But this is a wizard family after all, it shouldn't be a surprise but still... “Mano, are you a dragon too?” Leon asked, curious, but the young teen had already walked off to check up on Henry.“The records are detailed, good job on that.” Taking a look at Henry’s records, Mano praised the small kid, who beamed up at him. Though he got a smack on his head too. “But why is there a taste section!? You are not Gabi, stop putting things into your mouth.” As Henry tried to protest, he opened his mouth and a butterfly flew out, which got him another smack on the head. That was the moment Leon had the growing realisation he might not have been a normal wizard family as he initially thought it might have been, even if wizard families were hardly normal to begin with…“Look Henry, even if Gabi always does that-” Still admonishing Henry, Mano suddenly stumbled, dropping to the ground looking dazed.“Teacher!?” Henry panicked, helping Mano back up to his feet, but Mano didn’t respond. The teen just stared at the ground, suddenly unresponsive, sweat rolling down his brow. His face is pale, and his breathing erratic. Garam and Gabi ran to his side and hugged him tight, but he didn't respond. Leon debated whether he should help too, when Gammy suddenly leapt up from the ground, barking. There doesn't seem to be anything he could do as he and the other kids are tossed onto Gammy’s back, and the giant hound ferried them back.Gamunbi reassured the two frantic dragon girls that Mano is fine, he just needs to rest. But both still stuck close to him, meeping at him, perhaps in hopes to help Mano relax more. The teen didn’t complain, though he looked too weak and pale to protest even if he wanted to. Henry pulled out a chair and started reading, though glancing back towards Mano from time to time.“I’m weak, ain’t I,” Mano said softly, ignoring the panicking meeps telling him he isn’t.“It’s because you went out too far, Mano,” Gamunbi chuckled at his dour face and petted him on the head. “You are kept alive by my lifeforce, you can’t venture too far from my domain.”“Look, I can visit Maru just fine, it’s not like I’ve gone that far this time-”“You are suppressing Leon’s ability too right now, you are very much weaker than you usually are-”“Wait, what!?” Although he didn’t think he should be cutting in to the conversation, hearing something related to him Leon couldn’t help but ask out in shock. “You are what!?!?”“Suppressing your ability, duh.” At least Mano still had the energy to roll his eyes and snap back at him. “If not you would have died when you first arrived.”“What!?”Unlike the cheeky snipping he usually got for his questions, Mano just laid back on his pillow, sulking.“Look, Teacher wouldn’t let any of his patients die on him, and so, no matter what, I won’t let you die on me,” the teen complained, though he was too weak to say anything else. Garam ran to get a cup of water for Mano as he coughed, and Gabi hugged him tighter.“Mano, Mano!” The little dragon girl squeaked, and Mano weaker petted her on her head.“Look, Gabi, I just… need to rest. I’m not going to die that easily.” With that, Mano seemed to have no more energy left, and laid down to rest. With the three kids guarding Mano, and a familiar pair of blinking eyes on the floor watching the teen, Leon felt there should be nothing else he could ask about the topic. Maybe he could just leave-/ I’m sure you have many questions, Leon. Shall we have a talk? / Gamunbi’s voice rang in his head, and by now Leon isn’t surprised anymore. He nodded and found himself and Gamunbi in a small, quiet clearing, with a set table with some snacks and tea.“What Mano said… was it true?” Leon asked, “I’m alive just because he was keeping me alive?”“Yes,” Gamunbi poured a cup of tea for him, which he accepted. Leon took a sip, it helped calm the messy thoughts in his mind a little. “I’m sure you know it by now, that poison that seeps out of you, it is an ability.”“It… is?” Leon asked. Since he was young he had been told that was a curse, it was something he was inflicted with, cursed with, for being a bad person, a terrible person, a monster. And now, Gamunbi told him that is an ability, something that people desire… he hadn’t known what to think. “But, but isn’t it… killing me? Killing everyone close to me?” Leon asked.“It’s because you are unable to control it.” Gamunbi answered simply. “And no, it isn’t your fault that you cannot control it, even though it is a part of you. Humans are not naturally magically inclined unlike us; you didn’t have anyone teach you how to control it, it isn’t your fault that it ran rampant and took those close to you.”Leon just nodded numbly from those words. So… it wasn’t his fault that his parents died from his touch, that he was shunned by the entire village and turned against by them?“We can teach you how to control this power if you want, Leon.” Gamunbi told him kindly, “this way, you won’t have to fear hurting the people around you anymore.”“That… be great. Yeah…” Leon numbled, not really sure about his choice. “Then like this, I won’t die? Then Mano won’t have to keep me alive?”“No, your ability had already eaten away too much of your life. Even if you managed to control it right now, you still don’t have much time left.” Gamunbi’s words hit him hard. He had had the hope for a merger few seconds only to have it snatched away from him-“But there is still another way.” As Gamunbi continued Leon’s ears perked up, despite knowing his hopes might be dashed again. “Firstly, I’m sure you know Gabi and Garam are dragons.”Leon nodded. “I thought they are little wizards- Wait, are you a dragon too?”“No, I’m not. I was entrusted these two by a dragon,” Gamunbi shook his head. “She wouldn’t take no for an answer, and the two girls chose me as their family.”“That’s… cool?” Leon answered neutrally, unsure how this is related to him at all.“Sure this is related to you, little Yu Jin’s a dragon too.” Gamunbi chuckled at the dumbfounded look on his face. “Mu Yeung and Ignatio said it was easier to explain to you this way, and the two of them are half vampires, not wizards like they told you.”That brought Leon’s mind to a screeching halt as he stared at Gamunbi with his mouth agape, not knowing how to respond. His closest friends are... half vampires? And little Yu Jin whom he doted on, a dragon?“Please don’t blame them about it,” Gamunbi said, “they were turned against their wills, and hadn’t known much about themselves, much less explain it to someone else.”“I mean, yeah, that kind of makes sense, like they didn’t like the sun much, but still… it’s kind of unbelievable…”“Mano’s a half vampire too like them-”“That explains a lot of things.”“-and I’m a vampire.” Somehow, those simple words made sense to him, and Leon nodded. Seeing Leon isn’t saying anything, Gamunbi continued. “I can turn you-”Somehow Leon finally understood what Gamunbi is getting yet, immediately leaping from the seat and slamming his hands down on the table. “If you can, please, please!" He begged, "I, I owe Mu Yeung and Ignatio a lot, I, I can’t just die like this! There’s so much I have to repay them!”“Don’t worry, I’ve promised the twins too that I won’t let you die,” Gamunbi told him kindly, rekindling that hope in his heart, “but do you have any questions about this? This isn’t reversible, you will become a part of my family forever till you die, are you sure about this?”Leon pondered for a while before answering. “If you turn me into a vampire huh… Then, do I have to call you dad too? And more importantly, would I be Mano’s older brother?”Immediately he could hear choking laughter in his mind, and Gamunbi’s tired /stop eavesdropping and rest, Mano/./ You are turned later than me, you’re the younger brother, / Mano taunted, though his voice still sounded weak, at least he sounds like he is having fun. / REST,/ Gamunbi repeated again, and for the moment Mano’s voice vanished. “I know Mano is a handful, but please get along with him.”“I can’t promise much,” Leon winced, “I’ll try to put up with him I guess, but he’s like this…”Leon trailed off sighing, but quickly turned back to him, the questions finally flowing out.“So, if I’m turned, I, I can finally go out? Go travelling all on my own? I’ll get to play with Gammy and the kids all day without tiring? And everything I had always wanted to do, I’ll be able to do it?” For the first time since he arrived, no, perhaps since he was born, Leon never felt so excited about his future.“Yes, you’ll be able to do that. Not immediately though, your body has to get used to the changes, but eventually you’ll be able to do that.” Gamunbi petted him on the head like he did with Mano, and he immediately felt some faint connection to the man. “I promised you this much.”“Right, thanks… then I, when can I be turned? How would it be like? Are you going to bite me on the neck, god would it hurt? Or is it going to be some strange sex ritual-”/ Oi dad, let's just throw him at Choi. // Mano, no. / Gamunbi shook his head, and put a firm hand on Leon’s shoulder. The vampire looked at him straight in the eyes and said sternly, “Leon, it is nothing as you imagined, please wipe those images from your mind. All you have to do is to take a bit of my blood, and I’ll rather you use a cup for that.”Gulping, and turning a bit red that Gamunbi could look into his thoughts, Leon tried to focus on something else. But nothing else comes into mind, and despite not getting an answer to when he would be turned, Leon excused himself before the conversation could turn even more awkward./ The young ones from this era sure are troublesome, / Gamunbi sighed as he watched Leon leave, helping himself to the remaining tea./ It’s most probably Choi’s fault, / Mano offered, and quickly cut off their link before he could nag him to rest again.The next day Mano is still resting in bed. The fatigue and pain Leon felt when he arrived returned, and Gamunbi told him to rest too.“Mano’s still too weak to suppress your ability fully, don’t push yourself too hard for now,” the blonde vampire told him, and Leon watched in frustration as he is unable to join the little kids in playing with Gammy.“Gamunbi, can you please turn me now?” Leon asked, “I don’t want to feel this weak ever again.” “It isn’t that I don’t want to help, but Leon, please wait till Mano recover more.”“I, I understand-” “No, it isn’t about that,” Gamunbi cut him off, chuckling. “I can turn you right away, but if you aren’t able to control your ability when you are newly turned, you can still die.”Leon immediately turned pale. “I, I’ll wait. Really.” But upon realising something…“Wait, if I have to wait for Mano to recover…”“Yes, Mano will be training you on how to control your ability.” Gamunbi nodded. “He’s a doctor too, it is easier for him to keep track of your health too.”Groaning at how he would still not be able to escape from Mano, and knowing well his training wouldn’t start till Mano recovers… “I’ll just have to help look after him don’t I?”Gamunbi just smiled at him, and petted him on the head.“Look I don’t need your help,” Mano snapped as he struggled to stop Leon from shoving a piece of apple down his throat. “I can jolly well eat on my own.”“Stop complaining and eat your fruits.” Ignoring Mano’s complain, Leon treated him like how he forced the twins to eat when they were too tired from their missions. “The faster you recover the sooner you can teach me to control my ability, and the sooner you won’t need to keep suppressing it.”“What I need is rest, not someone to nag at me,” Mano rolled his eyes. “And if you are so eager to learn go read this and stop bothering me!”Mano called up a book somehow and tossed it at him, and Leon caught it before it rammed into his skull. “Just read this huh? Seems easy enough?”He pulled a chair over and sat down beside Mano’s bed, ignoring the teen groaning that he could read somewhere else. Flipping a few pages… “Hey, it’s all about poisons?”“Your ability is poison,” Mano explained, still pouting. “Go find the one which matches your poison the most, most probably some kind of snake poison, and memorise how to counter it. Once you understand it more we’ll move on to controlling it.”“Thanks, I guess?”“Now shut up and let me rest!?”Although it had been decided that Leon will learn how to control his ability from Mano, there was the issue of what to use to test if he really has control over his poisons. Garam and Gabi protested venomously that animals are not to be used, as Henry disappointedly released the rabbit he caught back to the wild. Mano got smacked as usual, and the girls refused to talk to him the entire day for such a suggestion, though Leon had never seen Mano happier to not be disturbed. The nagging came back twofold when the girls found out that Mano spent the entire night in the library studying instead without them dragging him to bed, and Leon tried hard not to laugh just in case the girls blame him too for not reminding Mano to actually sleep.With live animals out of the picture, and everyone agreeing that Gammy shouldn’t be considered a test subject under any circumstances (which surprised Leon that Mano agreed to that), they moved on to plant test subjects. Gamunbi’s domain has a wide variety of plants for them to test on, and apparently Henry is an expert on them after memorising the books on plants in the library. Each morning Mano sends him out with a list of plants to find, and he will return with them correctly before noon. In the meanwhile the twin dragon girls played with Gammy, and Leon’s training started.Leon had to wonder if it is because of Mano's powers, he could feel the poison flowing through his body. If he concentrates he could see it forming an intricate web inside his body, eating away at his organs which seem to be healing themselves constantly.“So you can see that much,” Mano studied him carefully, not seeming to notice him squirming under those brown eyes. “You won't be as strong as a full fledged vampire like dad, or even me, you can still die if your poison kills you much faster than you can regenerate. It might help when you get turned, but you'll need to control your poison more first.”“So… what do I do now?” Leon asked, quickly buttoning up his shirt and getting a safe distance away from the young doctor after his daily checkup.“If you can see the poison, find the source.” Mano rubbed his chin, seeming much lost in his thoughts. “If you can find the source we'll work on getting you to control it so you won’t kill yourself so much, and hm… I might have to untangle that web so the organs wouldn’t get damaged each time you use your poison, that or strengthen your body so that they won’t affect you that much, or just force the poison to merge with your bloodstream and make it a part of your body…”As Mano went on and on not paying any attention to him, Leon figured out he should get away while he could.“So, I’ll give you three choices.” Leon woke with a jolt upon hearing Mano’s voice. Leaping up from his head, he found the teen doctor sitting by his bed, watching him. Though it is still dark outside- Wait, does that mean Mano had been visiting him at night when he is asleep!?“What the fuck!?” Leon pinched himself just to make sure he isn’t dreaming. It hurt, he isn’t dreaming, and Mano really is there sitting by his bed watching him with unreadable eyes.“First, I can remove the poison totally. This way you won’t ever be able to use poison ever again, but you’re a vampire, you can defend yourself.” Ignoring his surprise, Mano droned on. “Second, I’ll untangle the poison web from your body; you’ll still be able to use poison, and perhaps control it better, but this will take time. A long time. Third-”“Um, can I choose to sleep? And continue in the morning?” Thinking he might not be in the rightest mind to make the correct decision, and seeing he is actually asking Mano civilly at that made him even more aware of it. “It’s like, really late?”“... Yeah it is,” Mano looked up disinterestedly at the window and yawned. “Well, good night.” Taking off his glasses and tucking them safely into his breast pocket, Mano folded his arms and closed his eyes. And seemed to be asleep soon.What?! Leon nearly cried out in surprise, and gulped as he heard chuckling in his mind./ Mano can be quite adamant about things once he has his mind set onto it, / Gamunbi explained as he appear in his room, a mirthful smile on his face. / Sorry he disturbed your sleep, I’ll get him back to his room, please rest well. /The elder vampire carried him up gently in his arms, and warped away, leaving Leon wondering if he should pretend it is a dream.Their first training session was bad, but not as bad as Leon expected it to be. Mano wasn't his sadistic snarking usual self, which might or might not have been due to the lack of sleep seeing how he constantly kept yawning through breakfast, but during training he is more focused than anything. "First focus on this poison network you see in your body. See where the poison is flowing from." Mano looked unblinkingly at him, staring at his body that made him uncomfortable even if he still had his clothes on. It made him feel naked, not that he is desired sexually, but like a cooked dish ready to be chopped up. Trying hard to ignore that sensation, Leon closed his eyes and focused. A pale yellow web glistered before him, a beautiful pattern which seemed so much unlike a deadly poison that is threatening to kill him. He tried to do as Mano ordered, to find where the source is, but it's like a spiderweb leading back to itself no matter where he looked."I can't-""Hush," Mano said sternly, and a pair of scalpels appeared in his vision. A red one, a green one, both intricately carved yet looking so delicate. A pair of pale, white hands held them between their slender fingers, at ease yet seeming ready to dance at any moment. "Here, can you see this?"The red scalpel picked up a strand from his golden spiderweb on its blunt side, and Leon could see it thinned. "Can you touch this?" Mano asked, lifting that strand higher, and it got thinner. Maybe because it is a part of himself, Leon could feel that link would break if Mano tugged it just a bit harder, but to touch it-- How the hell is he going to touch it?!"Hush, breathe." Mano said in that emotionless voice. "Look, if you get agitated, your poison gets stronger too."The golden web thickened, pulsing harder. The organs in his body start to bleed, though still healing themselves constantly, but it starts to hurt him. Is that why he is able to kill those who angered him, and felt even closer to death after that?"Breathe," Mano ordered again, and he did so, thinking about calming thoughts. About playing with Garam and Gabi, about learning from Henry as he regurgitated another book, about Gammy as he played with the overly excited oversized puppy. He relaxed, and the web shrunk in size."Now think about your hand. How it feels like to hold something, to touch something." Leon tried thinking about that, but nothing else surfaced in his mind. "You're bad at this." That disdainful voice is back, and Leon can't help but snark back."Look, I'm so sorry I was brought up by humans instead of you wizards.""Vampires," Mano correctly absentmindedly. "And you should be. You could have been so much more."Before Leon could ask what he meant, a cold hand took his. Fingers grabbed his index finger, and somehow he could see it in his mind too, wriggling as he wriggled his finger."Stop moving around." That's when he realised Mano's voice is starting to sound strained, and he stopped moving his finger. "Good. Now, can you feel this?"Mano moved that finger to the lifted strand, and Leon felt something touching his finger. Something light and springy, yet at the same time it felt sharp, as if it is lined with countless glass shards. "Hurts, doesn't it?" There is a faint hint of mirth in that voice. "Remember this feeling, remember how--"Mano stopped abruptly, and suddenly his own vision turned all white. It took a lot of blinking and shaking his head before Leon could see again. Mano's no longer in front of him, but cradled in Gamunbi's arms. The young doctor looked pale and frail, and seemed to be in pain."Mano will be fine after some rest, you rest too for today," the blonde vampire petted him on the shoulder, his hand warm compared to Mano's cold ones. "Mano, what did he do? Just, just what is he?" Leon couldn't help blurting out, and Gamunbi chuckled."Mano's a smart kid, Leon," Gamunbi said with a hint of pride in his voice. "He won't go easy on you, you got to be prepared that the coming days will drain you even more, but at the same time, he won't go easy on himself either." With those words the vampire left with his kid, leaving him to wonder just what lies ahead for him.The training got tougher as Gamunbi said; there are days Leon got so tired mentally that all he can do is to curl up in bed and sleep. Henry read to him, the monotonous voice putting him to sleep even faster. But those days started getting lesser and he got more sure of controlling his poisons and killed less plants with his touch. "So you choose to live with it huh," Mano said while giving him his regular check up. The feeling of nearly being cut up never faded, but Leon felt maybe he can live with it just like how he is living with his condition. Though he is a little irritated he wasn't exactly given a choice a pick."Yeah, it's a part of me, and it's useful," he shrugged. "So why not keep it?""Good choice," Mano waved him off the examination table. "You've seen your poison web, it won't be easy to cut it all up.""Even by you? I thought you're like… a lot more skilled than this?" Leon asked, surprised. Mano had always seemed like he can do anything, as long as it is related to being a doctor, with the exception of taking better care of himself."I'm not at Teacher's level yet," Mano said glumly, a tinge of sadness and bitterness surfacing each time he mentioned his teacher. That quickly faded as Mano wore his normal fully toothed grin. "But if I can cut you up down to your bones it'll be waaay easier-""No thank you." Leon scrambled out as quickly as he could."Your control over your poison's improving," Gamunbi told him on a rare day where he didn't have washing duties with Mano."Yeah, I'm killing less plants?" Leon answered easily, getting more used to the vampire. Despite him being a much more powerful being, spending more time around him, he is starting to see Gamunbi as a father figure much like his children. "Mano said I won't need to wear gloves around living things anymore soon, though it will take time before my body recover enough for me to go out further.""That's good to hear," Gamunbi petted him on the back, giving him a warm smile. "You seem ready, are there any other questions that you have?"Ready...? It took Leon some moments to realise what the vampire is talking about, but as per before, he had made up his mind. Questions, of course he has them, but he figured out he can slowly get his answers when he isn't in any danger of dying soon./ That's good to know, / Gamunbi chuckled in his mind, bemused. / Here, drink. /Before his eyes a cup appeared, one filled halfway with a dark fluid. Just one glance and Leon knew what it is, and without a second thought gulped it down. It's tasteless, he had expected the metallic taste of blood. And it felt as if the liquid is absorbed into his body with him gulping it down, he felt no different than he was previously, and he looked up at the vampire in confusion."Nothing... happened-" As the words left his mouth he felt it. It had been so subtle that he initially mistook it as nothing happened, but he definitely felt it. There's something inside him, something warm. Power.Power to move, to breath, to live without the pain eating away at him.Power to freeze that intricate poisonous web in his body, to command it to stop hurting himself, to will it to expand and contract at his biding. Power to-The world around him turned black, and he is out cold."-yeah, don't go blaming me if Garam and Gabi cries, you know how soft they are about these things."Leon woke on a familiar examination table, climbing up and shaking his head. He remembered drinking something and that's about it, he must have fainted again to appear back in Mano's lab, but-"You're up," Mano walked closer, and dropped something in his hands. "Good, hold this.""Hold what?" Still groggy from just waking up, he looked down at a brown rabbit in his arms, nibbling at some carrot sticks. "Oh, good boy?" Leon asked, stroking the tiny animal and wondering why both Mano and Gamunbi are looking so intensively at him. "What.""Nothing, just felt like cutting you up suddenly." Mano looked at him, but his expression is thoughtful, unlike his usual threatening self that Leon can't help but shrink back, protectively shielding that rabbit in his arms-A rabbit?A live rabbit?In his arms?He quickly looked down, horrified, but he could feel the rabbit still alive in his hands. It’s heart is still pounding, a gentle rhythm feeling so foreign to him.It is very much alive, and not poisoned as he expected it to be. Though maybe because he tensed up suddenly, the rabbit quickly leapt off his arms and wandered off.Gamunbi ruffled Mano's hair to the teen doctor's annoyance, and went up to him. "Are you feeling any better, Leon?" The vampire asked kindly, and smiled when he nodded. "Things should get a bit easier for you from now on, just look for me or Mano if you don't feel alright.""Yeah, I will." Leon replied politely, still very much in wonder. Does that mean he wouldn't accidentally poison anyone again? And before the vampire left the room, he added, "thanks dad."And somehow from that rumbling chuckle, that just felt right.“Hey, Garam, stop running or you’ll trip! And Gabi, stop putting everything into your mouth!” Leon panted as he chased the girls, although he had become much stronger, keeping up with two energetic little kids is still something tiring. As he sat down on a stump to catch his breath, Leon had to marvel at how much further he had left Gamunbi’s domain. The trees are less sparse and the ground more sandy, and he could hear waves in the distance. Somehow the breeze felt so fresh, and he felt so alive.“Leon, Leon, come on, dad is waiting!” Gabi called out while munching a plant/ She grabbed his hand and dragged him along, laughing together with her twin. As they neared the beach, a huge ball of shadows danced happily alongside them, barking happily.“We’re going to the beach,'' the girls sang happily, with Gammy barking alongside them. "We're going to the beach for a picnic!" "Bark bark bark!" "With dad and Mano and Henry and Gammy and Leon, we're going to the beach!""Bark bark bark!"As adorable as that was, Leon noted with a tinge of jealousy that his name is so far down the list./ Of course, you're the youngest here, stop complaining, / Mano smirked, appearing beside his sisters. "Garam, Gabi, we've already finish setting up the picnic, and Yu Jin's here too."Hearing that their friend is there, both girls ran at full speed towards the beach, with Gammy following them."Jin's here too? That means-""We just told your friends you died, too bad." Mano shrugged, "they were so sad-"Without waiting for Mano to continue Leon pushed past him and ran for the beach too."Yeah it was really scary at first, I really thought we are going to die- Hey Leon!" Ignatio waved energetically at him, patting at the empty seat beside him. "Wow, you really look so much better now, you doing well?"Yu Jin immediately ran towards him and gave him a big hug, beaming happily at him. He hugged Yu Jin back, lifting the little dragon up in his arms and giving him a spin before putting him down again. Mu Yeung just smiled at him and placed a warm hand on his shoulder. “Yeah, I’m feeling much better, thanks.” Then seeing Mano chuckling as he walked to join them, he glared. “But I’ll never forgive the two of you for leaving me with that monster! I nearly died several times!!”“Well this…” Mu Yeung shifted uncomfortably, “he’s the best doctor around here, so…”“Yeah, and Gamunbi-hyung here promised that he’ll put you back together with no issues, and look, you’re so much better now!” Seeing that bright grin from Ignatio, Leon couldn’t bring himself to complain anymore. If not for them, he wouldn’t have been alive right now, seeing them again, and enjoying a picnic with them.“I know, thanks,” he said and smiled, listening and laughing with them as they recounted their previous mission. Maybe when he is a lot stronger, he’ll offer to travel with them, instead of just hearing their tales from them, but to see and experience it together with them-“So you two actually met Hanarin and survived, that’s impressive,” Gamunbi spoke, pouring a cup of tea for them.“I know! It’s like, she’s just so scary! Seriously, I really thought we are going to die right there right then?!” Ignatio groaned and petted Yu Jin on the head, and the little dragon meeped back happily.“It’s all because of Yu Jin that we lived, but here’s what happened…”
----- CHAPTER BREAK -----
Due to the mayor's insistence, they reluctantly accepted the job. Firstly, the town didn't have the resources to hire the 'more skilled' hunters, and secondly after travelling for so long and being rejected at all the hunters he visited, as the mayor got down on his knees and begged for their help the twins felt bad if they didn't do something about the issue. And it would set a bad example to their growing kid for not helping. As they accepted the meager bag of bronze coins as an upfront payment, they knew they had to get going soon. Though…
/
How 'bout Leon? Jin we can still bring along,
/ Ignatio winced as he looked at his arm, remembering the bloody scratches their little dragon boy left as he refused to be left behind by them. /
He doesn't look too good, you think…?
/
/
The medicine isn't helping anymore?
/ Mu Yeung glanced to their friend, worried. /
The only other doctor we know...
/
Mu Yeung trailed off as the two of them frowned, remembering their previous encounters with the half vampire doctor.
/
I can vouch for his skill, he did save Maru, I saw it,
/ Ignatio winced at the accusing glare his twin gave him, /
but I dunno, he just seems like of scary in general
/
/
Gamunbi… should be able to keep him under control?
/ Mu Yeung pondered. /
He does seem a lot more reasonable than Eun Yul, and other than Mano his other kids all seemed normal.
/
/
Yeah… like we can go visit and ask him for help?
/ Ignatio sighed, looking back at their friend playing with little Yu Jin, seeming just a bit more frail and pale than the previous day. /
I don't think he'd end up any deader than he is right now.
/
The meeting went off much better than expected, even when they dragged it to the last possible moment before asking for help. Gamunbi agreed to help them, with the promise to keep Leon alive. It took a heavy load off their mind, knowing their close friend wouldn't die during their trip and hopefully remain so for the years to come. They had some explanation about vampires, and elders, making them worried if they had overstepped their boundaries in asking someone so much powerful for help. Although Gamunbi has reassured them he does not require any payment, he is helping them out of his duty to look after the 'young ones'...
/
He's got plenty of kids, maybe we can buy some candies for them on our way back?
/ Ignatio suggested, /
have we got enough for that?
/
/
Not really,
/ Mu Yeung admitted as looked into their money pouch. /
Yu Jin's going to want us to eat and rest, we can camp but we'll need to buy food. And several days since we can't travel nonstop.
/
/
How bout we travel as fast as we could and stop when Jin complain? If we cover more ground we don’t need as many breaks,
/ Ignatio pointed out, and Mu Yeung nodded in agreement.
/
That'll cut down on our costs, and it's nearing Halloween, we might afford some cheap sweets for the kids.
/
/
Oh yeah, Halloween! We can dress up Jin and take him around trick-or-treating! We've got to make it back on time!
/ Carrying up the little red haired dragon up in his arms, Ignatio told his kid, "here Jin, we're going to go fast, hold on tight."
/
You’re no longer a kid, yet you’re always so excited-
/
/
Hey it’s time for candies! How can you not be excited too!
/ Ignatio pouted at his twin, so just chuckled. /
Fine, don’t go crying if we don’t give you the candies we collected!
/
After some rushing, they managed to reach the town in three days. Earlier than their initial estimate of a week. Maybe because two of them were recently killed, the townsfolk were too open to them, preferring to stay in the safety behind closed doors. Since there doesn’t seem to be much ways to obtain more information, even with Ignatio at his most charming none refused to give any information, they ended their day at the inn. The room they got is small, for the amount they are offering Mu Yeung is surprised they aren’t thrown out immediately. There is just one bed, just right for little Yu Jin to rest comfortably. The little kid flopped onto the bed and fell asleep immediately, evidently more used to the comforts of a soft bed compared to sleeping on the ground.
/
Should I scout ahead first? I think I spied a castle in the distance, but there’s too much foliage to be sure.
/ Ignatio asked as he peeked out of the window, looking into the distance. The forest is dense and thick, looking menacing as the skies darkened. Although it is getting darking, with a high enough vantage point he should be able to spot some landmarks for them to make their way around the next day.
/
Not now, everyone’s spooked, we don’t want to alarm them even more that we aren’t humans.
/ Mu Yeung sighed, stroking Yu Jin’s hair as the small kid meeped softly in his dreams. /
They don’t look too suspicious about us for now, at least let Yu Jin rest enough before they figure out to throw us out of town.
/
/
Yeah, and you rest too. It’s my turn to keep watch,
/ Ignatio said still studying the outside skies. /
I wonder how Leon’s doing right now...
/
/
Don’t worry so much, he’ll be fine,
/ Mu Yeung ruffled his hair, and laid down beside Yu Jin, putting a protective hand over his kid. /
He’d be fine, and when we’re back, we are all going to take Yu Jin out for trick-or-treat… Eun Yul’s going to complain he doesn’t want to give away his food to kids...
/
Mu Yeung’s voice slowly trailed off as he fell asleep, looking as though he had no worries at the moment. But through the link they had with each other, Ignatio knew he’s worried too, wanting to be back at home just as much as him. They’ll just have to find whatever monster this is and deal with it, then they’ll be home free. And Leon’s going to be much better as Gamunbi had promised, and everything’s just going to be fine.
He can only hope so.
Mu Yeung woke early in the morning before the sun rose, and they packed up to leave. Yu Jin’s still asleep, this being his first trip it’s not strange that he isn’t used to such a grueling trip outdoors. They let the little dragon sleep while they packed, and Mu Yeung cradled him gently in his arms to not wake him up when they left. The innkeeper didn’t ask any questions, just warning them there is a monster living in the forest who had taken lives. Ignatio thanked him for the information, but before he could ask anymore, they had the door shut in their face, though thankfully it didn’t wake Yu Jin up. Since they are that unwelcomed, they started their exploration of the surrounding area before the sun rose and becomes uncomfortable for them.
The forest is dense. Despite being on one of the tallest tree in the area, the foliage blocked out much details on the ground. The only landmark he could make out is the castle Ignatio said he spotted yesterday. It looked old and abandoned from the distance, but remembering Eun Yul’s castle, it might help for them to check it out.
/
Hopefully we don’t run into anyone like Yul? We don’t really have the food with us now...
/ Ignaito noted glumly while stroking Yu Jin’s hair, hugging on to his kid while his twin took a good look around. /
Depending on how long this takes, we might not have enough for the way back.
/
/
We’ll hunt then,
/ Mu Yeung said simply. /
There’s wildlife here, we won’t starve for now.
/
/
That’ll traumatise Jin for sure- Ah, he’s waking up.
/ As Yu Jin stretched and yawn, Mu Yeung leapt down from the tree he perched on, landing softly on his feet.
“Morning Yu Jin,” he greeted the red haired boy, who meeped back sleepily. “There’s a stream nearby, let’s get you washed up.”
“m’Kay, Mumu, Iggy…” The little kid struggled to keep his eyes open, yawning again. Though after a good wash, and some bread for breakfast, he is back to his energetic self again. As Ignatio bent down to carry him again, Yu Jin shook his head. “Walk walk!”
“It’ll be a long walk, tell us if you become tired, right?” Ignatio petted him on the head, and took his hand. Immediately Yu Jin beamed.
“Maru, Maru!” He called out excitedly, the smile on his face wide.
“Maru?” Looking around, Ignatio noticed Yu Jin’s tugging at his hand. “Ah, you mean how Yul holds his hand when they go out? Sure, we can hold your hands too.”
/
He sure is growing up fast,
/ Mu Yeung mused as Ignatio slowed down his pace, letting Yu Jin lead him around. /
He was just a little baby months ago, and now he and already drag you all over the place.
/
/
You hold his hands too, I think my arm's getting torn off!
/ Ignatio mock complained, but still stopped from time to time when Yu Jin pointed to the various greenery curiously.
"Big leaf!" The little kid pointed at one, and Ignatio quickly scanned the area for a clean one similar to the size Yu Jin spotted. The leaves are almost the same sizes around there, seeing how they are in a forest, and focusing so hard on the various shades of green is dizzying, but he spotted one relatively nice looking on above them. Pointing his fingers at the stem, Ignatio let off an invisible bullet, cutting it cleanly off. Catching his look, Mu Yeung nodded and leapt off against the tree trunks around him, catching the leaf mid air and bringing it back to his kid.
"Here's a nice one, Yu Jin," he passed it over to the red haired dragon, who looked it over in amazement.
"Thank, Mumu!" Yu Jin beamed back at him, and put the leaf on his head. It wasn't that good a fit, being oversized for his head, but the little kid still giggled. "Look, hat!"
"Yup, that's a nice hat you have there, Jin," Ignatio chuckled as his leaf hatted kid skipped happily beside him. Mu Yeung led the way, though from time to time he would climb higher to check if they are heading in the correct direction. As they walked deeper into the forest, the sound of a running stream got closer. And Yu Jin’s steps are getting slower.
“Hey Jin, you tired yet?” Ignatio asked, only to be greeted back by a pout. “Alright, alright, but there’s a river coming up, let’s take a break alright?”
“I’ve got some of the biscuits that you like, Yu Jin,” Mu Yeung added, “we’ll just take a quick break.”
“m’Kay, Mumu,” Yu Jin meeped, yellow eyes brightening at the mention of his favourite biscuits. His footsteps fastened as they got closer to the river, but stopped abruptly as they saw a little girl playing by the river.
/
A kid? Out here in the wilderness?
/ Ignatio asked, putting up a hand to stop them from getting closer. The little brown haired girl is still splashing happily at the water, not noticing them.
/
Maybe she lives in the castle,
/ Mu Yeung pondered. /
Her clothes are more elegant than the townsfolk, and she doesn't look lost. Maybe we can ask her about the happenings- Jin?
/
Despite Ignatio stopping them, spotting someone around his size, Yu Jin burrowed under his arm and pattered up to the little girl.
"Friend?" He asked loudly, scaring the little girl so much she squeaked and fell into the water.
"I didn't sneak out unnie!! I was just, just--" Spluttering, and taking Yu Jin's tiny hand as he panicked and pulled her out of the shallow stream, she blinked. "You are… not unnie?"
"Friend," Yu Jin chirped again, but taking a look at her frantically ran back to his fathers.
"Towel, towel?" The little dragon asked, almost in tears. Mu Yeung pulled out one from his bag, handling it over to Yu Jin, and under the little girl's wary glaze decided to step out and introduce themselves. But just in case, he nodded to Ignatio who remained hidden out of sight.
"Hi, I'm Mu Yeung, and this is my kid Yu Jin." He bent down and smiled kindly at the little girl, while Yu Jin meeped worriedly and patted her with the towel in an attempt to dry her up.
"Hello…" the girl reached her hand out hesitatingly and gave a small wave, before squeaking out anxiously, "please, please don't tell unnie I, I came out to play alone! She doesn't like it when I go into the forest!"
/
So she has family here, no wonder she doesn't seem any scared.
/ Ignatio noted as he listened in on their conversation. /
But, a little princess kept locked in a castle?
/
"We are not sent here by your unnie, don't worry," Mu Yeung tried to placate the little girl, while keeping his twin's question in mind. "We're just passing by-"
"Play play?" Perhaps sensing her anxiety, Yu Jin asked, planting himself between his father and the little girl. “Play please?”
With Yu Jin looking at her with big, round, pleading yellow eyes, looking a little ridiculous still wearing his leafy hat and holding up a half wet towel still dabbing her with it, the little girl burst into giggles. Mu Yeung watched quietly, not knowing how he should react, somehow realising he should have let Ignatio deal with the little girl since he is much better with kids, while Yu Jin joined in laughing too.
/That’s called making friends,/ Ignatio mused, /and if she opens up while playing with Jin, we might get some info from her?/
/We can try,/ Mu Yeung gave a light nod, letting the two kids interact. The little girl seemed to become a bit less wary about them as their laughter subsided, but smiles remained on their faces.
“Play?” Yu Jin asked again, and this time the little girl nodded vigorously.
“Sure, let’s play!” She chirped, and was taken aback at how brightly Yu Jin beamed back.
“Yay, let’s play!” Yu Jin repeated after her cheerily. He pointed to himself, saying, “Yu Jin.”
“Yu Jin?”
As the little girl repeated after him, he nodded. Yu Jin then pointed to Mu Yeung, “papa Mumu!”
“I’m Mu Yeung,” the half vampire quickly cut in before that became his nickname with this little girl. She looked a bit confused at him, but gave a small, shy nod. “You are?”
“I, I’m Ara,” she offered her name, giggling as Yu Jin repeated it after her. “Um, Yu Jin, so what do you want to play?”
The little dragon replied immediately, “play cooking!”
Mu Yeung groaned a little inwardly; ever since Leon let Yu Jin help out a little when preparing meals, Yu Jin had been fixated on it. He even asked Gamunbi to teach him how to cook, although it would be good if the little kid can cook something more delicious than the bland meals they’ve been having, he rather Yu Jin be having fun instead. And seeing Ara’s confused look, he spoke up hastily. “Yu Jin, sorry, we don’t have the utensils to play cooking, how about something else?”
Yu Jin pouted with disappointment, fraying his tiny arms. Seeing that, Ara asked, “um, I’m trying to find a pretty rock for unnie, Yu Jin, would you like to one with me?”
That cheered Yu Jin up, and he meeped happily back at her. Putting that towel on Mu Yeung’s lap, he quickly ran up to the river and began staring at the rocks. Ara gave him a quick bow and a soft thank you, before joining Yu Jin’s side.
“Pretty?” Yu Jin dug one up in his hands and offered it to Ara.
“It isn’t pretty enough, look, there are some cracks here.” Ara took the stone and explained to Yu Jin, the little dragon listening intensely. “Unnie’s really nice to me, I, I want to find the nicest stone her and give it to her!”
Yu Jin meeped and nodded, getting back to the task at hand. Mu Yeung kept an eye on them while listening to Ignatio’s reports as he surveyed the surrounding area.
/
It’s just trees and more trees around here, it’s so boring!
/ Ignatio grumbled, sending an image of what he is seeing through their link. /
Trade places with me Rang, I want to play with Yu Jin too!
/
/
They’re just looking for rocks, you won’t enjoy this either,
/ Mu Yeung shook his head. /
But...
/
He turned towards the little brown haired girl, asking, “Ara, do you live around here?”
“Yup, unnie and I live in the castle over here!” Ara answered back brightly. “Would you like to come and play? Unnie bought me a lot of dolls!”
At the mention of playing and dolls, Yu Jin lit up, his task forgotten. Seeing how much he adored the dragon plush Yeon Hwa gave him, that wasn’t too surprising. “Play?” The little dragon asked.
“Yup! Let’s go play after we find a pretty rock alright?” Ara smiled as Yu Jin nodded at her words, looking much more motivated to find something nice.
“If you live around here, did you hear of anything strange happening recently, Ara?” Mu Yeung asked as gently as he could, though he might have said something wrong and the little girl tensed up. He quickly clarified, “the townsfolk said some of them got injured when they went gathering in the forest, we’re just trying to find out what happened.”
“It, it isn’t unnie, unnie promised me she won’t hurt anyone!” Ara squeaked out terrified, brought almost to tears by his accusations. “Unnie’s really nice to me, it isn’t her, please don’t take me away from unnie!”
/
If anything this just makes her seem more suspicious-- Watch out Rang!
/ Ignatio called out, leaping from his spot landing in front of them, summoning his gun and using it to block a magical strike. By reflex Mu Yeung scooped up Yu Jin in his arms and leapt backwards, and caught a glance of their attacker. A lady with long purple hair appeared beside Ara and picked her up in her arms, while energy balls spun towards them. Ignatio managed to block the first, but he is pushed back quite a bit. Mu Yeung quickly summoned his own gun too, though having one arm wrapped around Yu Jin protectively meant he couldn’t move or attack that efficiently. The best thing to do is to run, but with more energy balls zooming in from all directions, and not knowing how strong this foe is. Even Yu Jin looked terrified, meeping in fear from the attack.
“Unnie, unnie, stop!” At Ara’s wail, the attacks froze in place. Though initially wearing a disgusted expression on her face, the purple haired lady turned towards Ara with a gentle smile on her face.
“They made you cry, sweetie,” the lady stroked her face gently, “I promised I won’t let anyone make you cry or hurt again.”
“But they’re my friends! Please, please don't hurt them!" At Ara's desperate pleas, the lady called off her magical attacks, though doesn't seem too happy about that.
"Fine, you freaks can live-"
"Unnie!! They are not freaks! They are my friends!" Ara corrected the lady with a pout, and despite having questions, the lady kept her mouth shut and watched. Ara pushed the protective arm around her and dropped to the ground, running past Ignatio, ignoring him. She went up to Yu Jin, who is still trembling and meeping in terror. As a gesture to show they are not hostile, and in hopes they won't piss off the lady any further, Mu Yeung called off his gun, bending down and bringing Yu Jin to eye level with Ara.
"It's alright now, Yu Jin!" Ara took his tiny hands and told him. He's still trembling, but nodded. Although Mu Yeung put him down on the ground, he refused to let go. "And um, mister Mu Yeung, um, unnie’s really a nice person, really!”
With violet eyes watching him closely, and a dangerous aura that could crush them anytime, Mu Yeung nodded. “Go back to your big sis, she’s worried about you.”
As Ara pattered back while constantly looking back towards Yu Jin, Mu Yeung introduced himself to the lady. “I’m Mu Yeung, and this is my twin, Ignatio. We’re hunters.”
The lady hmfped, but waved her hand for him to continue. Though she quickly put a protective hand around Ara when she ran back to her side.
“Two men from the town were killed while they-”
“That wasn’t me,” the lady answered immediately, “now leave us alone.”
/
She’s def hiding something,
/ Ignatio narrowed his eyes, calling off his gun as the lady’s eyes shifted to him. /
She definitely isn’t human.
/
/
Do not compare me with the lowly wretched creatures,
/ her voice boomed in their minds, and immediately Ignatio leapt back towards his twin, resummoning his gun and taking a more defensive stance.
“Unnie! Stop bullying them!” Ara called out again, tugging at her long shirt. “They are my friends, and I promised, I promised Yu Jin we’ll play together with my toys!”
“Ara sweetie, I’ll play with you instead, alright? Just ignore these people-”
“I want to play with Yu Jin! I promised!” Ara stomped her feet, causing a few rumbles when her feet hit the ground.
/
Def an ability holder,
/ Ignatio pointed out, though quickly shutting up when he remembered the lady seemed to be able to hear his thoughts.
“Alright, alright, sweetie, they can come play with us,” the lady reluctantly agreed, shaking her head. She rubbed Ara’s cheeks, speaking at a voice much tenderer and gentler. “Don’t pout like this, I just don’t want you to get hurt again.”
“Thank you, unnie!” Ara beamed back with a bright smile, and the impact on the lady looked suspiciously like how Eun Yul is when hit with a bright smile from Maru.
“My precious sweetie Ara, you’re just the sweetest little kiddy ever,” the lady sighed, seeming to drift off into bliss.
“Ah, um unnie, I couldn’t find a nicer one, but this is for you!” Ara handed over one of the rocks she found from the river, a smooth purple one matching the colour of the lady’s hair. “This is as thanks for looking after me!”
With those words the twins twitched as the lady squealed and picked up Ara in her arms in a big hug.
/
They’re weirdos.
/
/
Yeah.
/
Ignatio easily introduced themselves to the lady, who very unwillingly gave her name as Hanarin.
“Unnie’s a really strong vampire!” Ara said proudly as she tipped over her toy box, wowing Yu Jin with the numerous plushies that poured out. “She is so cool!”
That caused Hanarin to beam happily, though…
“But Ara’s a human right?” Ignatio asked, trying to ignore that the lady might be someone they might have to hunt down one day. “I mean you’re a vampire-”
“Look you have no idea what this little dearie had been through, before I took her in there wasn’t even any light in her eyes!” Hanarin growled, wrapping her hands protectively around Ara’s shoulders. “If her parents hadn’t wanted her then I’ll protect her!”
“I, I’m not going back, ever!” Ara pouted. “Unnie’s really nice to me, I’m going to stay here forever and I’ll protect her when I grow up!”
Immediately Hanarin wrapped the little girl in a big hug, stroking her hair gently. “My sweetie Ara, you’re just the sweetest dearie ever!”
“That’s kind of like Choi and-”
Before Ignatio could finish his words Hanarin glared at him, her aura flaring up. “So you know that bastard.”
Trembling a little, Mu Yeung answered neutrally. “We met him before.”
“He called for that useless gathering, and because of that I had to leave my precious little princess behind!” The vampire ranted as the twins made note never to mention Choi again around her. “My dear little Ara, unnie is really sorry for leaving you behind, unnie won’t ever do that again!”
Watching her squeal again as Ara hugged her back, Mu Yeung cleared his throat. “Miss Hanarin, we are hunters-”
“Yeah, yeah,” Hanarin waved dismissively, “there’s this hut near the edge of the forest, go check it out.”
“Thank you?” Mu Yeung twitched at how she is waving them away, but seeing how powerful she is, he didn’t question her on her information. “We’ll be going, but can we please leave Yu Jin here with you-”
“Mumu, Mumu!” It appears that Yu Jin hadn’t been focusing much on playing with the dolls, at the mention of his name he ran towards Mu Yeung immediately, and clung onto his leg tight. “Dangerous!”
“Yu Jin, don't worry, we can take care of ourselves,” Ignatio bent down and explained to their kid, while trying but failing to pry him off Mu Yeung’s leg. “It’s safer for you to stay here instead, be a good kid and play with Ara alright?”
“Um, I can go with you all!” Ara offered brightly. “I, I’m strong, I can protect all of you!”
The mental image of this little girl protecting them: two adult half vampires and one tiny dragon, it was just too strange that the twins grimaced.
“Ara, you’re just a little girl, it’s too dangerous for you too,” Mu Yeung explained kindly to her, looking over to Hanarin worriedly as Ara’s eyes became teary.
“But, but…”
Before she could cry, Hanarin spoke up. “Look, you two just need to find whatever’s killing the townspeople right?”
The twins nodded, not knowing how else to react.
“I’ll go with you two, don’t you dare make Ara cry because of something this minor!” As Ara hugged her again in delight, the twins had to wonder what kind of mess they had gotten themselves entangled into.
One snap and Hanarin got them to a small hut deep in the forest. Ara giggled at Yu Jin’s amazement, explaining, “unnie’s really powerful! She can poof, and bring me to a different place!”
“So this is where the monster stays?” Mu Yeung asked, wondering if they should just rush in. The hut looks old and unlived, but there definitely is the scent of dried blood present.
“How would I know,” Hanarin shrugged, “are you expecting me to know what is happening in my domain!?”
“But-”
Ignatio started asking, and she rolled her eyes. “Look, there isn’t anywhere else anyone can live around here, here’s the best spot to check out first.”
“Yeah, right…” Frowning at that indifference, Ignatio knocked on the door. “Hey, anyone in?”
There wasn’t any answer, so he pushed the door inwards. It opened up surprisingly easily, though as he stepped in-
/
Ho, watch out!
/
Something metallic struck him-- A pot? One kick and it went flying, together with the person holding the pot.
“A kid!?” Ignatio exclaimed, wondering if he saw wrongly, then a even smaller figure ran up to him, smacking his leg hard.
“Don’t hurt big bro, don’t hurt him!” the little figure cried, while jabbing his leg hard. Ignatio could make out a little girl with a disfigured monstrous arm, maybe that’s why the two of them are hiding in the forest instead of living in the town. Being a half vampire he could take those jabs from that arm, though normal humans might die from that inhuman strength. Could she had been the one who killed the townsfolk.
“Keep… your hands off Ah Leum!” The kid he sent flying sat up and groaned, but seemed too weak to get up from his spot. “I, I won’t let you hurt her!”
“They are just… little kids?” Hanarin looked surprised to see them as she stepped into the house. The little girl squeaked in fear and ran back towards the other kid. Though her legs are trembling, she stood protectively in front of him.
“Don’t, don’t hurt big bro!” The little girl squeaked, her voice getting weaker.
“Sorry kiddo, I hadn’t meant to.” Ignatio took a seat a safe distance from them, offering his usual easy going smile. “I was taken by surprise, but here, you want some food?”
Digging into his bag, Ignatio dug out a loaf of bread, which the two kids stared hungrily. As he passed it over, the little girl immediately broke it into half, and wolfing down her half while offering the other to the boy.
“Ah Leum, it’s dangerous-” despite his protest, as the little girl stuffed the bread into his mouth, he couldn’t help but gulp it down too.
/
Let me speak to them,
/ Hanarin ordered, and immediately Ignatio vacated his spot, letting the vampire get closer to the two kids.
“You two, what are your names?” She asked them kindly, like how she had been speaking to Ara.
“I, I’m Ah Leum, big bro’s Pu Leum,” Ah Leum answered softly, looking a little intimidated by her. Pu Leum shrunk back a little too behind her.
“Ah Leum, Pu Leum, have you two been living all alone here all this time?” Hanarin continued speaking kindly and gently to the two little kids, and they nodded.
“Big sis went to the city to work and never came back, and then Ah Leum got sick and everyone started calling her a monster!” Pu Leum cried, and Ah Leum quickly took his trembling hand, offering him some comfort. “She didn’t mean to kill anyone, please, please don’t kill her!”
“I’m not going to kill you, poor dears,” Hanarin reached out to the two of them, petting their heads. They flinched, unused to such a gentle touch from a stranger. “You must have been through so much. Here, I live in a castle nearby, would you two like to live with me? I’ll make sure no one hurt the two of you again.”
“Can… can we?” Ah Leum asked hesitantly, unbelievingly. “Everyone calls me a monster, I, I’ll kill you-”
“Unnie’s really strong!” Ara chirped in. “Mom and dad called me a monster too, but unnie took me in and she gave me lots of food and toys!”
“Really?” Pu Leum asked, “you, you really won’t kill us?”
“You all are just little kids, you don’t deserve to suffer so much,” Hanarin sighed and pulled the three kids into her embrace. “I’ll protect you, you three won’t ever have to suffer again in your lives.”
As the two new kids cried, the twins wondered how they should report back on their mission…
After a bath where the two kids where thoroughly wowed at having warm and clean water to bathe, and perhaps the first filling meal after a long time, the two kids fell asleep on a bed of plushies. The twins watched as Hanarin tucked both of them in bed, her expression very much different compared to when she spoke to them.
“You really are going to bring them up?” Mu Yeung asked as they returned to the living room where Ara continued playing with Yu Jin, though beaming and telling him how she has two younger siblings now.
“Of course!” Hanarin snorted. “I’m an elder, these are two little kids asking for my help! Of course I’m going to take care of them!”
“An elder… Wait you're an elder too!?” Ignatio gulped, turning pale and inching away from her.
“They are just such poor little kids, what had they done to deserve this happening to them?” Hanarin ignored Ignatio’s question, and joined Ara as she played with the dolls.
“Um, unnie, thank you.” Ara gave her a hug, surprising the vampire. “Thank you for taking me in, and thank you for taking Ah Leum and Pu Leum in too!”
As the elder melted into squeals at how adorable her little girl is, the twins had to wonder if all vampire elders are like that.
“Yeah, that’s bout it,” Ignatio concluded as he stuffed another sandwich into his mouth, “we lived, two kids got adopted, but wow, bringing Jin along really helped!”
“Not everyone likes kids,” Mu Yeung smacked his twin, earning a panicked squeak from Yu Jin. “We’re just lucky this time, who knows we might meet the next time?"
"Next time…" Leon murmured quietly, then turned to look at Gamunbi. "Next time, would I be able to go with them?"
"You know how weak you are right now," Mano rolled his eyes, "but I can go together and put you back-"
"No thank you," three voices replied immediately. Leon chuckled as his half vampire friends shifted a little away from Mano, while Yu Jin looked at them cluelessly.
"Maybe in a few years' time," Gamunbi said as he poured them all another round of tea. "You won't be able to get took far from my domain for now, but as long as you keep training to control your ability, you'll be able to do it."
"If Mano doesn't kill me first," he muttered under his breath, which got a sharp toothed grin from the half vampire.
"Hey, I'm trying so hard to keep you alive, I won't kill you," Mano drawled, and Leon decided he would rather sit even further from the teen doctor. Seeing that, Garam and Gabi glanced at each other, and gave Mano a firm smack on the head.
“Hey, what was that for?!”
"Bring me with you the next time," he told the twins, ignoring Mano’s yelps of pain. “I won’t be a burden again.”
"You aren’t, and don’t worry, we will," Mu Yeung promised, smiling fondly at him.
"Yu Jin would like it too," Ignatio added, as Yu Jin nodded furiously on his lap.
"Travel together!" The little dragon meeped, and offered a sandwich to him.
“Yeah, that sounds great.” Smiling back, Leon can only how his future would be, everything just seems so much better and brighter to him right now...
----- CHAPTER BREAK -----
Leon helped to put up Halloween decorations a few days before the festival. Garam and Gabi ran about excitedly placing glowing pumpkins around the place, while he and Henry patrolled the further areas. Walking nearly half the morning away, Leon realised Gamunbi’s domain is much larger than he thought. He had Henry for company, which is better than having Gabi and Garam around. The twin dragon girls tend to drag him off forcefully whenever they encounter anything interesting, though it is still considered preferable than being around Mano. "Hey Henry, are we expecting guests?" Leon asked Henry. The quiet zombie boy shrivelled his head to look at him, the unnatural movement still unnerving him."Maru is coming for Trick-or-Treat," Henry replied tonelessly, though his eyes are shining. "Dad said Yu Jin is coming too."Yu Jin’s visit is something Leon had been looking forward to, the twins kept him in suspense on what they’ll dress their little dragon up in. But for Maru, so far, he had only heard of the name from the kids."Maru? He’s your friend?" As Henry nodded, Leon prodded further, getting a little curious. "What is he like?""Fluffy," Henry answered immediately, raising his hand to eye level. "This tall. Warm. We all like him."So Maru is a little kid too? Seeing how excited Henry seemed to be, they must be quite good friends.Seeing that curious look on his face, Henry added, "Teacher Mano likes him a lot too.""Mano likes this Maru kid?" That caught Leon by surprise, he couldn’t imagine the young doctor liking anyone, he always appeared to have the tendency to cut others up instead."Maru saved teacher's life," Henry nodded. "Because of him I’m alive right now too.""... Ah?" A kid saved both their lives? Maybe he should risk it and ask Mano about it, though Leon feared he might end up in more pieces. Though… "So, does Mano like Yu Jin?""Mano wants to cut him up," Henry answered with brutal honesty. Immediately Leon took note to never allow the tiny little dragon near Mano ever. Though it made him even more curious about Maru, does Mano like him just because he saved his life? Or is it something more to make Mano like him more than precious little Yu Jin? Seeing Henry staring at him, Leon asked again."Then how about you, Henry? Do you like Yu Jin?"The zombie boy thought for a while before answering. "Yu Jin is small. I want to protect him."That’s one less person he has to worry about around Yu Jin, and Leon petted Henry gratefully on the back. But the undead kid looked unblinkingly at him and asked, "Leon, do you like us more or Yu Jin?"Those innocent eyes looked at him for an answer. Leon felt he shouldn’t lie, but breaking the small kid’s heart is just as bad. Having helped looked after Yu Jin when the half vampire twins panicked over what to do with a small kid, of course he prefers Yu Jin over all others, but now, Garam, Gabi, and Henry is part of his family. They are very obedient kids too, and he cherishes them."You all are such nice little kids, I want to protect all of you," Leon answered honestly. That seemed to satisfy Henry enough, and they went back to their task of putting up decorations in silence. Though the usually emotionless zombie boy smiled a bit more that day.During lunch Leon asked Gabi and Garam about Maru, the two immediately breaking up into excited chattering."Maru's fluffy!" Gabi beamed at him, and Garam made a petting motion with her hands."Very fluffy," she meeped in agreement, wearing the same bright smile as her twin. Somehow the foriegn kid in his mind is starting to resemble Gammy instead of a human kid."Fluffy? So is he… human?" He asked, and both girls nodded."Yeah he is, and Maru's a nice kid," Mano added with a very strange gentleness in his voice. Leon stared, thinking he might have heard wrongly, which evidently rubbed Mano the wrong way. "What.""I never thought you'll never like anyone?" Leon raised an eyebrow. "Aren't you all about cutting people up?""Maru's a nice kid, he’s much too nice for his own good." Mano growled, sounding much more protective of this little kid than Leon expected him to be."And… that's it? He's just nice? Nothing special?" Immediately that got him two painful smacks from the twin girls, which enlightened him on why Mano always winced in pain when his sisters smacked him. "Maru's special!" Gabi pouted, "Maru's very special!""Specially fluffy!" Garam agreed, both girls glaring at him daring him to say otherwise. Henry didn't say anything, but pulled out a pile of books from nowhere and dumped them on his head."Ouch! What was that for?!" Rubbing his head, Leon complained to three pairs of unapologetic eyes."Kids." One stern word from Gamunbi and all three focused their attention back on their meals. / Maru's a small kid, and one of their first friends. They can be quite protective of him ./Despite Gamunbi's bemused explanation, Leon still couldn't understand what they liked so much about this Maru kid, but if this is what happens if he brings him up, no way he is going to ask about him anymore. Though since when did he have syringes sticking out of him…?And within the blink of an eye, it is Halloween. Leon was woken up by Mano, nearly getting a heart attack thinking it was a nightmare. To see the teen so early in the morning, and wearing a rare non threatening smile on his face, Leon rolled off the bed and hit his head painfully. Mano laughed at him as he rubbed the bump on his head, ignoring his glare."Get up already, else I’m cutting you up for breakfast?" Despite his words Mano is in very good spirits, and Leon quickly got up and started his day before it can change for the worse.But somehow, he could feel something’s strange about the day. He feels a little more powerful, a little different."It’s Halloween, magic’s much stronger today," Mano explained jovially as they walked towards the kitchen. "We’re magical beings, our powers are much stronger today too.""Is that so," Leon remarked neutrally. That would explain what he is feeling, but as much as he wants to test his powers, he is not looking forward to over exhausting himself and getting admonished by his little siblings.As they walked into the kitchen, they met Henry stirring the pot of stew. Though instead of being hyper focused on the task as he usually is, Henry seemed distracted, staring into the distance instead of the pot."Maru won't be here so early, stop staring. We’ll take over, go feed Gammy," Mano told his little brother. Though he even more excited than Henry, adding in spices almost haphazardly to the stew."Oh yeah, Maru's visiting." Being reminded by Mano, Leon quickly made a note not to say anything wrong around his siblings, he doesn’t need the day to turn out painful instead of fun."Your Yu Jin's visiting too," Mano snorted, still in good spirits. "Don't make it sound like you're not looking forward to today." Yu Jin's not mine, Leon wanted to protest. Sure he helped looked after Yu Jin, but the little dragon belonged to the twins, not him. Though the little dragon once tried to call him 'mama', does it count? But seeing that rare smile on Mano's face, he didn't say anything more, choosing to focus on the activities ahead for the day.Breakfast passed, and by noon time, Maru still has not visited. Garam and Gabi looked around anxiously, and pattered over to Gamunbi."Maru?" They looked up with teary eyes and asked, but Gamunbi only shook his head."No, they aren't answering, something might have happened. Mano-" "Got it." Mano cut him off before he could say anymore, and called up Gammy from the shadows. He sounded very worried, which surprised Leon because he never expected the young doctor to have such… human feelings. "Boy, we're going to visit your master."With one strong leap and excited barking, Gammy and Mano vanished from sight. Gamunbi sighed, trying to placate his two nearly crying daughters, while Leon wondered what he should do to help with the situation. Meanwhile Henry stood there, watching where Mano left with an unblinking glum expression.Mano returned soon, shaking his head as Garam and Gabi hounded him for answers. "Something bad happened, and Maru needs time to recover." Mano sighed at their questioning meeps, "and no, this isn't anything I can treat."If it isn't anything Mano can treat, it has to be something major, Leon thought. Something that can make Mano look so frustrated./ Dad, / Mano called out telepathically, and Gamunbi nodded. Hearing that voice too Leon wondered if he should be involved in it, having not even met Maru before, but at Mano's glare he remained silent."Garam, Gabi, we'll discuss this, in the meantime go play with Gammy." He petted both on their heads. "I'm sure Yu Jin will turn up later, don't be so sad. And Henry, go join them too."It didn't make the two girls much happier, but they nodded obediently and went to play with Gammy together with their brother./ Here. / With that word, the three of them appeared in a simple tea room, a hot pot of tea sitting in the centre table. It smelt of fruit, and Leon couldn’t help but be curious why their meetings always include tea."You really like tea?" Leon asked, but Gamunbi only smiled, shaking his head./ Now’s not the time for that, / he told Leon gently, and turned his attention to Mano."Mano, what is the issue?" He asked, and immediately Mano called up an image of a man with long black hair and red tips, and cruel yellow eyes. Leon nearly leapt from his seat, there is no way he will ever forget those cold, sneering eyes."This guy traumatised Maru," Mano growled. "According to Choi he saw something bad in his dreams, and this is the guy that caused it.""Dream seering again? How is Maru now?" Gamunbi asked, taking a sip of tea. Leon did the same too, tasting a hint of rose and honey. Mano ignored his cup, looking more frustrated by the moment."Not good." He shook his head. "He can't speak, the light's gone from his eyes, he's so messed up mentally I couldn't get any thoughts from him at all.""That bad?" Gamunbi sighed, pouring another cup of tea for himself and Leon. "I’ve never seen this person before, he doesn't seem like any of the young ones I've met, but those eyes...""I, I know that person," Leon spoke up, feeling he should contribute a bit to the conversation, but Mano continued on."Once I find that bastard I'll kill him. I'll make him regret ever breaking such a sweet little kid." There's venom in his voice, and Mano's aura flared up. For a first time Mano felt dangerous, not the danger of being cut open, but it felt as if… as if he'll make someone suffer, then take away their ability to die even if they asked for it. That thought made his legs weak and his hands shake, but Leon tried to ignore that chilling sensation and spoke up."I knew this person." He repeated, louder, though it didn't seem to get through to Mano."Yeah, yeah, I know, I'll adjust your dosage later." At least Mano returned back to his normal self, that dangerous aura fading off, but still, Leon can't help but feel irritated as Mano stomped off, vanishing from the area."What, just what was that!?" He complained. Gamunbi only chuckled at his irritation."Mano doesn't respect you yet, Leon, but can you please tell me more about this person?" Gamunbi motioned towards his cup, and Leon took a gulp, calming down a little. At least Gamunbi is interested in listening to him, and Leon racked his brain trying to remember all he could about that person."That's Bigak, he really hates humans. I, um, lived together with him and his group for some time before I met the twins, but he isn’t the nicest person to be around." Talking about it brought back memories of his time with those people, and reminded him much of how people will just vanish for the slightest reason, or once they ceased to be of use. He hadn’t known why he was allowed to live, nor why he was allowed to leave, but he isn't going to question that right now. "He doesn't say much, but I remembered once he got someone to draw my blood, he said he's going to kill the king. Something about fixing all that is rotten in this generation?""The king?" Gamunbi looked taken aback by those words, and murmured under his breath. "No, he can't be referring to the human kings, this generation meant he's referring to our king, but he has been gone for some time?"Unsure if he should leave Gamunbi to his thoughts or continue on, Leon cleared his throat."Ah, sorry about that." Gamunbi poured another cup of tea for him, a hint of worry on his face. "I'd think he's referring to our king, the vampire king.""Vampires have a king?" Leon asked, just a little curious."We had one, or our generation had one but he vanished." Gamunbi shook his head, "I don't know what happened, back then I was busy trying in vain to rein in the unruly young ones, but that presence hanging over our heads just vanished one day.""If he's gone how is Bigak going to kill him?" Leon asked, confused. "Are you sure he's really referring to the vampire king?""Maybe not for our generation, but the vampire king has to pass down his power and role when he dies," Gamunbi sighed. "Being the older generation we have no role to play in this, only the new generation will recognise the king and obey his rules, but none of those whom I know mentioned a new king.""Um… so?""If this Bigak person wants to kill this new king, he must have felt the effects of this king's rule. But we cannot be sure right now-- Leon." Gamunbi stopped suddenly, red eyes looking directly at him. The kindness in his eyes is gone, replaced by sternness. "This might be too dangerous for you or Mano to handle, I'll take care of it. It's a good thing Mano isn't paying much attention to your words, please don't mention this again to him. I do not need him running off investigating on his own, especially right now.""Yes sir," Leon gulped, wondering what that was about. But he felt compiled to agree, as if someone is making a choice for him."That is an order, Leon, it is something that someone above you in power can force onto you." Gamunbi said much gently, petting him on the shoulder. "I'm sorry, but I cannot afford to give you a choice in this matter right now. I hope you can understand.""... Alright?" Leon can only answer confused, not truly understanding what happened, but knowing well he is not to bring the topic up around Mano no matter what happened."Thank you Leon." Yu Jin arrived late in the afternoon, to Garam and Gabi's delight. Henry still wore the same disinterested expression on his face, but he ran with the girls to go play with his friend. Mano though is still sulking, burying his nose in his books and refusing to leave the library./ Leave him to be for now, I'll keep an eye on him, don't worry so much. / Gamunbi said while dropping a bag of candies in his hands. / Go join your friends, weren't you looking forward to seeing Yu Jin again? // Thanks. / At Gamunbi's words Leon hastened his steps towards living room, and the moment he stepped in Yu Jin gave him a big hug."Leon, Leon!" The little dragon meeped happily. With his wings and tail showing, it is more apparent to Leon now that Yu Jin wasn't a human kid as he had thought, though is he dressing up as a dragon?"Hey Jin, you're looking great today." He hugged the little boy up in his arms, wincing at how heavy the little boy had gotten. Yu Jin squealed as he is lifted up, spreading his wings wide./ You alright? / Mu Yeung asked, concern present in his voice. / Yu Jin got a bit heavier, Yeon Hwa said it's normal till he can finally control his powers. // I'll live. / Ignoring the strain in his arms, Leon ruffled Yu Jin's hair. "Have you been doing well, Jin?"He laughed as the little kid rubbed his face onto his shirt, meeping happily."Here, let Leon rest, he isn't that strong yet," Ignatio said while taking his kid from his arms. Though Leon protested, he knew his arms are shaking from the strain and might give way any time. Yu Jin pouted, still grabbing on to his shirt. "I'm still here, here Jin, don't you want to play with Garam and Gabi?" Leon gently uncurled those tiny fingers from his shirt, petting Yu Jin on the head. "Garam, Gabi-"As he turned to look for the two dragon girls, he realised they are standing at his feet, eyes looking at him expectantly."Hug?" Both girls asked at the same time. Leon wondered how much heavier they would be than little Yu Jin, and if he'd even be able to lift them up. Gamunbi walked in right on time with two platters of cookies."Gabi, Garam, Leon isn't strong enough yet." The vampire chuckled and petted his two daughters on the head. "Yu Jin's much smaller and lighter than you two."There were two very disappointed meeps as the little girls looked away, though they squeaked out in surprise as Henry snuck up behind them and easily lifted them up in his arms, one around each arm./ Thing don't seem so boring around here, / Mu Yeung mused as Henry somehow seemed to be in a lifting contest with Ignatio, with the little dragons cheering them on. / How have things been for you? // Fine, other than Mano being Mano it's not bad here, / Leon admitted as they sat down to watch the kids (including Ignatio) play. He leaned lightly against the half vampire’s shoulder, who shifted for him to lean in closer. / How about things on your end? Managed to find the person you've been looking for? // No, not yet. / Mu Yeung shook his head with a sigh, and he could feel that rumble at his side. Everytime the topic is brought up, the twins also sound so pained. All Leon could do is to just sit there and listen, just being there as a support for them. Remembering the candy bag Gamunbi gave him, Leon rumbled through it for one, and passed it to Mu Yeung. / Thanks. We managed to get some help but there is still no news on the matter yet. Your side? // Remember Bigak? / As Mu Yeung made a face Leon nodded understandingly, and snuggled closer, running his fingers on Mu Yeung's hands. / I know, and Gamunbi's looking for him now, heard he hurt this kid called Maru. // Maru's hurt?! / Mu Yeung soundly extremely worried, he had known the little kid too? Is this Maru kid some kind of celebrity around here? Though somehow the name is starting to sound a little familiar to him, he might have heard it somewhere before?/I don't know the specifics, but Mano said he'll recover with more rest. You met this kid too?/ As Leon asked, he drew his hand back to get another candy from the bag. Mu Yeung pulled his hand back, dropping his fingers and the candy into his mouth. He took the candy from those fingers, licking them before letting Leon draw his fingers back./ He's the kid Ho stabbed, / Mu Yeung grimaced. / And because of that somehow we got Yu Jin. // … what. /A few hours of play later and the kids sans Henry laid exhausted on the floor, napping. Being the only one still capable of moving, the zombie kid carried his sisters up in his arms carefully and took them back to their rooms. Gamunbi petted him on the head and thanked him as he passed, gentle eyes watching him. Mu Yeung picked up Yu Jin in his arms, the little dragon meeping sleepily before burrowing into his embrace and resumed his nap./ You get up too, / Mu Yeung nudged his twin with his feet, who refused to get up from the ground. / You're not a kid, you shouldn't be this tired out from playing. // Leon, Rang's bullying me... / Ignatio complained, though Leon unsympathetically ignored him, petting the sleeping boy in Mu Yeung's arms. Gamunbi chuckled and started cleaning up the place./ You three can stay here and rest for the night if you want to, / the elder vampire offered, but the twins shook their heads./ Duuuuude, you know you got this ultra scary kid? / Ignatio whined, and quickly looked around to see if said kid is around, relaxing when he didn’t see Mano around./ Please stay here and suffer together with me, / Leon asked sincerely, but is shot down heartlessly immediately by both./ No thank you. /"Wait a minute did we even have Trick-or-Treat!?""You stole that plate of cookies, and Leon gave us a bag of candies.""Leon did!? Hey give me some-- Oh, so that was what the two of you were doing!? You know how hard I had to distract the little kids-- Leave some for me too!!"Maru eventually visited, Mano told him. Leon had been out cold that time, after overestimating his control over his poisons and knocking himself out that day. He thought Mano would have been much happier after the visit from his favourite kid, but the young doctor informed him sourly they will all be going on a trip."Huh? All of us? Including me?" Leon asked, unsure if he heard correctly. "Yeah, you too," Mano sulked, sitting on the examination table and kicking his legs in frustration. "Just because some useless elder couldn’t take care of himself and his kid! Now we’ll even have to involve Teacher into this mess!?""Teacher?" Leon asked, it seemed that every time the topic of his teacher is brought up Mano always seemed very… agitated."No one you should be bothered with," Mano waved it away, immediately becoming very defensive. "All you need to know is that we’re going on a trip soon, when you’re free go pack up whatever you need, go pester dad if you need anything else."As he refused to say anymore on the matter, Leon decided perhaps this isn't the right time to press Mano about the issue. Packing up sounds like a better option, and maybe he can ask Gamunbi about this sudden trip too.Before Leon could head back to his room, two little dragon girls pattered up to his side. He gulped hard, Garam and Gabi are both looking at him with the same accusuary glance they often give Mano when he collapsed from over straining himself and not taking breaks. "I, I’m sorry...?" He offered weakly as both glared at him."Rest more! Worried!" Garam meeped loudly at him, sounding very much angry. Gabi just smiled at him, and gave him one painful smack on his leg. It hurt a lot, no wonder Mano always complained when they hit him. "Bad Leon," she meeped, that calm smile creeping him out more than Garam’s anger."I know, I’m sorry, I won’t push myself so hard anymore, alright?" Leon grimaced, telling the two girls sincerely, "really, I promise I won’t be like Mano, alright?"As the two girls looked at each other and nodded, walking off, Leon swore he won’t ever be making them angry again. Somehow he has a feeling Gabi already hit him as lightly as she could, any heavier he would be having broken bones. And for fixing broken bone he will have to rely on Mano-- he definitely isn't going to anger the dragon girls ever again.As he was packing whatever meager belongings he had in his room, Gamunbi appeared, a small haversack in hand."I take it Mano told you about the trip," the vampire asked politely, handing the haversack over."Yeah, he said something about a trip, and told me to pack." Accepting the haversack, Leon found its insides is much larger than it looked, with water containers and clean clothes and some snacks. "Thanks, this’ for the trip?""Yes," Gamunbi answered, though something seemed a little strange about him. "Leon, do you know what this trip is for?""No? Mano didn’t say anything, though he seemed… somewhat agitated, and it’ll involve his teacher?" Leon shrugged. "What’s up with him and his teacher anyway? He always seemed so troubled when his teacher is brought up."Gamunbi sighed, taking a seat on his bed. "This… you know Mano’s not the most ethical doctor?""Yeah, I noticed," Leon made a face. "So… I guess he had a falling out with his teacher over that?""Yes," Gamunbi nodded. "They hadn’t parted on a good note, but now we require Saeha’s services." The vampire shook his head, though, Saeha’s the name of Mano’s teacher? That name seemed familiar to him, though Leon couldn’t remember where he heard it from. And…."Mano’s teacher is a doctor too right? What happened, why do we need him instead of Mano?" Leon asked, fearing for the worse. Could it be that his condition worsened because he pushed his body too hard? Or--"No, you are perfectly fine, Leon," Gamunbi petted him fondly on the head, making him feel like a small child again. Though when he was small Leon is sure no one was this gentle to him. "Remember Maru? His guardian is affiliated with something that Mano is unable to cure, and they aren’t in the best state to travel.""Alright?" Leon nodded slowly, unsure why Gamunbi is telling him this much. "Thank you? Is, is that all I need to know?""I know this might be a bit too much to ask of you, but for this trip, I sincerely hope that you can be a support to Mano." Gamunbi cut straight to his point. "Mano’s still a kid, he is still terribly hurt when his teacher abandoned him."Leon twitched at the vampire's request. "Me? Support Mano? I’m more likely to be cut into pieces by him. I mean I’ll try, but don’t get your hopes up too high."Seeing Gamunbi’s satisfied smile before he left the room, Leon can only hope he can do what he promised.Initially, the trip wasn’t as bad as he thought it would be. Leon managed to cover some distance on his own, feeling a lot of refreshed being out in the open. Although Gamunbi’s domain had a lot of greenery, it often felt magical, very much unlike the very normal and mundane scenery he is experiencing now. Garam and Gabi are giggling happily and and running up ahead with Gammy, seeming as though they hadn’t been outdoors before. Henry started plucking various plants and shoving them into his haversack, while he’s sure Mano and Gamunbi are deep in an unheard conversation. Mano’s frowning deeply, and that pained look resurfaced. Though the teen soon saw him looking in his direction and glared back./ What, / Mano snapped, and hearing him so irritated, Leon thought it is best to keep his distance for the rest of the day before he ended up in more pieces than he should be in.By noon Leon is starting to get tired. Not the usual tired when he had to work for an entire day, but his body is starting to go numb and unresponsive. It felt like when he was ill, but hadn’t he been much stronger now?"Henry, stabilize Leon." Mano called out, surprising him. "Garam, Gabi, we’re taking a break."Immediately Henry’s by his side, the pale skinned zombie carrying him up awkwardly in his arms. Too weak to protest, Leon allowed himself to be carried to the shade, where Gamunbi laid out a picnic for them in mere seconds. Garam and Gabi looked worriedly at him, passing sandwiches and drinks to him while he rested, and he had to keep reassuring them he is fine, just tired. "Your body still isn’t used to this huh," Mano remarked, studying him closely. "Maybe if we’re lucky enough to find teacher soon, you can beg for him to-""Mano." One stern word from Gamunbi and the teen shut up. Mano didn’t accept the sandwiches from his siblings, simply leaning against a tree and watching the far off distance. Even when Gammy whined and poked its head nearer to cheer him up, Mano only petted the shadow hound on the head instead absentmindedly./ He’s frustrated, / Gamunbi sighed lightly, keeping an eye on his son. / Yeah, I can see that, / Leon resisted the urge to roll his eyes. / But you said we won't find his teacher so easily? /Gamunbi nodded. / I've reminded him, but to meet the person he had been chasing after since he was young, it wasn't easy for Mano to keep his emotions under control. // What exactly happened? Why did Mano- // Leon. This is Mano’s personal issue. I would prefer if Mano tell it to you himself. / Gamunbi told him sternly, and Leon quickly shut up. He is still curious, but if it is something that personal he is alright with not knowing.After that they travelled for a few days, with Mano’s mood affecting them less. Leon still got tired easily, and is carried around embarrassingly by Henry. "Isn’t there any other way you can carry me?" Leon asked quietly, and Henry tilted his head."Garam and Gabi likes being carried like this," the little boy pouted. "I can drag you on the floor, but Teacher said to keep you upright.""It’s alright, this is much better than that ," Leon sighed./ Would you rather Garam and Gabi carry you instead? / Gamunbi asked with amusement, and the mental image of him being lifted and carried around by the two girls like a wooden log came into mind. He grimaced, shaking his head."Teacher's not in this area either," Mano complained. "I thought I felt a hint of his aura!"Seeing the teen look so frustrated, Garam and Gabi quickled hugged his legs, meeping at him. He only petted them on their heads, though his expression looked as though… as though he is near to tears? / I don't cry, / Mano snarled at him, sounding very much unlike his usual self. Though he quickly walked off to Gamunbi, who gave him a firm pet on his back."Take a break, Mano," Gamunbi told him firmly. "If Saeha isn't in this area, stop scouting and rest. You know him well enough to tell if he's here or not.""But! But Teacher!" Mano protested, but is unable to get anymore words out. Hanging his head, Mano dropped down on a log and sat there, hands hugging his sides tight. With Gabi and Garam sitting beside him, Leon let him rest, not that he can do anything much with Henry still carrying him around and lecturing on the greenery in the area.It was around a week before Leon started recognising some landmarks."Hey, if we're in the area, can I visit Yu Jin?" He asked, in faint hope that Mano isn't in that bad a mood to reject him. The teen doctor shrugged at looked at Gamunbi."Is this where the twins lived?" The vampire asked. "Choi mentioned they sensed a strange presence in the area when they last visited. Can you bring us there, and please avoid the human settlements if possible.""Well I can," Leon nodded, brightening up at being able to visit his friends, hopefully they are at home. But… "Avoid the human settlements?""Humans bad," Gabi and Garam answered immediately, both growling and baring their teeth, a stark contrast to their usual cheerfulness. That hostility caught Leon by surprise, and seeing that pained look from Gamunbi, he didn't press the issue. It is not like he doesn't have any issues with humans, and he nodded."Yeah, I can do that, follow me." The twins lived some distance away from the nearest town, having once lived in it and feared for their longevity. The issues got lesser when they moved to a more remote area, and interacted with humans less. And when they returned with little Yu Jin Yeon Hwa enthusiastically provided all the food, clothes and toys the little kid needs--Wait, does that mean Yeon Hwa is a dragon? Thinking of the curly pink haired lady, a dragon as the furthest thing he would think of her as, though his recent experiences had been eye opening. "Hanarin's here," Gamunbi announced as they got closer."Hanarin? The vampire they met?" Leon asked, twitching as he remembered their recount of the incident. "She has three kids right-""Mano, Hanarin is capable of wiping memories clean," Gamunbi told his kid sternly. "You should have much better survival instincts than this."That got Mano to shut up abruptly, he turned pale and looked around frantically."Wiping memories?" Leon asked, and Gamunbi nodded."It's exactly as it sounds like. Hanarin can erase your entire past, and leave you a blank slate with no idea of who or what you were." Gamunbi explained, with a side glance at Mano. "Even skills, she can wipe them away. She might not be powerful in raw strength, but she is an extremely formidable foe.""That… seems useful," Leon twitched as Mano slid behind him, trying to appear less conspicuous. "It is," Gamunbi nodded. Though he didn't elaborate any further on the issue. "I've told Mu Yeung and Ignatio we're here, shall we get going?"At least Henry allowed him the dignity to walk the last stretch to his friends' house on his own feet. Yu Jin ran out and tackled him; Leon felt as though he had lost all feeling in his leg where the little dragon hit him."Leon, Leon!" The small dragon meeped happily, hugging him tight. Three other kids Leon didn’t recognise are in the room, and one lady with purple hair whom he guessed should be the vampire Hanarin. "You doing well, Jin?" He petted the small dragon on his head, and the sweet little kid nodded. Yu Jin quickly ran off and took a sandwich from the table, pattering back to him."Leon, sandwich! I made!" The small kid offered it to him, puffing his chest proudly. The other three kids are also munching on sandwiches too."You made them? That’s really amazing!" Leon praised the little kid, and he beamed brightly, blushing a little. "I’m sure it’s delicious!"Behind him, Garam and Gabi meeped curiously, and Yu Jin quickly got three more sandwiches for them. They got into a meeping conversation, and Leon noted one of the girls is starting to look a little jealous. Yu Jin then dragged Garam and Gabi to join the other kids, with Henry following close behind. Garam and Gabi hadn’t seem to have any other girl friends, the moment Yu Jin introduced the two of them began squeaking happily to the two girls present, Ara and Areum. Yu Jin handed plushies to them, which Garam and Gabi ignored chattering with their new friends, while Henry looked at the squid plushie passed to him and hugged it tight. Pureum looked at him curiously, but seemed too shy to say anything."It’s rare to see you outside your domain, hadn’t you given Choi a good scolding for drawing you out?" Gamunbi asked the vampire lying on the sofa, helping herself to the sandwiches and watching her kids with a dreamy look on her face."You just look at these sweet little angels!" Hanarin gushed, petting the little boy closest to her. That should be Pureum, going by the description the twins gave previously. The boy giggled, turning a little red, and handed a plushie over to her. "Just look, little Pureum here is so sweet too!As Hanarin lapsed into intelligible words squealing over her kids, Gamunbi excused himself to the kitchen. Mano followed him immediately, looking immensely uncomfortable there. The twins followed too, and Leon decided to join them, seeing how Yu Jin’s having fun playing and not needing them there right now."Oi, the kitchen’s too cram for all of us, get out." Mano sat down on the dining table, crossing his arms and scowling at them. Immediately Leon smacked him on the head unable to stop himself. "Ouch, what is that for!?"Despite the sudden realisation he had put himself closer to death, Leon glared back. "The table’s for eating, get off it!"He heaved a quiet sigh of relief as Mano just got off the table without another word, though still glaring at him. The teen must have been really spooked, but kitchen hygiene isn’t something he can overlook just because of that. "Hey dude, you cooking something?" Ignatio went up to Gamunbi’s side, deciding it is much safer by the vampire. Gamunbi took out a few pots from their cabinet, and called up a couple more with his magic."This is the last I can since I’m imposing on you," Gamunbi smiled as he called up some food ingredients to the sink too, getting ready the chopping board and knife. "And don’t worry, with her eyes on her kids, Hanarin wouldn’t do anything to you two.""She still scary," Ignatio gulped, sneaking a peek outside. "Like, she’s an elder, and she nearly killed us. Look my legs are still trembling!""But she likes Yu Jin, so Jin’s safe there, but us…" Mu Yeung sighed, sharing a knowing look with his twin."Sure Hanarin is powerful, she is still weaker than Choi?" Gamunbi asked, skillfully chopping up the ingredients into fine bits without even looking at the chopping board. One flick and its contents are sent into a saucepan, slowly being cooked into a stew. "I dunno?" Ignatio shrugged. "He really dotes on little Maru, but like, like he’s a normal person? And how you and Yul put it, he’s like some kind of paedophile?" Immediately Mano choked, biting back on his laughter. "Yeah, he’s a paedophile, it’s right." "Mano," Gamunbi smacked him on the head lightly, though he’s wearing an amused smile on his face. "And you two, just don’t let him hear you say that." "Yeah, we won’t," Mu Yeung said solemnly, twitching at their laughter. Though curious, Leon kept his mouth shut; it didn’t involve him, but if he ever meets this Choi person, he should just run like hell."Sure, Choi seems like a normal person, that’s because he preys on humans and is more used to hiding his power from others." Gamunbi explained, and Mano made a face. "Yeah yeah, he’s just a pervert," the teen complained, rolling his eyes. "Of our generation, he's the one who gets around the most," Gamunbi explained to the confused twins, bemused. And seeing Mano's disgusted look, he added, "we're elders, Mano. If you live that long, you-""If I live that long I'll rather spend my eternity brushing up my skills instead of fucking around," the young teen spat. "I'll surpass even Teacher, I'll even become a legend!""I'm sure you will, Mano," Gamunbi just smiled and petted Mano on the head as if he is talking to his younger children, causing the young doctor to pout and swat his hand away."And although Choi is strong, he is still weaker than Yeon Hwa," Gamunbi continued, smiling. "She’s a dragon, there aren't many people who can stand up against her in her full power.""Oh, Pinkie’s alright!" Ignatio chirped in brightly. "She’s really happy with how we are bringing up Jin, like she pops up without warning from time to time, but she keeps saying Jin’s gonna grow up into a real fine young man!"Leon nodded at his words. He had met the pink haired lady a couple of times, she hadn’t seemed as powerful as Gamunbi said she is, and he only thought she’s a really concerned aunt of little Yu Jin, always speaking to her politely. "So she visits you two often?" Gamunbi asked, and as the twins nodded in unison, he shook his head. "Is she even checking out whatever Choi asked her to check?""Dunno bout that man, but she’s really excited when Jin started to breathe fire. Those few days she was really bouncing up and down with joy." Ignatio said while grinning, flashing a victory sign at Leon. "Dude, Leon, get back soon, you’re missing out all the milestones of Jin’s growth!""Wait, Yu Jin, he, he can breath fire now?" Leon looked out of the kitchen curiously, only to see the little kids playing together happily. "Yeah, he even said he’ll protect us all, but he’s just a little kid," Mu Yeung sighed lightly. "He shouldn't be doing any fighting at all, we’ll do it on his stead.""Hm, he’s already at this stage?" Gamunbi rubbed his chin, letting his magic continue cooking for him. "Gabi is able to call up some tiny flames of her own now, but Garam isn’t yet. But take care, dragon fire is very dangerous, try not to get caught in it or you two might die.""Yeah, Yeon Hwa drilled that into us for days," Mu Yeung recounted, wincing. Leon scooted a bit closer to him, and he nodded at the support. "But at least Yu Jin knows fire is dangerous, and he only uses it when Yeon Hwa is training him.""Yeah, Jin’s really obedient," Ignatio nodded cheerfully, "he always listens to us if we take good care of ourselves, no offense, but if he’s like your kid it’ll be a huge headache."Ignatio pointed over ot Mano, who glared back, challenging him to say anymore."I know, everyday I am thankful that Mano isn’t a dragon--" "What the fuck dad!?""-- even for me, a delinquent dragon isn’t something I can handle." Gamunbi smiled and petted Mano on the head again, ignoring his glare. "And Mu Yeung, Ignatio, did anything else out of the ordinary happen recently? Choi said that something suspicious happened in your area.""Nothing happened actually, other than Yeon Hwa visiting every now and then," Mu Yeung answered after thinking a bit. "The strangest thing would be Hanarin visiting today, but other than that, not really.""Is that so? Well, just inform me if anything happens," Gamunbi smiled as he petted the twins on their heads, being like a kind fatherly figure to them."Do you just take in everyone you meet?" Leon asked curiously, unable to stop the question from bubbling out. Gamunbi just smiled."You are just little kids, if there is anything I can help with I would love to be of some aid. And as I said, go play with the kids, I'll serve the food once it is ready." "Scary lady outside," Mu Yeung told him uncharacteristically simply, and Mano nodded too."I promise she won’t hurt the two of you. And Mano, as long as you don't cut up or hurt anyone it'll be fine," Gamunbi laughed at their unwillingness."Look, I’m not risking Teacher’s skills for that," Mano complained darkly, "his skills are just too precious to risk being near that elder-""Then how about risking it for Maru?" A jovial voice asked, and a little kid appeared in Mano’s hands."Mano-nim!" The blonde little kid chirped happily, and immediately Mano hugged him close. As curious as he is to find out more about this little kid, on how he can make Mano smile so gently at him, Leon found his attention drawn towards the tall man who appeared with the little kid. A black haired man with sharp eyes that glistered like black diamonds, dancing mesmerizingly, with features that seemed carved out of fine marble. An impossibly handsome man who just seems so magical he wants to reach out and feel that he is real, to--"Choi, can’t you stop harassing my kids just for once?" Gamunbi said, snapping Leon back to his senses. Ignatio leaned casually on his shoulder, draping an arm over his shoulder and pulling him further back from the person. Leon could feel his face flaring up, just what were those thoughts that popped up?"Come on, I hadn’t even done anything yet?" The tall man said exasperatedly, shaking his head. Leon found himself unable to tear his eyes away again, and a painful smack on the back of his head by Mu Yeung reminded him that he should most probably be on guard, especially against someone who can get past his defenses and charm him so easily. "So you’re Leon? I’m Choi," the tall man smiled easily, so he is that pervert they had been talking about previously? "I can assure you, most of what you heard about me is not true," Choi winced. Had he somehow been able to read his thoughts!? Leon shrunk back as Ignatio wrapped his arm even more protectively around him, and he called up his fangs just in case."Come on," the vampire groaned. "Maru here can testify that I’ve never done anything to hurt him.""Ah, so that’s Maru?" Leon asked, turning his attention away and look at the little kid Mano is cradling so protectively. The little kid shrunk back a little at his gaze, trying to hide himself behind Mano’s sleeve."He’s alright, Maru," Mano said in a voice too gentle for him to be used to. "He’s Leon, he's my younger brother." Why am I the younger brother!? Leon wanted to ask, but the little kid spoke first."Um, hi Leon-nim!" Peeking out shyly behind Mano’s arms, Maru gave him a shy wave. "But um, um, Leon-nim, are you… are you a subhuman too?"Hearing the cursed words Leon snarled, and had the twins not held him back, he’s certain he would have hit the little kid. Seeing red, he called out the poison claws he had been training to control, though Mano called up his power too, scalpels forming around him as he hugged the little kid in his arms tight."Mano." One stern word from Gamunbi and the air in the room thickened, so much so Leon nearly couldn’t breathe. It seemed to affect the twins and Mano too, and Mano’s scalpels, together with his claws vanished. And then he found he could breathe again, so did the others, though Mano choose to remain silent and just glare at him."Leon?" Choi said gently. "Maru hadn’t mean it, I apologise that he had hurt you with his words."The little kid in Mano’s arms hung his head too, squeaking soft apologies. Mano petted him on the head protectively."Try that again and I’ll end you, Leon." Mano growled, sending hairs on his back standing. Even Ignatio shrink back a bit, gulping."Mano, remember when you first met Maru?" Choi asked, bemused. "You slapped him so hard he went flying." Leon’s jaw dropped at that, so Mano hadn’t always liked the little kid? As Mano looked away guiltily, Maru quickly hugged the young doctor."Yes Leon, Maru hadn’t meant to insult you," Gamunbi went over and petted Maru on the head. "And Maru, the word you are thinking of is ‘ability holder’, since both of you have an ability. ‘Subhuman’ is actually a bad word to use.""Ah?" The little kid seemed confused at his words. "But, but they kept calling us subhumans! That’s why they kept us all in cages and did all those disgusting things to us-"Before the little kid could say anymore, there was a light silvery whirlwind and a white haired-- The BaekJung!?Leon could only watch in amazement as the BaekJung took the little kid from Mano, who had turned quite pale at his sudden appearance. He hugged little Maru close, almost being even more gentle to the little kid than Mano was."Look Maru, forget all about that." The BaekJung kissed the little kid gently on the head, seeming so different from the bloodthirsty killer he had heard of. "You are our treasure now, you don’t need to remember all the bad things.""m’Kay…?" The little kid nodded, though he doesn’t sound as though he understood what the BaekJung is talking about. As the white haired killer bounced the little kid in his arms, Choi took the chance to gently push them out of the kitchen to join the other kids. There was quite some happy squeals from the living room as they spotted the little blonde kid."Just, just what was that?" Leon asked, at a loss at what happened. "What happened to that kid!? Why is the BaekJung here!?"Mu Yeung and Ignatio looked at each other with a shrug, and Mu Yeung started speaking first. "You remember we told you about a bottomless eater who lived here once?""Yeah? And so-" Before Leon could ask how is it related to the current situation, his words are cut off."You’re sure forceful-""What the fuck!? How did you get Maru!? Wasn’t he your illegitimate kid or something!?" Mano was grabbing Choi’s collar and almost screaming at him, looking more agitated than he remembered ever seeing the teen. Choi easily brushed his fingers off."Maru is very loved right now, Mano," Choi shook his head. "What happened to him in the past doesn’t matter, he’ll only continue to be my precious little treasure.""I’m sure Maru belongs to Eun Yul," Gamunbi chuckled, and upon seeing his confused look he explained, "Eun Yul’s the BaekJung’s name, Leon. And Mu Yeung, Ignatio, Choi’s the one who turned him, go blame him for all your Eun Yul related issues."The twins twitched at that mention, shrinking further back as Choi chuckled and smiled back at Gamunbi."It’s such a pity I wasn’t the one who turned you, I could have made you take back all the words you said about me today." Those lovely charcoal eyes met ruby red ones, and Gamunbi smiled back easily."You had your fun eons back, I’m no longer the person you can twist around your finger anymore." Gamunbi said calmly but defiantly, challenging Choi to make a move."I can always try again?" Choi drawled, but before he can make any moves, needles shot out at the two of them. They easily deflected them, Gamunbi swatting them off the air with a spatula, while the needles around Choi dropped to the floor before they neared him. Their attention immediately turned to Mano, who rolled his eyes at the two of them."Go get a room already!?" The teen snapped, pushing past the two of them to the living room. "If you two aren’t going to kill each other I’ll rather go play with Maru!?"As Leon blinked in shock at hearing Mano being so straightforward, the twins took on look at the situation and dragged him out with them as they followed Mano’s lead, leaving the kitchen to the two vampires.The situation in the living room isn’t any much better. The BaekJung Eun Yul had his swords drawn out, slashing away at Hanarin’s purple fireballs. At least they kept clear from the kids, who mostly didn’t seem to notice the chaos happening around them. Except for little Areum, who is excitedly cheering her guardian on. Yu Jin’s playing house with Pureum, Ara and Garam, using various plushies as the members of their home. Mano hugged Maru up and placed the small kid on his lap, and started teaching him about medicine. Henry quickly joined them, still clutching tight on the squid plushie they saw him with. Meanwhile Gabi is at a corner on her own, munching one of the houseplants. Looking back at the kitchen, and the unfolding mess before them, the trio decided it is much safer to stay in the living room than to head back.With both Choi and Gamunbi cooking, the lunch spread was scrumptious. Roasted meats and seafood, and a huge variety of vegetables all spread out before them; despite having Eun Yul there with them it still felt too much for all of them. The silver haired vampire quickly tackled the food, taking huge chunks of everything and dropping them onto his plate, which emptied itself at an astonishingly fast pace. At the same time, he heaped much food on Maru’s plate too, ignoring the small kid’s frantic protest that he can't finish that much food. "Choi-nim, Choi-nim, please help!" The little kid is almost in tears as Choi petted him on the head. "Don’t worry Maru, just eat till you are full," Choi chuckled, though his attention is soon averted by Yu Jin pattering up to his side and tugging his sleeve."Teach, cook?" The little dragon asked as his dads tried to get him back to his seat. "You want me to teach you how to cook?" Choi asked with a gentle smile, a sharp contrast to him previously. "Sure, the next time we visit I’ll teach you some simple dishes, alright?"That satisfied the little red haired dragon, and Yu Jin allowed Mu Yeung to carry him back to his seat, meeping happily. Back at the table, Hanarin squealed as Ara put more food on her siblings’ plates, while Leon and Mano ate uncomfortably quietly beside her hoping she wouldn’t pay them any attention. Lunch passed by with no issues, with Eun Yul somehow managing to finish all the food on his own. The little kids played around a little bit after lunch, though having such a filling meal most just nodded off. "Unnie, unnie, we should go back?" Ara easily picked up her two sleeping siblings in her arms, giggling as Hanarin hugged her tight."Aren’t you just such a sweetie," the purple haired vampire squealed, nodding at the little girl’s request. Before Ara could turn to her friends and wish them goodbye, she vanished with her family. There was a collective sigh of relief, and even Mano melted down the couch. He still reached out to pet Maru on the head, making a soft disappointed sound when Eun Yul cradled his napping kid in his arms, vanishing back to his own domain."That’s not fair," the teen complained, though he didn’t make any moves to leave his spot. Beside him Henry played with the squid plushie happily, petting Mano on the arm using one of its long feelers."So how was your search so far?" Choi asked Gamunbi as the elder vampire prepared tea for those who remained awake. "Any signs of Saeha?""He was here recently, Mano confirmed that much, we're searching the surrounding mountain ranges after this." Gamunbi nodded as Leon helped himself to a cup before scooting off as far as he could. "How's Maru doing?""He's fine," Choi chuckled. "Today he stunned Eun Yul saying he wants to be a seashell when he grows up, Yul's still deciding if he should let Maru go to the beach so often after this.""A seashell? That's adorable." Gamunbi said, serving cups to the still awake twins and Leon. "You two can actually have a normal conversation?" Mu Yeung asked as he accepted a cup, raising his eyebrows. "And did you two leave the kitchen intact?" His twin asked, twitching and glancing at the direction of the kitchen."There are kids around," Gamunbi deadpanned, almost rolling his eyes. "As an elder I can't be corrupting the young.""So you'll visit Choi late in the night?" Mano asked lazily from his spot, still refusing to bulge. "Bring Maru back-- Ouch!"One firm whack on the head Mano melted down to the couch and refused to speak any further. Choi chuckled lightly at the scene."Sure, you're free to come look for Maru too--"He easily blocked Gamunbi's glaive with his foot, smashing it down on the ground with an easy kick. "Really, is getting you to stop obsessing over my kids that tough?" Gamunbi asked with mock resignation, though he soon switched back to his normal, serious tone. "It would still take some time before we find Saeha, go back to your kid for now.""But I hadn't had my fill yet--" Choi froze mid sentence, and he vanished from the spot immediately. "Something happened to Maru?!" That got Mano to sit up abruptly."Eun Yul complained Maru almost cried thinking Choi went missing," Gamunbi explained, chuckling. "To think the pain of the generation is so easily tamed by a little kid.""Yeah he's a pain alright," Mano complained, grabbing hold of one of the discarded plushies and hugging it tight, resting his chin on it. "But yawn, I guess we have to go back looking huh…"Despite his words Mano started to nod off, though allowing Henry to snuggle against his side still playing with his plushie. Looking at the mess in the living room, with Yu Jin and the dragon girls sprawled over the carpet, sleeping together with a pile of plushies, to Leon putting a blanket over the kids, to Gamunbi cleaning up the mess in the kitchen, the twins wondered if such bustling days are going to be a norm going forward.
----- CHAPTER BREAK -----
Following the signs of conflict, the broken rocks and traces of spilled blood, Gamunbi could feel they are getting closer to the ones who caused the destruction. There are two younger ones up ahead, and from Mano’s growing anxiety, one of them must be Saeha./ Teacher's ahead, / Mano confirmed quietly. The young doctor is tensed up, ready to strike at any moment. / I'll go first-- // Not on your own, it's too dangerous even for you. / Gamunbi ordered, forcing his will on Mano. Defiant as he is, Mano has no choice but to obey, glaring back helplessly. / I'll go with you, give me a moment first. /Gamunbi looked at his younger kids. Gabi and Henry are curiously studying the broken stones and ruin around them, showing no hints of fear. And Gabi might have put a few stones in her mouth too, seeing how she is chomping away. Garam is spooked unlike her twin, sticking close to Leon and meeping softly, his kind words not seeming to comfort her any bit. They are all such lovely little kids that Gamunbi would rather not involve them in any combat, and it is safer to leave them back in his domain before heading further. And as Mano managed to tether Henry's lifeforce to his domain, there is no need to bring the undead kid along just to keep him alive."Garam, Gabi, Henry," Gamunbi called out and his three youngest kids ran to his side. He knelt down to meet them at eye level, making sure he gets his point across clearly. Meanwhile Leon remained at his spot, still trying to stay away from Mano, but listened attentively too. "It might be dangerous going ahead, I'll send you three home with Leon first--"Immediately Garam and Gabi meeped loudly in protest, hugging him tight. "Dad dad dad dad!!!" Garam's frantically shaking her head, while Gabi buried her head in his arms, not letting go. Henry nodded obediently though, and tried to pull both girls away from him in vain."Garam, Gabi," he spoke gently yet firmly to the two girls. "There might be fighting involved. I need all of you where it is safe, I won't be able to fight and protect all of you at the same time.""Fight, fight!" Garam meeped tugging his sleeve, temporarily forgetting the words she had learnt. "We’ll fight with dad!" Gabi declared firmly, and Leon spoke up too. "I’ll fight too if you need me to," Leon said as he called up his fangs, but Gamunbi shook his head. "No Leon, you are not strong enough yet. And Garam, Gabi, I won’t be going alone." As he spoke a black mist formed beside him, and Choi stepped out. "Choi will be coming along with us."Both girls looked up at the black haired elder vampire, who smiled easily at them. The blonde little kid in his arms waved at them, and Gamunbi groaned inwardly./ You told me to come when I finally could play with Maru, / Choi offered apologetically, still hugging his kid tight in his arms despite Garam and Gabi meeping distractedly at Maru trying to play with him. Ignoring the weak apology, Gamunbi turned back to his girls."Don’t worry, we’ll be back soon." Maybe because Choi is there, both girls nodded, relaxing a little. "Protect dad please?" Gabi asked, while Garam just looked worriedly at the elder vampire. / I haven’t even agreed to help out with whatever it is? / Choi sighed, but nodded at the two girls."Don’t worry, I’ll protect your dad." He smiled, petting the two dragon girls on their heads. "The two of you are good girls, go back and wait for us please?"Gabi nodded obediently, but Garam still stared at him. "Play with Maru please?" The little girl asked, reaching up and trying to touch the little kid in his arms, but Choi kept Maru safe and snug in his arms, refusing to give up on his precious kid. / You’re childish, / Gamunbi chuckled, watching as Mano plucked Maru from Choi’s hands and passed the small child over to his siblings. Choi pouted, making him seem even less of an elder./ Hey?! // Can we finally go now? / The young doctor asked impatiently, though he still watched gently as Maru waved at him, allowing a small smile for the little kid./ Leon, take care of them, / Gamunbi instructed the half vampire who looked worriedly at him./ Get back safely, / he requested, and Gamunbi nodded, petting him lightly on the back. As the small kids crowded over Maru chattering happily, Gamunbi sent them and Leon back to his domain where it is safer. Hopefully they’ll return soon as he promised, before Maru realised he is separated from his guardian."But I hadn’t played enough with Maru today…" Choi groaned as he is dragged off by Gamunbi, with Mano following close behind."Choi… nim?" The small little blonde kid squeaked softly, looking around despite having Garam and Gabi playing with his hair. Meanwhile Henry walked off towards the direction of the library, with shadows that looked much bigger than him under his feet. "Choi will be back soon, Maru," Leon tried reassuring the small kid, but he only looked closer to tears by the moment."Where, where is Choi-nim? Is he doing something dangerous again?" The poor little kid asked, tugging at Leon’s hand. He sounded as sad as Yu Jin is when his dads aren’t around, so Leon carried the small kid up in his arms, petting him comfortingly on the back. Being used to carrying little dragons around, the little kid is surprisingly light. He isn't sure if it is malnutrition or that is just how heavy normal kids are. "Choi is helping Mano find his teacher," Leon answered honestly, not wanting to lie to a little kid. "He should be back soon. Hopefully.""m’Kay…" His words didn’t cheer up Maru much, but at least the small kid tried hard not to cry. Even Garam and Gabi meeped at him in encouragement, although they look like they miss their father too. Is there anything else he can do to distract them till the vampires return?Leon remembered their conversation when they first met, together with the chills running down his back as he realised how angry Mano was because he nearly hit the little kid. Maru had suffered under the hands of humans, and even before that, Gamunbi wanted to avoid the human settlements because Garam and Gabi dislike humans too. Maybe he can distract these three this way? "Hm, Maru, you don’t like humans, do you?" Leon asked, sitting down on the floor and setting Maru beside him. All three kids nodded. "Humans bad," they chorused, three pairs of defiant eyes looking back at him that shouldn’t have belonged to such young kids. After caring for carefree little Yu Jin, it hurts to see these little kids hating something with such passion. "Humans locked us up," Gabi said, and the other two kids nodded."Yeah, humans can be bad, but you three are happy right now?" Leon asked, wincing, and all three brightened immediately."Dad best! Dad cooks best!" Garam chirped, though in their previous trip Leon could have sworn she ate more of the dishes Choi cooked than Gamunbi’s. "Dad took care of us, he gave us food, he never hurt us! He always very nice to us!" Gabi added, and Garam nodded frantically. "Yeah, Gamunbi loves the two of you," Leon petted both girls on their heads fondly as they giggled. Maru remained silent though, and that sad expression returning to his face. Is he missing his guardian again? Leon quickly asked him, "how about you, Maru?""Me?" The little kid looked up at him, jolted away from his thoughts. "Are you happy now?" Leon asked again."I, I'm very happy, I love Choi-nim and Eun Yul-nim very much!" The little kid beamed brightly, so brightly Leon felt like averting his eyes. "Choi-nim and Eun Yul-nim are very nice to me, I really, really, really love them very much!" At least the three of them are very much loved right now, Leon thought with relief, though a nagging question popped up in his mind."How about Mano? Do you like Mano too, Maru?" Leon asked, recalling how Mano often softens at the mention of Maru. The small kid nodded. "Mano-nim treated me before! He poof two thin knives and went cut cut cut, then suddenly my insides don't hurt anymore!" The cheerfulness of the little kid is jarring compared to what he is saying, and even Gabi and Garam looked at him worriedly. "And ah… Mano-nim is going to find his teacher right? Is he, is he going to be happy?" Is he going to be happy? That is a very strange thing for the small kid to be asking."Do you know Mano's teacher, Maru?" Leon asked, and both girls listened attentively too to Maru's reply."Um… Saeha-nim looks very scary," Maru said. "Mano-nim said Saeha-nim threw him away, and he always looks so angry and sad when he talks about his teacher…""Mano mano?!" Gabi asked worriedly. "Mano was... thrown away?""Henry, Henry dragged Mano-nim over! And Mano-nim said he doesn't have a teacher but he has!! Then Choi-nim said he is going to die so he took Mano-nim to big Gammy-nim!! And now Mano-nim looks so much happier now!!" Maru squeaked, waving his arms about frantically, become almost out of breath by the time he is done. "So Leon-nim, is Mano-nim really going back to his teacher?" The small kid asked softly, looking at him worriedly. "Will he be happy?""I don't know." Leon shook his head at the three pairs of curious eyes asking him. So far, Mano does seem happy during his days in Gamunbi's domain. Maybe when he is back, if Mano would allow that, and not threaten to cut him up as usual, they could have a talk about it-"So Leon, Leon, have you killed any humans before?" Gabi asked, the abrupt change in topic jolting Leon from his thoughts."Huh?!"Without the little kids slowing them down, they quickly located Saeha. He's there with another vampire, another young one? They are facing off some shadowy creatures Gamunbi had never seen before, attacking them with such ferocity he had never seen before. Though the two worked together with synergy, they are being pushed back. Mano immediately sped towards his teacher./ Mano, / Gamunbi called out sternly, but the young doctor refused to be stopped. Shaking his head, he called out his glaive, and slashed the ground hard, sending a shockwave across the ground to clear the path for Mano, while cutting those shadowy creatures in his way into half. They didn't remain down, easily reforming back into the shapes they took, attention now focused on them. Choi landed on one, a firm kick and it turned into a fine mist, finally staying down./ Looks like brute force's the way? Think you can handle them? / Choi asked, eyes darting around before focusing on the vampire beside Saeha./ Not if it's for you to flirt, / Gamunbi kept his eyes on Mano, careful strikes keeping the shadowy creatures away from his kid, while following Choi's example with powerful blows to incapacitate those creatures. But to make an elder like him put in just this little bit more effort to deal with them, whoever is controlling them wouldn't be easy to deal with. "Teacher!" Mano reached his teacher's side, though scalpels drawn out, he was only concerned about Saeha's safety. The doctor’s eyes widened with shock, but that expression soon returned to a neutral one."You're still alive," Saeha said kurtly, and Mano flinched as if he is hit. Although he is still occupied with keeping the shadowy creatures at bay, Gamunbi could tell that his kid is very hurt by the indifference, the nonchalance in his teacher's voice. But Mano bravely bit back his pain, giving the doctor a firm smack on his head like how he treats his younger siblings."You're injured, you're a patient now," Mano snapped through gnawed teeth, trying not to let his emotions show. It isn't too successful, he sounded as if he might cry anytime soon, so Gamunbi called forth a phantom limb to pet Mano on the shoulder. But Mano smacked it away, sending a glare his way. He quickly turned back to his teacher though. "You shut up and be treated, and you," turning to the purple long haired vampire beside him, "stand down and let the elders take care of things!"Seeing how the young doctor is taking charge, Gamunbi beamed at his kid with pride. The teen's ears turned a little red, while still focusing on bandaging the external wounds he spotted. Choi's getting closer to them, clearing the path around them./ They're coming from somewhere, / the black haired vampire mused as he watched more of the shadowy creatures surfaced from the ground, screeching in their unearthly growls. They threw themselves at him, but one powerful kick reduced a couple of them to shadowy splatters on the ground. They didn't stop coming, though Gamunbi is sure they won't fall that easily. / They're stalling us. // Keep them at bay, I'll bring us back. / Having two injured young ones with them, and Mano who is inexperienced from combat, Gamunbi felt it is best for them to withdraw first. Leon's panicking cries for help as the little kids bombarded him with questions he felt he shouldn't be answering might have played a part in his decision too. Warping to Mano's side, Gamunbi focused on the three of them. One firm kick from Choi sent the shadowy creatures around them flying, and Gamunbi took the chance to send the injured vampires and his kid back. Choi can get back on his own; he isn’t going to expend more power than he needs for something the elder vampire can do on his own./ That's so cruel of you, Gamunbi, how can you be so heartless? / Choi chuckled as he appeared beside them back in Gamunbi's domain. Immediately he is tackled by his little kid, while Garam and Gabi ran for Gamunbi’s side."Dad dad dad!" Gabi meeped with relief, and Garam almost cried, burying her head into his leg. He carried both in his arms, and nodded with thanks at Leon, who looked almost as close to tears as they are./ Why are the kids such human hating maniacs? / The pale man groaned, before dragging himself off to the side to rest. Petting both Gabi and Garam in his arms, Gamunbi called for Henry to come to him. The zombie kid came running to his side, and from Saeha’s stunned expression Gamunbi is sure he recognised Henry. But the doctor didn’t say anything, just watching them as Mano helped bandage his companion’s wounds with much hostility."Here, Henry," Gamunbi handed his two daughters to the little kid, who took them in his arms gently. "We’re going to talk. Garam, Gabi, we’re safe now, please go and play with Henry first?"Both looked at him worriedly, but nodded obediently, seeing their father is back safely. Gamunbi petted Henry on the head, and the little kid pattered away with his sisters to play. Still watching the kids, Saeha put up a hand to stop Mano."That's enough," Saeha said absentmindedly, occupied with some thoughts. "We are capable of treating ourselves."That look of hurt in Mano’s eyes only deepened, but maybe because he is in the presence of his teacher, instead of stomping off in a tantrum as he expected, Mano walked off briskly and sat by Leon's side. Leon immediately shifted away from the young doctor, though he looked a little worried about Mano. Choi walked over and placed his precious kid on Mano’s lap, and he immediately hugged the little kid tight. "That isn't how you should be treating your student," said the purple haired vampire with blue streaks in his hair. He studied bandage on his arm, it quickly dissolved on his skin, together with the injury underneath. "His skills aren’t bad.""I don't have a student," Saeha said neutrally. Mano clenched his teeth tight, Maru must have heard that as the little kid suddenly hugged the young doctor tight, and Leon shifted even further away from Mano. Choi just walked over silently, and draped his arms down Saeha’s shoulders, causing the vampire to jump."You do still have a student, Seonbi," Choi chuckled as Saeha summoned his needles and stabbed him. The blonde doctor missed him as he easily danced away towards his companion. "And you are Chun Ryang the musician?"Light blue eyes narrowed at him, studying him with suspicion before the man gave a curt nod, swatting Choi’s hand away as he reached out and stroked his long purple locks.. "I am, but I don’t think you are are here to look for me.""True, I'm looking for Seonbi here, but," Choi laughed good naturedly, petting Saeha on the head like a little kid while somehow avoiding his needles. "But before that, Saeha, shouldn’t you be nicer to your student?""There is no need to involve children in this," Saeha snapped back at him, not seeming to notice Mano’s mood getting darker. "Mano’s old enough to decide if he wants to be involved in this or not-"Though Gamunbi tried to put in some words for his kid, Saeha cut him off."Mano is just a kid, there is no need for him to be involved in this!" Saeha snarled. Mano looked surprised to hear his name from his teacher’s voice, and calmed down a little."I am no longer a kid," he said firmly, looking at his teacher straight in the eye. But as those words left his lips, both Saeha and Chun Ryang immediately turned to look at Choi, who twitched at the accusation in their eyes."... what?" he asked."Mano, maybe you should rephrase your words?" Leon asked Mano quietly, who glared back at him."Look I’m already fifteen, I’m no longer a kid! What’s wrong with that I said!?" Mano snapped at him, annoyed. Gamunbi chuckled as Choi sighed tiredly, though Mano’s words didn’t lessen the accusary looks from the two younger vampires’ eyes."You are… only fifteen!?" Leon stared at him dumbfounded. "But, but you’re, you’re way more skilled than that!?" Mano ignored him, though the small kid in his arms giggled and nodded. "Mano-nim is really skilled, he saved my life!" Maru added, and Mano hugged him even more tenderly. Somehow, Gamunbi had the feeling the instances Mano kidnaps the little kid back will only increase."That only shows how much a kid you are, Mano," Choi said from his spot, easily stopping the glaive Gamunbi threw at him with a finger, and flicked it away. "Since you know he is still a kid, can you please stop harassing him, Choi?" Gamunbi asked with a twinkle in his eyes, and immediately Saeha flared up. A barrage of acupuncture needles materialised around the doctor, and Gamunbi could see Mano wisely obstructed Maru's sight. Though as a young vampire going against an elder, the disparity of power is too great for Saeha to land a hit on Choi. Swatting the cloud of needles away easily, Choi gave Saeha's long locks one last twirl before taking a proper seat across them. "I don't harass kids," Choi waved off the allegations with mock pain in his voice. "But that aside, Saeha, would you be able to treat this?"Choi dematerialised the bandages around his wound, it seems like his injury hadn't healed itself yet. The phantom flames are still eating away his regenerating flesh, and Gamunbi suspects if Choi isn't an elder it would have already eaten him down to the bone. Saeha narrowed his eyes at the wound, but before he can say or do anything-"Choi, Choi-nim is injured!?" Maru squeaked in panic, and struggled to get free from Mano's hug. It reminded Gamunbi that the child's ability is hearing, despite his sight being obstructed by Mano, he could hear them clearly."He'll be fine, Maru, Teacher's here." Mano told him gently, but his voice didn't calm the struggling child any bit. Saeha watched him, his expression unreadable."Let him go to his dad," Leon elbowed Mano in the ribs, and the young doctor let go of Maru in pain, glaring at him. Maru immediately ran for Choi's side, hugging his guardian and refusing to let go. "Choi-nim, Choi-nim, you are injured-- Eeeeeek!?" Crying out frantically, Maru caught sight of the wound on Choi's arm and shrieked. The little kid paled, hugging Choi even tighter, his body trembling in horror."Maru, I just got careless, don't worry, alright?" Choi picked the small kid up in his uninjured arm, planting a light kiss on his head. "And don't worry, Saeha here should be able to treat it, go play instead?"Maru looked up to him, orange eyes welling up with tears. The small kid shook his head, instead turning towards Saeha. "Saeha-nim, Saeha-nim, please, please help Choi-nim!!! Please!" Maru begged, almost sobbing. Choi looked heartbroken by that, watching his kid helplessly. / Stop making my baby cry! / Eun Yul snarled as he wrapped in, easily retrieving his kid from Choi's arms despite the elder vampire's protests. Immediately Saeha glared at him hostilely, while Mano quickly hid behind Leon, who paled too but had no one else to hide behind. Gamunbi quickly joined their side, which Leon is very grateful for his near presence. / He's not a baby, Eun Yul, / Gamunbi said bemused, and Eun Yul glared at him./ Shut it?! / Despite his words, Eun Yul's voice towards his child is forever tender as he comforted Maru. "I told you you don't need to cry for such a useless elder, Maru.""But, but Eun Yul-nim--""The doc's going to treat him," Eun Yul glared back at Saeha, daring him to say otherwise. "And if he isn't able to I'll chop him up." "You're not chopping Teacher up!" Mano snapped from behind Leon, voice and legs still trembling. Eun Yul ignored him, walking away with Maru in his arms. Gamunbi could hear faintly Maru's panicking cries slowly fading away."Eun Yul-nim please don't chop anyone up!! Ah, Choi-nim! Choi-nim!!"At least one of their problems is resolved. Chun Ryang winced and rubbed his ears, the kid's cries might have been grating for a musician like him. "So Saeha--""I get it already!" The blonde doctor snapped at Choi as he repeated his request, cutting him off. "Let me see your wound, but if you dare harass Mano again…"The doctor walked over to Choi's side, leaving his threat unspoken. But those words touched Mano a little, and Gamunbi could feel the conflict arising in his kid's heart. Leon seemed to feel that too, and reached up hesitatingly to put a hand on Mano's shoulder. The young doctor nodded absentmindedly at him, attention still very much focused on the scene before him. Choi let Saeha study his wound. The doctor's eyes narrowed as he prodded the wound, too focused on his task to notice Choi studying him closely. / Oi dad, you can do anything about that bastard perving on Teacher? / Mano asked annoyedly, and Gamunbi can only shake his head and sigh. / CHOI. / He admonished, and the elder gave him a roguish grin. / It isn’t everyday that I am surrounded by such pretty faces, can’t you let me enjoy myself a little? / Choi said, though he put back his normal smile as Saeha pulled back with a frown. "This isn’t normal." Saeha shook his head. "This magic, it isn’t natural.""It wouldn’t be the most unnatural thing we saw so far," Chun Ryang commented, and Saeha nodded, rubbing his chin. "What caused it," the doctor asked, a tinge of red appear on his iris. "If I know what caused it--""Maru caused it." Mano said firmly, brown eyes meeting his teacher’s. "I saw it, Maru was burning with hatred.""That little kid?" Saeha asked, taken aback. "Yup, Maru's just so amazing isn't he?" Choi added in proudly, "he's going to be real powerful when he grows up!"Mano rolled his eyes, ignoring the elder. Saeha didn’t question further; the trust in his student is still there, even if Choi hadn't spoken up he is sure Saeha would have believed in his student's words. "If he could--""No." Mano cut him off, anticipating his words. "Maru won’t be, no, he shouldn’t do that again, even if he could. I won’t allow him to."That protectiveness in his voice is clear, and from Mano’s recount of the incident Gamunbi is inclined to agree too. Maru is a small child without much magical power, For something that only arose when he is so distressed, if they made the little kid repeat it again, it would be a danger to his life. And very evidently it will be dangerous for them too, if it affects Choi so much, then it might kill them, being much younger than the elder. Saeha looked taken aback by that, yet at the same time, he seemed proud of his student."Just say it out instead of bottling it up," Chun Ryang said with a firm smack to Saeha’s head. So the musician can hear those thoughts? Gamunbi had to wonder what else he is capable of, while putting a hand on Mano’s shoulder to stop him from attacking the vampire. His kid had already called up his scalpels and is glaring at Chun Ryang for hitting his teacher, looks like all forms of subtlety often flies over his head. "Say what," Saeha smacked that hand away; the teacher isn’t any much better than his student at that. "But this wound, it isn’t anything that can be treated easily, the easiest way is to cut away all the infected flesh before it is being eaten away, but it won’t be simple.""But it’s doable?" Choi asked, studying his arm. "For that one moment you managed to stop the infection--""Firstly, that drains a lot," Saeha snapped, waving his needle in Choi’s face, but the elder easily dodged it. "Secondly, I am unable to focus on stopping the infection and cutting your flesh away!""But Mano would be able to do that?" Choi challenged, his eyes dancing. Mano jolted to attention, suddenly extremely interested in where the conversation is going. "Mano’s quite good with his scalpels?" Leon offered, and shrunk back a little when Mano turned and glared at him. The teen is a little red in the ears though, and for once he seemed a lot less hostile than he usually is to Leon."No one asked you for your thoughts-- Dad!?" Gamunbi ruffled Mano’s hair, cutting off his words. "Mano’s improved quite a lot since your absence, Saeha. But even before this, you should know well how skilled he is." Gamunbi challenged the doctor, and smiled as he saw Mano’s ears turn even redder at his praise. "Of course I'm skilled enough, who do you think taught me." Mano muttered, though he stayed at his spot, waiting. Waiting for an invitation to return, yet at the same time feeling hesitant. "... he's still a kid," Saeha pointed out, shaking his head. "This is dangerous--""I've already said I'm no longer a kid!" Mano snapped in irritation and hurt. "I'm more than capable of this, I'll prove it to you!""Just say you don't want him to get hurt, Seonbi," Chun Ryang rolled his eyes and smacked Saeha on the head with his fan. Saeha glared back, needles shooting towards the musician, though a single sharp note shattered them. "And make a choice quick, the kid's still crying and that sound's grating.""Keep your hands off Teacher--" Mano repeated, growling, only to be stopped by Gamunbi ruffling his hair again. "Stop it, dad!""... Fine." Saeha said quietly, and very much unwillingly. Mano looked at him uncertainly, unsure whether he heard his teacher wrongly."Go help your teacher, Mano," Gamunbi smiled at his child, and with the confirmation Mano's features exploded into a joyous smile. Of course Choi opened his mouth and tried to say something. Gamunbi called up his glaive from where it laid, sending it soaring up, but as usual he couldn't hit the elder vampire. "Try looking at my student like that again," Saeha warned, "I'll cut that whole arm off.""I tried, it didn't work." Choi chuckled, focusing his sight back on Saeha, to the doctor's annoyance. "I'm putting myself in your hands, Seonbi.""This isn't for you," Saeha snapped back. "It's for the poor little kid who is crying nonstop for you.""I know." For once Choi's eyes glazed off into the distance, not even commenting as Mano inched nearer to his teacher. "Maru's just such a sweetie, really, he shouldn't have to live through all of this. When he couldn't smile it felt like decades of suffering..."Saeha looked like he wanted to say something, probably to complain about the overly dramatic and problematic elder, but held back his tongue. Instead his stern green eyes met Mano's excited brown ones."Keep up with my pace," he said firmly, softly, and Mano nodded, summoning his red and green scalpels. They vibrated in his hands, ready to dance at his command./ Don't push yourself too hard, Mano, / Gamunbi reminded his kid. Mano ignored him, already studying Choi's wound closely, hovering above his arm and ready to strike.Silver needles materalised in Saeha's fingers. He defty stuck one down, and from Choi's frown it can't be a pleasant experience. Mano immediately weaved his scalpels around the area while Saeha moved to the next, stabbing in needles at specific spots while Mano worked around him. Even though the young doctor hadn't been around his teacher for some time, his nimble fingers easily traced over his teacher's steps. Just looking at his fingers it felt effortless, but Gamunbi could tell Mano's getting more strained by the moment. He doesn't have to step in yet, not yet. After that surgery on Maru his kid had been training his stamina, together with training Leon, he had gotten much stronger. He still kept a watchful eye on him, ready to support Mano if he needs him. Choi kept his mouth shut during the treatment, knowing better than to further provoke the two doctors treating him. Across him Chun Ryang sat with his arms crossed, deep in conversation with another party since this operation doesn’t involve him. Leon had gotten closer to watch the surgery, entranced by Mano’s skill. Gamunbi chuckled and petted him on the head as he tried his best not to blink; despite being extremely wary of the young doctor he still can’t help being wowed by such skill. Although there are two skilled doctors working on Choi’s wound, it still took quite some time for them to be done. Mano drew back first, collapsing into a panting heap on the floor. Gamunbi is at his side immediately, offering a wrist for him to feed on. Somehow Mano still had the energy to push him away, looking up at his teacher."Had, had I done well, Teacher?" Mano pleaded, seeking the recognition he had always wanted. Saeha looked taken aback by his question."Yeah, you’ve improved," he gave a light nod, his eyes unreadable. Immediately relief washed over Mano’s features, he finally leaned into Gamunbi’s arms, allowing himself to rest and recover. Though both Choi and Chun Ryang gave him firm whacks on his head, getting a weak protest from Mano."What." The doctor glared at both of them."This isn’t how you should be treating your student," Chun Ryang rolled his eyes at him, ignoring Saeha’s protest that he no longer has a student. His words immediately dampened Mano’s joy, as he looked back longingly at his teacher."He’s still your student, Saeha." Choi chuckled, flexing his fixed arm. There is some scarring, but it looks all recovered. "You should have felt it, the two of you were working in perfect unison. A bond like this isn’t something that can be broken that easily just because you pushed him away." Saeha fell silent at that, eyes returning to Mano. "What are you going to do now, Mano?" Gamunbi asked his kid gently, ruffling his hair. "Are you going to return to your teacher?""I…" Mano took a deep breath, eyes never once leaving his teacher’s. "I am no longer Teacher’s student. And I..." "Just tell him what you want to," Gamunbi chuckled. "I'm sure you have thought very much about it?""Yeah, I…" Mano forced himself to sit upright, despite how much effort it too him to. "I… Teacher… I…""I want to go back to those days, Teacher…" It took some internal struggling for Mano to get those words out. "I, I want Teacher to praise me, to dote on me. I, I love Teacher, I want Teacher to love me back, like how Choi and the BaekJung love Maru!"Looks like his question of whether Maru is loved stuck to Mano all this while. Gamunbi gave Mano a soft pet on the shoulder for support, and let him continue."Even, even if that isn't possible, I, I still want to return to Teacher's side! I, I, I missed Teacher!" Mano begged, pleaded. Saeha looked at him with very gentle eyes, giving him just the tiniest bit of hope before shaking his head. Immediately Chun Ryang whacked him on the head again with fan."Just say what you want to say," the purple haired vampire complained again, and immediately Mano pushed himself off Gamunbi, leaping to his teacher's defense. "Stop hitting Teacher!" The young teen growled, though he is still too weak, barely standing and gasping for breath."Stand back Mano," Saeha told him sternly. "This isn't your issue-""I'm much stronger now!" Mano argued back defiantly, though with his legs still trembling and his face pale, he looked nothing like what he claimed. "This time, this time I can, and I will protect Teacher!"Saeha sighed. He went up to Mano and petted him on the head, the gesture so gentle tears started rolling down the young teen's eyes. Mano leaned into it, looking even more vulnerable than he ever had been."I hadn't needed a kid to protect me, I can protect myself just right." He said gently, much more gently than his previous words were. "I hadn’t wanted you to get hurt trying to protect me.""I’m strong now, I won’t-"Saeha cut off Mano’s feeble protest, shaking his head. "You are just a kid, Mano. You shouldn’t have to get hurt," Saeha sighed. "After what you've been through, you shouldn't have to get hurt again.""Teacher…" Mano called out softly. "You, you still cared for me, so then, then why? Why, why did you threw me away? What had I done wrong?"Then young teen looked down, pushing himself just slight from his teacher. "I just wanted Teacher to praise me! I just wanted to return to those days where Teacher still loved me! That’s why, that’s why even if it cost me my life to bring Henry back, as long as Teacher just praised me again, I, I just wanted Teacher to praise me again!"Mano’s voice quivered as he tried to get his words out, but he still looked up to his teacher, trying to get an answer. Green eyes looked down on his with with tenderness, fondness, and suddenly Saeha hugged him, catching him by surprise. "You are an idiot, Mano," Saeha told him softly as those tears he had been trying hard to hold back rolled down his eyes. It was a warm embrace he missed badly, perhaps when he was small his teacher might have hugged him, or maybe it was just a dream he once had, but right now he felt so safe, so warm in his teacher’s arms. "You are an idiot, and your teacher’s an even bigger idiot…""Teacher, Teacher isn’t an idiot!" Mano protested weakly through his tears, hugging Saeha tight. "Teacher’s the greatest person I’ve ever met!""You’ll say that even now?" Saeha chuckled softly, ruffling Mano’s hair. "You were in so much pain when that sword nut cut you up, I thought, I thought if I could push you away, you won’t risk your life so recklessly again.""Teacher…?" "But it appears because of this my idiotic student tried something more idiotic huh," Saeha shook his head sadly. "Maybe I’m not suited to be a teacher at all--"He is cut off by Mano hugging him as tight as he could; maybe that was all the love and recognition the young doctor needed, and he allowed his fatigue to claim him, still wearing a blissful smile on his face. / Here, / Gamunbi offered a hand to take Mano from Saeha, but Saeha shook his head. Holding on to his unconcious student, still petting him on the head, the doctor’s smile is gentle, like a father watching over his son. It looks like things will slowly be on the mend for the two of them, and maybe when the time comes, Mano would be able to return to his teacher with a smile on his face.Saeha rested on one of the couches, still protectively holding his student close. Eun Yul had carried Maru back in somewhen, and after hugging Choi tearily and making sure his guardian is alright, the small kid pattered over to Saeha’s side and kept thanking him profusely. The doctor didn’t seem to hear his words, he had been exhausted by the operation too. Seeing how he isn’t responding Choi quickly retrieved his kid, hugging him close. As Choi and Eun Yul fight it out who should be having Maru close by, and the helpless little kid trying to stop them, Leon inched closer to him./ Mano really looks like a kid now, / the pale man said while in thought./ That’s because he’s still a kid, Leon. / Gamunbi petted him on the head too as Leon absentmindedly brushed his hand away. / Saeha had been all he ever had, and he still is. // Then… is he returning back to his teacher? / Leon asked, and Gamunbi shook his head./ He will eventually, but not now. Mano isn’t strong enough. / The blonde elder looked back at Mano and sighed. / Leon, your life was eaten away by your poisons because you had no way of controlling it, but Mano, he willing cast his away just for his teacher’s praise. Since I turned the two of you to halfs so you two can live, but that also means you two cannot venture too far from my domain until I turn you into full vampires. That will take some years, turning people into free willed vampires requires a lot of power which I cannot afford to spare now. // Then, this... / Leon pondered for a while, / can you turn Mano first? He’s just a kid, he really needs his teacher. // You are a very kind kid too, Leon, / Gamunbi chuckled, and suddenly a warm cup of tea appeared in his hands. / But if I have to turn, I’ll turn you first. Fully turned vampires stop aging, and Mano is still a teenager. I’ll rather wait till he is an adult. That’s the same with Choi and Eun Yul, they hadn’t wanted their little kid to be stuck as a kid for eternity. // Ah... / Turning towards the two vampires still bickering, and little Maru almost crying, Leon could imagine why. / While you are already an adult, Leon, your family is made of half vampires and a little dragon. You don’t need to decide right now too, just know that when the time comes, I’ll listen to whatever request you have. // Thanks dad. /While Saeha and Mano rested, and Chun Ryang was convinced to stay for lunch, they had a talk about the creatures the two younger vampires were fighting. Eun Yul is sent to play with Maru out of earshot, to not stress out the little kid any further. Choi took over the kitchen, though he kept an ear out for their discussion."These beasts started appearing one month back, and they were once humans." Chun Ryang explained impatiently, calling up an illusion of one of those beasts. / Once humans? / Choi asked, and immediately the illusion showed the full painful transformation. A writtling human body crawled on the ground in pain, features contorted and mouth wide in a soundless scream. The human exploded into a shadowy matter, and from it one of those beasts they fought climbed up from it."That, that's one of his experiments," Leon said softly, his voice quivering, his face turning white. "God, he said, he said he was, he, I didn't know he was actually going to do that…""You know what's happening?" Chun Ryang asked, using his fan to tilt Leon's head up and looking at him straight in the eyes. Leon gulped, unable to look away from the purple haired vampire. Gamunbi pushed the fan away, breaking Chun Ryang's power over his kid."Leon's still young, please do not treat him like one of us," Gamunbi said firmly, and put a protective hand on his kid's shoulder. As the vampire hfmped, Gamunbi turned towards Leon and spoke gently to him. "Leon, can you please tell us more?""But this… um, Mano?" Leon asked, and Gamunbi recalled the order he gave to not speak about Bigak around his kid. Now that Choi is treated, and Mano had his teacher back, there should be less danger of the young doctor running off on his own. Calling off the order he had on Leon, Gamunbi motioned for him to continue, while Mano looked curiously at why it involved it."Well, there is this person, I think he isn’t human," Leon explained as Gamunbi called up Bigak’s image for their audience. Mano’s eyes narrowed. He didn’t say anything, but grabbed hold onto his teacher tightly. "His name is Bigak, um, he hates humans, and the last I heard this is one of the ways he wants to kill humans, like, um, using them to kill themselves off?" He gulped as Chun Ryang studied him, cold blue eyes looking deep into his soul. "Chun Ryang," Gamunbi called out sternly. As much as he would rather avoid any conflict in his domain, he will not tolerate it if his kids get harassed. Chun Ryang dropped his glaze with a simple: "he’s not lying."/ So this person is called ‘Bigak’? / Choi asked, the amusement gone from his voice, replaced by a calm fury. Chun Ryang turned a bit paler like Mano, while Saeha hugged his student more protectively. Leon quickly zoomed to Gamunbi's side for protection./ Choi. / Gamunbi snapped, and the elder apologised unapologetically./ Because of him my Maru’s unable to smile, / The elder vampire growled, making the young ones squirm even more. Though he is stopped soon enough. / Ah, Maru... /One glance showed Choi hugging his precious child in his arms, and the silver haired Baekjung complaining at the lack of food. The heavy presence on them lifted, and the young vampires recovered their composures. But Mano is still panting for breath, and Saeha put a warm hand on his head."Rest," he commanded, and Mano curled up around him with a soft whimper. "Looks like you have an issue with this Bigak person too," Chun Ryang remarked, "but we aren’t pursuing this lead right now. His abominations had taken out a few of my students, but once they have recovered...""After they have recovered we can return to this discussion." Gamunbi said firmly, and for the moment that was the end of their discussion. Mano still needs more rest, and Maru had just recently recovered from his trauma. If they are to make any other larger scale attacks, it will have to wait till they won’t have to worry about their little kids. It seemed to be the same for Chun Ryang too, the worry for his students overshadowing the new lead he just obtained. / That’s a good choice, and lunch’s ready. / Choi quickly announced, turned their attention from the subject to food, and they quickly arrived at the dining room.As per Choi’s previous cooking, Gamunbi found his entire pantry emptied out. In exchange he got an amazing spread which half immediately vanished down Eun Yul’s gut. There is still plenty of food left of everyone though, and Gamunbi made sure to put enough food on his kids’ dishes. Maru gave up stopping Eun Yul from heaping food onto his dish, waiting patiently for the silver haired vampire to be done before swopping his filled dish for Choi’s empty one. Mano took one look at that and shoved a few items onto Saeha’s dish too, to the doctor’s surprise. "Eat, you got to recover too," the young doctor said awkwardly, shoveling more food as Saeha watched, not knowing how to react. "Choi’s cooking so much better than what you cook anyway…""You’ve got to eat more too," Saeha tried to stop him, but it didn’t stop food from piling up higher and higher on his dish."Yeah, I’m eating," Mano said softly, and beside him Leon twitched. / Would the two of them be alright? They look so awkward around each other. / The pale half vampire asked, only to get glared by Mano."Shut up and eat," the young doctor complained, but with much less hostility in his voice compared to their usual bickering. He returned his focus back to his food, but from time to time Mano still snuck a few more items to Saeha’s dish, telling his teacher that it is nice and he should eat more.Immediately after lunch, Chun Ryang got ready to leave, dragging Saeha away by the collar. The doctor wanted to stay a little longer by his student’s side, but seeing there are patients he still had to treat, he promised to visit when his work load is lighter. As much as Mano wanted to follow his teacher along, having not recovered enough, he had no choice but to stay behind./ Teacher... / The young teen sat aside, thought interest spiking up as Maru pattered up to Chun Ryang."Um, mister?" The small kid tugged lightly at the purple haired vampire’s sleeve, and he looked distastefully at the little kid."What." Chun Ryang asked, and Maru shrunk back a little, looking scared. But he still continued his tugging. With Eun Yul glaring at him the vampire didn’t do anything more, although his irritation is clear in his voice."Were you, were you the one calling out?" The little kid stammered, and Chun Ryang bent down to study him, icy blue eyes making Maru shrink back."Why are you asking this," Chun Ryang asked, not letting Maru go from his glance. Before Eun Yul could slice the vampire up for scaring his kid, Choi quickly stepped in, grabbing Maru up in his arms while smashing Eun Yul’s blade to the ground. "Ah, Choi-nim! And um, mister, I, um, I heard this voice, it was like yours, saying, saying to get back?" Maru squeaked from the safety of Choi’s arms, looking worried."His ability is hearing, isn’t it." Chun Ryang asked as he climbed up to his feet. Immediately Eun Yul called up all his swords, separating Chun Ryang from his kid with that bladed barrier."Maru’s my kid, you ain’t laying your hands on him." The Baekjung warned, but Maru still nodded to answer his question."I, um, I can hear things well?" Maru replied honestly, and immediately interest lit up in Chun Ryang’s eyes. "We could with your ability, come join me when you are older." His words only made Eun Yul see red, his blades shooting out. A sharp note from Chun Ryang caused most of the blades to shatter, the remainder he stopped with his fan. Maru shrieked at that note, clapping his hands on his ears, seeming to be in pain. Only when Choi petted on his head and reassured it is alright did he look up again."Um, mister, I, um, I really love Eun Yul-nim and Choi-nim!" Maru said while holding tight onto Choi’s arm. "I, I want to be with them forever, I, I won’t join you! Even, even if Eun Yul-nim and Choi-nim don’t want me anymore I still want to be by their side forever!""You are my precious baby, why would I not want you!?" Eun Yul finally dropped his blades, and pulled Maru into his arms experatedly. His words caused the little blonde kid to turn teary eyed, and without warning Maru cried. Wincing at the sound Chun Ryang quickly grabbed Saeha and left, leaving them to deal with a sobbing little kid.
----- CHAPTER BREAK -----
It started with Maru tossing and turning in his sleep. Usually, the little kid slept like a log safely tucked in Eun Yul's arms, feeling so safe around them he hasn't woken early for months by now. For him to have such an uneasy sleep Choi worriedly looked into his dreams.Nothing.He couldn’t see anything; Maru isn't having any nightmares, or any dreams, nothing should have affected his sleep. But the tiny blonde kid is experiencing some strange discomfort that he cannot identify, which is why he isn't sleeping well. Eun Yul sensed that too, the silver haired vampire hugged his precious kid tighter in his arms, and planted a soft kiss on his locks. That usually chased away any nightmares Maru had, but since he wasn’t having any, it didn’t help any bit. It took almost an hour before Maru fell into deeper sleep and stopped moving. Choi thought that was the end to their troubles, but as the birds in the surrounding forest started their flight, their sleepy little kid climbed up from the bed, yawning softly and rubbing his eyes."Good, good morning Choi-nim…" Maru squeaked sleepily as Choi got up to join him, not wanting the little kid to be wandering alone. "Good morning Maru," Choi smiled back and petted his head. One sleepy smile and Maru climbed off the bed to wash up and start his day. The strange discomfort is still there, but it didn’t seem to be affecting him to much right now./ What happened? / Eun Yul asked with his eyes shut, sounding even less awake than his kid./ I don't know, / Choi sighed worriedly. / Sleep, I'll play with him till it's bright. // Make sure he doesn't get hurt. / Eun Yul warned before slipping back to sleep, easily falling into a dream without any issues unlike his kid./ I will, / Choi promised to silence, and quickly went to prepare breakfast for their little kid. Food never fails to cheer Eun Yul up, hopefully, this is all it needs for Maru to feel better.Maru always loved the sea. They sat side by side on a log, watching as the skies slowly turned brighter. Maru munched on his breakfast quietly, watching as the skies are painted a majestic fiery orange. He is amazed by the colours, but the discomfort is still there somehow."Choi-nim…" Maru called out to him softly, eyes still glued to the fiery horizon."Yes, Maru?" Choi asked, handing another sandwich over."Can I, can I go to big Gammy-nim's place, please?" The small kid asked, and anxiety started growing in Choi’s heart. Sure Maru is friends with Gamunbi's kids, but he hasn't asked to go there before. Usually they took him there, or he is invited over, or even forcefully taken over by Mano. From his words he doesn't seem to want to go there to play, but it being a request from his kid, Choi nodded."Sure, Maru." Despite the questions burning in his heart, Choi didn’t prode any further. Maru promised to tell them if anything is wrong, and he will wait for his kid to say so, for now all he can do is go along with his wishes. And since Mano will be there, he should get his kid examined by the young doctor too.Gamunbi is surprised to see Choi and Maru at his domain at such an early hour. The skies had just lit up, even his kids aren’t even up yet. Choi held on to Maru’s hand with worry radiating from him, and the little kid is without his usual cheerful smile. Had something gone wrong again? The blonde vampire quickly called for Mano, who is still asleep on his bed./ What... / Mano grumbled sleepily, refusing to even lift his head from his pillow. / Maru's here, and- /Before he finished his words Mano joined them, still in his pajamas and looking nowhere near awake. He yawned, stretching and ignoring how he almost smacked Choi on the head."Good morning Mano-nim." Maru greeted him, the lack of his usual cheerfulness finally jolting the young doctor awake."Maru?!" He blinked himself awake and asked, studying the small kid with concern. Maru turned away, looking at Gamunbi instead."Um, big Gammy-nim, can I, can I talk to you? Please?" Maru asked, sounding very much close to tears. Choi’s protectiveness immediately flared up, even Mano looked confused at the small kid’s words./ … dad? / Mano asked, eyes still very much on Maru."Is anything wrong, Maru?" Gamunbi bent down to look at the small kid in the eyes. He is almost crying, barely biting back his tears."Big, big Gammy-nim, can I, can I talk to you alone? Please?" Maru pleaded, and Choi looked hurt by his words. Is there something that Maru cannot tell his guardian? But Choi still unwillingly let go of his kid and allowed Gamunbi to lead him to a small, quiet room. Gamunbi opened a link to the both of them, to keep them from getting too worried.Gamunbi poured a warm cup of chocolate for the small boy, who sat on the chair swinging his legs, watching him. "Here, Maru, drink this, you’ll feel better.""Thank, thank you, big Gammy-nim," Maru accepted the cup and held it in his hands, keeping them warm. "Um, Choi-nim said big Gammy-nim is very dependable, and to look for you if I have any problems. Can you please help me, big Gammy-nim?"He could feel Choi being horrified through their link, and Mano’s accusatory glare, but Gamunbi ignored both to focus on the little kid. "Is there anything wrong, Maru? Are you being mistreated?" Gamunbi asked, petting him on the head gently./ We didn’t mistreat Maru! / Choi protested weakly, though doubt is creeping up his voice. / Or could we have hurt him somehow…? // Shut up and listen, / Mano snapped, and both listened attentively to Maru’s words."No!" Maru squeaked, protectiveness of his guardians clear in his voice. "Choi-nim and Eun Yul-nim are very nice to me! They love me a lot, and I love them a lot too!""But…"The little kid trailed off, tears starting to roll down his eyes. Immediately Choi wanted to rush to his kid’s side, and Mano struggled to stop him./ Choi, listen to Maru first. / Gamunbi ordered sternly, and with much internal struggling the elder unwillingly stayed put."I, I, I really love Choi-nim and Eun Yul-nim, but, but I don’t know what I can do for them…" Maru squeaked, struggling to get his words out as his tears couldn’t flowing. "Eun Yul doesn't want me to help with anything, Choi wants me to grow up happy, but I, I don’t know how to do that! But I really want to do something for them because they love me so much!"The moment he got those words out Maru wailed, unable to hold back his cries anymore. Immediately Eun Yul warped in, hugging his kid close in his chest, only for Maru to cry even louder. Gamunbi smacked him hard./ WHAT THE FUCK!? / The silver haired vampire complained, only to have his kid retrieved from his arms. Gamunbi ignored him, and spoke softly to the little kid."Maru, you are feeling this way because today is the day of love," Gamunbi explained as Choi and Mano quickly joined them, Choi in relief that it isn’t because they had hurt their precious little kid, and nearly melting from his words, Mano to see if there is anything he can help with."The day of love?" Maru asked worriedly, looking to Eun Yul and Choi back to Gamunbi. Gamunbi nodded."Today love becomes much stronger. Choi and Eun Yul's love for you becomes much stronger today too. Maru," Gamunbi smiled at the little kid, "you are human, that’s why this love is too much for you. It is what's making you feel uncomfortable, making you feel you have to do something for them in exchange for this love.""Is that so…" Choi sighed in relief, reaching out to pet Maru on his head. "I was so worried-""Don’t." Gamunbi warned, and Choi hastily pulled his hand back as Maru looked like he is about to cry again. "Your touch will only cause him more discomfort till Maru can get an outlet for this love he is experiencing.""I’ll get him something to do-"/ Like what? / Gamunbi asked bemused, cutting off Choi’s words./ Like... / Choi trailed off, racking his brain for ideas."Maru, my kids will be making cookies today, would you like to join them?" Gamunbi asked the little kid. "All this love you are feeling, you can put into the cookies and give them to those you love, it will make you feel much better too.""Cookies?" Maru lit up at the mention of them, and nodded furiously. "Eun Yul-nim loves to eat, I, I’ll make cookies for Eun Yul-nim and Choi-nim!!"With that bright smile returning to his face, Choi couldn’t hold himself back anymore and hugged Maru tight, only to be smacked by all three present when Maru started crying in discomfort again.Garam and Gabi are elated to find out that Maru has visited, meeping happily as they had breakfast together. Choi is made to cook for them since Eun Yul cleared out their breakfast spread even before it is ready, while Henry frantically took notes watching him cook. Since he dotes on Maru too Mano kept his distance from the little kid to lessen his discomfort, instead sticking close to Leon much to the latter’s horror as he laid out the breakfast table. Despite that, breakfast went on as normal, though Eun Yul tried his best to hold back from his usual piling Maru with more food. He kept complaining though that his baby isn’t eating enough, and to make him shut up Gamunbi forcefully tossed him back to his domain. / Is he even really the BaekJung? / Leon asked, heaving a sigh of relief at the silence that greeted them. / The bloody butcher? // Yeah, he chopped me up, / Mano retorted back glumly. / Disgusting how he goes gaga over a little kid. // You go gaga over Maru too, / Leon rolled his eyes as Mano glared back at him./ Of course, he’s just too nice for his own good!? / Mano snapped back, calling his scalpels out. Immediately Garam smacked him hard unapologetically, though quickly returning to her animated conversation with her twin and Maru. Maru is just smiling and nodding at them, not seeming to understand anything. Instead, all his thoughts are filled with the promised cookie making. He did look very lonely though without his guardians sticking close to him, and with each passing moment Choi looked as if he is losing his self control to not hug the little kid close."So Maru, you add these ingredients in one by one," Mano went through the steps slowly with the little kid as Gamunbi helped Garam and Gabi with their cookies. Henry helped them clear away the used wrappers and egg shells, while Leon is at his own corner trying to figure it out with a recipe book. "Um, so this, and this, and this…" Maru tipped the containers of sugar, butter and eggs into the mixing bowl, constantly looking back to Mano for confirmation."That’s right, and as you mix them together, think of how much you love your guardians and your love will be poured into these cookies." Mano twitched as he continued, as always the thought of the BaekJung always spooking him. Maru didn’t catch that, despite being always very sensitive to sound; he is too focused on his task this time."I, I love Eun Yul-nim and Choi-nim very much!" Maru squeaked at his mixture, trying hard to get everything mixed and not spill anything. Gamunbi had to keep reminding his kid that this is something Maru has to do on his own, as Mano watched in frustration and tried to help several times, especially one time where Maru almost tipped his entire mixing bowl over./ Just look at Choi, he is even more frustrated than you are, / Gamunbi told Mano, who snapped back./ Who cares about that useless elder, Maru needs my help! / The young doctor gritted his teeth, and distract him, Gamunbi passed him a couple of raw ingredients. / What. // There’s someone you want to make cookies for, isn’t there? / The elder chuckled as the tips of Mano’s ears turned red, and he roughly jerked the eggs and butter off Gamunbi’s hands./ Yeah, yeah, I know, / Mano rolled his eyes, though added almost inaudibly, / thanks dad. /Despite putting in almost as much care in his cookies as Maru, Mano still kept an eye on the little kid, telling him to add in flour next and chocolate chips. His dough mixture somehow turned out alright, though it is the day of love after all, with that much love and effort the little kid put in, there is no way it could go wrong. But seeing how overbrimming with love the cookies are, Gamunbi had to wonder if Choi and Eun Yul could stomach it./ My baby made them?! Of course I'll eat them?! / Eun Yul's rebuttal is quick, the vampire still having his eyes glued to his kid despite being booted back to his own domain. Choi remained silent, most of his energy spent trying to keep himself away from his kid."Here, you can use cookie cutters to make shapes, or you can make them by hand." Mano passed some cutters to Maru, then made a round cookie with his fingers."Mano-nim, you are really good with your hands!" Maru chirped fascinated as he watched the young doctor draw out hair on the cookie, and added two chocolate chips as eyes. "Ah, it, it’s Mano-nim! Are you making this for Saeha-nim?"Mano mumbled something intelligible, his face turning bright red. But Maru caught his words and beamed at him."I’m sure Saeha-nim will like it! Because Mano-nim put in much love into this cookie too!" At his words Garam and Gabi came running over to peek at Mano's cookies, and the young doctor chased them back to their cookies much embarrassed. / If he's always like that he would be so much easier to get along with, / Leon complained as he snuck over to peek at their cookies, quickly scooting back to his spot when several syringes joined the cookie cutters on the table. / That’s cute? // Stop peeking, and mind your own business! / Mano snapped at him, any hint of gentleness towards his younger siblings vanishing. Ignoring the two, Gamunbi kept watch on Maru.The small kid split his cookie dough into two piles, one significantly bigger than the other. He worked on the smaller pile first, shaping it into what he presumed to be a heart shape."Maru, is this for Choi, and the bigger one for Eun Yul?" He asked, and Maru nodded furiously. Choi's jealousy flared up immediately, and Eun Yul bragged about his larger cookie through there link. Bemused, Gamunbi asked, "do you love Eun Yul more?""I, I love both Choi-nim and Eun Yul-nim lots and lots! And I put all my love into the cookies like Mano-nim said! They will both get all my love!" The little kid looked confused at his question and petted both misshapen piles lightly. "But, but Eun Yul-nim's cookie has to be big, or else he will eat everyone's cookies too!"It's good that Maru took that into account, but Gamunbi doubted if a cookie that size can stop the glutton, not that he won't be stopping Eun Yul from stealing his kids' cookies. The silver haired vampire groaned at how he couldn't hug his kid for how sweet that was, while Choi is still fixated on the part where his cookie is smaller.After that, Gamunbi helped Maru put his cookies into the oven. After making them with so much love, the little kid is exhausted, sitting in front of the oven and waiting for the cookies to be baked. Gabi ran off to check on Leon’s cookies, while Garam and Henry joined Maru’s side."Maru, Maru," Garam pointed at her cookies baking in the oven beside his, "we made cookies for Maru!" "Ah? But I, I didn’t make any cookies for everyone, I only made cookies for Choi-nim and Eun Yul-nim!" Maru squeaked in panic, jumping up from his spot ready to run for another ingredient mix. Henry petted him on the head, easily making him sit back down on the spot seeing how exhausted he is."Dad said you don’t need to make cookies for us!" Garam beamed at him, "Maru is already tired out, so we made cookies for Maru to eat and rest!""Garam… Thank you Garam! And thank you Henry!" Maru beamed back in thanks, leaning back a little to rest, not complaining when both petted him on the hair. His cookies are baked soon, and he excitedly joined the twin dragons and Henry as they watched Gamunbi get the cookie tray out."Here Maru, here are your cookies. Be careful, they are hot." Gamunbi handed Maru his cookies on a plate, and the little kid accepted them gratefully. A small heart shaped cookies laid on top of a bigger on, which Choi is still complaining about, but he smiled warmly at Maru when the little kid pattered up to him."Choi-nim, Choi-nim! Here, here’s your cookie!" Maru picked up the smaller cookie and handed it to him. "But, but Eun Yul-nim isn’t here--"Before he could say more Eun Yul appeared beside him, easily taking the plate from his hands. "Eun Yul-nim--" Seeing that larger cookie vanish within seconds Maru giggled, and flung himself at his guardian with a big hug. "How is it, Eun Yul-nim? Is it nice?""Yeah…" Gulping down a cookie filled with that much love, coupled with the huge hug, Eun Yul nearly melted on the spot./ Oi Gamunbi, can I finally hug him now!? / The silver haired vampire complained, gritting his teeth and trying not to give in to the temptation of hugging his little treasure close./ Sorry Eun Yul, but no hugs today. You’ll only overwhelm Maru again. /This might have been the first time he managed to drive two adult vampires plus one half vampire so close to tears.For the remainder of the day Maru stayed at Gamunbi’s domain and played with the kids, while Eun Yul complained at being unable to hug his kid. Choi is still staring at the cookie Maru offered him, extremely unwilling to eat the precious gift from his precious kid. Meanwhile upon finding out he cannot hug the small child and read him stories like he usually likes, Mano left to deliver his cookies instead, dragging Leon with him.They visited Yu Jin and the half vampire twins first, with Mano dumping Leon with them and going off on his own. Leon is more than happy at that, spending a happy time hugging Yu Jin and catching up with the twins on the daily happenings without any fears for his life since Mano is not around. But for the young doctor…Mano wandered around the area for quite some time, and he felt quite conflicted when Gamunbi cast his eyes on him./ Is anything wrong, Mano? / He asked, and immediately Mano growled./ Stop poking your nose into my business! / His kid complained, though from the uncertainty in his voice Gamunbi could guess the reason why he isn’t anywhere near to his teacher. / If you are not going to your teacher I’ll call him for you? / Gamunbi asked, chuckling. To his surprise Mano nodded. / You think… Teacher will like these? / The young doctor asked with much hesitation, shifting his weight from side to side. / Do you trust in Maru’s words? / Gamunbi asked back, amused when Mano blushed red. / Just one moment, I’ll get Saeha there. /Quickly the elder vampire contacted the doctor, who answered back quickly./ Something happened to Mano!? / The doctor asked, despite sounding busy with something else, a patient? / Mano wanted to speak with you about something, Saeha, / Gamunbi showed the doctor where his student is waiting, not surprised when Saeha immediately cut off their connection, vanishing in the direction of his student. Hopefully the doctor wasn’t working on a patient…Mano fidgited as he waited for his teacher to arrive, wondering what he should say to his teacher. From what little he knew from Gamunbi’s explanation to little Maru, the day is for expressing love and gratitude to those they love, and Gamunbi did tell him to make cookies for his teacher, there is nothing wrong with that he is doing, it just felt… something strange and foreign to him. Reading up on medical techniques, cutting up patients, treating illness, those are much easier to understand and do than… to give out cookies? Would teacher eat them? Does he even eat cookies? He is cut off from his thoughts as Saeha warped to his side."Are you alright, Mano?" His teacher asked, his voice gently and full of concern like when he was a small kid, making him feel so nostalgic for his childhood. But he isn’t there to reminisce about the past, and he definitely isn’t going to further embarrass himself in front of his teacher by crying from the nostalgia. Instead, he nodded, shoving his bag of cookies into his teacher’s hands."These, these are for you, eat them." They hadn’t spoken much after that encounter, and during his teacher’s brief visits they hadn’t talked much either, which left Mano at a loss of what to say. But he had given his teacher the cookies, and asked him to eat them, that should be alright? Saeha blinked at the bag in his hands."Thank you?" His teacher seemed a bit confused at his gift, is he twitched at it!? Mano shifted his weight from side to side, wondering how he should explain it to his teacher."It’s the day of love, Maru made cookies for his guardians, yeah..." It didn’t make things seem less awkward, and Mano quickly excused himself, hoping his teacher would have forgotten about this exchange by the time he next visits./ Gamunbi. / Moments after Mano returned, and quickly buried himself back in the library, Saeha contacted Gamunbi./ Yes? How are the cookies? / Gamunbi asked, bemused./ What exactly did you tell the kids about today!? / The doctor asked exasperatedly. / A day of love!? // That’s exactly what I said, / Gamunbi chuckled. / And the kids had much fun making cookies for each other today. // Today’s a day of love, for lovers. / Saeha groaned annoyedly through their link. / I don’t need bag of cookies made with love from my kid. // Mano’s going to be really depressed if you don’t finish them, and loosen up a bit, / Gamunbi laughed lightly, petting the doctor on the head through their link, grinning as the doctor tried but failed to swat it away. / All that matters is that your kid still loves you, come visit him more often or I’ll send him over with more cookies on Mother’s Day? /From the cursing, Gamunbi is sure the next time Saeha visits, it will be a more exciting experience. Though…/ He even made them look like himself, Mano’s still such a dear little kid... / Saeha sighed, his voice much gentler. / Come visit him more often Seonbi, he really misses you. / / Yeah... /Maru stayed with them that night. Since his guardians are still banned from hugging him till the day is over, and back in Eun Yul’s castle there is nothing much else for him to do which didn’t involve sticking close to both of them, Eun Yul unwillingly allowed him to have a mini sleepover with Gamunbi’s kids."I’m only letting him stay till midnight passes!?" The silver haired baekjung complained, his patience wearing thin at not being able to hug his kid. Maru looked so much lonelier as the hours passed, being about to see his guardians but not touch them hurts him. But when Choi gave in and gave him a hug, the discomfort hurt him even more that he could only obediently watch them from afar, waving at them and smiling back whenever he sees them watching him./ Isn’t there anything else that can be done? / Choi asked tiredly, a melted pile on the ground after Eun Yul found out he hadn’t eaten his cookie and in a rare case of generosity forced him to swallow it whole. / I don’t want to live through this torture again next year... // Asking you two to love him less would be impossible. / Gamunbi shook his head as he watched Henry poke the unmoving elder with a finger curiously. / If Maru is turned his body would be able to contain all this love much better, but he is still too young for that. // If you dare I’ll fucking kill you, / Eun Yul warned, forcing a tired smile as Maru turned towards him. / And seriously, Maru’s just one troublesome little baby. // But you still love him very much, / Gamunbi said as Garam and Gabi carried in mattresses for them to sleep on. They placed the four of them on the floor, one for each of them. Leon informed earlier he will be spending the night with the twins if possible, and seeing how busy they are Gamunbi told him to enjoy himself and return the next day. And Mano had went to sleep extra early after a long conversation with his teacher, wearing the most satisfied smile on his face. / Of course, he’s my baby, / Eun Yul hmphfed, petting Maru on the head as the little kid waved goodnight to him and laid down to sleep on one of the mattress, with Henry joining him on the left. Garam and Gabi laid on his right, meeping goodnights and soon falling asleep. / No goodnight kisses either!? // Sorry, no. / If Eun Yul and Choi hadn’t suffered so much from the entire day’s ordeal at not being able to hold their lovely kid close, Gamunbi would have laughed at their dejected sighs./ I hate this day... /And the moment midnight struck Eun Yul quickly grabbed Maru and hugged him tenderly, before Choi took him from his arms. There was a brief shuffle which woke the sleepy kid up, and to prevent them from waking his kids, Gamunbi booted them back home. Now that the day of love has passed, Maru should be sleeping and feeling much better, at least till a year passes...
----- CHAPTER BREAK -----
The rainy season started. Rain poured nonstop for weeks, not the light drizzles Maru witnessed infrequently, but heavy rains that could wash away a tiny child like himself. Eun Yul called off all outdoor trips, with stern warnings for his little treasure not to step even one foot out of his castle. Even Maru’s favourite trips to the beach were stopped, the silver haired vampire is taking no chances of his kid falling sick again. Having Maru down with fever once is more than enough for him, and he would rather have a slightly unhappy kid than a sick one. Although he is the one to stop Maru from going out, Eun Yul didn’t spend his time playing with his kid, leaving the task to Choi instead. He is a lot more sluggish than he usually is, refusing to get up from any spots he plants his body in, and other than getting up unwillingly for food, he doesn’t move at all. "Eun Yul-nim says it is very nice to sleep!" Their dear little kid exclaimed to Choi as he struggled to put a blanket over his beloved slumbering guardian. The blanket is much bigger than he is, but the little kid didn’t complain any bit, clumsily pulling it over Eun Yul’s shoulders and petting him like how he pets Maru to chase away his nightmare. As much as Choi wants to help his little kid, it is something for him to take his mind off how he is trapped in the castle, so he merely watched and praised the little kid when he finally managed to stuff all of Eun Yul’s limbs under the blanket."You’ve done a good job, Maru, Eun Yul looks quite warm right now," he petted Maru on the head, melting at the bright happy smile he got back in return. "Here, I’ve made some snacks, will you help me to eat them while Eun Yul’s asleep?"/ I’m dying from the heat!? / Eun Yul complained, but at least he had the willpower to not move till Maru is out of the room. / Suck it up, you know how hard Maru tried to put that blanket on, / Choi rolled his eyes, warping him and his kid to the kitchen. / You won’t die from that, but this little treasure will cry if he hears you. /Eun Yul grumbled, complaining about how troublesome his baby is that Choi cut him off. At least he appreciates the sweet little kid munching happily on his midday snack, though Choi knew if Eun Yul is awake Maru would have ran off immediately with the cookies to feed his always hungry guardian. "Choi-nim, Choi-nim, can I keep some of these cookies for later?" Sparkling orange eyes looked at him, and it drained away all his willpower to refuse the little kid. "You want to give them to Eun Yul, don’t you," Choi sighed softly, wondering just what kind of little angel had they brought up. Maru nodded furiously as Eun Yul cursed away."Eun Yul-nim likes these cookies a lot, he always finishes them extra fast when I give them to him!" Seeing that satisfied smile, Choi didn’t bear to tell him it is only so because they were given to the silver haired glutton from his precious kid, of course he has to show that he enjoys them a lot more than other cookies he nicked. Instead, he placed a small bag of cookies in Maru’s hands."Just this one packet, Maru, please eat the rest? I made them for you," Choi pleaded. Maru’s eyes widened and gave him yet another bright smile, and Choi is certain he would die for this lovely kid would he ever ask for such a thing."Thank you, Choi-nim!" The little kid chirped, a happy blush spreading on his face. "Choi-nim’s cookies are very nice, um, Choi-nim, can you, can you please eat them with me please?""Sure," Choi ruffled his kid’s hair lovingly. Maybe Maru’s desire to share his cookies with Eun Yul was because he didn’t want to eat alone? But the small kid kept adding more and more cookies to his dish instead of eating them made Choi wonder if the little kid even likes them in the first place. Before he can ask the small kid to please eat more, Maru perked up."Ah, I think, I think I hear people?" He immediately patterned over to the window, closing his eyes and focusing on the outside world. Despite Maru’s initial dislike of his ability, even wanting him to get rid of it, it seemed that without humans around to abuse that ability, he is starting to accept it little by little. From subconsciously using it to locate them around the castle, to now using it to listen out for visitors, Choi is sure his little kid will eventually learn to love his own ability, and love himself more too by extension. But for now, he will watch and protect this little treasure, and guide him when he needs help."Who are you hearing, Maru?" Choi asked. Sure he can tell who is nearing, but he isn’t going to miss out on chances to praise the little kid. Maru focused harder, straining his ears."Um, I think, I think I hear, um, I hear Gabi! And Garam! They are singing!" Maru’s eyes lit up as he looked up at him excitedly. "I, I can hear Gammy too!""Hm, that’s amazing, Maru," Choi smiled at him, legs turning back to rubber at the smile he got back. "Gamunbi said they are here to play, shall we go and greet them?"Maru nodded, and Choi let him lead the way to the castle’s main hall. Despite his ability guiding him, and having lived in the castle since they found him, Maru still got lost the moment they stepped out of the kitchen. "Um, I think, I think the main hall is this, this way?" Maru turned left and right, looking down both hallways and not recognising any of them. It took him some moments to pick the left one, only to be even more lost in the next intersection."Here, Maru," Choi took his tiny hand and led him down a couple more hallways before they met a blonde elder vampire and his children."Maru!" Both Garam and Gabi wrapped him up in a warm hug even before he could greet them, and Choi had to pull his kid away for them to remove their raincoats first and not get his little treasure wet and cold. Even Gammy barked happily seeing his tiny little friend, though as usual he scared little Maru so much the small kid quickly burrowed under his coat, not daring to come out."Maru still afraid of Gammy?" Garam asked as Gamunbi helped her take off her raincoat, while Gabi managed to pull hers off without help. "Gammy scary," a small quivering voice squeaked from underneath Choi’s coat. "Sorry…"Despite his phobia, the little kid still apologised, watching as Gammy whined sadly about not being able to play with its friend."Gammy is very nice, he is not scary," Gabi promised, pattering over to his side and taking hold of his hand. "Gammy always plays with us!""He never hurt us!" Garam promised, holding his other hand. They didn’t try to drag him out, just holding on to his hand and encouraging him to venture out./ Your daughters sure are sweet little kids, aren’t they? / Choi chuckled, petting both on the heads./ Only towards Maru, / Gamunbi shook his head, bemused. / Sure they are nice towards Leon, but if it is Mano, they would have dragged him out and lectured him till it is dark. // That would have been a sight to behold, / Choi brushed off that death glare the other elder is sending him, instead turning his attention back to his little kid, trying to coax him out too. "Here, Maru, it is alright, we won’t let you get hurt.""Scary," Maru still squeaked, even though both dragon girls meeped reassuringly at him. "Choi-nim, Choi-nim, is there, is there any way to not be afraid?"As Maru almost cried, Gamunbi called the shadow hound away, even as it whined increasingly louder to its tiny little friend. Only when it is in a different room did Maru crawl out, almost in tears."I, I want to play with Gammy too…" The poor little kid squeaked as Gabi and Garam petted him on the hair, seeming to be having fun instead of comforting him. "Gammy love you too," Gabi giggled as she played with his hair, her words only making Maru sadder."Hm, Maru, if Gammy is smaller, will it be less scary for you?" Choi asked, kneeling down and meeting the little darling’s eyes. It took Maru quite some hesitation before answering."May, maybe?" His tiny voice is almost immediately drowned out by the two dragon girls. "Are you going to make Gammy small?" Gabi asked with eyes glittering, while Garam put her hands before her, requesting, "make Gammy this small?""Yes, yes, I’m going to make Gammy small, just for a while, so it won’t scare Maru so much." Choi answered, and immediately a small shadowy being bounced back into the room, tackling Maru hard. Maru dropped to the floor in surprise, as a now much smaller Gammy licked him on the face happily. "Gammy is small!" Garam exclaimed amazed, reaching out to pet her friend, but Gamunbi appeared by her side and hugged her and her twin close. "Sorry, Garam, Gabi, Gammy is very small right now, you’ll hurt him," the elder vampire explained, keeping both excited little girls in his embrace and away from the now tiny puppy. He kept his eyes on Maru and Gammy too though, watching if he needs to step in.Despite how much smaller Gammy is, Maru is still scared of the over enthusiastic little puppy. His heart is racing fast, too fast for a little kid, but Choi could tell he is trying hard not to let his fear show."Here," Choi carried the small puppy up in his hands, letting it wriggle its feet up in the air some distance away from Maru. Immediately the little kid ran for his side, hugging his leg tight. He peeked out hesitatingly, and shrunk back as Gammy barked harmlessly, its tail wagging hard."Gammy, sit." Gamunbi said calmly, and as Choi set the puppy down, it sat down obediently, tail still wagging. "Gammy, I know you want to play with Maru," the excited tail wagged even harder, "but you'll only scare Maru more. Let Maru get less scared of you first, alright?"The shadow hound whined sadly, its head drooping to the floor. But it stayed in place, eyes still looking at Maru expectantly. "Maru, Gammy agreed to stay still for now, would you like to pet it?" Gamunbi asked and motioned for the small little kid to come closer. Maru nodded slowly, but made no moves to let go of Choi's leg. Garam wriggled out of Gamunbi's hug, and pattered over to his side instead. "Maru, here!" The little dragon girl held his hand with a friendly smile, and led him over to Gammy. Seeing that, Gabi quickly dropped down to the floor too, and took Maru's other hand. "Look, Gammy is very nice!" She squeaked as Garam nodded, taking Maru's hand gently and putting it on top of the excited little puppy. It managed to stay in place despite its tail nearly being wagged off, giving off an excited little bark. "Gammy… is warm…" Maru mewed, resting his hand on Gammy's head, not daring to move any bit. His voice is still quivering. "Gammy love pets!" Garam added in, taking Maru's hand and slowly stroking Gammy down its head. The small puppy yipped happily, its tail wagging so hard it might even fly off soon. "Gammy… likes it?" Maru giggled, and seeing how the puppy isn't making any sudden movements he got a bit braver, sitting down beside Gammy and petting the happy shadow hound. Garam and Gabi nodded."Gammy likes everyone!" Gabi meeped, and Garam added in, "Gammy likes Maru a lot too!""I, I like Gammy too," Maru squeaked, still stroking and looking at the little puppy. "Gammy is my friend, I, I, I'm trying my best, I, I want to play with Gammy again one day!"As Gammy looked up and rubbed its nose against Maru's cheeks, Maru giggled again and wrapped his arms around its neck, giving it a gentle hug. By now Gammy's tail had already become a blur, wagging so fast that shadow droplets are being flung off. "We can play with Gammy now too," Gabi reached into her pocket and pulled out a stick, which Choi recognised as the one Eun Yul gave Maru. "Maru's stick!" Garam meeped excitedly as Gabi handed it over to the small blonde kid. "We kept it!"Seeing that look of wonder in Maru's eyes, Gamunbi smiled and explained, "Gabi and Garam said it belonged to you, and they took good care of it, so you can come and play with Gammy any time.""Is, is it? Thank you Gabi, Garam!" Even before Maru took the stick over, Gammy had already weaselled from his hug, bouncing up and down on the spot excitedly. That took the small kid by surprise, the sudden movement startling him, but it soon turned into a wide smile."Gammy, Gammy, here catch!" Maru threw the stick, and immediately Gammy ran to retrieve it, quickly returning and depositing the stick before him like it did in the past. It sat obediently in front of Maru, tail wagging furiously. The little blonde kid giggled, petting Gammy on the head. He threw the stick again, and this time Gabi and Garam joined in too, petting and praising little Gammy./ Maru's just adorable when he isn't scared, but hm, is that your delinquent complaining? / Choi asked, his eyes never once leaving his precious kid./ He's becoming more willful than a dragon, / Gamunbi chuckled dryly, shaking his head. / Mano's complaining that he wants to be here too- // I am not! / An irritated voice cut into their conversation, snapping away. / And bring Maru over! // Sure Mano, I'll bring him over when the rains subside, / Choi smiled, though the younger half vampire had already cut off their link./ If you wait till then he might have kidnapped your kid several times, here. / Gamunbi pulled out a neatly folded plastic material, and handed it over to him. / Garam and Gabi said Maru should have one so he can come and visit, he's a growing kid, don't let him get too cooped up. // Eun Yul doesn't want him going out and falling sick, / Choi sighed, only to be met with a glare./ Unless you want Mano to keep calling you a useless elder, enchant this and keep him warm. And you don't have the excuse of being as lazy as Eun Yul is. / / Oi?! /Running his fingers through the plastic material, and letting his magic enchant it, Choi can only chuckle and watch the little kids play.Gabi and Garam sat next to Maru during lunch, refusing to take any other seat. Gammy plopped itself on Maru’s lap, yipping happily as the small kid petted him. "Here, Gammy, here’s a piece of meat for you." Maru clumsily cut a piece of beef and gave it to Gammy, who gulped it down instantly. Maru giggled, petting it on the head. "Are you hungry, Gammy?"The shadow hound yipped and gave Maru a big lick on the face, which caused the little kid to flinch. Immediately both Gabi and Garam hugged him tight."Maru, Maru, it’s fine!" Gabi meeped, while Garam pouted and blooped Gammy on the nose with her finger. "Gammy, you scare Maru!" The little dragon girl admonished, and Gammy whined apologetically. "Sor, sorry, Gammy, I got scared," Maru mewed back, petting the small puppy, though his hands shook a little."Maru, if he scares you, you can pass Gammy over to us," Gamunbi smiled, petting Maru on the head."Um, Big Gammy-nim, I, I, I want to be less scared!" Maru shook his head, hugging Gammy a little closer to his chest. The puppy yipped happily, resting his head obediently on Maru’s chest. "And, and um, um, I want to be with Gammy a bit longer! I, I hadn’t played with Gammy for so long, I, I want to be with Gammy more when I’m not scared!""Sure, Maru," Gamunbi chuckled, withdrawing his hand. "But it’s lunch time, you should focus on eating first and play later. Look, your plate’s already overflowing.""Ah, this…" That got Maru to focus on his food, which resulted in even more panicked squeaking. "Choi-nim, Choi-nim! I, there’s so much food on my plate! I can’t finish this! Here, Gammy please help me!! Eun Yul-nim!!!"After the very filling lunch, where Eun Yul wisely stayed away to prevent his puppy from getting a lot more excited and uncontrollable, Garam and Gabi napped. Maru tried playing with Gammy, though from how he kept trying to keep his eyes open, he needs a nap too."Maru, I’ll be bringing Garam and Gabi back," Gamunbi told the small kid gently. "You should take a nap too.""m’kay… But, um, Big Gammy-nim, you will be bringing Gammy back too right?" Maru asked, petting the little shadow hound. "You’ll turn Gammy big again right?""Yes, Maru," he ruffled the small kid’s hair fondly. "Gammy has grown up, he cannot remain in this form for too long. But you can still come over and visit any time you want.""Um…" The small kid hummed sadly, giving Gammy one last pet before pushing him towards Gamunbi. "Um, I, I’ll try my best! I, I’ll be less scared of Gammy the next time!""We will all be looking forward to that," Gamunbi smiled, and called Gammy over to his side. The small shadow hound looked sadly at his friend before bouncing to Gamunbi’s side, growing larger in size as Choi released the spell he had on the shadow hound. That got his small kid scrambling back to his side for protection, though Maru still waved hard as Gamunbi took his family home, a new determination burning in his eyes."Um, Choi-nim, so I can go out if I wear this?" Maru asked curiously as Choi helped him put on the enchanted raincoat. "Eun Yul-nim won’t be worried?""The raincoat will keep you dry and warm, Maru," Choi petted Maru on the plastic coat, smiling at the worried little child. Sure Eun Yul is still worried, with threats of death if his little baby gets any signs of illness, but he is more than confident that his magic will keep Maru warm. "Here, do you feel warmer with this on?"Maru nodded hard, a smile spreading on his face. "It, it's warm! So Choi-nim, Choi-nim, I can, I can go to the beach now? Can I? Please? Please?""You really love the beach a lot, Maru," Choi chuckled and hugged Maru up in his arms. "It must have been boring to not get out for so many days.""Um, Choi-nim, Choi-nim, I’m not bored!" Maru frantically shook his head, taking Choi by surprise. "Really! I have Choi-nim and Eun Yul-nim here with me, I am not bored at all! I just, I just..." The adorable little kid looked down, rubbing his knees together. Choi petted him on the back, encouraging him to get his words out. "Um Choi-nim, the rains sound very nice…" Maru squeaked out softly, leaning back against Choi’s hand. "And the sea sounds very nice, so I, I thought…""So Maru," Choi asked gently, trying to not let his disappointment show. Even Eun Yul gave a tired groan through their link, shaking his head at his little kid. "You want to know how the rainy seas would sound?"Maru nodded, looking up at him with a shy smile. "I think, I think the sea will sound really nice too when it’s raining!""Is that why you kept looking out of the window?" Choi sighed lightly, hugging his little kid closer.More nodding answered his question, and Choi’s heart ached at the innocent eyes looking at him."Look, Maru," he stroked the small kid’s face gently. "You only needed to tell us you want to listen to the rainy beach, and we would have taken you there right away.""But, but Choi-nim," Maru shrunk back, and Choi quickly hugged him closer. "Choi-nim you are so busy cooking, and Eun Yul-nim would rather sleep, I, I-""You have never been a bother, Maru," Choi cut him off, putting a finger to his lips. "You are our treasure, my precious little treasure , we will give you anything, everything you want. As long as you tell us, no matter what it is, we will grant it to you.""But, but but but but but-"As Maru turned paler and started stuttering, Choi gave him a soft kiss on the cheek, cutting off his feeble protests. Both he and Eun Yul know well it wouldn’t be easy for their little darling to make demands from them, even right now he still sees them as powerful beings to be respected, to be feared, to be obeyed. As much as he loves them with all his heart, there are still boundaries he set up in his heart that he doesn’t dare to cross. Even simple requests such as this, the poor little kid held himself back from asking them. But since Maru made his wish clear to him, as his guardian he shall grant it to the best of his ability. Making sure his lovely treasure is safe in his arms, Choi warped them to the middle of the stormy ocean. The waves raged as lightning streaked across the skies, fanned by heavy winds to create a chaotic symphony. Maru looked at the scene before him, eyes wide with surprise, clinging onto Choi with all his might. The scene before him seemed too much for the little kid to take in immediately, and Choi perched in the air, letting Maru slowly take in the sight and sounds. Even Eun Yul watched on through their link, absentmindedly calling up a phantom limb to pet the small kid on his head."Choi-nim…" Maru struggled to find words after a few mesmerised moments, as he slowly let go and gestured at the sea under him. "Choi-nim, the sea, the sea, it sounds really beautiful…""We can come here again tomorrow if you want, Maru, and everyday till the rains stop," Choi chuckled lightly, pulling Maru’s hood back in place when the wind nearly blew it away. "But, but, but-""No buts, Maru. You like listening to the rainy seas don’t you?" He asked, cutting off Maru’s words."But Eun Yul-nim will be lonely!" Maru managed to squeak out, and immediately Eun Yul smacked him lightly on the head./ Look Maru- /Even before he could say anything, his kid beamed happily up at where he thought his guardian might be. "Eun Yul-nim, Eun Yul-nim! You are here too!"/ Of course I’m here, / the vampire huffed with annoyance. / Look Maru, you are my precious treasure, you think I’ll let you run off all on your own!? /"But, but Eun Yul-nim, you were sleeping-"Another light tap on his head got Maru to shut up. / So? You are my baby, no matter where you are, I’ll be there. / With that, a mirage of the silver haired vampire appeared before the small kid, and kissed him lightly on the hair. / I won’t get lonely, while you, on the other hand, are just a baby who should be doing more things you like. Go have fun, or else . /Leaving the empty threat hanging, and complaining endlessly to Choi, the mirage vanished, leaving Maru to reach out in vain to hold him back. "Eun Yul-nim, Eun Yul-nim!" Maru called out in vain, and upon hearing no responses from his beloved guardian, he dropped his hands disappointingly."Maru, you’ve already heard Eun Yul." Choi took his tiny hands, keeping them warm in his. "You should enjoy your time here for now, so when we go back for lunch, you can tell Eun Yul all about it, alright?""m’Kay…" The little kid is disappointed for a few brief moments, but soon clenched his fists with determination. "Choi-nim, Choi-nim, I, I’ll listen to the rainy sea! And, and I’ll tell Eun Yul-nim how beautiful it is!""I’m sure he’ll love to hear it," Choi squeezed those tiny fists, and felt them squeeze back. Though it is worrying how they are starting to get cold again. "Say Maru, the winds are very heavy here, would you mind if we return to the shore for today?"The sweet little kid nodded, closing his eyes to take in as much of the sea as he could before Choi warped them both back to the sandy beach. The rains and winds aren’t as heavy there, and Choi set Maru down on the beach, letting him run about freely and splashing in glee at the puddles on the sandy ground. Watching Maru have fun, Choi enchanted a nearby fallen log dry, and sat down. This is how their little kid should be everyday, being happy and having fun, instead of being cooped up in Eun Yul’s castle all day. "Um, Choi-nim?" The little kid suddenly pattered back to his side, amber eyes lighting up with a question. Choi immediately motioned him to take a seat beside him, and Maru happily did so, leaning against him. Choi reached out and wrapped an arm around him, pulling him closer, as Maru hummed happily. The little kid loves being close to the two of them, and from the love emitting off the little kid, he couldn’t imagine leaving this little darling ever."Yes Maru?" Choi asked, petting him on the head, meeting those lovely orange eyes. "Um, this, Choi-nim, um…" Maru frowned lightly, a small blush growing across his face. He fidgeted, and Choi rubbed his back, giving him time to get his words out. "Um Choi-nim, if, if I can ask," he looked up hesitatingly, and Choi nodded for him to continue. "If I can ask, can you, can you please teach me a way to find the two of you no matter what? Please?"Even without looking through his thoughts Choi could see how helpless the little kid felt. Despite how long he had been living in Eun Yul’s castle, Maru still gets hopelessly lost if he is allowed to wander freely. The little kid would blunder around scared till one of them picks him up and comforts him. Now with Eun Yul sleeping all day long due to the rains, and him being more busy cooking as the gluttonous vampire somehow eats a lot more, their little kid is running about lost for a longer period before he finally cries and asks for help. But to teach him something that can help him…"Hm, there are spells which can help you, but Maru, your magic isn’t strong enough to learn them." The hopeful gaze turned downfallen at his words almost immediately, and Choi quickly hugged Maru closer before he cried. "But there might be something else that might help you, Maru."The little kid perked up, listening to him intensely, his eyes glittering with hope. "I can enchant a pendant for you to wear, Maru, and it will point you towards where we are at any time, what do you think about it?" He asked, smiling at his little kid. "So Choi-nim, Choi-nim, as long as I follow it, I can find the two of you?" Maru asked excitedly, and Choi had to admit there is no sight more beautiful than the smile he is getting. / Oi?!?! /"Sure you can, Maru." He picked the little kid up and hugged him close, feeling the little heart pound so happily. "How about this, Maru, I’ll bring you to the market, and you can pick a stone you like for me to make into a necklace?"Unexpectedly the lovely smile faded, and Maru looked at him worriedly, a tinge of fear washing over his face. "The… market? Choi-nim, will there be humans there?""We will be going to the Magician’s Market, Maru," Choi told the small kid gently, trying to reassure him. Though it is worrisome that Maru still fears humans that much, he figured he should tackle the issue another day. "Humans won’t be able to enter the market, only magical beings like us can enter.""Real, really? Then I, I want to go there with Choi-nim!" That brought back that lovely smile, and Choi couldn’t help but smile back at his darling kid. "When are we going there, Choi-nim?"Chuckling at his enthusiasm, Choi kissed him lightly on his raincoat hood. "We can go after lunch if you wish, Maru, but for now, do you want to listen to the sea longer?"Setting the little kid back on the log beside him, Choi let him enjoy the sounds longer before they headed back. It is good that Maru is finally requesting something from them, even if it is a request that he can only partially fulfill, he can only hope the little kid learns to be just a bit more selfish and demanding of them. Though..."Hm, Maru, would you mind if I ask you a question?" He asked gently, while putting a warm hand over Maru’s to make him know it is alright."Yes, Choi-nim?" Maru asked curiously, eyes back on his. "You’ve only started asking us for what you want, and this is great," Choi petted his head fondly, and the little kid blushed happily. "But during the Day of Love, you managed to ask me to bring you to Gamunbi for help?"That had bugged him since the day passed, but he never really felt a chance to ask the little kid. And seeing he is no longer in discomfort he hadn’t felt the need to press on the issue. But it is curious why that was the only thing Maru sought his help on, and not something like being able to find his way around, which he needs more daily."Um, this, Choi-nim…" Maru frowned a little, lips pulsed and looking so adorable Choi had to hold himself back to allow him to continue. "I felt bad, I felt really bad, it’s like I am being torn apart! It wasn’t as bad as what the humans did to me, but it felt so bad!"Hearing the small kid so distressed Choi hugged him tight, trying to comfort him from the horrible memories he dredged up. "It, it felt even worse when I’m with Choi-nim and Eun Yul-nim, but, but I don’t want to not be with Choi-nim and Eun Yul-nim! I love Choi-nim and Eun Yul-nim, so I must get better or else I won’t be able to stay with Choi-nim or Eun Yul-nim anymore!" Having those memories again almost made the little kid cry, but Maru bit back his tears and continued. "Choi-nim said before to look for Big Gammy-nim if I need help! So I have to look for Big Gammy-nim and get better!"/ My poor baby, / Eun Yul winced, holding onto the little kid’s free hand and squeezing tight. / He shouldn’t have to get hurt anymore... // It is just one day in the year, and it should get better when he grows up. Hopefully. / Despite his words, Choi somehow doubts if Maru’s pain will get any lesser in the coming years, seeing how he is still human after all."That’s very brave of you, Maru, and I'm really proud of you," he praised his little kid instead, who blushed happily. "But getting lost affected you too almost everyday, didn’t it?""It, it’s my fault for getting lost!" Maru squeaked, a small pout appearing on his face. "I, I’m bad with directions, even Eun Yul-nim said so! So, so, so I, I want to get better at not getting lost, I thought, I thought if I walk around more, I’ll get better eventually!""But you only got more lost," Choi chuckled at the unhappy pout on his kid’s face."I, I want to get better on my own! I didn’t want to bother Choi-nim and Eun Yul-nim!" Those determined eyes looked back at his, but Maru’s still pouting. "But, but Choi-nim said I should ask for help, so I, so I… had I done the right thing, Choi-nim?"Hearing that much hesitation in his voice, Choi kissed him again on the head to reassure him. "You’ve done great, Maru. We are your family, we are here to love you and help you and guide you. You are just too nice, you should ask all you want, all you need from us. Just tell us anything, we will fulfill-"It took Choi some time to realise Maru isn’t paying any attention to his words. The little kid's eyes are wide with surprise, murmuring happily to himself, "my family, my family!""Yes, we are your family," Choi chuckled weakly at that. Hadn’t their precious kid already realised it? "Not only are we your family, Eun Yul’s castle is your home too.""My, my home! My family, my home!" As Maru exploded from joy from the realisation, Choi felt his heart being pierced by those words. Despite having lived with them for a few months by now, he is sure Maru must have known it already, but the little kid needed their confirmation that he belongs there. Just what had he done wrong as an elder? But seeing how much in bliss Maru is, he didn’t say anything, letting the little kid bask in joy of gaining a home, and a family who loves him very much./ You're definitely very much a failure of an elder, / Eun Yul complained, words tinged with an unwilling pain, petting Maru on the head. / How could my little baby not realise this till now!? // Go back to sleep already and stop rubbing salt in my wounds, Yul, / Choi sighed tiredly. / At least he knows it now, but still- /Soft tugging at his sleeve halted his thoughts, and Choi turned to meet beaming amber eyes. "Choi-nim, Choi-nim, can I, can I go back now please? I, I want to go home, I want to go home!"Having his heart stabbed even harder by these words, Choi could only obey, and ferry his little treasure back to where he wants to be."Eun Yul-nim, Eun Yul-nim!" Maru sat on Eun Yul’s lap as the vampire sleepily hugged him tight, both waiting for lunch to be cooked. "Eun Yul-nim, you and Choi-nim are my family! My family!"Having his lovely kid still so giggly with joy from that, Eun Yul cuddled him even closer, not knowing how to love his tiny treasure even more. "You’ve always been my baby," he tapped Maru on the head lightly, and is forced to look away from that blinding smile he got back. "It means, it means we’re family!" Maru murmured back happily, "We’re family, we’re family!!"/ Couldn’t you have tired him out more before bringing him back!? / He complained to Choi, who he suspected is taking his own sweet time in the kitchen. / I can’t deal with this any longer?! // He wanted to return, how can I deny him this? / The elder vampire sighed, voice full of love for the little kid. / And I can’t deal with this either, food will be ready when he finally calms down. // … Fuck you Choi, / Eun Yul snapped, turning his attention back to his precious little darling. Those happy orange eyes looked at him with such adoration that he doesn’t know if he can handle the little kid any longer, that the only thing he felt he could do is to stuff Maru back into his embrace. "Eun Yul-nim, I love you and Choi-nim the most!" As the small kid murmured into his chest, Eun Yul never felt so weak before. Yet at the same time, he felt he could take on and win against anyone, anything that threatens his baby’s happiness. "I know, and I love you very much too," he petted Maru on the back, meaning every word he said, yet at the same time desperately complaining to Choi to return and take the little sweetheart off his hands. "Alright, lunch's ready," the moment Choi reappeared, food filled the table. Maru scrambled off Eun Yul’s lap to his relief, and he quickly dug into the food. The little kid pattered to Choi’s side, beaming at him. "Choi-nim, Choi-nim, let’s eat together!" Maru tugged his pants lightly, pointing at the empty seat beside Eun Yul. "Together!""Sure Maru, here." Choi picked Maru up and put him on the chair right beside Eun Yul, and took a seat beside him. Sitting in between them, the little Maru is in such bliss he didn’t complain any bit as Eun Yul overloaded his plate with food."Stop smiling and eat your food," Eun Yul complained weakly, knocking Maru lightly on the head with his knuckle. "We aren’t going anywhere so EAT."Despite those stern words, his little kid still turned towards him with a smile that is too bright for his heart to take. "We’ll eat together, together!" His little sweetheart chirped, looking at him with the most adoring eyes before turning towards his dish, where his voice became horrified little squeaks instead. "Eun Yul-nim!? I can’t finish this much food!! Choi-nim help!!! Choi-nim!!"The moment Eun Yul put down his utensils, the silver vampire went poof and vanished from his seat. Choi cleared the table, letting Maru perch on Eun Yul’s usual spot while waiting for him. "Are you missing Eun Yul already?" Choi chuckled as he watch the little kid sink into the seat, snuggling up against it like he usually does on Eun Yul’s lap. "Eun Yul-nim, Eun Yul-nim he’s sleeping!" Maru squeaked with a nod. "But, but, Eun Yul-nim, he’ll be back when the rains stop! I, I’ll wait for him to read me stories again!""I can read you stories too if you want, Maru," Choi chuckled, petting Maru on the head, "but since Eun Yul is asleep, do you want to visit the Magician’s Market with me?""Ah! The market!" Maru’s eyes lit up immediately, but despite that, he looked a little unwilling to leave his spot. "Um, Choi-nim, I, I want to go! But, Eun Yul-nim…""Don’t worry, it won’t be a long trip, I’ll bring you back quickly to be with Eun Yul, alright?" Choi offered a hand to the little kid, who quickly took it with a bright smile."I, I haven’t told Eun Yul about the raining seas, I, I’ll tell him about that and the market too!" Holding tight onto Choi’s hand, Maru let Choi hug him tight in his embrace, and took the two of them to the Magicians’ Market.This might have been the first in a very long time since Maru saw so many people gathering at the same place. The small kid looked around bewildered, curiosity lighting up his eyes as he looked at the place before him. There are many stalls selling all sorts of curiosities: artefacts, ingredients, weapons, anything of a magical nature can be found here, ready to be sold off at the right price. Not only are the goods mesmerising, some more than others due to enchantments to attract buyers, but the people there is a blend of all kinds of magical beings, some humanoid, some animal-like, most very much different from the vampires Maru is used to seeing. But as curious as he is, Maru didn’t let go of Choi’s hand, holding onto it even tighter."It’s alright to explore, Maru," Choi smiled reassuringly at him, nudging him forward. "I won’t let go of your hand." Encouraged, Maru took a few tiny steps forward. Choi followed him, allowing his little kid to take the lead. Maru pattered up towards a weapons stall, looking much enamoured by the weapons there. / No. / Eun Yul immediately complained through their link, a phantom limb dragging Maru back by his collar. / No weapons. /"Eun… Yul-nim…?" Maru asked hesitatingly, shrinking back. Choi quickly hugged him up in his arms."Maru," he told the small kid gently. "It’s alright, Eun Yul just doesn’t want you to use weapons when you are still so young. Shall we look at some other things?""But, but Choi-nim, if, if I had a weapon," the small kid protested softly, "if I had a weapon then humans wouldn’t have touched me, they wouldn’t have hurt me!"Those words hit Choi hard, and he cuddled his kid tight against his chest. "Maru, I am here. You know I won’t let you get hurt, be it humans or non-humans. You don’t need a weapon.""But…""No buts." He put a finger on Maru’s lips. "Eun Yul said it before, didn’t he? We won’t ever be leaving you, so you will never ever need a weapon." Seeing the hesitation in those eyes, he continued, "we’re family right? It means we won’t ever be leaving you.""Family…" Maru repeated, "Family... We, we’re family, so I… I won’t need a weapon?" Choi nodded in agreement, ruffling Maru’s hair. "Yes, that’s right.""Because, because Choi-nim, Choi-nim and Eun Yul-nim will protect me… always?" The hesitation is still there in those eyes, but the spark of understanding is slowly lighting up. "That’s right," Choi confirmed. Was it because Maru got injured and sick under their care that he doesn’t trust them to protect him? "But, but Choi-nim, Choi-nim, you don’t have a weapon like Eun Yul-nim!" Maru took his hand and held it in his, gently squeezing it. "I know, I know Eun Yul-nim is very powerful, but Choi-nim…"As Maru’s words trailed off, and the small kid pointed towards the weapons stall, Choi never felt his pride being so wounded. Eun Yul’s laughter didn’t help any bit either./ Looks like Maru knows well who is the strongest around here huh, / the silver haired vampire gloated, / he’s such a smart little kid. /"I don’t need a weapon unlike Eun Yul, Maru," Choi sighed and pushed Maru’s hand down gently. "I am much stronger than you think I am, I’m much stronger than Eun Yul too.""Um…" Maru just hummed, not seeming to believe him but not voicing it out either."That aside, we are here to look for a nice stone for you," Choi quickly distracted Maru, placing him down before a stone stall. "Just pick a stone that you like, I’ll get it for you.""m’Kay…?" At Choi’s nudging, Maru stepped closer to the stall. The scaly reptilian shop owner gave him a brief glance, and the small kid gave a shy smile and waved, but he still looked away with disinterest, focused on polishing his wares. Still hesitant, Maru quietly looked at the various gemstones laid on the table. Something must have caught his eye, as he shifted from side to side, studying something intently."Did you find anything, Maru?" He asked, and was taken away by the stone Maru pointed out. It was a piece of black opal, one which looked colourful enough to be attractive to a little kid. But with just one glance Choi could tell it isn’t a good magic container, which explains the low price, but Maru is absolutely enamoured by it. "Choi-nim, Choi-nim! This! Can I, can I have this? This one, please?" Maru asked excitedly, that the shopkeeper cast his eyes on the chosen gem. He quickly looked away in disgust over the enthusiasm over the inferior gemstone. Even Eun Yul complained at his kid’s choice through their link./ No way he’s getting that!? He’s my baby, he deserves something much better?! /"Twelve bronze coins," seeing his hesitation, the shopkeeper snapped, the sudden raspy voice causing Maru to jump back in shock. Still Choi held back his wallet."Maru, are you sure about this? There are still others-""Look Choi-nim! The stone is black like your eyes, and, and when I look at it over here, it’s like Eun Yul-nim’s eyes!" That wasn’t something Choi could argue against, and despite his unwillingness, he had no choice but to hand over his coins to the shopkeeper in defeat. At least Maru gave him the brightest smile and the sweetest little ‘thank you’s as he accepted his little present from the shopkeeper, though it didn’t do anything to dim out Eun Yul’s complaints. The only comfort he got is how gently Maru cradled the black opal close to his chest, that reassured him just a little that he made the right choice."So, Eun Yul-nim, Eun Yul-nim, Choi-nim took me to the beach! And it sounded really, really pretty! It sounded like, like the sea and the rains but much better!" The moment they returned back home, Choi placed Maru by Eun Yul’s side, and the little kid started chattering away excitedly. Sure Eun Yul is still sleeping, and mentally complaining how he can’t sleep anymore because he has such an excited little angel squeaking at him. That at least got Eun Yul to stop ranting at him, which allowed him to work on Maru’s black opal in peace. Enchanting gemstones is usually an easy task, he only needed to infuse the gemstone with the spells he required, and set it in place with a seal. The piece of opal Maru picked might be beautiful by the kid’s standards, but as a magic container it is much inferior to the other gemstones on sale. The opal trembled and threatened to crack as he let a bit of his magic sip through, to enchant it with a pathfinding spell would be impossible. The most he could do is to make it glow and look pretty enough to distract a young kid, but that isn’t what he promised to his little kid. If he can imbue just a bit more magic to the opal, and make it more useful for Maru…/ And this is all you can come up with, / Eun Yul remarked tiredly, having cut short his nap to listen to Maru’s excited stories. The little kid didn’t seem any bit drained unlike the two of them despite telling them about his adventures for the second time, glowing so much brighter with happiness when Choi joined them. "Choi-nim, Choi-nim, you’re back!" The small kid pattered over to his side immediately. "Choi-nim, Eun Yul-nim said he will bring me to a place better than the market next time! Let’s, let’s go together!"That happy smile melts his heart, and it hurts Choi that he couldn’t give the little darling something much better. "Sure, Maru, but first, this is for you." He knelt down before Maru, and placed the completed necklace on the kid’s hand. Maru looked it at, amazed, his eyes sparkling. Choi had polished the pendant into a flat thin circle like a gold coin, framing it with enchanted silver vines which formed the necklace. "Would you like me to put it on for you?""Yes please, Choi-nim, it, it’s so, so pretty! It, it’s really pretty!" The small kid tried to hold still for Choi to put the necklace around his neck, but he was still vibrating with excitement and looking so adorable he couldn’t help planting a kiss on his head, causing Maru to turn bright red. "Here, Maru, do you like it?" Linking the clasps together, Choi gave Maru a pet on the back, taking a seat to let the small kid enjoy his little present. Maru beamed at him brightly."It, it’s from Choi-nim! It’s my treasure! And, ah…" Maru pattered back to Eun Yul’s bed, climbing up, and held his pendant up beside his face. "It sparkles like your eyes Eun Yul-nim, and um, um, it, it’s warm?"Choi smiled as Eun Yul took Maru and put the small child on his lap, resting his chin on his head."I couldn’t put too much magic in it or it will shatter, but Maru," he held Maru’s hand gently, as it is wrapped around his new treasure, "the pendant will glow warmer as you get closer to us. I’m sorry I can’t make something more useful-""Choi-nim, Choi-nim! That, that’s amazing!" The little kid cut him off excitedly. "With this I, I won’t get lost so often, and, and it’s like the both of you are here with me!"/ That’s because you are here with us right now, / Eun Yul snapped, though not at his precious little kid, hugging him tighter in his embrace. / One day, one day I’ll definitely get you something much better than this, something much more worthy for you to treasure! // I know, Eun Yul, I know, / Choi sighed tiredly as he watched Maru be so happy with his necklace, holding it up to the light and watching the colours bounce off and dance. But for now, this is all Maru needs; his treasures surrounding him, and daily trips to the rainy seas, and everything is fine.